Mitsubishi Lancer Sportback Owner's Manual PDF

BK0200700US.
book 1 ページ２０１３年２月１４日　木曜日　午後２時４６分
Introduction Throughout this manual the words WARNING and CAUTION

appear.
N09200102026
These are reminders to be especially careful. Failure to follow the
Thank you for buying a MITSUBISHI LANCER SPORTBACK. instructions could result in personal injury or damage to your vehi-
cle.
We are confident you will enjoy your vehicle. It has been engineered
for optimum performance, durability and comfort. By thoroughly
reading this Owner’s Manual, you will gain an understanding of the
many features that are included in the LANCER SPORTBACK. The Indicates a strong possibility of severe personal injury or death if
Owner’s Manual contains descriptions and illustrations that will assist instructions are not followed.
in the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
Your Authorized Mitsubishi Motors Dealer will be happy to assist you Points out hazards or unsafe practices that could cause minor
with any further questions you may have regarding the operation of personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
your vehicle.
Please note that this manual applies to all LANCER SPORTBACK You will see another important symbol:
models and explains all features including options. Some features NOTE Gives helpful information.
explained in this manual may not be installed on your vehicle.
Please leave this Owner’s Manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. WARNING
The next owner will appreciate having access to the information con-  Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
tained here. nents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
This manual includes instructions for standard and optional equipment certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
available at the time of printing. Mitsubishi Motors Corporation nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of Califor-
nia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and to
make additions or improvements in its product without assuming any
obligation to install these on previously manufactured products.
©2013 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation Printed in Japan

BK0200700US.book 1 ページ２０１３年２月１５日　金曜日　午後１２時１７分
Table of contents
Overview 1
Quick index 2
General information 3
Seat and restraint systems 4
Features and controls 5
Driving safety 6
Comfort controls 7
For emergencies 8
Vehicle care and maintenance 9
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10
Specifications 11
Alphabetical index 12
Instruments and controls (Driver’s area)
1 Instruments and controls (Driver’s area)

N00100202531
Instrument cluster P.5-106 Sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter

(if so equipped) P.5-66
Multi-information meter switch P.5-109
Combination headlights and Wiper and washer switch

dimmer switch P.5-145 P.5-152
Turn signal lever P.5-150 Rear window wiper and washer
Front fog light switch switch P.5-156
Steering wheel audio remote Cruise control switches P.5-94

control switches P.5-159
Ignition switch
Headlight leveling switch P.5-16, 5-23, 5-53
Supplemental restraint system - airbag
Active stability control (for driver’s seat)
(ASC) OFF switch P.5-92 P.4-23
Horn switch P.5-157
Steering wheel tilt lock lever

P.5-50
Fuses P.9-28
Supplemental restraint system - driver’s knee airbag
P.4-29
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) P.5-158
Engine hood release lever
P.9-3
1-1 Overview
Instruments and controls
Instruments and controls 1

N00100201390
Supplemental restraint system - airbag (for front

Vents P.7-2 Gearshift or selector lever P.5-59, 5-62 passenger’s seat) P.4-23
Parking brake lever P.5-49

Glove compartment P.5-187
USB input terminal (if so equipped)
P.5-180
Cup holder (for front seats) P.5-189
Fuel tank filler door release
lever P.3-4
Heated seat switch (if so equipped) P.4-5
Floor console box P.5-188

12 V power outlet P.5-183
Overview 1-2
Center panel
1 Center panel
N00100701223
<Type 1>
Audio (if so equipped) P.7-26

DISPLAY AUDIO (if so equipped)
Refer to the separated owner’s manual
Front passenger seat belt warning light

Hazard warning flasher switch
P.4-13
P.5-151
Passenger’s airbag off indicator Electric rear window defogger switch

P.4-28 P.5-157
Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA) Air conditioning

(if so equipped) P.7-50 P.7-4, 7-9, 7-14, 7-20
Front console tray 12 V power outlet P.5-183

P.5-188
1-3 Overview
Center panel
<Type 2> 1
DISPLAY AUDIO (if so equipped)

Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System (if so equipped)
Refer to the separated owner’s manual
Hazard warning flasher switch Front passenger seat belt warning light
P.5-151 P.4-13
Passenger’s airbag off indicator Electric rear window defogger switch

P.4-28 P.5-157
Air conditioning
Front console box (Upper box) P.7-14
P.5-188
Front console box (Lower box) 12 V power outlet

P.5-188 P.5-183
Overview 1-4
Interior
1 Interior
N00100302268
Sunroof switch
Electric remote-controlled
(if so equipped)
outside mirror switch Dome light (Front)/Reading lights
P.5-46
P.5-52 P.5-184, 9-35, 9-46
Window lock switch
P.5-46
Power window switches Power door lock

P.5-44 switch P.5-38
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface microphone (if so equipped) P.5-158
Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor (for front seats)

Inside rearview mirror
P.4-13
P.5-50
Seat belts P.4-9
Rear shelf panel Sun visors P.5-182

P.5-190 Vanity mirror P.5-182
Card holder P.5-182
Bottle holder (for front seats)

P.5-190
Front seats P.4-3
Supplemental restraint system - side airbag

(for front seats) P.4-34
Head restraints (except for RECARO seat) P.4-6
1-5 Overview
Interior
1
Supplemental restraint system - curtain airbag P.4-34
Coat hook P.5-192 Dome light (Rear) (if so equipped)

Assist grips P.5-192 P.5-185, 9-35, 9-47
Luggage compartment levers

P.4-9
Tether anchors for

child restraint system
P.4-18
Rear seats P.4-5

Cargo floor boxes
Cup holder (for rear seat) P.5-190

Dual height adjustable cargo
floor board (if so equipped)
P.5-191 Arm rest P.4-5
Overview 1-6
Luggage compartment
1 Luggage compartment
N00100500442
Cargo room light

P.5-186, 9-35, 9-47
Spare tire P.8-7
AWC control fluid reser-

voir (Vehicles with turbo-
charger)
P.9-12
Tools P.8-6 Jack P.8-6
1-7 Overview
Outside (Front)
Outside (Front) 1
N00100601323
Sunroof (if so equipped) P.5-46 Outside rearview mirrors P.5-52
Windshield wiper P.5-152

Fuel tank filler P.3-4
Locking and unlocking P.5-36

Engine compartment P.9-5
Keyless entry system
Engine hood P.9-3
F.A.S.T.-key (Free-hand Advanced Security
Transmitter)
Side turn signal lights P.5-150, 9-33
Front fog lights (if so equipped) P.5-151, 9-33, 9-40
[Except for vehicles with high intensity discharge headlights type] [For vehicles with high intensity discharge headlights type]
Front turn signal lights P.5-150, 9-33, 9-40
Front turn signal lights P.5-150, 9-33, 9-40
Headlights, low/high beam
Headlights, low beam P.5-145, 9-33, 9-38
P.5-145, 9-33, 9-35
Front side-marker and

Front side-marker and park-
parking lights
ing lights
P.5-145, 9-33, 9-39
P.5-145, 9-33, 9-38
Headlights, high beam P.5-145, 9-33, 9-36 Daytime running lights P.5-145, 9-33, 9-37
Overview 1-8
Outside (Rear)
1 Outside (Rear)
N00100602375
Antenna P.7-59
Rear window wiper P.5-156 Tire inflation pressure P.9-21

Changing tires P.8-6
Tire rotation P.9-22
Tire chains P.9-24
Tire pressure monitoring system
P.5-100
High-mounted stop light P.9-33
Rear hatch P.5-40
Rear side-marker lights

Rear-view camera (if so equipped) P.5-145, 9-33, 9-43
P.5-104
Rear turn signal lights

License plate lights P.5-145, 9-33, 9-45 P.5-150, 9-33, 9-43
Back-up lights P.9-33, 9-44 Tail and stop lights P.5-145, 9-33, 9-43
1-9 Overview
If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

2
N00200701077
NOTE
 For information regarding warning displays in the multi-information display, refer to “Multi-information display” on page 5-108.
 These warning lights will come on for a few seconds for a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to “ON”.
Warning light Do this Ref. page
 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your P.5-143
choice for assistance.
Charging system warning light
 If this light comes on while driving, check to see that the parking brake is
fully released.
 If this light stays on after releasing the parking brake, stop and check the
or
brake fluid level. P.5-142
 If the brake fluid level is correct, there may be a system malfunction. Avoid
Brake warning light hard braking and high speeds, and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance.
 Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, have
the engine system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
or
repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. If the vehicle is not driv-
able, contact emergency roadside assistance at 1-888-648-7820 (for vehi- P.5-142
Engine malfunction indicator cles sold in U.S.A.) or 1-888-576-4878 (for vehicles sold in Canada), an
(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, or local towing company for assis-
light”) tance.
Quick index 2-1


Warning light Do this Ref. page
 When this light comes on, the anti-lock braking system is not functioning
2 and only the ordinary braking system is functioning.
 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.
P.5-89,
Test the system as described on page 5-89.
5-89
 If the light does not go out after the test, or if it comes on again, we recom-
Anti-lock braking system warning light mend that you have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.
 It is not necessary to stop the vehicle immediately, but we recommend that

P.4-15,
you have the airbag and the pre-tensioner seat belt system checked at an
4-29
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible.
SRS warning light
 If the warning light comes on, you should stop and adjust the tires to the
proper inflation pressure as soon as possible.
(See “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-21.)
Once adjustments have been made, the warning light will go off after a few
minutes of driving.
P.5-101
 If the warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then remains
continuously illuminated, the system is not operating properly. If the sys-
Tire pressure monitoring system warning light tem returns to normal, the warning light will go off. If the warning light
does not go off, have the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
2-2 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

2
N00200900740
Problem Do this Ref. Page

Cannot turn the key. When using a key to start the engine
(When using a key to start the Will not turn from “LOCK” to “ACC”.
engine) Turn the key while turning the steering wheel in either direction.
Will not turn from “ACC” to “LOCK” .
Vehicles equipped with continuously variable transmission (CVT) or Twin Clutch SST: P.5-54,
Check the position of the selector lever (CVT) or the gearshift lever (Twin Clutch SST). 5-55
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever (CVT) or the gearshift lever (Twin
Clutch SST) is set to the “P” (PARK) position.
Vehicles equipped with manual transaxle:
Place the key at the “ACC” position. Push the key in and turn it.
When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start the engine
(When using the F.A.S.T.-key to
Will not turn from “LOCK (PUSH OFF)” to “ACC”.
start the engine)
Push the ignition switch again, turn the steering wheel in both directions and then turn the
ignition switch.
Will not turn from “ACC” to “LOCK” . P.5-11

Vehicles equipped with CVT or Twin Clutch SST:
Check whether the selector lever (CVT) or the gearshift lever (Twin Clutch SST) is set to the
“P” (PARK) position.
Vehicles equipped with manual transaxle:
Place the ignition switch at the “ACC” position. Push the ignition switch in and turn it.
The F.A.S.T.-key does not oper-
ate.
Use the emergency key to lock and unlock the doors and start the engine. P.5-22
(for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key)
Quick index 2-3


Problem Do this Ref. Page
Cannot shift the selector lever
2 (CVT) or the gearshift lever
Shift the selector lever (CVT) or the gearshift lever (Twin Clutch SST) while pressing the
(Twin Clutch SST) from the “P”
brake pedal. P.5-62, 5-70
(PARK) position.
Check that the ignition key or ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
(for vehicles equipped with
CVT or Twin Clutch SST)
The windows are fogged up.
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” or “ ” position.

P.7-19, 7-24
2. Turn on the blower.
The engine does not start.

The lights do not come on.
P.8-2,
The lights are dim. Have the battery checked. Recharge or replace as needed.
9-14
The horn does not honk.
The horn sound is weak.
2-4 Quick index


Problem Do this Ref. page
The engine coolant temperature
display “ ” in the multi-infor- 2
mation display is flashing.
Steam comes out of the engine
compartment.
Type 1
The engine is overheated.

P.8-4
Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Type 2
The vehicle is stuck in sand,

Rock your vehicle back and forth to free it. P.8-15
mud, or snow.
WARNING
 When attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, be sure that no one is near the vehicle. The rocking motion may cause the vehicle to
suddenly lurch forward or backward, possibly injuring bystanders.
 Avoid revving the engine or spinning the wheels. Prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in overheating and transaxle failure.
If the vehicle remains stuck after several rocking attempts, have a towing service pull the vehicle out.
Quick index 2-5

2 The brakes are not functioning

properly after driving through Dry out the brakes by driving slowly while lightly pressing the brake pedal. P.6-5
water.
The CVT makes no engine
speed to vehicle speed ratio
change when accelerating. The There may be a problem in the CVT.
initial movement of the vehicle If the or warning lights on the multi-information display will not turn off, or if they are
P.5-70
is slow when the vehicle starts coming on frequently, please have the vehicle checked at your nearest Mitsubishi Motors
moving. dealer.
CVT)
Twin Clutch SST does not shift.
Vehicle cannot move.
Acceleration is slow.
The vehicle does not creep.
A large shock is felt when shift- The temperature of the Twin Clutch SST fluid is high, a safety device in the Twin Clutch SST P.5-73,
ing. has been activated due to a possible malfunction in the Twin Clutch SST, or there is a possible 5-81,
Shifting occurs at higher engine malfunction in the engine electronic control module. 5-142
speed.
Response is slow.
Twin Clutch SST)
2-6 Quick index


A tire is punctured.
2
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place where the surface is flat and level.
P.8-6
2. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire.
Quick index 2-7

General information
3
Fuel selection ....................................................................................3-2
Filling the fuel tank...........................................................................3-4
Modifications to and racing of your vehicle.....................................3-5
Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts ......................................................3-7
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements................................3-7
Fuel selection
oline to minimize fuel-injector fouling and octane rating of at least 91 [(MON+RON)/2]
Fuel selection minimize intake-valve deposits. Detergent must be used.
N00301000882
gasoline helps keep your engine in tune and If the premium grade unleaded gasoline rat-
Your vehicle is designed to use unleaded gas- your emission-control system working prop- ing of 91 [(MON+RON)/2] or higher is not
3 oline only. It is equipped with a fuel filler erly. available on journey, etc., regular unleaded
tube especially designed to accept only a gasoline having an octane rating of 87
small diameter unleaded gasoline dispensing [(MON+RON)/2] can be used temporarily as
nozzle.
Octane requirement an emergency measure.
MON: Motor Octane Number

WARNING Except for vehicles equipped with RON: Research Octane Number
 Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
sive. You could be burned, seriously
turbocharger
injured or killed when handling it. When- Oxygenated gasoline
ever you refuel your vehicle, stop the Your vehicle is designed to operate on
engine and keep flames, sparks, and unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane
smoking materials away from the vehicle.
Gasoline sold at some service stations con-
number of 87 [(MON+RON)/2], or 91 RON.
Always handle fuel in well-ventilated out- tains oxygenates such as ethanol, although
door areas. the oxygenates may not be identified by those
Vehicles equipped with turbo- names. Oxygenates are required in some
charger areas of the country. Such fuel can be used in
CAUTION your vehicle.
 Using leaded gasoline in your vehicle will Your vehicle is designed to operate on pre-
damage the engine, catalytic converter, and mium grade unleaded gasoline having a mini- Ethanol (Gasohol)
the oxygen sensors. Also, using leaded gaso- mum octane rating of 93 [(MON+RON)/2] or
line is illegal, and will void your warranty higher for optimum performance. In case pre-
coverage of the engine, catalytic converter, A mixture of up to 10 % ethanol (grain alco-
mium grade unleaded gasoline 93 hol) and 90 % unleaded gasoline may be used
and oxygen sensors.
[(MON+RON)/2] is not available, unleaded in your vehicle, provided the octane number
gasoline rating of 91 [(MON+RON)/2] can is at least as high as that recommended for
be used. However, the performance level is unleaded gasoline.
Gasoline detergent additives reduced.
In order to maintain exhaust system durabil-
In the United States, fuel suppliers are ity, premium unleaded gasoline having an
required by law to add detergents to their gas-
3-2 General information
Fuel selection
Use of gasolines blended with MMT may
Methanol adversely affect performance, and cause the
NOTE
 Poor-quality gasoline can cause problems
malfunction indicator on your instrument
Do not operate your vehicle on gasoline con- such as poor starting, stalling during idling,
panel to come on. If this happens, contact an
abnormal engine noise, and poor accelera-
taining methanol (wood alcohol). Using this authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a tion. If you experience any of these prob- 3
type of alcohol could adversely affect the repair facility of your choice for assistance. lems, try using a different brand of gasoline.
vehicle’s performance and damage critical If the engine malfunction indicator (“SER-
parts of the vehicle’s fuel system. VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine
Sulfur in gasoline light”) flashes, have the vehicle inspected as
soon as possible by the nearest authorized
Reformulated gasoline Your vehicle may have been designed to sat- Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
isfy California’s low-emission regulations of your choice.
Many areas of the country require the use of based on clean-burning low-sulfur gasoline.  Repeatedly driving short distances at low
cleaner burning fuel referred to as “Reformu- Gasoline sold in parts of the country other speeds can cause deposits to form in the fuel
lated Gasoline”. than California is allowed to have a higher system and engine, resulting in poor starting
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates sulfur content. Using such gasoline could and poor acceleration. If these problems
and is specially blended to reduce vehicle occur, you are advised to add a detergent
adversely affect the vehicle’s catalytic con-
emissions and improve air quality. additive to the gasoline when you refuel the
verter and cause the engine malfunction indi-
vehicle. The additive will remove the depos-
Mitsubishi Motors Corporation strongly sup- cator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or its, thereby returning the engine to a normal
ports the use of reformulated gasoline. Prop- “Check engine light”) to come on. Illumina- condition. Be sure to use a Mitsubishi
erly blended reformulated gasoline has no tion of this indicator while you are using Motors Genuine cleaning additive. Using an
adverse effect on vehicle performance or the high-sulfur gasoline does not necessarily unsuitable additive could make the engine
durability of the engine and fuel system. mean the vehicle’s emission-control system is malfunction. For details, please contact the
malfunctioning. Your authorized Mitsubishi nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
MMT (methylcyclopentadienyl Motors dealer may suggest you try using a
different, lower-sulfur brand of unleaded gas-
manganese tricarbonyl) oline to determine whether the problem is
fuel-related.
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic
additive that is blended into some gasolines
to increase the octane number.
Mitsubishi Motors Corporation recommends
using gasolines without MMT.
General information 3-3

Filling the fuel tank

2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear
Filling the fuel tank WARNING driver side of your vehicle.
 Keep the doors and windows closed while
N00301101910
The fuel tank filler door can be opened
refueling the vehicle. If they were open,
from inside the vehicle with the fuel tank
WARNING fuel vapor could get into the cabin.
3  Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
filler door release lever located at the left
side of the driver’s seat.
sive. You could be burned, seriously
injured or killed when handling it. When
Fuel tank capacity
refueling your vehicle, always turn the
engine off and keep away from flames, Vehicles without turbocharger:
sparks, and smoking materials. Always 15.5 gal (59 liters)
handle fuel in well-ventilated outdoor Vehicles with turbocharger:
areas. 14.5 gal (55 liters)
 Before removing the fuel cap, be sure to
get rid of your body’s static electricity by
touching a metal part of the car or fuel
pump. Any static electricity on your body Refueling
could create a spark that ignites fuel
vapor. 1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine.
 Perform the whole refueling process 3. Open the fuel tank filler pipe by slowly
(opening the fuel tank filler door, remov- turning the cap counterclockwise.
ing the fuel cap, etc.) by yourself. Do not
let any other person come near the fuel
tank filler. If you allowed a person to help
you and that person was carrying static
electricity, fuel vapor could be ignited.
 Do not move away from the fuel tank filler
until refueling is finished. If you moved
away and did something else (for example,
sitting on a seat) part-way through the
refueling process, you could pick up a
fresh charge of static electricity.
 Be careful not to inhale fuel vapor. Fuel A- Remove
contains toxic substances.
B- Close

Modifications to and racing of your vehicle

5. To fill with fuel correctly depends mainly
WARNING on correct handling of the fuel filler noz-
CAUTION
 Since the fuel system may be under pres-  If you need to replace the fuel tank filler cap,
zle. Do not tilt the nozzle. Insert the noz-
sure, remove the fuel tank filler cap use only the cap specified for your model
zle in the tank port as far as it will go.
slowly. This relieves any pressure or vac- vehicle.
uum that might have built up in the fuel 3
tank. If the cap is venting vapor or if you CAUTION
hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops  Your vehicle can only be operated using NOTE
before removing the cap. Otherwise, fuel unleaded gasoline. Serious engine and cata-  If the fuel tank filler cap is not tight while
may spray out, injuring you or others. lytic converter damage will result if leaded driving, the engine malfunction indicator
gasoline is used. (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check
4. While filling with fuel, store the cap in the engine light”) may come on when the
cap holder located on the inside of the fuel 6. When the nozzle stops automatically, do onboard diagnostic (OBD) system performs
not attempt to add more fuel. a self check.
tank filler door.
Always tighten the fuel tank filler cap until
you hear clicking sounds.
CAUTION The indicator will go off after driving several
 To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
times. If the indicator does not go off, con-
“top-off” the fuel tank. Spilled fuel could
tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
discolor, stain, or crack the vehicle’s paint-
dealer or a repair facility of your choice as
work. If fuel spills on the paintwork, wipe it
soon as possible.
off with a soft cloth.
7. To close, turn the fuel tank filler cap

slowly clockwise until you hear clicking
Modifications to and racing
sounds, then gently push the fuel tank of your vehicle
filler door closed. N00301600178
This vehicle should not be modified with

WARNING non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts. Mit-
 Make sure the fuel cap is securely closed. subishi Motors designs and manufactures
If the fuel cap is loose, fuel could leak, high quality vehicles with an emphasis on
resulting in a fire. safety and durability. Modifications using
non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts may
affect the performance, safety and/or durabil-

Modifications to and racing of your vehicle

ity of your vehicle, and may violate applica-
ble state and/or federal regulations.
Installation of accessories WARNING
N00301700023  If you choose to use a cellular phone while
DAMAGE OR PERFORMANCE PROB- driving, you must not allow that usage to
CAUTION distract you in the safe operation of your
3 LEMS RESULTING FROM MODIFICA-
 Before any electrical or electronic accesso- vehicle. Anything, including cellular
TIONS TO OR RACING OF YOUR
ries are installed, consult an authorized Mit- phone usage, that distracts you from the
VEHICLE ARE NOT COVERED UNDER safe operation of your vehicle increases
subishi Motors dealer.
WARRANTY. your risk of an accident.
Refer to and follow all state and local laws
Examples of modifications to your vehicle  The installation of accessories, optional in your area regarding cellular phone
that can cause damage or performance prob- parts, etc., should only be carried out usage while driving.
lems include the following: within the limits prescribed by law in the
driving area and in accordance with the
 Failure to use Mitsubishi Motors genuine guidelines and warnings contained within
parts
Important point!
the documents accompanying this vehicle.
 Failure to use required fuel and fluids Only Mitsubishi Motors approved acces-
 Failure to use proper size tires and wheels Due to the large number of accessory and
sories should be fitted to your vehicle.
 Modification of the fuel, intake, exhaust, replacement parts provided by different man-
 Improper installation of electrical parts
emission, suspension, engine, drive train ufacturers in the market, it is not always pos-
could cause fire. Refer to the “Modifica-
or electrical wiring systems sible for an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
tion/alterations to the electrical or fuel
 Modification of any onboard com- dealer to check whether the attachment or
systems” section within this owner’s man-
puter/control module, including repro- installation of non-Mitsubishi Motors genu-
ual.
gramming, or replacing/adding chips to ine parts will affect the driving safety of your
 Using a cellular phone or radio set inside
any onboard computer/control module Mitsubishi-vehicle.
the vehicle without an external antenna
may cause electrical system interference,
Review the Warranty and Maintenance Man- which could lead to unsafe vehicle opera- Modification/alterations to the
ual for further details regarding warranty cov- tion.
erage. electrical or fuel systems
 Tires and wheels which do not meet spec- N00301800167
ifications must not be used.
Refer to the “Specifications” section for Mitsubishi Motors manufactures high quality
information regarding wheel and tire vehicles with an emphasis on safety. It is
sizes. important to consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer before installation of any

Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts

accessory which may involve modification of
the electrical or fuel systems. California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
CAUTION N00300100017
 Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi Certain components of this vehicle, such as 3

Motors dealer concerning any such acces- airbag modules, seat belt pretensioners, and
sory fitment or modification. button cell batteries, may contain perchlorate
If the wires interfere with the vehicle body or materials.
improper installation methods are used (pro- Special handling may apply. For additional
tective fuses not included, etc.), electronic
information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardous-
devices may be adversely affected, resulting
waste/perchlorate.
in a fire, vehicle damage, or other accident.
Mitsubishi Motors genuine

parts
N00301400235
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts are

designed and manufactured to meet high stan-
dards of performance, and are recommended
for all of your maintenance needs. Also avail-
able from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer are
a wide variety of accessories to personalize
your new vehicle. Each Mitsubishi Motors
vehicle has a selection of Mitsubishi Motors
authorized accessories to choose from to tai-
lor your new vehicle to your own personal
preference. Your Mitsubishi Motors dealer’s
Parts Manager has information on various
audio systems, protection items, as well as
interior and exterior accessories available for
your specific model.
Seat and restraint systems
Seats..................................................................................................4-2 4
Seats and restraint systems ...............................................................4-2
Front seats.........................................................................................4-3
Rear seats ..........................................................................................4-5
Head restraints ..................................................................................4-6
Extending a luggage compartment ..................................................4-8
Seat belts...........................................................................................4-9
Seat belt use during pregnancy .......................................................4-14
Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems ...........................4-14
Child restraint systems....................................................................4-15
Maintenance and inspection of seat belts .......................................4-22
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag ..............................4-23
Seats
Seats
N00408400408
locks also are safety equipment, which must

1 - Front seats Seats and restraint systems be used correctly.
N00401600182
 To adjust the seat forward or backward  Always check the following before you drive:
P.4-3 Your vehicle has seat belts and other features
 To adjust the seatback  P.4-4 that help protect you and your passengers in
 That everyone in your vehicle is properly
 To adjust the seat height (except for an accident.
wearing their seat belt.
RECARO seat, driver’s side only)  Seat belts are the most important safety
 That infants and small children are prop-
P.4-4 device. When worn properly, seat belts can
erly secured in appropriate child restraint
 Heated seats (if so equipped)  P.4-5 reduce the chance of serious injury or death
systems in the rear seat.
in various types of crashes. For added protec-
 That all doors are fully closed and locked.
tion during a severe frontal collision, your
2 - Rear seats  That seatbacks are upright, with head
vehicle has a Supplemental Restraint System
restraints properly adjusted.
(SRS) with airbags for the driver and passen-
 Arm rest P.4-5 gers. The seats, head restraints, and door
4-2 Seat and restraint systems

Front seats
Safety equipment cannot prevent injury or
death in all motor vehicle accidents. You can
WARNING To adjust the seat forward or
help reduce the risk of injury or death, how-  To reduce the risk to the driver of serious backward
injury or death during deployment of the
ever, by following the instructions in this N00401900257
driver’s airbag, always properly wear the
manual. seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide the
back as possible while maintaining a posi- seat forward or backward to the desired posi-
tion. Release the adjusting lever to lock the 4
Front seats tion that still enables you to fully apply the
pedals, easily control the steering wheel, seat in place.
N00401800328
and safely operate the vehicle.
Position the driver’s seat as far back as possi-  To reduce the risk to the front passenger
Except for RECARO seat
ble while maintaining a position that still of serious injury or death during deploy-
enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily ment of the passenger’s airbag, always
control the steering wheel and safely operate properly wear the seat belt and adjust the
the vehicle. front passenger’s seat as far back as possi-
ble.
 Always place children 12 years old and
Except for RECARO seat RECARO seat under in the rear seat and use appropriate
child restraint systems. RECARO seat
CAUTION
 Make sure that the seat is adjusted by an
adult. If it is adjusted by a child, an unex-
pected accident might occur.
 Do not place a cushion or the like between
your back and the seatback while driving. WARNING
The effectiveness of the head restraints will  To make sure that the seat is securely
be reduced in the event of an accident.
WARNING  When sliding the seats, be careful not to
locked, try to move it forward or back-
 Do not attempt to adjust the seat while ward without using the adjusting lever.
catch your hand or leg.
driving. This can cause loss of vehicle con-
 When sliding or reclining the seat rearward,
trol and result in an accident.
pay careful attention to the rear seat passen-
 After adjusting the seat, make sure that gers.
the seat is securely locked into position.
Seat and restraint systems 4-3

Front seats
To adjust the seatback RECARO seat WARNING

N00402000343  To reduce the risk of serious injury or
Adjust the seatback angle by turning the dial. death in the event of an accident or sud-
Except for RECARO seat den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
the upright position while the vehicle is in
motion.
4 To adjust the seatback, lean forward slightly, Seat belt performance during an accident
gently pull the seatback lock lever up, then can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
lean backward to a comfortable position and are reclined. The more a seatback is
release the lever. The seatback will lock in reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
place. mance will be adversely affected. If the
seat belt is not properly positioned against
the body during an accident, there is
increased risk you will slide under the belt
and receive serious injury or death.
1- To move to forward direction

2- To recline backward
To adjust the seat height
(except for RECARO seat,
driver’s side only)
N00402100201
Operate the lever repeatedly to raise or lower

the seat.
CAUTION
 The reclining mechanism used in the seat-
back is spring loaded, and will cause the
seatback to return quickly to the vertical
position when the lock lever is operated.
When pulling the lever, sit close to the seat-
back or hold the seatback with your hand to
control its return motion.

Rear seats
3 (LO) - Heater low (to keep the seat warm)
CAUTION
The indicator light (A) will illuminate while  When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine,
the heater is on. kerosene, gasoline, alcohol, or other organic
solvents; doing so can cause damage not
only to the surface of the seat, but also to the
WARNING heater.
 Persons who are unable to feel tempera-  If water or any other liquid is spilled on the
4
ture change or skin pain due to age, ill- seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before
ness, injury, medication, alcohol use, attempting to use the heater. Turn the heater
fatigue or other physical conditions or off immediately if it appears to be malfunc-
who have sensitive skin may suffer burns tioning during use.
1- Raise when using the heated seat even at low
2- Lower temperatures. To reduce the risk of burns,
people with such conditions must use care Rear seats
when using the heated seat. N00402500162
Heated seats (if so equipped)

N00435600349 Arm rest
The heated seats can be operated when the  Switch off the seat heaters when not in use.
ignition switch is in the “ON” position. Operate the heaters at the “HI” position for
Tilt the arm rest down for use as shown.
quick heating. After the seat has become The arm rest includes a cup holder. (Refer to
warm, set the heater switch to the “LO” posi- “Cup holder” on page 5-189.)
tion to keep it warm. Slight variations in the
seat temperature may be felt while using the
heated seats. This is caused by the operation
of the heater’s internal thermostat and does
not indicate a malfunction.
 Do not place heavy objects on the seat or
stick pins, needles, or other pointed objects
into the seat.
 Do not place a blanket, cushion, or other
insulating material on the seat while using
1 (HI) - Heater high (for quick heating) the heater; doing so can cause the heater ele-
ment to overheat.
2 - Heater off
Head restraints
should raise the restraint to the highest locked
Head restraints WARNING position.
N00404300467  In order to minimize the risk of a neck
injury due to a rear impact, the head  To raise the restraint, pull it straight up.
restraint must be adjusted to the proper
Except for RECARO seat position before vehicle operation. For the
 To lower the restraint, push down on it
N00409400014 while pressing the lock knob (A) in the
driver and front passenger, the seatbacks
4 Padded head restraints for the seats can must be adjusted to the upright position
direction shown by the arrow.
before adjusting the head restraints. The  After adjusting the height, push down on
reduce the risk of a whiplash injury if your
driver should never adjust the seat while the restraint to make sure it is locked in
vehicle is hit from the rear.
the vehicle is in motion. position.
The head restraints are equipped in the illus-
trated position.  Driving without the head restraints in
place can cause you and your passengers
To maximize the effectiveness of your head
serious injury or death in an accident. To
restraint, adjust the head restraint to the reduce the risk of injury in an accident,
proper position. For the driver and front pas- always make sure the head restraints are
senger, adjust the seatbacks to the upright installed and properly positioned when
position before adjusting the head restraints. the seat is occupied.
Sit back against the seatback with your head  Never place a cushion or similar device on
close to the head restraint. the seatback. This can adversely affect
head restraint performance by increasing
the distance between your head and the
restraint.
Adjustment of the head restraint To remove

height
Press the lock knob (A) in the direction
To reduce the risk of injury in an accident, shown by the arrows. Then pull the head
adjust the head restraint height so that the restraint up and out of the seatback.
center of the restraint is at your eye level
when seated. Any person too tall for the
restraint to reach their eye level when seated

Head restraints
CAUTION
 Check that the lock knob (A) is extended out
as shown in the illustration. Then pull the
head restraint up to make sure that it is
locked in place and will not come out of the
seatback.
4
WARNING
 To help minimize the risk of neck injury in RECARO seat
the event of an accident, the head N00409500015
restraints must be properly installed and RECARO seats are equipped with padded
positioned to proper height before vehicle
head restraints integrated with the seatbacks.
operation.
These head restraints can reduce the risk of a
whiplash injury if your vehicle is hit from the
CAUTION rear.
To install The head restraints are equipped in the illus-
 The shape and size of the head restraint dif-
fers according to the seat. Always use the trated position.
First check that the head restraint is facing in correct head restraint provided for the seat To maximize the effectiveness of your head
the right direction as shown in the previous and do not install the head restraint in the restraint, adjust your seatback to the upright
illustration, and then insert it into the seat- wrong direction. position and sit back against the seatback
back. Push the head restraint down while with your head close to the head restraint.
pressing the lock knob (A) until the restraint
locks into place.

Extending a luggage compartment
Extending a luggage com- WARNING

partment  The front passenger seat is equipped with
weight sensors. Depending on the weight
N00405500088
detected, the front passenger airbag is dis-
abled or enabled. When folding the rear
WARNING seats forward for increased cargo capac-
4  Never adjust the seats to extend a luggage ity, the front passenger seat and seatback
compartment while the vehicle is in must be adjusted to assure they are not
motion or on a slope. contacting the rear seat. In the event the
The seats could move suddenly and cause front seat or seatback is allowed to contact
serious injury or an accident. the folded rear seat, proper operation of
 After returning a seatback to its normal the front passenger airbag system may be
WARNING position, make sure that the seatback is affected.
firmly secured. If the seatback is not
 In order to minimize the risk of a neck
secured, it could move and cause a serious
injury due to a rear impact, the driver and
front passenger seatbacks must be
accident. CAUTION
adjusted to the upright position before  Do not allow anyone to ride in the luggage
 In the luggage compartment, do not load the
vehicle operation. The driver should never compartment while the vehicle is in
luggage higher than the top of the seats and
adjust the seat while the vehicle is in motion. People who are not properly
make sure that the luggage is firmly secured.
motion. seated and restrained can be seriously
Restricted rear vision or unsecured objects
injured or killed in an accident.
 Never place a cushion or similar device on entering the passenger compartment from the
the seatback. This can adversely affect  The luggage compartment in the rear of luggage compartment during sudden brak-
head restraint performance by increasing the vehicle should never be used as a play ing can cause serious injury or an accident.
the distance between your head and the area by children. All children should be
 Seatbacks should always be folded and put
restraint. properly restrained in a restraint device
back into normal position by an adult. Seat
that offers the maximum protection for
adjustments by a child could lead to an unex-
their size and age. Refer to “Child
pected accident.
restraint systems” on page 4-15.
 When adjusting the seats, be careful not to
catch your hand or leg. Personal injury could
result.

Seat belts
1. Push the rear seat release button (A) to 2. The seatbacks fold forward.
NOTE manually fold the rear seatback forward, Confirm that the seatback locks securely
 When the seatback of a front seat is reclined,
or pull the luggage compartment lever (B) when it is returned.
return it to the upright position before driv-
to automatically fold the seatback for-
ing.
ward.
Rear seat release buttons 4
Folding the rear seatbacks for-
ward
N00405700093
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to

extend luggage compartment.
NOTE
 Before folding the rear seatbacks forward,
make sure that the arm rest is stowed and the WARNING
head restraints are lowered completely. Luggage compartment levers  When folding the rear seat, make sure no
 You can separately fold the right and left side one is on the seat. The seatback will fall
of the seatback. forward rapidly and could cause serious
injury.
 After returning the seatbacks to their
upright positions, make sure that the seat-
backs lock in place and are firmly secured.
Also check to be sure that the rear seat
belts are in front of the seatbacks, and not
caught behind the seatbacks.
Seat belts
N00406000439
Seat belts are installed in your vehicle to help

reduce the risk of injury to the driver and pas-

Seat belts
senger in the event of an accident. Always
use the provided seat belts.
WARNING WARNING
 To reduce the risk to a front seat passen-  Any child who is too small to properly
Carefully review the following information
ger of serious injury or death from a wear a seat belt must be properly
for proper seat belt usage.
deploying airbag, make sure the passenger restrained in an appropriate child
always wears the seat belt properly, restraint system. Children 12 years old
4 WARNING remains seated all the way back and and under should be seated only in the
 To help reduce the risk of injury or death upright in their seat, and moves the seat as rear seat to reduce their risk of serious
in an accident, seat belts and child far back as possible. Refer to “Supplemen- injury or death in an accident, especially
restraint systems must always be used. tal Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” on from the deployment of a front passenger
Refer to “Child restraint systems” on page page 4-23 for additional information. airbag.
4-15 for additional information.  Never hold an infant or child in your arms  Infants MUST be placed in a rear-facing
 Never use one seat belt for more than one or on your lap when riding in this vehicle child safety seat and positioned in the rear
person. even when you are wearing your seat belt. seat.
 Never carry more people in your vehicle Never place any part of the seat belt you  In the event of an accident, all seat belt
than there are seat belts. are wearing around an infant or child. assemblies, including retractors and
Failure to follow these simple instructions attachment hardware, should be inspected
 Always adjust the seat belt for a snug fit.
creates a risk of serious injury or death to by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
 Always place the shoulder belt over your
your child in the event of an accident or dealer to determine whether replacement
shoulder and across your chest. Never put
sudden stop. is necessary.
it behind you or under your arm.
 Children 12 years old and under should
 Always wear the lap belt as low as possible
always ride in the rear seat and be prop-
across your hips, not around your waist.
erly restrained. This reduces their risk of Seat belt instructions
 Never modify or alter the seat belts in serious injury or death in an accident, N00406201470
your vehicle. especially due to a deploying front passen- All seats are equipped with a seat belt which
 To reduce the risk to the driver of serious ger airbag. Refer to “Child restraint sys- uses one combined lap-and-shoulder belt with
injury or death during deployment of the tems” on page 4-15 for additional
driver’s airbag, always properly wear the an emergency locking retractor.
information.
seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far
back as possible while maintaining a posi-
This system is designed to provide both com-
tion that still enables you to fully apply the fort and safety. It permits full extension and
pedals, easily control the steering wheel, automatic retraction of the belts during nor-
and safely operate the vehicle. mal vehicle operation. A sensing device
inside the belt retractor is designed to lock the
retractor in the event of a sudden change in
the vehicle’s motion.
Seat belts
3. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding
NOTE WARNING the latch plate. Push the latch plate into
 For instructions on installing a child restraint  To reduce the risk of serious injury or
the buckle until you hear a “click”. Pull
system using a seat belt, refer to “Installing a death in the event of an accident or sud-
up on the belt to be sure the latch plate is
child restraint system using the seat belt” on den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
page 4-20. the upright position while the vehicle is in locked securely in the buckle.
motion.
Seat belt performance during an accident 4
1. Occupants should always sit back in their
can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
seats with their backs against the upright are reclined. The more a seatback is
seatback. To reduce the risk of serious reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
injury or death during deployment of the mance will be adversely affected. If the
airbag, adjust the driver’s seat as far back seat belt is not properly positioned against
as possible while maintaining a position the body during an accident, there is
that still enables you to fully apply the increased risk you will slide under the belt
pedals, easily control the steering wheel, and receive serious injury or death.
and safely operate the vehicle. The front
passenger seat should also be moved as 2. Grasp the latch plate and slide it up the
far back as possible. Refer to “Supple- webbing so that it easily pulls across your NOTE
mental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” body.  If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled
on page 4-23. Also refer to “To adjust the out, pull it once with force and let it retract
seat forward or backward” on page 4-3. all the way.
Then, pull the belt out slowly once again.

Seat belts
4. The lap part of the belt must always be Warning display type 1
worn low and snug across the hips. Pull
WARNING
 Be sure the lap belt portion fits snugly and
up on the shoulder portion of the belt to
is worn as low as possible across the hips,
take up any slack in the lap belt.
not around the waist. Failure to follow this
instruction will increase the risk of serious
injury or death in the event of an accident.
4  Be sure the seat belt webbing is not Warning display type 2
twisted when worn. Twisted webbing may
adversely affect seat belt performance.
5. To release the belt, press the button on the

buckle and allow the belt to retract.
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it
out and check for kinks or twists in the A tone and warning light are used to remind
webbing. Then make sure it remains the driver to fasten the seat belt.
untwisted as it retracts. If the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
NOTE position without the driver’s seat belt being
 With the exception of the seat belt for the fastened, a warning light will come on and a
driver, the seat belts in all other seating posi- Seat belt warning tone will sound for approximately 6 seconds
tions are equipped with an Automatic Lock- N00409100011
ing Retractor (ALR) function. If you pull the
to remind you to fasten your seat belt.
seat belt fully out of the retractor, the retrac- If you then drive with the seat belt unfastened
tor will switch to its ALR child restraint
Driver’s seat belt reminder/warn- for longer than a minute from when the igni-
installation function (see page 4-20). ing light and display tion switch was turned on, the warning light
When the ALR function has been activated, N00409200025 will come on and blink repeatedly and the
the seat belt will only retract. If this happens, Warning light tone will sound intermittently.
let the belt fully retract, then pull the seat The warning light and the tone will stop after
belt back out, repeating steps 1 through 4. approximately 90 seconds.
If you then repeatedly stop and start your
vehicle with the seat belt unfastened, the
warning light/display and tone will remind
you to fasten your seat belt every time the
vehicle starts moving. You will also be

Seat belts
reminded to fasten your seat belt in this way To move the anchor up, slide the anchor up to
when you remove your seat belt while driv- the desired position.
ing. The warning light and the tone go off
when the seat belt is fastened. Anchor down Anchor up
WARNING 4
 In order to reduce the risk of serious
injury or death in an accident, always
wear your own seat belt. Do not allow any-
one to ride in your vehicle unless he or she
is also seated and wearing a seat belt.
Children should additionally be restrained When the ignition switch is turned to the
in a secure child restraint system. “ON” position, this indicator normally comes
on and goes off a few seconds later.
The light comes on when a person sits on the WARNING
NOTE front passenger seat but does not fasten the
 At the same time, “FASTEN SEAT BELT”  Always adjust the shoulder belt anchor so
seat belt. It goes off when the seat belt is sub- that the shoulder belt is positioned across
will be displayed on the information screen
sequently fastened. the center of your shoulder without touch-
in the multi-information display.
ing your neck. The shoulder belt should
WARNING not be able to fall off your shoulder. Fail-
ure to follow this instruction can adversely
Front passenger seat belt warning  Do not install any accessory or sticker that
affect seat belt performance and increase
makes the light difficult to see.
light the risk of serious injury or death in the
N00409300013 event of an accident.
The front passenger seat belt warning light is  Adjust the shoulder belt anchor only when
located in the instrument panel.
Adjustable seat belt shoulder the vehicle is not in motion.
anchor (front seats)  Make sure the anchor is securely locked in
N00406300269
position after adjusting it.
To move the anchor down, press the lock

knob (A) and slide the anchor down to the
desired position.

Seat belt use during pregnancy
Seat belt extender Seat belt use during preg- Pre-tensioner system
N00406701215
nancy
When your seat belt, even fully extended, is N00406800121
The driver and front passenger seat belts are
not long enough, a seat belt extender must be equipped with a seat belt pre-tensioner sys-
Seat belts work for everyone, including preg-
obtained. The extender may be used for either tem. In a moderate-to-severe frontal or side
nant women. Like all occupants, pregnant
4 of the front seats.
women are more likely to be seriously injured
collision, the pre-tensioner system operates
simultaneously with the deployment of the
or killed in an accident if they do not wear
front airbags or side airbags and curtain air-
seat belts.
bags.
The seat belt pre-tensioners are located within
WARNING the seat belt retractors (A). When activated,
 To reduce the risk of serious injury or the pre-tensioners quickly draw back seat belt
death to pregnant women and unborn webbing and increase seat belt performance.
children in an accident, pregnant women
should always wear a seat belt. The lap
portion of the seat belt should be worn
snug and low across the hips and below
the rounding. Consult your doctor if you
have any additional questions or concerns.
WARNING
 The extender should only be used if the
existing belt is not long enough. Anyone Seat belt pre-tensioner and
who can use the standard seat belt should
not use an extender. Unnecessary use of an
force limiter systems
N00417700612
extender can adversely affect seat belt
performance in an accident. The driver’s and front passenger’s seats each
 When not required, the extender must be have a seat belt equipped with a pre-tensioner The seat belt pre-tensioner system includes
removed and stowed. system. the following components:

Child restraint systems

The pre-tensioners activate in the event of a
moderate-to-severe frontal or side impact,
Force limiter system
N00408900113
even if the seat belt is not being worn. The
seat belt pre-tensioners may not activate in In the event of an accident, the seat belt force
certain types of collisions, even though the limiter system will help reduce the force
vehicle may appear to be severely damaged. applied to the driver and front seat passenger.
Such non-activation does not mean some- 4
thing is wrong with the seat belt pre-tensioner Child restraint systems
system, but rather that the collision forces
N00407100596
were not severe enough or not of the type to
activate the system. When transporting infants or small children
1- SRS warning light in your vehicle, an appropriate child restraint
2- Front impact sensors system must always be used. This is required
3- Seat belt pre-tensioners WARNING by law in the U.S. and Canada.
4- Airbag control unit  The seat belt pre-tensioner system is Child restraint systems specifically designed
5- Side impact sensors designed to work only once. After the seat
for infants and small children are offered by
belt pre-tensioners have been activated,
several manufacturers. Choose only a child
they will not work again. They must
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness promptly be replaced and the entire seat restraint system with a label certifying that it
of the electronic parts of the system whenever belt pre-tensioner system inspected by an complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
the ignition switch is in the “ON” or authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Standard 213 (FMVSS 213) or Motor Vehicle
“START” position. These include all of the Restraint Systems and Booster Cushions
items listed above and all related wiring. Safety Regulations (RSSR). Look for the
The pre-tensioner seat belt system will oper- SRS warning manufacturer’s statement of compliance on
ate only when the ignition switch is in the N00408700111
the box and child restraint system itself.
“ON” or “START” position. This warning tells you if there is a problem The child restraint system should be appropri-
When the seat belt pre-tensioners activate, involving the SRS airbags and the pre-ten- ate for your child’s weight and height, and
some smoke is released and a loud noise will sioner seat belts. Refer to “SRS warning should properly fit your vehicle’s seat.
be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care light/display” on page 4-29. For detail information, refer to the instruction
should be taken not to intentionally inhale it,
manual accompanying the child restraint sys-
as it may cause some temporary irritation to
tem.
people with respiratory problems.

Guidelines for child restraint WARNING WARNING

system selection  All children must be seated in the rear  Never hold an infant or child in your arms
seat, and properly restrained. or on your lap when riding in this vehicle,
Accident statistics show that children of even when you are wearing your seat belt.
All children should be properly restrained in all sizes and ages are safer when properly Never place any part of the seat belt you
a restraint device that offers the maximum restrained in the rear seat, rather than in are wearing around an infant or child.
4 protection for their size and age. the front seat. Failure to follow these simple instructions
Be sure to check local, state, or provincial  Any child who is too large to use a child creates a risk of serious injury or death to
requirements for child size and age that may restraint system should ride in the rear your child in the event of an accident or
vary from the recommendations listed below. seat and wear the lap and shoulder belt sudden stop.
properly. The shoulder belt must be posi-
 Children less than 1 year old and children tioned over the shoulder and across the
less than 20 pounds (9 kg) MUST ride in a chest, not across their neck, and with the
rear-facing child safety seat that MUST lap belt positioned low on the child’s hips,
ONLY be used in the rear seat. not across their stomach. If necessary, a
booster seat (including a booster cushion)
 Children older than 1 year of age and who
should be used to help achieve a proper
weigh less than 40 pounds (18 kg) or who seat belt fit. Follow the booster seat
are less than 40 inches (100 cm) tall must (including a booster cushion) manufac-
be in a forward-facing restraint used only turer’s instructions. Only use a booster
in the rear seat. seat (including a booster cushion) that is
 Children who weigh more than 40 pounds certified as complying with Federal Motor
(18 kg) or who are more than 40 inches Vehicle Safety Standards or Motor Vehicle
(100 cm) tall, regardless of age, should Restraint Systems and Booster Cushions
use a suitable child seat or a booster seat Safety Regulations.
(including a booster cushion) in the rear
seat until the vehicle’s lap/shoulder belt
fits them properly.

WARNING WARNING WARNING

 Your vehicle is also equipped with a front  FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT  When installing a child restraint system,
passenger airbag. SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat follow the instructions provided by the
Never put REAR-FACING CHILD whenever possible. If they must be used in manufacturer and follow the directions in
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT the front passenger seat, move the seat to this manual. Failure to do so can result in
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas- the most rearward position and make sure serious injury or death to your child in an
senger seat. This places the infant too the child stays in the child restraint sys- accident or sudden stop. 4
close to the passenger airbag. During tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow  After installation, push and pull the child
deployment of the airbag, the infant can these instructions could result in serious restraint system back and forth, and side
be seriously injured or killed. Rear-facing injury or death to the child. to side, to see that it is firmly secured. If
child restraint systems or infant restraint the child restraint system is not installed
systems must only be used in the rear seat. securely, it may cause injury to the child
or other occupants in the event of an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
Airbag  When not in use, keep your child restraint
system secured with the seat belt, or
remove it from the vehicle, in order to pre-
vent it from being thrown around inside
the vehicle during an accident.
WARNING
 It is important to use an approved rear-
facing infant restraint until the infant is
one year old (unless the infant outgrows
the seat sooner). This allows the infant’s
neck and spine to develop enough to sup-
port the weight of their head in the event
of an accident.

NOTE Installing a child restraint sys- Tether anchor locations

 Before purchasing a child restraint system, tem using the LATCH (Lower N00418900145
try installing it in the rear seat to make sure Your vehicle has 3 attachment points located
there is a good fit. Because of the location of Anchors and Tethers for chil-
on the back of the seatbacks. These are for
the seat belt buckles and the shape of the seat dren) system securing a child restraint system tether strap
cushion, it may be difficult to securely install
4 some manufacturer’s child restraint systems.
N00418800115
to each of the 3 rear seating positions in your
If the child restraint system can be pulled
vehicle.
forward or to either side easily on the seat
Lower anchor locations
cushion after the seat belt has been tightened,
choose another manufacturer’s child restraint The outboard seating positions in the rear seat
system. of your vehicle are equipped with lower
Depending on the seating position in the anchors for attaching child restraint systems
vehicle and the child restraint system that compatible with the LATCH system.
you have, the child restraint system can be
attached using one of the following two
methods:
• To the lower anchorage in the rear seat
ONLY if the child restraint system is com-
patible with the LATCH system (See page
4-18).
• To the seat belt (See page 4-20).
NOTE
 The symbols on the seatback show the loca-
tion of the lower anchor points.


2. Push the anchor connectors (A) on the
Examples of child restraint sys- NOTE
child restraint system into the slits (B) in
tems compatible with the LATCH accordance with the instructions provided  In order to secure a child restraint system
system compatible with the LATCH system, use the
by the child restraint system manufac-
lower anchor points in the outboard positions
N00419000185 turer. Remember, the lower anchors (E) of the rear seat. It is not necessary to use the
provided with your vehicle are designed vehicle’s seat belt. The vehicle’s seat belt,
to secure suitable child restraint systems however, MUST be used to secure a child 4
compatible with the LATCH system in the restraint system in the center position of the
rear seat only. rear seat.
WARNING
 If there is any foreign material in or
around the lower anchors, remove it
before installing the child restraint sys-
tem. Also, make sure the seat belt is away
A- Rear-facing child restraint system from, not looped through or otherwise
B- Front-facing child restraint system interfering with, the child restraint sys-
C- Child restraint system lower anchor tem. If foreign matter is not removed
connectors and/or the seat belt interferes with the
D- Tether strap (These are only examples.) A- Connector D- Vehicle seat child restraint system, the child restraint
cushion system will not be secured properly, could
detach and move forward in the event of
B- Slit E- Lower anchor
Using the LATCH system sudden braking or an accident, and could
C- Vehicle seatback result in injury to the child or other vehi-
N00419100199
cle occupants.
1. In order to securely fasten the tether strap,  When the vehicle is moving, do not adjust
remove the head restraint from the loca- the seat where the child restraint system is
tion where you wish to install the child installed.
restraint system.


3. Remove the rear shelf panel from the
vehicle.
Installing a child restraint sys- WARNING
(Refer to “Rear shelf panel” on page tem using the seat belt (with  When you install a child restraint system
using the seat belt, always make sure the
5-190.) emergency/automatic locking retractor has been switched to the ALR
4. Latch the tether strap hook (F) of the child mechanism) child restraint installation function. The
restraint system to the tether anchor bar ALR function will keep the child restraint
4 (G) and tighten the tether strap so it is
N00407300439
system tightly secured to the seat.
securely fastened. With the exception of the driver, the seat belt
Failure to convert the retractor to the
in all other seating positions can be converted ALR function may allow the child
FRONT from normal Emergency Locking Retractor restraint system to move forward during
(ELR) mode to Automatic Locking Retractor sudden braking or an accident, resulting
(ALR) mode. This means that when you pull in serious injury or death to the child or
the seat belt fully out of the retractor, the other occupants.
retractor will switch to its ALR child restraint
installation function. Always use the ALR
child restraint installation function when you Installation
install a child restraint system using the seat
belt.
1. Place the child restraint system in the rear
Children 12 years old and under should seating position.
5. Push and pull the child restraint system in always be restrained in the rear seat, when-
all directions to be sure it is firmly ever possible, although the front passenger
secured. seat belt can also be converted to ALR mode.
WARNING
 Child restraint system tether anchors are
designed only to withstand loads from cor-
rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under
no circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts, or harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the
vehicle.


2. Route the seat belt through the child 3. To activate the ALR child restraint instal- 5. After confirming that the belt is locked,
restraint system according to the instruc- lation function, slowly pull the shoulder grab the shoulder part of the belt near the
tions provided by the child restraint sys- part of the belt all the way out of the buckle and pull up to remove any slack
tem manufacturer. Then insert the seat retractor until it stops. Then let the belt from the lap part of the belt allowing the
belt latch plate into the buckle. Make sure feed back into the retractor. slack to feed into the retractor. Remember,
you hear a “click” when you insert the if the lap belt portion is not tight, the child
latch plate into the buckle. restraint system will not be secure. It may 4
help to put your weight on the child
restraint system and/or push on its seat-
back while pulling up on the belt (see
illustration).
4. After the belt has retracted, tug on it. If

the belt is in the ALR function, you will
not be able to pull it out. If the webbing
can be pulled out from retractor, the ALR
function has not been activated and you
will need to repeat steps 3 and 4.
If your child restraint system requires the use
of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap in
accordance with the following procedures.
6. Remove the head restraint from the loca-

tion in which you wish to install a child
restraint system.
7. Remove the rear shelf panel from the
vehicle. (Refer to “Rear shelf panel” on
page 5-190.)

Maintenance and inspection of seat belts

8. Latch the tether strap hook (A) of the 10. To remove a child restraint system from
child restraint system to the tether anchor the vehicle and deactivate the ALR mode,
WARNING
 Any child who is too small to properly
bar (B) and tighten the tether strap so it is remove the child from the restraint.
wear a seat belt must be properly
securely fastened. Unlatch the buckle. Then remove the belt
restrained in an appropriate child
from the restraint and let the belt fully restraint system, to reduce their risk of
FRONT retract. serious injury or death in an accident.
4  A child should never be left unattended in,
Children who have outgrown or unsupervised, around your vehicle.
When you leave the vehicle, always take
child restraint systems the child out as well.
N00407600588
 Children can die from heat stroke if left or
Children who have outgrown a child restraint trapped inside the vehicle, especially on
system should be seated in the rear seat and hot days.
wear the seat belt. If the shoulder belt crosses  Keep your vehicle locked when not in use.
their face or neck, and/or the lap belt crosses Keep your vehicle keys away from chil-
dren.
their stomach, a commercially available
WARNING booster seat (including a booster cushion)  Never allow children to play in the lug-
 Child restraint system tether anchors are gage compartment of your vehicle.
must be used, to raise the child so that the
designed only to withstand loads from cor- shoulder belt crosses their shoulder and the
rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under lap belt remains positioned low across their
no circumstances are they to be used for
hips. The booster seat (including a booster Maintenance and inspection
adult seat belts, or harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the
cushion) should fit the vehicle seat and have a of seat belts
vehicle. label certifying compliance with Federal N00407000221
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Motor
The seat belt webbing may be cleaned with
Vehicle Restraint Systems and Booster Cush-
9. Before putting your child in the restraint, mild soap or detergent solution. Do not use an
ions Safety Regulations.
push and pull the restraint in all directions organic solvent. Allow the belts to dry in the
to be sure it is firmly secured. Do this shade. Do not allow them to retract until com-
before each use. If the child restraint sys- pletely dry. Do not attempt to bleach or re-
tem is not firmly secure, repeat steps 1 dye the belts. The color may rub off and the
through 8. webbing strength may be affected.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

Regularly check your seat belt buckles and The SRS front airbags are designed to supple- The SRS airbags are NOT a substitute for use
their release mechanisms for positive engage- ment the primary protection of the driver and of the seat belts. For maximum protection in
ment and release of the latch plate. Check the front passenger seat belt systems by provid- all types of accidents, seat belts must
retractors for automatic locking when in the ing those occupants with protection against ALWAYS be worn by everyone who drives or
Automatic Locking Retractor function. head and chest injuries in certain moderate to rides in this vehicle (with infants and small
severe frontal collisions. children in an appropriate child restraint sys-
The entire seat belt assembly should be The SRS front airbags, together with sensors tem in the rear seat, and older children buck- 4
replaced if the webbing shows any obvious at the front of the vehicle and sensors led in the rear seat). Refer to “Child restraint
cuts, tears, increase in thickness in any sec- attached to the front seats, form an advanced systems” on page 4-15.
tion of the webbing from broken fibers, or airbag system.
severe fading from sunlight. All of these con-
ditions indicate a weakening of the belt, The SRS driver’s knee airbag is designed to
WARNING
 IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS
which may adversely affect seat belt perfor- supplement the primary protection of the
WEAR YOUR SEAT BELT PROPERLY
mance in an accident. driver’s seat belt system. It can reduce the
EVEN WITH AN AIRBAG.
forward movement of the driver’s lower legs
• Seat belts help keep the driver and pas-
WARNING and provide increased overall body protection sengers properly positioned. This
 Do not attempt to repair or replace any
in certain moderate to severe frontal colli- reduces the risk of injury in all collisions,
part of the seat belt assemblies. This work sions. and reduces the risk of serious injuries or
should be done by an authorized death when the airbags inflate.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Failure to have The SRS side airbags and the curtain airbags During sudden braking just before a col-
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer are also designed to supplement the seat belts. lision, an unrestrained or improperly
perform the work could reduce the effec- The SRS side airbags provide the driver and restrained driver or passengers can move
tiveness of the belts and could result in a front passenger with protection against chest forward into direct contact with, or
serious injury or death in an accident. injuries by deploying the bag on the side within close proximity to, the airbag
impacted in moderate to severe side impact when it begins to inflate.
collisions. The SRS curtain airbags provide The beginning stage of airbag inflation is
the most forceful and can cause serious
Supplemental Restraint Sys- the driver and passengers on the front seat
injuries or death if the occupant comes in
and rear outboard seat with protection against
tem (SRS) - airbag head injuries by deploying a bag on the side
contact with the airbag at this time.
• Seat belts reduce the risk of injury in
N00407701733
impacted in moderate to severe side impact rollovers, rear impact collisions, and in
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental collisions. lower-speed frontal collisions, because
Restraint System (SRS), which includes air- the airbags are not designed to inflate in
bags for the driver and passengers. those situations.


• Seat belts reduce the risk of being • Seat all infants and children in the rear  Infants and small children should never
thrown from your vehicle in a collision or seat, properly restrained in an appropri- ride unrestrained, or lean against the
rollover. ate child restraint system. instrument panel. They should never ride
 IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROP-  Airbags inflate very quickly and with held in your arms or on your lap. They
can be seriously injured or killed in an
4 ERLY SEATED.
• A driver or front passenger sitting too
great force. Do not sit on the edge of the
seat or sit with your lower legs too close to accident, especially when the airbags
close to the steering wheel or instrument the instrument panel, or lean your head or inflate. Infants and children should be
panel during airbag deployment can be chest close to the steering wheel or the properly seated in the rear seat in an
seriously injured or killed. instrument panel. appropriate child restraint system. Refer
• Airbags inflate very quickly and with  Do not put your feet or legs on or against to “Child restraint systems” on page 4-15.
great force. If the driver and front pas- the instrument panel.
senger are not properly seated and
restrained, the airbag may not provide
the proper protection and can cause seri-
ous injuries or death when it inflates.
• To reduce the risk to the driver of serious
injury or death due to a deploying
driver’s airbag, always properly wear
your seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat
as far back as possible, maintaining a
position that still allows the driver to
have good control of the steering wheel,
brake, accelerator, and other vehicle con-
trols.
• To reduce the risk to the front passenger
of serious injury or death from a deploy-
ing passenger’s airbag, make sure the
passenger always wears the seat belt
properly, remains seated upright and all
the way back in the seat, and positions
the seat as far back as possible.

WARNING WARNING How the Supplemental

 NEVER put REAR-FACING CHILD  FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT Restraint System works
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat N00407800476
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas- whenever possible. If they must be used in
senger seat. This places the infant too the front passenger seat, move the seat to The SRS includes the following components:
close to the passenger airbag. During the most rearward position and make sure
deployment of the airbag, the infant can the child stays in the child restraint sys- 4
be seriously injured or killed. tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow
Rear-facing child restraint systems or these instructions could result in serious
infant restraint systems must only be used injury or death to the child.
in the rear seat.
Airbag
1- Driver’s airbag
2- SRS warning light
3- Passenger’s airbag off indicator
4- Passenger’s front airbag
5- Front impact sensors
6- Driver’s knee airbag
7- Driver’s seat position sensor
WARNING 8- Passenger’s seat weight sensors
 Older children should be seated in the
9- Airbag control unit
rear seat with their seat belt properly
worn, and with an appropriate booster
seat (including a booster cushion) if
needed.
Refer to “Children who have outgrown
child restraint systems” on page 4-22.


the smoke as it may cause temporary irrita- short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
tion to people with respiratory problems. less.
After deployment, the airbags will quickly The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
deflate, so quickly that some people may not such data as:
even realize the airbags inflated.
4 Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver  How various systems in your vehicle were
from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, operating;
and does not prevent people from leaving the  Whether or not the driver and passenger
vehicle. safety belts were buckled/fastened;
 How far (if at all) the driver was depress-
10- Side airbag modules ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;
11- Curtain airbag modules
CAUTION and,
 Airbags inflate very quickly and with great
12- Side impact sensors  How fast the vehicle was traveling.
force. In certain situations, contact with an
inflating airbag may cause small cuts, abra-
These data can help provide a better under-
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness sions, and bruises. Refer to “Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” on page standing of the circumstances in which
of the electronic parts of the system whenever
4-23. crashes and injuries occur.
the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“START” position. These include all of the
items listed above and all related wiring. NOTE
Event Data Recording  EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only
The airbags will operate only when the igni- N00418600230 if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
tion switch is in the “ON” or “START” posi- This vehicle is equipped with an event data
are recorded by the EDR under normal driv-
tion. ing conditions and no personal data (e.g.,
recorder (EDR). name, gender, age, and crash location) are
When the impact sensors detect a front or The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in recorded. However, other parties, such as
side impact sufficient to deploy the airbag(s), certain crash or near crash-like situations, law enforcement, could combine the EDR
the appropriate airbag(s) will be deployed. such as an airbag deployment or hitting a data with the type of personally identifying
road obstacle, data that will assist in under- data routinely acquired during a crash inves-
When airbags deploy, some smoke is released standing how a vehicle’s systems performed. tigation.
accompanied by a loud noise. The smoke is The EDR is designed to record data related to
not harmful, but do not intentionally inhale vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi-


cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
WARNING WARNING
• Do not place metallic objects or luggage  If any of the following conditions occur,
law enforcement, that have the special equip-
under the front seat. you should immediately have your vehicle
ment, can read the information if they have
 If the vehicle is involved in a severe inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
access to the vehicle or the EDR. Motors dealer as soon as possible:
impact, have the SRS sensor inspected by
Driver’s seat position sensor

an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
soon as possible.
• The SRS warning does not initially come
on when the ignition switch is turned to
4
N00417900180
the “ON” or “START” position.
• The SRS warning does not go out after
The driver’s seat position sensor is attached Passenger’s seat weight sensors several seconds.
to the seat rail and provides the airbag control N00418000292
• The SRS warning comes on while you are
unit with information on the seat’s fore-aft The passenger’s seat weight sensors are driving.
position. The airbag control unit controls attached to the seat rails and provide the air-  To ensure that the passenger’s seat weight
deployment of the driver’s front airbag in bag control unit with information regarding sensors can correctly sense the weight
accordance with the information it receives the weight on the front passenger seat. The being applied to the seat, observe the fol-
from this sensor. airbag control unit controls deployment of the lowing instructions. Failure to follow these
If there is a problem involving the driver’s passenger’s front airbag in accordance with instructions can adversely affect the per-
seat position sensor, the SRS warning in the formance of the passenger’s airbag sys-
the information it receives from this sensor.
instrument panel will come on. Refer to “SRS tem.
The passenger’s front airbag will not deploy
warning light/display” on page 4-29. • Adjust the seat to the correct position,
in an impact when the weight on the seat is and sit well back against the seatback.
sensed to be less than approximately 66 Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-3.
WARNING pounds (30 kg). In this case, the passenger’s • Do not recline the seatback more than
 If the SRS warning comes on, have the airbag off indicator will come on. necessary.
vehicle inspected by an authorized Mit- Refer to “Passenger’s airbag off indicator” on • Never have more than one person (adult
subishi Motors dealer as soon as possible. page 4-28. or child) sitting on the seat.
 Please observe the following instructions If there is a problem involving the passen- • Do not place anything between the seat
to ensure that the driver’s seat position ger’s seat weight sensors, the SRS warning in and the floor console.
sensor can operate correctly. the instrument panel will come on. Refer to • Do not hang anything on the front pas-
• Adjust the seat to the correct position, “SRS warning light/display” on page 4-29. senger’s seatback.
and sit well back against the seatback. • Do not remove the head restraints.
Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-3. • When attaching a child restraint system,
• Do not recline the seatback more than secure it firmly.
necessary when driving.

WARNING WARNING
• Do not place luggage or other objects on  If any of the following conditions occur,
the seat. you should immediately have the airbag
• Do not use a seat cover or a cushion. system in your vehicle inspected by an
• Do not modify or replace the seat and authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
soon as possible:
4 seat belt.
• Do not place luggage or other objects • The passenger’s airbag off indicator
under the seat. comes on when an adult is sitting on the
• Do not place the floor mat on the seat front passenger seat.
rails. • The passenger’s airbag off indicator does
• Do not expose the sensors to liquids or not come on when the front passenger’s
vapors. The indicator normally comes on when the seat is not occupied.
• Do not subject the sensors to shock. ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position • The passenger’s airbag off indicator does
not come on when the ignition switch is
• Do not allow rear-seat occupants to push and goes out a few seconds later.
turned to the “ON” position.
the front passenger seat with their feet or In the following situations, the indicator will
force the front passenger seat upward. • The passenger’s airbag off indicator
stay on to show that the passenger’s front air-
• Do not allow rear-seat occupants to grasp comes on and goes out repeatedly.
bag is not operational.
the front passenger’s seatback or put  Do not attach any accessory to your vehi-
their arms around it. cle that makes the passenger’s airbag off
 The passenger’s seat weight sensors sense
indicator difficult or impossible to see.
• When attaching a child restraint system a weight of less than approximately 66 You must be able to see the passenger’s
in the rear seat, make sure it does not pounds (30 kg) on the front passenger airbag off indicator and verify the status
interfere with the front seat. seat. of the passenger’s airbag system.
 If the vehicle is involved in a severe  The front passenger’s seat is not occupied.
impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
When the weight applied to the front passen-
soon as possible.
ger seat is sensed to be approximately 66
pounds (30 kg) or greater, the indicator goes
Passenger’s airbag off indicator out to show that the passenger’s front airbag
N00418100251 is operational.
The passenger’s airbag off indicator is
located in the instrument panel.


belt pre-tensioner system have been acti- passenger’s airbag are designed to deploy at
SRS warning light/display vated. the same time. However, the front passen-
N00408300524
The warning light/display is used for both ger’s airbag does not deploy when the front
Warning light
SRS airbag warnings and seat belt pre-ten- passenger seat is not occupied or when the
sioner system warnings. weight sensor in the front passenger seat
senses a weight on the seat of less than
WARNING approximately 66 pounds (30 kg). 4
Warning display type 1
 There may be a system error if the warn-
ing light/display appears as indicated. In
such cases, an SRS airbag or a seat belt
pre-tensioner system may not function
properly in a collision. Have your vehicle
checked by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer:
Driver
• Even when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position, the warning light does
not come on or it remains on a few sec- Front passenger
onds later
• When warning light comes on while driv-
ing
If there is an error in the system, the warning
• When warning display appears while
light will come on and the warning display driving Driver’s knee airbag system
will appear on the information screen in the
N00404500010
multi-information display.
Under normal conditions, the warning light The driver’s knee airbag is located under the
comes on when the ignition switch is turned
Driver’s and passenger’s front steering wheel. The driver’s knee airbag is
to the “ON” position and goes off a few sec- airbag system designed to deploy at the same time as the
onds later. N00407900275 driver’s front airbag.
The warning light will also come on and The driver’s airbag is located under the pad-
remain on when the SRS airbags and the seat ded cover in the middle of the steering wheel.
The front passenger’s airbag is contained in
the instrument panel above the glove com-
partment. The driver’s airbag and the front

Deployment of front airbags

N00408000550
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when…
Head-on collision with a solid wall at speeds of Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded
approx. 15 mph (25 km/h) or higher area between the arrows


The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are
The front airbags and driver’s Collision with a utility pole, tree or other nar-
designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a
moderate to severe frontal impact. A typical knee airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY row objects
condition is shown in the illustration to the when …
left.
In certain types of front collisions, the front
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are airbags and driver’s knee airbag may not 4
designed to deploy only in certain moderate deploy, even if the deformation of the body Collision where the vehicle slides under the
to severe frontal collisions within the shaded seems to be large, because the vehicle’s body rear body of a truck
area between the arrows in the illustration to structure is designed to absorb the impact and
the right. deform in order to help protect the occupants.
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag Some typical situations where the front air-
will deploy if the impact to the vehicle’s main bags and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy
structure is above a specific threshold level. are shown in the illustrations.
The threshold level is approximately 15 mph
Oblique frontal impact
(25 km/h) for a frontal collision straight into a Because the front airbags and driver’s knee
solid flat wall that does not bend or deform. If airbag do not protect the occupant in all types
the impact to the vehicle’s main structure is of frontal collisions, be sure to always wear
below this threshold level, the front airbags your seat belts properly.
and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy. This
threshold level may also be higher if the vehi-
cle hits something that absorbs the impact,
either by bending or moving (for example,
another stationary vehicle, a pole or a guard
rail). The front airbags and driver’s
The beginning stage of airbag inflation is the knee airbag ARE NOT
most forceful, and can cause serious injuries DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when
or death if you are too close to the deploying …
airbag. Accordingly, it is important that you
always wear the available seat belt. The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are
not designed to deploy in situations where


they cannot provide protection to the occu-
The front airbags and driver’s Collision with
pants.
Some typical situations are shown in the knee airbag MAY DEPLOY when an elevated
… median/island
illustrations.
or curb
Because the front airbags and driver’s knee The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag
4 airbag do not protect the occupants in all may deploy if the underside of the vehicle
types of collisions, be sure to always wear suffers a moderate to severe impact (under- Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole
your seat belts properly. carriage impact). Some typical situations are
shown in the illustrations.
Rear end collision to your vehicle
Because the front airbags and driver’s knee
airbag may deploy in certain types of unex-
pected impacts, as shown in the illustrations, Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits
and these unexpected impacts can move you the ground
out of position, it is important to always wear
Side collision to your vehicle your seat belts properly. When worn properly,
seat belts can help maintain your distance
from the airbags and driver’s knee airbag
when they begin to inflate. The beginning
stage of airbag inflation is the most forceful
and can cause serious injury or death if you
are close to the deploying airbag.
Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof


 Do not attach anything to the steering  Do not attach additional keys or accesso-  Do not place objects, such as packages or
wheel’s padded cover, such as trim mate- ries (hard, pointed or heavy objects) to the pets, between the airbags and the driver
rial, badges, etc. These could strike and ignition key. Such objects could prevent or the front passenger. Such objects can
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates. the driver’s knee airbag from inflating adversely affect airbag performance, or
normally or could be propelled to cause cause serious injury or death when the
 Do not set anything on, or attach anything
to, the instrument panel above the glove serious injury if the airbag inflates. airbag deploys. 4
compartment. Such items could strike and  Do not attach accessories to the lower por-  Immediately after airbag inflation, some
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates. tion of the driver’s side instrument panel. parts of the airbag system will be hot. Do
Such objects could prevent the driver’s not touch them. You could be burned.
knee airbag from inflating normally or  The airbag system is designed to work
could be propelled to cause serious injury only once. After the airbags deploy, they
if the airbag inflates. will not work again. They must promptly
be replaced and the entire airbag system
must be inspected by an authorized Mit-
WARNING
 Do not attach accessories to, or put them
in front of, the windshield. They could
restrict the airbag inflation, or strike and WARNING
injure an occupant, when the airbag  Do not attempt to remove, install, disas-
inflates. semble or repair the SRS airbags.


A label is attached to the seatbacks in vehi-
Side airbag system cles with side airbags.
N00408100359
The side airbags (A) are contained in the

driver and front passenger seatbacks.
The side airbag is designed to inflate only on
4 the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even
with no passenger in the front seat.

RECARO seat
WARNING
 The side airbag and curtain airbag can
cause serious injury or death to anyone
too close to the airbag when it deploys. To
RECARO seat reduce the risk of injury from a deploying
side airbag and curtain airbags, all occu-
pants must be properly restrained and
Curtain airbag system seated well back, upright, and in the mid-
dle of the seat. Do not lean against the
N00419201243
door.
The curtain airbags are contained in the front
and rear pillars and roof side rail. The curtain
airbag is designed to inflate only on the side
of the vehicle that is impacted, even with no
passenger in the front seat.

WARNING WARNING
 In order to reduce the risk of injury from  Front-facing child restraint systems
a deploying side airbag, do not allow any should also be used ONLY in the rear seat.
rear seat passengers to hold onto the back If a front-facing child restraint system
of either front seat. Special care should be must be used in the front passenger seat,
taken with children. move the seat as far back as possible, and
 Do not place any objects near or around make sure that the child stays in the child 4
the front of either front seatback. Such restraint system, properly restrained and
objects can interfere with proper side air- away from the door.
bag deployment and cause injury during  Do not allow a child to lean against or sit
deployment of the side airbag. close to the passenger door, even if the
 Do not place stickers, labels or additional child is seated in a child restraint system.
trim on the back of either front seat. They WARNING The child’s head should also not lean
can interfere with proper side airbag  Do not put a hanger or any heavy or against or be close to the section of the
deployment. pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur- seatback where the side airbag and cur-
 Do not install seat covers or re-cover seats tain airbag was activated, any such item tain airbag are located. It is dangerous if
that have side airbags. Covers can inter- could be propelled away with great force the side airbag and curtain airbag
fere with proper side airbag deployment and could prevent the curtain airbag from deploys. Failure to follow all of these
and adversely affect side airbag perfor- inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly instructions could lead to serious injury or
mance. on the coat hook (without using a hanger). death to the child.
 Do not attach a microphone (A) or any Make sure there are no heavy or sharp  Work done on or in the vicinity of the side
other object around the part where the objects in the pockets of clothes that you airbag and curtain airbag system compo-
curtain airbag (B) deploys, such as on the hang on the coat hook. nents should be done only by an autho-
windshield, side door glass or front and  Never install a rear-facing child restraint rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Improper
rear pillars and roof side rail. When the system in the front passenger seat. Rear- work methods can cause accidental side
curtain airbag inflates, the microphone or facing child restraint systems MUST airbag and curtain airbag deployment, or
other object may be hurled with great ONLY be used in the rear seat. render a side airbag and curtain airbag
force or the curtain airbag may not inflate inoperable. Either of these situations can
correctly, resulting in death or serious result in serious injury or death.
injury.


your safety and the safety of all occupants, be
Deployment of side airbag and sure to always wear your seat belts properly. Side impact in an area away from the passen-
curtain airbag ger compartment
N00408200510
The side airbag and curtain airbag
The side airbag and curtain airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY when …
4 ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY
In certain types of side collisions, the side air-
when … bag and curtain airbag may not deploy, even Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle colli-
A side airbag and curtain airbag are designed if the deformation of the body seems to be sion with the side of vehicle
to deploy when the vehicle suffers a moderate large, because the vehicle’s body structure is
to severe side impact to the middle of the pas- designed to absorb the impact and to deform
senger compartment. in order to help protect the occupants. Some
The typical situation is shown in the illustra- typical situations where the side airbag and
tion. curtain airbag may not deploy are shown in
the illustrations. Collision with a utility pole, tree or other nar-
row object
Moderate to severe impact to the middle of Because the side airbags and curtain airbags
the vehicle body’s side structure do not protect the occupant in all types of side
collisions, be sure to always wear your seat
belts properly.
The seat belts in your vehicle are your pri-

mary means of protection in an accident. The
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) side
airbags and curtain airbags are designed to
provide additional protection. Therefore, for

Oblique side impact SRS servicing

Head-on collision
N00408500672
WARNING
 Any maintenance performed on or near
the components of the SRS should be per-
formed only by an authorized Mitsubishi
4
Rear end collision Motors dealer. Do not permit anyone else
to do any service, inspection, maintenance
Vehicle rolls onto or repair on any SRS components or wir-
its side or roof ing. Similarly, no part of the SRS should
ever be handled, removed or disposed by
anyone except an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
Improper work methods on the SRS com-
ponents or wiring could result in an acci-
dental airbag deployment or could make
The side airbag and curtain airbag the SRS inoperable. Either of these situa-
ARE NOT DESIGNED TO tions could result in serious injury or
death.
DEPLOY when …
 Do not modify your steering wheel or any
other SRS component or related vehicle
The side airbag and curtain airbag are not part. For example, replacement of the
designed to deploy in situations where they steering wheel, or modifications to the
cannot provide protection to the occupants. front bumper or body structure can
Typical situations where the side airbags and adversely affect SRS performance and
curtain airbags cannot provide protection are may lead to injury.
shown in the illustrations below.  If your vehicle has received any damage,
you should have the SRS inspected by an
Because the side airbags and curtain airbags authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to
do not protect the occupants in all types of make sure it is in proper working order.
collisions, be sure to always wear your seat
belts properly.


[For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico]
WARNING NOTE To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
 Do not modify your front seats, center pil- • Steering wheel
Caribbean, Inc.
lar or center console. Such modifications • Instrument panel
can adversely affect SRS performance and call 1-787-251-8715 or write to:
may lead to injury. [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.] Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Caribbean,
Also, if you discover any tear or open To contact Mitsubishi Motors North Inc.
4 seam in the seat fabric near the side air- America, Inc. Customer Service Department
bag, have the seat inspected by an autho- call 1-888-648-7820 or write to: P.O. Box 192216
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Mitsubishi Motors North America, SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216
 If you find a crack in or damage to the Inc.
front pillar, rear pillar, or roof side rail Customer Relations Department [For vehicles sold in Guam]
where the curtain airbag is located, have To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc.
P. O. Box 6400
the SRS inspected by an authorized Mit-
Cypress, CA 90630-0064 call (671) 649-3673 or write to:
Triple J Enterprises, Inc.
[For vehicles sold in Canada] P.O. Box 6066
To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of TAMUNING
NOTE
Canada, Inc. GUAM 96931
 When you transfer ownership of the vehicle
to another person, we urge you to alert the call 1-888-576-4878 or write to:
new owner that it is equipped with the SRS Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, [For vehicles sold in Saipan]
and refer that owner to the applicable sec- Inc. To contact Triple J Motors
tions in this owner’s manual. Customer Relations Department call (670) 234-7133 or write to:
 If you decide to junk or scrap your vehicle, P.O. Box 41009 Triple J Motors
we urge you to first take it to an authorized 4141 Dixie Road P.O. Box 500487
Mitsubishi Motors dealer so that the SRS can Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9 SAIPAN, MP96950-0487
be made safe for disposal.
 If any of the following parts needs to be
modified for use by a handicapped person,
the advanced airbag system will be greatly
affected. Please consult an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer for assistance.
• Driver’s seat
• Front passenger seat
• Front seat belt


[For vehicles sold in American
Samoa]
To contact Pacific Marketing Inc.
call 684 (699) 9140 or write to:
Pacific Marketing, Inc.
P.O. Box 698
PAGO PAGO, 4
AMERICAN SAMOA AS, 96799
Warning labels *- Located in the passenger’s side as well.

N00408600338
Occupant restraint warning labels for the SRS

are located in the vehicle as shown in the
illustration.

Features and controls
Break-in recommendations...............................................................5-3 ACD (Active center differential system) (if so equipped) .............5-83
Keys ..................................................................................................5-3 Limited-slip differential (if so equipped) .......................................5-85
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system).........................5-4 Service brake ..................................................................................5-85 5
Keyless entry system (if so equipped) ..............................................5-7 Hill start assist (for vehicles equipped with Twin Clutch SST) .....5-86
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so Brake assist system.........................................................................5-87
equipped).....................................................................................5-11 Anti-lock braking system ...............................................................5-88
Door locks.......................................................................................5-36 Power steering system ....................................................................5-90
Power door locks ............................................................................5-38 Active stability control (ASC)........................................................5-91
“Child safety locks” for rear door...................................................5-39 Cruise control .................................................................................5-94
Rear hatch .......................................................................................5-40 Tire pressure monitoring system ..................................................5-100
Inside rear hatch release..................................................................5-41 Rear-view camera (if so equipped)...............................................5-104
Theft-alarm system .........................................................................5-41 Instrument cluster .........................................................................5-106
Power windows...............................................................................5-44 Multi-information display ............................................................5-108
Sunroof (if so equipped) .................................................................5-46 Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list
Parking brake ..................................................................................5-49 ..................................................................................................5-129
Steering wheel tilt lock lever ..........................................................5-50 Indicators ......................................................................................5-141
Inside day/night rearview mirror ....................................................5-50 Warning lights...............................................................................5-142
Outside rearview mirrors ................................................................5-52 Information screen display ...........................................................5-143
Ignition switch ................................................................................5-53 Combination headlights and dimmer switch ................................5-145
Steering wheel lock.........................................................................5-55 Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped)...................................5-150
Starting and stopping the engine ....................................................5-55 Turn signal lever ...........................................................................5-150
Turbocharger operation (if so equipped) ........................................5-59 Hazard warning flasher switch .....................................................5-151
Manual transaxle (if so equipped) ..................................................5-59 Front fog light switch (if so equipped) .........................................5-151
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)..........5-61 Wiper and washer switch .............................................................5-152
Twin Clutch SST (Sportronic Shift Transmission) (if so equipped) Electric rear window defogger switch..........................................5-157
.....................................................................................................5-70 Horn switch ..................................................................................5-157
All-wheel drive system (if so equipped).........................................5-82 Link System (if so equipped) .......................................................5-158
Cautions on handling of all-wheel drive vehicles ..........................5-82 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped).....................................5-158
Features and controls
USB input terminal (if so equipped) ............................................ 5-180

Sun visors ..................................................................................... 5-182
5 12 V power outlet......................................................................... 5-183
Interior lights ................................................................................ 5-184
Storage spaces .............................................................................. 5-187
Cup holder .................................................................................... 5-189
Bottle holder................................................................................. 5-190
Rear shelf panel............................................................................ 5-190
Dual height adjustable cargo floor board (if so equipped)........... 5-191
Assist grip..................................................................................... 5-192
Coat hook ..................................................................................... 5-192
Break-in recommendations
Keep one F.A.S.T.-key and one emergency
Break-in recommendations Keys key in a safe place together as a set of spare
N00508700314 N00508800591
keys.
Advanced automobile manufacturing tech-
niques permit you to operate your new vehi- Type 1
cle without requiring a long break-in period
of low-speed driving. Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks.
However, you can add to the future perfor-
mance and economy of your vehicle by
Keep one in a safe place as a spare key. 5
observing the following precautions during
the first 300 miles (500 km).
Drive your vehicle at moderate speeds during
the break-in period.
 Avoid revving the engine. For vehicles

equipped with turbocharger, do not 1- Free-hand Advanced Security Trans-
exceed 5,000 rpm for the first 600 miles mitter (F.A.S.T.-key)
(1,000 km). (with electronic immobilizer and key-
 Avoid rough driving such as fast starts, less entry system function)
sudden acceleration, prolonged high- 2- Emergency key
speed driving and sudden braking. These 1- Key for the electronic immobilizer and 3- Key number plate
would have a detrimental effect on the keyless entry system
engine and also cause increased fuel and 2- Key number plate
oil consumption, which could result in
NOTE
 The key is a precision electronic device with
malfunction of the engine components. Be
a built-in signal transmitter. Please observe
particularly careful to avoid full accelera- Type 2 the following in order to prevent damage.
tion while in low gear.
• Do not leave where it may be exposed to
 Do not overload the vehicle. Observe the Two Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit- heat caused by direct sunlight, such as on
seating capacity (See “Cargo load precau- ter (F.A.S.T.-key) and two emergency keys top of the dashboard.
tions” on page 6-10). are provided. • Do not take the remote control transmitter
 Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing. apart.
Features and controls 5-3

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)

[Except for vehicles equipped with the Free-
NOTE NOTE hand Advanced Security Transmitter
• Do not excessively bend the key or subject  No keys other than those registered in
(F.A.S.T.-key)]
it to strong impacts. advance can be used to start the engine.
The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
• Keep the remote control transmitter dry. Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft
starting system)” on page 5-4. nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
• Keep away from magnetic objects such as
Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
key rings.
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Electronic bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is
• Keep away from devices that produce mag-
attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
5 netism, such as audio systems, computers immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)” on
page 5-28. achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
and televisions.
• Keep away from devices that emit strong  When the theft-alarm is in the system opera- a key “registered” to the immobilizer system.
electromagnetic waves, such as cellular tional status, the alarm operates if a door or All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
phones, wireless devices and high fre- rear hatch is opened after using the key, the cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s
quency equipment (including medical door lock knob or the power door lock to electronics.
devices.) unlock the vehicle.
• Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners.  The system does not enter the preparation
status if the keyless entry system or the NOTE
• Do not leave the key where it may be
F.A.S.T.-key was not used to lock the vehi-  Do not attach additional keys or accessories
exposed to high temperature or high humid-
cle. to the ignition key. Such objects could pre-
ity.
vent the driver’s knee airbag from inflating
 If you lose your key, to prevent the theft of
normally. Refer to “Deployment of front air-
the vehicle immediately contact an autho- Electronic immobilizer bags” on page 4-30.
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
If you notify an authorized Mitsubishi (Anti-theft starting system)  In the following cases, the vehicle may not
be able to recognize the registered ID code
Motors dealer of the key number, they can N00509101817
from the key. This means the engine will not
make a new key. The key number is stamped [For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand start even when the key is turned to the
on the key number plate. Keep the key num-
Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.- “START” position.
ber plate in a safe place separate from the
key)] • When the key contacts a key ring or other
key itself.
For information on operations for vehicles metallic or magnetic object (Type A)
equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu- • When the key grip contacts metal of
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to another key (Type B)
“Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter • When the key contacts or is close to other
(F.A.S.T.-key): Electronic immobilizer (Anti- immobilizer keys (including keys of other
theft starting system)” on page 5-28. vehicles) (Type C)
5-4 Features and controls


To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the
NOTE NOTE vehicle keys must be changed.
 In cases like the above, move the offending  The key may not operate properly when it is
Take your vehicle and all remaining keys to
object(s) away from the key and turn the key near an object or facility that emits strong
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to
back to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. electromagnetic waves.
Then try to start the engine again. If the have your ID code changed.
 Electronic immobilizer is not compatible
engine does not start, contact an authorized with commercially available remote starting
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. systems. Use of commercially available Additional keys
A
remote starting systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security pro-
5
tection. To add a key, you need to register the ID code
 A system failure is suspected when the igni- to the vehicle.
tion switch is turned to the “START” posi- Registering the ID code can be done by your
tion, and the engine does not start. In such a authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it
case, contact an authorized Mitsubishi can be done by yourself (except for vehicles
Motors dealer. sold in Canada).
For you to register the ID code yourself, fol-
B
low the “Customer key programming” proce-
WARNING dure below.
 Do not make any alterations or additions If you choose to have your authorized Mit-
to the immobilizer system. Alterations or subishi Motors dealer register the ID code,
additions could cause failure of the immo- take your vehicle and all remaining keys to
bilizer.
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Replacement keys NOTE

C  You are provided with two keys, but you
may register up to eight keys.
Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle’s electronics can be used to start the
vehicle.
If you lose the key, contact your authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer by referring to the
key number.


4. When the immobilizer display starts
Customer key programming blinking, turn the second valid key to the
NOTE
(Except for vehicles sold in “LOCK” position and remove it. Within  The procedure will be terminated automati-
cally if:
Canada) 30 seconds after doing so, insert a blank
• a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
N00562200067 immobilizer key into the ignition switch
from the moment when the first key is
You can program new keys to the system if and turn it to the “ON” position. Perform turned to the “LOCK” position to the
you have two valid (already registered) keys this operation no more than 30 seconds moment when the second key is turned to
after the immobilizer display starts blink-
5 and blank (not registered) immobilizer key
ing. When registration of the ID code is
the “ON” position
(specially cut for your vehicle at your Mit-
subishi Motors dealer) by doing the follow- complete, the immobilizer display will from the moment when the second key is
ing: come on for 3 seconds then go off. If an turned to the “LOCK” position to the
error occurs, the immobilizer display will moment when the blank immobilizer key is
1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition go off during the procedure. turned to the “ON” position
switch and turn the key to the “ON” posi-  To use the new remote control transmitters, it
is necessary to register the key with both the
tion for 5 seconds.
electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys-
2. Turn the key to the “LOCK” position and tem.
remove the first key. Also refer to “Keyless entry system: Cus-
3. Within 30 seconds of turning the first key tomer remote control transmitter program-
to the “LOCK” position, insert the second 5. If you wish to register another key, per-
ming” on page 5-9.
valid key into the ignition and turn it to form the process again from step 1.
the “ON” position. About 10 seconds
General information
later, the immobilizer display will start to NOTE N00562301108
blink.  Perform the operation when the interrupt dis-
play screen is not showing. The interrupt dis- Your electronic immobilizer operates on a
play screen may prevent you from seeing the radio frequency subject to Federal Communi-
immobilizer display. cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi-
 It is not possible to register a key if: cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada
• the immobilizer display goes off during the Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This
procedure device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules
• the immobilizer display does not come on and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS
within 30 seconds after turning the ignition standard(s).
switch to the “ON” position with a blank
immobilizer key

Keyless entry system (if so equipped)

Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions.
To unlock
N00543301112
 This device may not cause harmful inter- Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the
ference. driver’s door only.
 This device must accept any interference Within about 2 seconds, press the UNLOCK
received, including interference that may button one more time to unlock all the doors
cause undesired operation. and the rear hatch.
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds. 5
The turn signal lights will also blink twice.
CAUTION
The front side-marker and parking lights will
 Changes or modifications not expressly 1- LOCK ( ) button
approved by the manufacturer for compli-
also turn on for about 30 seconds. Refer to
ance could void the user’s authority to oper- 2- UNLOCK ( ) button “Welcome light” on page 5-149.
ate the equipment. 3- PANIC button
4- Indicator light NOTE
 The door and rear hatch unlock function can
Keyless entry system (if so be set so that all doors and the rear hatch
equipped) To lock unlock when the UNLOCK button (2) is

pressed once.
N00542700037
N00509000819 Refer to “Setting of door and rear hatch
Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the unlock function” on page 5-8.
Press the remote control transmitter buttons doors and the rear hatch.
to lock or unlock the doors and the rear hatch. The turn signal lights will also blink once.
It can also help you signal for attention by
setting off the panic alarm.
Answerback function
NOTE N00543501101
 If you press the LOCK button (1) twice Setting of the horn and turn signal lights of
quickly, the horn will sound once. the keyless entry system answerback function
can be changed as required. This is done with
the key removed from the ignition switch.


4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and 3. Press the UNLOCK button (2) for 4 to 10
NOTE LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of seconds and press the LOCK button (1)
 The answerback function does not operate
pressing the UNLOCK button in step 3. during this time.
when the key is in the ignition switch or any
4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and
doors or rear hatch is opened.
Changing the setting of the turn LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
pressing the LOCK button in step 3.
signal lights answerback function
Horn deactivation/reactivation
5 The turn signal lights answerback function Setting of door and rear hatch
The horn answerback function can be set to can be set to the following seven conditions. unlock function
the following three conditions. Each time the turn signal lights answerback N00543601144
Each time the horn answerback function is function is set, a chime will sound to tell you The door and rear hatch unlock function can
set, a chime will sound to tell you the condi- the condition of the answerback function. be set to the following two conditions.
tion of the answerback function. Each time the door and rear hatch unlock
Number of Condition function is set, a chime will sound to tell you
Number of chimes To lock To unlock the condition of the door and rear hatch
Condition
chimes unlock function.
One chime One flash Two flashes
One chime The horn will not sound.
Two chimes One flash No flash Number of
Two chimes The horn will sound. Condition
Three chimes No flash Two flashes chimes
The horn will sound if the
Four chimes LOCK button (1) is pressed Four chimes Two flashes One flash All doors and rear hatch
One chime
twice quickly. unlock
Five chimes No flash One flash
Two chimes Driver’s door unlock only
Six chimes Two flashes No flash
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
Seven chimes No flash No flash
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
bination headlights and dimmer switch to 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
the “OFF” position. 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. bination headlights and dimmer switch to
3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec- 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- the “OFF” position.
onds and press the UNLOCK button (2) bination headlights and dimmer switch to 3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec-
during this time. the “OFF” position. onds and press the UNLOCK button (2)
during this time.


4. Release in sequence the LOCK and To prevent vehicle theft, the ID codes for all
UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of the remote control transmitters except the one
Customer remote control trans-
pressing the LOCK button in step 3. for the lost key must be programmed again. mitter programming
Take your vehicle and all the remaining N00544001145
remote control transmitters to your authorized You can program new remote control trans-
Using the panic alarm Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have your ID
N00543700021
mitters to the system if you have one valid
codes programmed again. (already registered) remote control transmit-
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat- ter by doing the following:
ened, you may activate the alarm to call atten- 5
tion as follows: Additional remote control 1. Have available all (current and new)
transmitters remote control transmitters you wish to
1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than N00543900036 register.
1 second. 2. With a valid (already registered) remote
To add a remote control transmitter, you must
2. The headlights will blink on and off and control transmitter, press the UNLOCK
already have one registered remote control
the horn will sound intermittently for button (2) for 4 to 10 seconds. Then press
transmitter.
about 3 minutes. and hold the LOCK button (1).
Registering the ID code can be done by your-
3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on 3. Within 10 seconds of pressing the LOCK
self or by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
the remote control transmitter. button, release the LOCK and UNLOCK
dealer. For you to register the ID code your-
self, follow the “Customer remote control buttons in sequence.
Replacement remote control transmitter programming” procedure below. At this time, ID codes for all remote con-
transmitters If you choose to have your authorized Mit- trol transmitters except for the transmitter
N00543800035
subishi Motors dealer register the ID code, used in steps 2 and 3 are erased and the
take your vehicle and all remaining keys to answerback function (door or rear hatch is
Only remote control transmitters pro- locked and unlocked) informs you that the
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
grammed with the vehicle’s electronics can registration mode has been activated.
lock or unlock all doors and the rear hatch. 4. Within 60 seconds after step 3, complete
NOTE the following ID code registration opera-
If you lose the remote control transmitter, you  You are provided with two remote control
tion using the next remote control trans-
can order a remote control transmitter from transmitters, but you may register up to eight
mitter you wish to register within 4
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by remote control transmitters.
seconds.
referring to the key number.
i. Press both the LOCK and UNLOCK
buttons for 2 seconds.


ii. Release both the LOCK and UNLOCK complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and
buttons for 1 second.
NOTE Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS stan-
 If the following conditions are observed after
iii. Press the UNLOCK button. dard(s).
pressing the buttons on the remote control
The answerback function informs you Operation is subject to the following two con-
transmitter, the battery in the remote control
that the ID code registration of the transmitter may need to be replaced. ditions.
transmitter is completed. • The doors and the rear hatch cannot be
5. To register the ID codes of additional  This device may not cause harmful inter-
locked or unlocked.
remote control transmitters, repeat step 4 ference.
5 within 60 seconds after step 4.
• The panic alarm cannot be operated.
 This device must accept any interference
• The indicator light (4) is dim or does not
6. If no ID code of a remote control trans- come on.
received, including interference that may
mitter is registered within 60 seconds  If you lose your remote control transmitter,
cause undesired operation.
after step 4, the registration mode is can- please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
celed and the normal mode returns. Motors dealer for a replacement. CAUTION
 If you wish to obtain an additional remote  Changes or modifications not expressly
control transmitter, please contact an autho-
NOTE rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. A maximum
approved by the manufacturer for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
 For verification purposes, try to lock and of eight remote control transmitters can be ate the equipment.
unlock the doors and the rear hatch after the programmed for your vehicle.
registration is completed.  To use the new remote control transmitters, it
 The indicator light (4) comes on each time a is necessary to register the key with both the
button is pressed. electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys- Procedure for replacing the
 The keyless entry system does not work if tem. remote control transmitter bat-
the key is in the ignition switch. Also refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
 The remote control transmitter can be used theft starting system): Customer key pro-
tery
N00544100077
from about 40 feet (12 m) away. However, gramming” on page 5-6.
this distance may change if your vehicle is 1. Before replacing the battery, remove static
near a TV transmitting tower, a power sta- electricity from your body by touching a
tion, or a radio station. General information metal grounded object.
N00546101111
 If the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed when
all doors and the rear hatch are locked and no Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
doors or the rear hatch are opened within frequency subject to Federal Communica-
about 30 seconds, the doors and the rear tions Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles
hatch will automatically re-lock. sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules
(For vehicles sold in Canada). This device
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

2. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you, 3. Remove the remote control transmitter 7. Place the remote control transmitter in the
insert the cloth-covered tip of a flat blade from the remote control transmitter case. remote control transmitter case, then
screwdriver into the notch in the remote Then, open the remote control transmitter securely close the remote control trans-
control transmitter case and use it to open using the method described in step 2. mitter case.
the case. 8. Check the keyless entry system to see that
it works.
NOTE
 You may purchase a replacement battery at
5
an electric appliance store.
 Your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
can replace the battery for you if you prefer.
CAUTION
 When the remote control transmitter case is
4. Remove the old battery.
opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc.
5. Install a new battery with the +side (A)
NOTE down.
out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-
 Be sure to perform the procedure with the nents.
Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the Mitsubi-
shi mark is not facing you when you open the + side
remote control transmitter case, the buttons Free-hand Advanced Secu-
may come out.
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
- side key) (if so equipped)
N00503100081
Coin type battery The Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-

CR1620 ter (F.A.S.T.-key) enables the doors and the
rear hatch to be locked and unlocked and the
6. Close the remote control transmitter engine to be started simply by carrying it.
firmly.


The F.A.S.T.-key can also be used as the The operations possible with the F.A.S.T.-
remote control transmitter of the keyless key can be modified as stated below.
entry system. (Keyless entry operations are possible.)
Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security For details, contact an authorized Mitsubi-
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Keyless entry shi Motors dealer.
system” on page 5-30. • Enabling only the locking and unlocking
of the doors and the rear hatch
The F.A.S.T.-key must be carried by the • Enabling only the starting of the engine
5 driver. The F.A.S.T.-key is required for • Deactivating the F.A.S.T.-key
vehicle operations such as locking and
unlocking the doors and the rear hatch,
NOTE
and starting the engine. When leaving the
 The F.A.S.T.-key uses weak electromagnetic
vehicle, make sure you are carrying the
waves.
F.A.S.T.-key and then lock the vehicle. In cases such as the following, operation
A- External transmitter may be improper or unstable.
B- Internal transmitter • The vehicle is near a facility that emits
WARNING strong electromagnetic waves, such as a TV
 Individuals who use implantable pace- transmitting tower, a power station, a radio
makers or implantable cardioverter-defi- WARNING station or an airport
brillators should keep away from the • The key is carried together with other com-
 Individuals using other electrical medical
external and internal transmitters. The munication devices such as cellular phones
apparatuses besides implantable pace-
electromagnetic waves used in the or radios, or electrical appliances such as
makers and implantable cardioverter-
F.A.S.T.-key may affect the operation of computers
defibrillators should check with the manu-
implantable pacemakers and implantable • The F.A.S.T.-key touches or is covered by a
facturer of the apparatus to confirm the
cardioverter-defibrillators. metal object
effect of the electromagnetic waves used
by the F.A.S.T.-key. The electromagnetic • A keyless entry system is being used
waves may affect the operations of the nearby
electro-medical apparatus. • The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key is run down
• The vehicle is in a location with strong
electromagnetic waves or noise

NOTE
Use the emergency key in such circum-
stances.
Refer to “To operate using the emergency
key” on page 5-22.
 The F.A.S.T.-key is constantly performing
reception operations in its communication
with the vehicle. This means that the battery
is always running down, regardless of how
5
often the F.A.S.T.-key is used. The battery
life is about 1 to 3 years, depending on the
usage conditions. *: Front of the vehicle
 Since the F.A.S.T.-key is constantly perform- NOTE : Operating range
ing reception operations, the reception of  When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key has run
strong electromagnetic waves can accelerate down or there are strong electromagnetic
the running down of the battery. Do not place waves or noise in the area, the operating NOTE
near electrical appliances such as televisions range could decrease or operations could  Only the doors and the rear hatch that derect
or computers. become unstable. the F.A.S.T.-key can be locked and unlocked.
 The system may not operate if the F.A.S.T.-
Operating range of the key is too close to the windshield, door win-
Operating range for locking and dows or rear hatch.
F.A.S.T.-key
N00503200154
unlocking the doors and the rear  Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within about 2.3
feet (70 cm) of the handles of the driver’s
When a person enters the operating range of
hatch and front passenger doors and center of the
the F.A.S.T.-key while carrying the F.A.S.T.- rear hatch, the system may not operate if the
key and press the driver’s or front passenger’s The operating range is within about 2.3 feet key is close to the ground or in a high posi-
door lock/unlock switch, the rear hatch (70 cm) of the handles of the driver’s and tion.
LOCK switch or the rear hatch OPEN switch, front passenger doors and the center of the  If the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operating
rear hatch. range, even a person not carrying the
verification of the ID code is performed.
F.A.S.T.-key can lock and unlock the doors
The F.A.S.T.-key enables the doors and the
or the rear hatch by pressing the driver’s or
rear hatch to be locked and unlocked and the front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch,
engine to be started only when the ID codes the rear hatch LOCK switch or the rear hatch
of the vehicle and F.A.S.T.-key match. OPEN switch.

Operating range for starting the To operate using the F.A.S.T.- Rear hatch switches
engine key
N00503300041
N00503401267
The operating range is the interior of the

vehicle. To lock
5 While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, press the

driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock
switch (A), or the rear hatch LOCK switch
(B) within the operating range to lock all the
doors and rear hatch.
The turn signal lights will blink once and the
NOTE
 In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.-
buzzer will sound once.
key does not operate.
Also refer to “Door locks”, “Power door • A door or the rear hatch is open or ajar
locks” and “Rear hatch” on pages 5-36, 5-38 • The ignition switch is in a position other
and 5-40 respectively. than “LOCK”
*: Front of the vehicle
• The emergency key is inserted into the igni-
: Operating range tion switch
Driver’s and front passenger’s door
 The rear hatch OPEN switch (C) can be used
lock/unlock switches
to confirm that the vehicle is locked prop-
NOTE erly.
 Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operat- Press the rear hatch OPEN switch within
ing range, it may not be possible to start the about 3 seconds of locking.
engine if the key is in a storage space such as  If the rear hatch OPEN switch is pressed 3
the glove compartment, on top of the instru- seconds or more after the vehicle is locked,
ment panel, or in the door pocket or luggage the doors and the rear hatch are unlocked.
compartment.  The time within which locking confirmation
 Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is outside the vehi- is possible can be adjusted. See an autho-
cle, it may be possible to start the engine if rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.
the key is too close to a door or door win-
dow.

To unlock NOTE NOTE

 Settings can be changed so that all doors and  The amount of time after unlocking until the
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key within the rear hatch are unlocked automatically by vehicle re-locks automatically can be
operating range, you can unlock the doors pressing the driver’s door lock/unlock switch adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi
and the rear hatch by F.A.S.T.-key operation. (A) once. Motors dealer for details.
Refer to “Setting of door and rear hatch  In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.-
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.
unlock function” on page 5-32. key does not operate.
The turn signal lights will blink twice and the
buzzer will sound twice.
• A door or the rear hatch is open or ajar 5
Press the front passenger’s door lock/unlock • The ignition switch is in a position other
Also refer to “Door locks”, “Power door switch (B), or the rear hatch OPEN switch than “LOCK”
locks” and “Rear hatch” on pages 5-36, 5-38 (C) to unlock all the doors and the rear hatch. • The emergency key is inserted into the igni-
tion switch
and 5-40 respectively.
 The doors and the rear hatch cannot be
Front passenger’s door Rear hatch OPEN
Press the driver’s door lock/unlock switch unlocked by using the rear hatch OPEN
lock/unlock switch switch
(A) to unlock only the driver’s door. switch for about 3 seconds after locking.
Within about 2 seconds, press the driver’s  The time within which locking confirmation
is possible can be adjusted. See an autho-
door lock/unlock switch (A) one more time to
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.
unlock all the doors and rear hatch.
 Function settings can be modified as stated
below.
Driver’s door lock/unlock switch See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
for details.
• Activating the operation confirmation func-
tion (flashing of the hazard warning lights)
only during locking, or only during unlock-
NOTE ing.
 If the doors and the rear hatch are unlocked • Deactivating the operation confirmation
when all doors and the rear hatch are locked function (flashing of the hazard warning
and no doors or the rear hatch are opened lights) and buzzer.
within about 30 seconds, the doors and the • Modifying the number of flashes in the
rear hatch will automatically re-lock. operation confirmation function (flashing
of the hazard warning lights).

NOTE LOCK (PUSH ON) NOTE

• Making the buzzer sound when the  If the ignition switch is not turned to the
F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger When the ID code verification inside the “LOCK (PUSH OFF)” position when the
compartment when all the doors and the vehicle produces a match, the ignition switch engine is not running, the ID code cannot be
rear hatch are closed. can be turned. verified and the engine will not start even if
the ignition switch is turned to the “START”
position. If this happens, fully return the
Ignition switch ACC
5 N00513500059
ignition switch to the “LOCK (PUSH OFF)”
position, and start the engine again.
To prevent vehicle theft, no F.A.S.T.-keys Allows operation of electrical accessories
other than those registered in advance can be with the engine off. To turn from “LOCK (PUSH
used to start the engine. (Electronic immobi-
OFF)” to “ACC”
lizer function)
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, the ignition
ON N00513600021
switch can be turned to start the engine. Turn slowly after pressing the ignition switch.
The engine runs and all electrical accessories
can be used.
START
Engages the starter. Release the ignition

switch when the engine starts. The ignition
switch returns automatically to the “ON”
position.
NOTE A- Steering wheel locked

 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic B- Steering wheel lock released
immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code
LOCK (PUSH OFF) which the F.A.S.T.-key sends must match the
one registered to the immobilizer computer.
The position where the steering wheel is (Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft
locked. starting system)” on page 5-28.)

NOTE CAUTION
 To turn the ignition switch from the “LOCK  Do not turn the ignition switch to the
(PUSH OFF)” position to the “ACC” posi- “START” position when the engine is run-
tion, push the ignition switch again, turn the ning. It will damage the starter motor.
steering wheel in both directions and then
turn the ignition switch.
 The ignition switch cannot be turned unless
Warning activation
5
N00503500203
the F.A.S.T.-key is inside the vehicle.
Refer to “Operating range for starting the With the F.A.S.T.-key, warnings are given
engine” on page 5-14. through buzzers and displays on the informa-
tion screen in the multi-information display
in order to prevent mistaken operations or
To turn from “ACC” to “LOCK” NOTE vehicle theft.
N00513701090  For vehicles equipped with CVT or Twin When a warning operates, be sure to check
Clutch SST, the ignition switch cannot be
the vehicle and the F.A.S.T.-key. A warning is
For vehicles equipped with manual turned to the “LOCK” position unless the
also displayed if there is a problem in the
transaxle selector lever (CVT) or the gearshift lever
(Twin Clutch SST) is in the “P” (PARK) F.A.S.T.-key.
Slowly turn the ignition switch to the position. If the following warning displays, contact an
“LOCK” position while pressing it. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
For vehicles equipped with continuously CAUTION Type 1

variable transmission (CVT) or Twin  If the engine is stopped while driving, the
Clutch SST power brake booster will stop functioning There is a problem in the
and greater effort for braking will be Type 2 F.A.S.T.-key
First, set the selector lever (CVT) or the gear- required. Also, the power steering system
shift lever (Twin Clutch SST) to the “P” will not function and it will require greater
(PARK) position, and then slowly turn the effort to manually steer the vehicle.
ignition switch to the “LOCK” position while  Do not leave the ignition switch in the “ON”
pressing it. or “ACC” position for a long time when the
If the following warning display, the display
engine is not running. Doing so could lead to
a dead battery. goes off if corrective action is taken.


 The ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key and the Type 1 Type 2
vehicle cannot be verified
Refer to “Key lock-in pre-
Type 1 vention system” on page
Type 2
Someone may be carrying a 5-19.
F.A.S.T.-key with a different
ID code, or the F.A.S.T.-key
Type 2 When the ignition switch is in a position
5 may not be within the oper-
ating range
Type 1 other than the “LOCK (PUSH OFF)”, if the
door(s) are opened, the F.A.S.T. - key is
Refer to “Door ajar preven- removed from the passenger compartment,
Type 1 and then the door(s) are closed, the warning
Type 2 tion system” on page 5-19.
display is displayed and the buzzer sounds 4
Refer to “F.A.S.T.-key take- times as a warning since it’s impossible to
out monitoring system” on verify the ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key and
Type 2
page 5-18. Type 1 vehicle.
Refer to “Ignition switch NOTE

Type 1 turn-off reminder system”  The F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring system
Type 2
on page 5-19. does not function if the F.A.S.T.-key is
The battery of the F.A.S.T.- removed through a window without opening
Type 2 a door. This setting can be changed.
key is run down
See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
for details.
F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring  The warning may display even if the
system F.A.S.T.-key is in the operating range for
starting the engine. The surrounding envi-
 A door or the rear hatch cannot be locked N00559801170
ronment or electromagnetic waves may
even when the driver’s or front passen- Type 1 make it impossible to verify the ID codes of
ger’s door lock/unlock switch or the rear the F.A.S.T.-key and vehicle.
hatch LOCK switch is pressed.


unlock and a buzzer will sound for about 3
Key lock-in prevention system Ignition switch turn-off reminder
seconds.
N00559900145 system
Type 1 N00560100147
Door ajar prevention system Type 1
N00560000146
Type 1
5
Type 2
Type 2
Type 2
When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK

(PUSH OFF)” position, the F.A.S.T.-key is
left in the passenger compartment, all the When the ignition switch is in a position
doors and the rear hatch are closed, and When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK other than “LOCK (PUSH OFF)”, all the
someone tries to lock the vehicle by pressing (PUSH OFF)” position, and someone tries to doors and the rear hatch are closed, and
the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock the vehicle by pressing the driver’s or someone tries to lock the vehicle by pressing
lock/unlock switch, or the rear hatch LOCK front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch, or the driver’s or front passenger’s door
switch, the warning display is displayed and the rear hatch LOCK switch while one of the lock/unlock switch, or the rear hatch LOCK
the buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds as a doors or the rear hatch is not fully closed, the switch, the warning display is displayed and
warning, and the doors and the rear hatch warning display is displayed and the buzzer the buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds as a
cannot be locked. sounds for about 3 seconds as a warning, and warning, and the doors and the rear hatch
If all the doors and the rear hatch are manu- the doors and the rear hatch cannot be locked. cannot be locked.
ally locked and closed while the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK (PUSH OFF)” posi-
tion and the F.A.S.T.-key is left in the car, the
doors and the rear hatch will automatically


 If the engine will not start because the bat-
Steering wheel lock CAUTION tery is weak or discharged, refer to
N00514300025  If your vehicle needs to be towed, turn the
“Jump-starting the engine” on page 8-2
ignition switch to the “ACC” position to
for instructions.
unlock the steering wheel.
 [Except for vehicles equipped with the
turbocharger]
NOTE The engine is warmed up enough for driv-
ing when the bar graph of engine coolant
5  If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft
temperature display starts to move. A lon-
lock may sometimes make it difficult to turn
the ignition switch from “LOCK” to “ACC” ger warm up period will only consume
position. Firmly turn the steering wheel to extra fuel.
the left or to the right as you turn the ignition  [For vehicles equipped with the turbo-
switch. charger]
The engine is warmed up enough for driv-
To lock Starting temperature display starts to move. Driv-
N00514601298 ing before the bar graph moves may cause
Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi- deterioration of turbocharger performance
tion. Tips for starting and driveability. A longer warm up period
Turn the steering wheel until it is locked. will only consume extra fuel.
 Do not operate the starter motor continu-  On vehicles equipped with the Twin
ously for longer than 15 seconds as this Clutch SST, the following may occur after
To unlock could run the battery down or damage the the engine is started, but they do not indi-
starter motor. If the engine does not start, cate an abnormality.
Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” posi- turn the ignition switch back to the • You may hear operational sounds of the
tion while moving the steering wheel slightly. “LOCK” position, wait a few seconds, Twin Clutch SST and you may feel
and then try again. Trying repeatedly with vibration in the vehicle body.
CAUTION the engine or starter motor still turning • If you shift the gearshift lever into the
 Carry the key with you when leaving the will damage the starter mechanism. “N” (NEUTRAL) position and depress
vehicle. the accelerator pedal, increases in the
engine speed will be limited.


1. Make sure all occupants are properly 5. On vehicles equipped with manual trans-
WARNING seated with seat belts fastened. axle, place the gearshift lever in the “N”
 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied. (Neutral) position.
ventilated area any longer than is needed
3. Press and hold the brake pedal down with On vehicles equipped with continuously
to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-
bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and your right foot. variable transmission (CVT) or Twin
extremely poisonous, could build up and 4. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way Clutch SST, make sure the selector lever
cause serious injury or death. down (manual transaxle). (CVT) or the gearshift lever (Twin Clutch
SST) is in the “P” (PARK) position.
5
NOTE
CAUTION  For models equipped with a manual trans-
NOTE
 Do not push-start the vehicle. axle, the starter will not operate unless the  On vehicles equipped with CVT, the starter
 Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive clutch pedal is fully depressed (Clutch inter- will not operate unless the selector lever is in
at high speeds until the engine has had a lock). This is a safety feature. the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
chance to warm up. tion.
 Release the ignition switch as soon as the On vehicles equipped with Twin Clutch SST,
engine starts. Otherwise, the starter motor the starter will not operate unless the gear-
will be damaged. shift lever is in the “P” (PARK) position or
the gearshift lever is in the “N” (NEUTRAL)
position with the brake pedal depressed.
For safety reasons, start the engine in the “P”
Starting the engine (PARK) position so that the wheels are
locked.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni-
cally controlled fuel injection system. This is 6. While pushing the ignition switch from
a system that automatically controls fuel “LOCK” (PUSH OFF) to “LOCK”
injection. There is no need to depress the (PUSH ON), set the ignition switch to the
accelerator pedal when starting the engine. “ON” position and confirm that all warn-
The starter motor should not be run for more ing lights and warning displays are oper-
than 15 seconds at a time. ating properly.
To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds
between attempts to restart the engine.


7. Without pressing the accelerator pedal, 3. If the engine still will not start, the engine (Twin Clutch SST) in the “D” (DRIVE) posi-
slowly turn the ignition switch to the could be flooded with too much gasoline. tion.
“START” position to start the engine. While depressing the brake pedal on vehi- This phenomenon occurs because the trans-
Release the ignition switch when the cles equipped with CVT or the clutch axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does
engine starts. pedal on the vehicles equipped with man- not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place
ual transaxle, push the accelerator pedal the selector lever (CVT) or the gearshift lever
all the way down and hold it there, then (Twin Clutch SST) in the “P” (PARK) posi-
NOTE crank the engine for 5 to 6 seconds. tion and let the engine idle for at least 10 min-
5  Minor noises may be heard on engine start-
Return the ignition switch to the “LOCK” utes.
up. These will disappear as the engine warms
up. position and release the accelerator pedal. The transaxle will warm up, and you will be
Wait a few seconds, and then crank the able to drive normally.
engine again for 5 to 6 seconds while Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up
When the engine is hard to start
depressing the brake pedal or the clutch operation.
After several attempts, you may experience pedal, but do not push the accelerator
that the engine still does not start. pedal. Release the ignition key if the
engine starts. If the engine fails to start,
To operate using the emergency
1. Make sure that all electric devices, such repeat these procedures. If the engine still key
as lights, air conditioning blower and rear will not start, contact your local Mitsubi- N00514800020
window defogger, are turned off. shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of
2. While depressing the brake pedal on vehi- your choice for assistance. Emergency key
cles equipped with continuously variable N00515200135
transmission (CVT) or the clutch pedal on The emergency key is built into the F.A.S.T.-
Startability of continuously variable
the vehicles equipped with manual trans- key.
transmission (CVT) vehicles or Twin
axle, press the accelerator pedal halfway When the F.A.S.T.-key cannot be used, such
Clutch SST vehicles at extremely cold
and hold it there, then crank the engine. as when the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key or the
ambient temperature
Release the accelerator pedal, immedi- vehicle has run down, the emergency key can
ately after the engine starts. When the ambient temperature is -4 °F (-20 be used to lock and unlock the driver’s door
°C) or lower on vehicles equipped with CVT, and to start the engine.
or -22 °F (-30 °C) or lower on vehicles
equipped with Twin Clutch SST, it may not To use the emergency key (1), unlock the lock
be possible to start from a standstill even with knob (2) and remove it from the F.A.S.T.-key
the selector lever (CVT) or the gearshift lever (3).

LOCK
The engine is off and the steering wheel is

locked. The emergency key can be inserted
and removed only when the ignition switch is
in this position.
ACC 5
The electrical accessories can be used with
the engine off.
1- Insert or remove the emergency key
NOTE 2- Lock
3- Unlock ON
 Only use the emergency key in an emer-
gency. When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key The engine will start only by using the emer-
has run down, replace the battery as soon as
gency key with the F.A.S.T.-key inserted. It is
possible and use it as a F.A.S.T.-key again. Ignition switch
possible to use all electrical accessories with
 After using the emergency key, be sure to N00529300212
reinsert it into the F.A.S.T.-key.

only the emergency key.
To prevent vehicle theft, only the emergency
key with the pre-registered F.A.S.T.-key
To lock or unlock the driver’s door with START
inserted can start the engine. (Electronic
the emergency key immobilizer function) Engages the starter. Release the emergency
Turn the emergency key toward the front of key when the engine starts. The ignition
the vehicle to lock the door. After checking switch returns automatically to the “ON”
that the door is locked, turn the emergency position.
key back to the center and remove it.


3. Insert the emergency key into the ignition
NOTE switch, and slowly push and turn.
To turn from “ACC” to “LOCK”
 The vehicle is equipped with an electronic
immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code 1. [For vehicles equipped with manual trans-
which the F.A.S.T.-key sends must match the axle]
one registered to the immobilizer computer. Push the emergency key in at the “ACC”
(Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft position and keep it depressed until it is
starting system)” on page 5-28.) turned to the “LOCK” position, and
5 remove.
[For vehicles equipped with continuously
To turn from “LOCK” to “ACC” variable transmission (CVT) or Twin
Clutch SST]
1. Remove the emergency key from the
First, set the selector lever (CVT) or the
F.A.S.T.-key.
gearshift lever (Twin Clutch SST) to the
Refer to “Emergency key” on page 5-22.
“P” (PARK) position, and then slowly
2. While pushing the lock release buttons
(A), remove the cover of the ignition NOTE turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
 When the ignition switch cannot be turned position while pressing it.
switch.
from the “LOCK” position to the “ACC”
position, turn the ignition switch while turn-
ing the steering wheel in both directions.

NOTE CAUTION CAUTION

 For vehicles equipped with CVT or Twin  Do not leave the ignition switch in the “ON”  Remove the emergency key when leaving the
Clutch SST, the emergency key cannot be or “ACC” position for a long time when the vehicle.
removed unless the selector lever (CVT) or engine is not running. The battery will run  If your vehicle needs to be towed, turn the
the gearshift lever (Twin Clutch SST) is set down. emergency key to the “ACC” position to
to the “P” (PARK) position.  Do not turn the ignition switch to the unlock the steering wheel.
“START” position when the engine is run-
2. Install the cover of the ignition switch.

ning. It will damage the starter motor.
5
3. Reinsert the emergency key into the Steering wheel lock NOTE
F.A.S.T.-key.  If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft
lock may sometimes make it difficult to turn
the emergency key from “LOCK” to “ACC”.
NOTE Firmly turn the steering wheel to the left or
 Always install the cover of the ignition to the right as you turn the emergency key.
switch when not using the emergency key.
Not doing so could cause damage if foreign Starting
material such as dust gets into the keyhole of
the ignition switch. Tips for starting
 Do not operate the starter motor continu-

CAUTION ously for longer than 15 seconds as this
 Do not turn the ignition switch to the could run the battery down or damage the
“LOCK” position while the vehicle is mov- To lock starter motor. If the engine does not start,
ing. This will cause the steering wheel to turn the emergency key back to the
lock, making it impossible to operate the Turn the emergency key to the “LOCK” posi- “LOCK” position, wait a few seconds,
vehicle. tion. and then try again. Trying repeatedly with
 If the engine is stopped while driving, the Turn the steering wheel until it is locked. the engine or starter motor still turning
power brake booster will stop functioning will damage the starter mechanism.
and greater effort for braking will be To unlock  If the engine will not start because the bat-
required. Also, the power steering system tery is weak or discharged, refer to
will not function and it will require greater Turn the emergency key to the “ACC” posi- “Jump-starting the engine” on page 8-2
effort to manually steer the vehicle. tion while moving the steering wheel slightly. for instructions.


 [Except for vehicles equipped with the 3. While pushing the lock release buttons
turbocharger]
WARNING (A), remove the cover of the ignition
The engine is warmed up enough for driv- switch.
temperature display starts to move. A lon- bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and
ger warm up period will only consume extremely poisonous, could build up and
extra fuel. cause serious injury or death.
 [For vehicles equipped with the turbo-
5 charger]
The engine is warmed up enough for driv- CAUTION
ing when the bar graph of engine coolant  Do not push-start the vehicle.
temperature display starts to move. Driv-  Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive
ing before the bar graph moves may cause at high speeds until the engine has had a
deterioration of turbocharger performance chance to warm up.
and driveability. A longer warm up period  Release the emergency key as soon as the 4. Insert the emergency key into the ignition
will only consume extra fuel. engine starts. It will damage the starter switch.
 On vehicles equipped with the Twin motor.
Clutch SST, the following may occur after
the engine is started, but they do not indi- Starting the engine
cate an abnormality. The vehicle is equipped with an electronically
• You may hear operational sounds of the controlled fuel injection system. This is a sys-
Twin Clutch SST and you may feel tem that automatically controls the fuel injec-
vibration in the vehicle body. tion. There is no need to depress the
• If you shift the gearshift lever into the accelerator pedal when starting the engine.
“N” (NEUTRAL) position and depress The starter motor should not be run for more
the accelerator pedal, increases in the than 15 seconds at a time.
engine speed will be limited. To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds
between attempts to restart the engine.
1. Make sure all occupants are properly

seated with seat belts fastened.
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.


5. Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the emergency 8. On vehicles equipped with manual trans- 11. Remove the F.A.S.T.-key from the emer-
key. axle, place the gearshift lever in the “N” gency key.
(Neutral) position.
On vehicles equipped with CVT or Twin
Clutch SST, make sure the selector lever
NOTE
 Minor noises may be heard on engine start-
(CVT) or the gearshift lever (Twin Clutch
up. These will disappear as the engine warms
SST) is in the “P” (PARK) position. up.
NOTE 5
 On vehicles equipped with CVT, the starter WARNING
will not operate unless the selector lever is in
 Make sure to remove the F.A.S.T.-key
the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
from the emergency key after the engine is
tion.
started.
On vehicles equipped with Twin Clutch SST,
6. Press and hold the brake pedal down with If not removed, the F.A.S.T.-key could fall
the starter will not operate unless the gear-
your right foot. to the floor, which may interfere with
shift lever is in the “P” (PARK) position or
7. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way pedal operation.
down (manual transaxle). Furthermore, the F.A.S.T.-key could pre-
vent the driver’s knee airbag from inflat-
For safety reasons, start the engine in the “P”
ing normally or could be propelled to
NOTE (PARK) position so that the wheels are
cause serious injury if the airbag inflates.
 On vehicles equipped with manual transaxle, locked.
the starter will not operate unless the clutch
pedal is fully depressed (Clutch interlock).
This is a safety feature.
9. Turn the emergency key with the NOTE
F.A.S.T.-key to the “ON” position and  If the emergency key is attached to a key
make certain that all warning lights and ring, it may become impossible to insert the
warning displays are functioning properly F.A.S.T.-key into the emergency key, and it
before starting the engine. may prevent the engine from being started.
10. Turn the emergency key with the When using the emergency key to start the
F.A.S.T.-key to the “START” position engine, first remove the key from the key
ring.
without pressing the accelerator pedal.
Release the emergency key with the
F.A.S.T.-key when the engine starts.


Wait a few seconds, and then crank the The transaxle will warm up, and you will be
When the engine is hard to start
engine again for 5 to 6 seconds while able to drive normally.
After several attempts, you may experience depressing the brake pedal or the clutch Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up
that the engine still does not start. pedal, but do not push the accelerator operation.
pedal. Release the ignition key if the
1. Make sure that all electric devices, such engine starts. If the engine fails to start,
as lights, air conditioning blower and rear repeat these procedures. If the engine still
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
window defogger, are turned off. will not start, contact your local Mitsubi- theft starting system)
5 2. While depressing the brake pedal on vehi- shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of N00529600127
cles equipped with continuously variable your choice for assistance. The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
transmission (CVT) or the clutch pedal on nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
the vehicles equipped with manual trans- theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
Startability of continuously variable
axle, press the accelerator pedal halfway bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is
transmission (CVT) vehicles or Twin
and hold it there, then crank the engine. attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
Clutch SST vehicles at extremely cold
Release the accelerator pedal, immedi- achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
ambient temperature
ately after the engine starts. a F.A.S.T.-key “registered” to the immobi-
3. If the engine still will not start, the engine When the ambient temperature is -4 °F (-20 lizer system.
could be flooded with too much gasoline. °C) or lower on vehicles equipped with CVT All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
While depressing the brake pedal on vehi- or -22 °F (-30 °C) or lower on vehicles cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s
cles equipped with CVT or the clutch equipped with Twin Clutch SST or it may not electronics.
pedal on the vehicles equipped with man- be possible to start from a standstill even with
ual transaxle, push the accelerator pedal the selector lever (CVT) or the gearshift lever Replacement F.A.S.T.-key
all the way down and hold it there, then (Twin Clutch SST) in the “D” (DRIVE) posi-
crank the engine for 5 to 6 seconds. tion.
Return the ignition switch to the “LOCK” Only the F.A.S.T.-keys that have been pro-
This phenomenon occurs because the trans-
position and release the accelerator pedal. grammed to the vehicle’s electronics can be
axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does
used to start the vehicle.
not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place
the selector lever (CVT) or the gearshift lever If you lose the F.A.S.T.-key, you can order a
(Twin Clutch SST) in the “P” (PARK) posi- F.A.S.T.-key from your authorized Mitsubishi
tion and let the engine idle for at least 10 min- Motors dealer by referring to the key number.
utes.


To prevent vehicle theft, the ID codes for all 2. While pushing the lock release buttons
Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
the F.A.S.T.-keys except the one for the lost (A), remove the cover of the ignition
F.A.S.T.-key must be programmed again. ming (Except for vehicles sold in switch.
Take your vehicle and all the remaining Canada)
F.A.S.T.-keys to your authorized Mitsubishi N00561200103
Motors dealer to have your ID codes pro- You can program new F.A.S.T.-keys to the
grammed again. system if you have two valid (already regis-
tered) F.A.S.T.-keys, blank (not registered)
F.A.S.T.-key and emergency key (specially
5
Additional F.A.S.T.-key
cut for your vehicle at your Mitsubishi
Motors dealer).
To add a F.A.S.T.-key, you must already have
To use the new F.A.S.T.-key, it is necessary to
two registered F.A.S.T.-keys. You need to
register the key with both the electronic
register the ID code to the vehicle.
immobilizer and keyless entry system.
Registering the ID code can be done by your
Also refer to “Keyless entry system: Cus- 3. Insert the emergency key into the ignition
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it
tomer F.A.S.T.-key programming” on page switch.
can be done by yourself (except for vehicles
5-33.
sold in Canada).
For you to register the ID code yourself, fol- For F.A.S.T.-key programming, follow the
low the “Customer F.A.S.T.-key program- procedures below.
ming” procedure below.
If you choose to have your authorized Mit- 1. Remove the emergency key from the
subishi Motors dealer register the ID code, F.A.S.T.-key. Refer to “Emergency key”
take your vehicle and all remaining F.A.S.T.- on page 5-22.
keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.
NOTE
 You are provided with two F.A.S.T.-keys, but
you may register up to four F.A.S.T.-keys.
You can obtain blank F.A.S.T.-keys specially
cut for your vehicle from your Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.


4. Insert the first valid F.A.S.T.-key into the 7. When the immobilizer display starts
emergency key. blinking, turn the second valid F.A.S.T.-
NOTE
 The procedure will be terminated automati-
key to the “LOCK” position and remove
cally if:
it. Within 30 seconds after doing so, insert
a blank F.A.S.T.-key into the emergency
from the moment when the first F.A.S.T.-
key and turn it to the “ON” position. Per- key is turned to the “LOCK” position to the
form this operation no more than 30 sec- moment when the second F.A.S.T.-key is
onds after the immobilizer display starts
5 blinking. When registration of the ID
turned to the “ON” position
code is complete, the immobilizer display from the moment when the second
will come on for 3 seconds then go off. If F.A.S.T.-key is turned to the “LOCK” posi-
an error occurs, the immobilizer display tion to the moment when the blank
will go off during the procedure. F.A.S.T.-key is turned to the “ON” position
 To use the new remote control transmitters, it
5. Turn the emergency key with the
is necessary to register the key with both the
F.A.S.T.-key to the “ON” position for 5
electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys-
seconds. tem.
6. Turn the emergency key with the Also refer to “Keyless entry system: Cus-
F.A.S.T.-key to the “LOCK” position. tomer F.A.S.T.-key programming” on page
Within 30 seconds after doing so, remove 8. If you wish to register another F.A.S.T.-
5-33.
the F.A.S.T.-key from the emergency key, key, repeat the process from step 1.
insert the second valid F.A.S.T.-key into
Keyless entry system
the emergency key and turn it to the “ON” NOTE N00515500196
position. About 10 seconds later, the  Perform the operation when the interrupt dis-
immobilizer display will start to blink. play screen is not showing. The interrupt dis- Press the remote control transmitter buttons
play screen may prevent you from seeing the to lock or unlock the doors and the rear hatch.
immobilizer display. It can also help you signal for attention by
 It is not possible to register a F.A.S.T.-key if: setting off the panic alarm.
• the immobilizer display goes off during the
procedure
• the immobilizer display does not come on
within 30 seconds after turning the ignition
switch to the “ON” position with a blank
F.A.S.T.-key

To unlock NOTE
N00544301122  The answerback function does not operate
Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the when the key is in the ignition switch or any
driver’s door only. Within about 2 seconds, door or rear hatch is opened.
press the UNLOCK button one more time to
unlock all the doors and the rear hatch. Horn deactivation/reactivation
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds. The horn answerback function can be set to
The turn signal lights will also blink twice. the following three conditions. 5
The front side-marker and parking lights will Each time the horn answerback function is
also turn on for about 30 seconds. Refer to set, a chime will sound to tell you the condi-
1- LOCK ( ) button “Welcome light” on page 5-149. tion of the answerback function.
2- UNLOCK ( ) button
NOTE Number of
3- PANIC ( ) button Condition
 The door and rear hatch unlock function can
chimes
4- Operation indicator light be set so that all doors and the rear hatch One chime The horn will not sound.
unlock when the UNLOCK button (2) is
Two chimes The horn will sound.
pressed once.
To lock Refer to “Setting of door and rear hatch The horn will sound if the
N00544200049 unlock function” on page 5-32. Four chimes LOCK button (1) is pressed
Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the twice quickly.
doors and the rear hatch.
The turn signal lights will also blink once. Answerback function 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
N00544501081
position. If you started the engine with the
NOTE Setting of the horn, turn signal lights and key, remove the key from the ignition
 If you press the LOCK button (1) twice buzzer of the keyless entry system answer- switch.
quickly, the horn will sound once. back function can be changed as required. 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
This is done with the key removed from the bination headlights and dimmer switch to
ignition switch. the “OFF” position.
3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec-
onds and press the UNLOCK button (2)
during this time.


4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and 3. Press the UNLOCK button (2) for 4 to 10 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of seconds and press the LOCK button (1) position. If you started the engine with the
pressing the UNLOCK button in step 3. during this time. key, remove the key from the ignition
4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and switch.
Changing the setting of the turn signal LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
lights answerback function pressing the LOCK button in step 3. bination headlights and dimmer switch to
The turn signal lights answerback function the “OFF” position.
can be set to the following seven conditions. 3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec-
5 Each time the turn signal lights answerback
Buzzer deactivation/reactivation
onds and press the UNLOCK button (2)
function is set, a chime will sound to tell you The buzzer answerback function can be during this time.
the condition of the answerback function. turned ON or OFF as required. 4. Release in sequence the LOCK and
UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
Number of Condition pressing the LOCK button in step 3.
Setting of door and rear hatch
chimes To lock To unlock unlock function
One chime One flash Two flashes N00544601125
Using the panic alarm
N00544700028
Two chimes One flash No flash The door and rear hatch unlock function can
be set to the following two conditions. If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-
Three chimes No flash Two flashes ened, you can activate the alarm to call atten-
Each time the door and rear hatch unlock
Four chimes Two flashes One flash function is set, a chime will sound to tell you tion as follows:
Five chimes No flash One flash the condition of the door and rear hatch
1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than
unlock function.
Six chimes Two flashes No flash 1 second.
Seven chimes No flash No flash 2. The headlights will blink on and off and
Number of
Condition the horn will sound intermittently for
chimes
about 3 minutes.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” All doors and rear hatch
One chime 3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on
position. If you started the engine with the unlock the remote control transmitter.
key, remove the key from the ignition
switch. Two chimes Driver’s door unlock only
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
bination headlights and dimmer switch to
the “OFF” position.


keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors 2. While pushing the lock release buttons
Replacement F.A.S.T.-keys
dealer. (A), remove the cover of the ignition
N00561300045
switch.
Only a F.A.S.T.-key, which has been pro-
grammed into the vehicle’s electronics, can NOTE
lock and unlock all the doors and the rear  You are provided with two F.A.S.T.-keys, but
you may register up to four F.A.S.T.-keys.
hatch, and start the engine.
If you lose the F.A.S.T.-key, you can order a
F.A.S.T.-key from your authorized Mitsubishi 5
Motors dealer by referring to the key number. Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
To prevent vehicle theft, the ID codes for all ming (Except for vehicles sold in
the F.A.S.T.-keys except the one for the lost Canada)
F.A.S.T.-key must be programmed again. N00561501132
Take your vehicle and all the remaining You can program new F.A.S.T.-keys to the
F.A.S.T.-keys to your authorized Mitsubishi system if you have two valid (already regis- 3. Insert the emergency key into the ignition
Motors dealer to have your ID codes pro- tered) F.A.S.T.-keys, blank (not registered) switch.
grammed again. F.A.S.T.-key and emergency key (specially
cut for your vehicle at your Mitsubishi
Additional F.A.S.T.-keys Motors dealer).
N00561400046 To use the new F.A.S.T.-key, it is necessary to
To add a F.A.S.T.-key, you must already have register the key with both the electronic
two registered F.A.S.T.-keys. immobilizer and keyless entry system.
Registering the ID code can be done by your Also refer to “Electronic immobilizer: Cus-
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it tomer F.A.S.T.-key programming” on page
can be done by yourself (except for vehicles 5-29.
sold in Canada). For you to register the ID
For F.A.S.T.-key programming, follow the
code yourself, follow the “Customer
procedures below.
F.A.S.T.-key programming” procedure below.
If you choose to have your authorized Mit- 1. Remove the emergency key from the
subishi Motors dealer register the ID code, F.A.S.T.-key. Refer to “Emergency key”
take your vehicle and all remaining F.A.S.T.- on page 5-22.


4. Insert the valid F.A.S.T.-key into the 10. Release in sequence the LOCK and
emergency key. UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
NOTE
 If the following conditions are observed after
pressing the LOCK button in step 9, and
pressing the buttons on the remote control
the immobilizer display will blink on the
transmitter, the battery in the remote control
information screen in the multi-informa- transmitter may need to be replaced.
tion display. (Perform the following pro- • The doors and the rear hatch cannot be
cedure within 60 seconds) locked or unlocked.
11. Press the LOCK button twice with the
5 blank F.A.S.T.-key and the immobilizer
• The panic alarm cannot be operated.
• The indicator light (4) is dim or does not
display will come on for 30 seconds on come on.
the information screen in the multi-infor-  If you lose your F.A.S.T.-key, please contact
mation display. an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for a
12. This completes the registration of the replacement.
5. Turn the emergency key with F.A.S.T.- F.A.S.T.-key.  If you wish to obtain an additional F.A.S.T.-
key to the “ON” position. (Perform the key, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer. A maximum of four F.A.S.T.-
following procedure within 30 seconds) NOTE key can be programmed for your vehicle.
6. Remove the F.A.S.T.-key from the emer-  The indicator light (4) comes on each time a  To use the new remote control transmitters, it
gency key. button is pressed. is necessary to register the key with both the
7. With the first valid F.A.S.T.-key, press the  The keyless entry system does not work if electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys-
UNLOCK button (2) and the LOCK but- the key is in the ignition switch. tem.
ton (1) simultaneously for 4 to 10 sec-  The F.A.S.T.-key can be used from about 40 Also refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
onds. feet (12 m) away. However, this distance theft starting system): Customer F.A.S.T.-
8. Release in sequence the LOCK and may change if your vehicle is near a TV key programming” on page 5-29.
UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of transmitting tower, a power station, or a
pressing the LOCK button in step 7. (Per- radio station.
 If the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed when
General information
form the following procedure within 30
N00562001075
seconds) all doors and the rear hatch are locked and no
9. With the second valid F.A.S.T.-key, press doors or rear hatch are opened within about Your F.A.S.T.-key operates on a radio fre-
30 seconds, the doors and the rear hatch will quency subject to Federal Communications
the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds
automatically re-lock. Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold
and press the LOCK button during this
time. in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For
vehicles sold in Canada). This device com-


plies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry 2. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you, 4. Install a new battery with the + side (A)
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). insert the cloth-covered tip of a flat blade up.
Operation is subject to the following two con- screwdriver into the notch in the remote + side
ditions. control transmitter case and use it to open
the case.
 This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference. - side
received, including interference that may 5
cause undesired operation. Coin type
battery
CR2032
CAUTION
 Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer for compli- 5. Close the remote control transmitter case
ance could void the user’s authority to oper- firmly.
ate the equipment. 6. Check the keyless entry system to see that
it works.
NOTE
Procedure for replacing the  Be sure to perform the procedure with the
Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the Mitsubi- NOTE
remote control transmitter bat- shi mark is not facing you when you open the  You may purchase a replacement battery at
tery remote control transmitter case, the transmit- an electric appliance store.
N00562100053
ter may come out.  Your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
1. Before replacing the battery, remove static can replace the battery for you if you prefer.
electricity from your body by touching a 3. Remove the old battery.
metal grounded object.
CAUTION
 When the remote control transmitter case is
opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc.
out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-
nents.

Door locks
locked, turn the key back to the center and
Door locks NOTE remove it.
N00509200521  When locking or unlocking with the key,
only the driver’s door will be locked or
WARNING unlocked.
 Make sure all doors are tightly closed and To lock or unlock all doors and rear hatch,
locked while driving. use the power door lock switches, the key-
• Locked doors, in combination with the less entry system, the F.A.S.T.-key opera-
5 use of seat belts, can help reduce the risk tion.
Refer to “Power door locks” on page 5-38,
of ejection in an accident.
“Keyless entry system” on page 5-7and 5-30,
• Locked doors can help keep passengers,
and “To operate using the F.A.S.T.-key” on
especially small children, from opening
page 5-14.
doors and falling out of moving vehicles.
 In vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key,
• Locked doors can help prevent outsiders
the driver’s door can be locked and unlocked
from gaining access to your vehicle when 1- Insert or remove the key
using the emergency key.
you slow or come to a stop.
Refer to “Emergency key” on page 5-22. 2- Lock
 Lock your vehicle whenever you leave it.
3- Unlock
Children who get into unlocked vehicles
may not be able to get out. Children
trapped inside vehicles can quickly be To lock or unlock the doors
overcome by heat and suffer serious with the key (driver’s door)
injury or death due to heat stroke.
 Never leave children unattended inside a Turn the key toward the front of the vehicle to
vehicle. In addition to the risk of heat lock the door. After checking that the door is
stroke, children can activate switches and
controls, resulting in an injury or fatal
accident.

Door locks
2. Be sure the keys are not inside the vehi- If the ignition switch is turned off and the
To lock or unlock the door from cle. Close the door. driver’s door is opened with the key in the
the inside ignition switch, the key reminder buzzer will
sound intermittently to remind you to remove
Move the lock knob to the lock position to the key.
lock the door. The warning display will be displayed on the
All doors should be kept locked while driv- information screen in the multi-information
ing. display.
5
Lock out protection
N00517300039
When you push the lock knob forward or lock

the door with the power door lock switch in
both of the following conditions, the lock
Key reminder system knob will automatically return to the
N00549600208 unlocked position.
When a key was used to start the  The key is in the ignition switch or the
ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”
1- Lock engine position.
2- Unlock
 Driver’s door or front passenger door is
Type 1 opened.
The driver’s door can be unlocked without
using the lock knob by pulling on the inside
door handle.
To lock the door without using Type 2

the key
1. Move the inside lock knob to the locked
position.

Power door locks
Ignition switch return reminder Power door locks To lock and unlock the doors
system N00509300593 and rear hatch
N00503800134
NOTE
 When locking or unlocking with the key on
When the F.A.S.T.-key was used to Using the power door lock switch
the driver’s door, only the driver’s door will
start the engine lock or unlock.
5 Type 1
 Repeated continuous operation between lock
and unlock could activate the power door
locking systems built-in protection circuit
and prevent the system from operating. If
this occurs, wait about one minute before
operating the power door lock switch.
Type 2
1- Lock
2- Unlock
If the driver’s door is opened while the igni- All of the doors and the rear hatch can be
tion switch is in a position other than locked or unlocked by pressing the power
“LOCK” (PUSH OFF), the ignition switch door lock switch on the driver’s or the front
return reminder buzzer will sound intermit- passenger’s door.
tently to remind you to return the ignition
switch to the “LOCK” (PUSH OFF) position.
The warning display will be displayed on the
information screen in the multi-information
display.

“Child safety locks” for rear door

(PARK) position with the ignition switch in Child safety locks help prevent rear passen-
To unlock the doors and rear the “ON” position. gers, especially children, from opening the
hatch rear door using the inside door handle.
N00563401148
Vehicles with A lock lever for the child safety lock is pro-
Vehicles with CVT
You can select the functions to unlock the Twin Clutch SST vided on each rear door.
doors and rear hatch either using the igni- When the lever is in the lock position (1), the
tion switch position or using the selector rear door cannot be opened using the inside
door handle.
lever {continuously variable transmission
To open the rear door when the child safety
5
(CVT)} position or the gearshift lever (Twin
Clutch SST) position. lock lever is in the lock position, pull the out-
These functions are not activated when the side door handle.
vehicle is shipped from the factory. To acti- When the lever is in the release position (2),
vate or deactivate these functions, please the child safety lock is released and the rear
contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors door can be opened using the inside door han-
dealer. dle.
“Child safety locks” for rear
WARNING
Using the ignition switch position door  Always keep the doors tightly closed and
N00509400204
locked when driving. An unlocked door
All doors and the rear hatch will unlock when may be accidentally opened by a passen-
the ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK” ger, especially by a child who could fall
position. out. Also, if the doors are not locked, there
is a greater risk of someone being thrown
from the vehicle in an accident.
Using the selector lever {continu-
ously variable transmission
(CVT)} position or the gearshift
lever (Twin Clutch SST) position
All doors and the rear hatch will unlock when 1- To lock
the selector lever (CVT) or the gearshift lever 2- To release
(Twin Clutch SST) is moved to the “P”

Rear hatch
Rear hatch To open To close

N00510000066
After unlocking, lift the rear hatch.
Pull the rear hatch grip (A) downward as
WARNING illustrated and release it before the rear hatch
 It is dangerous to drive with the rear closes completely. Gently slam the rear hatch
hatch open since carbon monoxide (CO) from the outside so that it is completely
gas can enter the passenger compartment.
closed.
5 CO is an invisible, odorless gas that can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
 When opening and closing the rear hatch,
make sure that there are no people nearby
and be careful not to hit your head or
pinch your hands, neck, etc.
CAUTION
 Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when CAUTION
loading and unloading luggage. Heat from  Make sure there is no one standing nearby
the exhaust could lead to burns. when opening the rear hatch.
NOTE NOTE CAUTION

 To avoid injuring your hand or arm, do not
 Locking and unlocking the doors by using  The rear hatch cannot be raised if it is not
attempt to close the rear hatch without
the power door locks (driver and front pas- raised immediately after pressing the rear
releasing the rear hatch grip (A).
senger side), keyless entry system, or hatch OPEN switch. If this happens, raise the
F.A.S.T.-key operation (if so equipped) also  Before starting the vehicle, be sure to con-
rear hatch again after pressing the rear hatch
locks and unlocks the rear hatch. firm that the rear hatch is locked. If the rear
OPEN switch.
hatch opens while driving the vehicle,
 It is not possible to open the rear hatch while
objects stored in the luggage compartment
the battery is disconnected. If necessary, use
could fall out into the road.
the inside rear hatch release.
 When the battery is reconnected, all doors
and the rear hatch will be locked. Unlock
them before trying to open the rear hatch.

Inside rear hatch release

2. Move the lever (B) to open the rear hatch.
NOTE
 Gas struts (B) are installed in the locations
illustrated in order to support the rear hatch.
Please observe the following in order to pre-
vent damage or faulty operation.
• Do not touch, push or pull the gas struts
when closing the rear hatch.
• Do not attach any plastic material, tape,
etc., to the gas struts.
5
• Do not tie string, etc., around the gas struts.
• Do not hang objects on the gas struts.
You and your family should familiarize your-
selves with the location and operation of the 3. Push out on the rear hatch to open it.
rear hatch release lever.
CAUTION
To open  Always keep the release lever lid on rear
hatch closed when driving so that your lug-
1. Open the lid (A) inside of the rear hatch. gage cannot accidentally bump the lever and
open the rear hatch.
Theft-alarm system
N00510200215
The theft-alarm system is designed to provide

Inside rear hatch release protection from unauthorized entry into the
N00523100058
vehicle. This system is operated in three
The inside rear hatch release is designed to stages: the first is the “armed” stage, the sec-
provide a way to open the rear hatch if the ond is the “alarm” stage, and third is the “dis-
battery is dead or disconnected. armed” stage. If triggered, the system
The rear hatch release lever (see illustration) provides both audible and visual alarm sig-
is mounted on the rear hatch. nals.

Theft-alarm system
3. Lock all doors and the rear hatch by using 4. The system has entered the armed stage
CAUTION the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.- after about 20 seconds, when the theft-
 Do not modify or add parts to the theft-alarm
key operation. alarm indicator (A) flashing becomes
system. Doing so could cause the theft-alarm
slower.
to malfunction. Arm the system and leave
The theft-alarm indicator (A) continues to
flash while the system is in the armed
stage.
Armed stage
5 N00510301196
Park the vehicle and stop the engine. Arm the NOTE
system as described below.  If the engine hood is open, the theft-alarm
indicator (A) illuminates and the system can-
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” not enter the armed stage. The system enters
the armed stage about 20 seconds after the
position.
engine hood is closed.
Also, if a key was used to start the engine,
At this time, the theft-alarm indicator (A)  The system will be disarmed if, while the
remove the key from the ignition switch.
on the audio panel flashes for confirma- theft-alarm indicator (A) is illuminated, all
2. Make sure that the engine hood is closed. doors and rear hatch are unlocked by using
tion.
the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-key
operation.
 The system will be disarmed if, while the
theft-alarm indicator is illuminated, the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.
 The system will not be armed if a door or the
rear hatch or the engine hood is not com-
pletely closed. If this happens, rearm the sys-
tem as described above.
 The theft-alarm system can be activated
when people are riding inside the vehicle or
when the windows are open. To prevent acci-
dental activation of the alarm, do not set the
system to the system armed mode while peo-
ple are riding in the vehicle.

Theft-alarm system
Type 2
Alarm stage Horn sounds!
N00510401201 Headlights blink on and off!
The alarm will be activated if any of the fol-
lowing occur while the vehicle is parked and
the system is armed.
 One of the doors and the rear hatch is

opened without using the keyless entry
Alarm deactivation 5
system or the F.A.S.T.-key operation.
 The engine hood is opened. The alarm can be deactivated in the following
ways.
Type of alarm NOTE  By using the keyless entry system or the
 The alarm will continue to operate for 3 min- F.A.S.T.-key operation to lock or unlock
utes. At the end of that period, the alarm will
When the alarm is activated: the door or rear hatch.
automatically shut off to save battery power.
The system will then be rearmed until the
 Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
1. The headlights blink on and off for 3 min- tion.
proper disarming step is taken.
utes.
 The alarm will resume if unauthorized
After 3 minutes the headlights automati-
cally shut off.
actions are taken again, even if the alarm has Disarmed stage
stopped.
2. The horn will sound intermittently for 3  While the alarm is operating, a warning is
N00510501185
minutes. displayed on the information screen in the The system will be disarmed if the following
multi-information display. operation is performed.
Type 1  The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.
 All doors and the rear hatch are unlocked
by the keyless entry system or the
F.A.S.T.-key operation.

Power windows
1. Lower the driver’s window.
Disarm...by using the keyless entry system or
2. Arm the system as explained in “Armed
NOTE
F.A.S.T.-key operation  Never try to operate the main switch and sub
stage”.
switch in different directions at the same
3. Make sure that the theft-alarm indicator
time. This will freeze the window in posi-
comes on and flashes for approximately tion.
20 seconds.  Operating the power windows repeatedly
4. Wait a few seconds and then unlock the with the engine stopped will run down the
driver’s side door by using the inside door
5 lock knob and open the door.
battery. Use the window switches only while
the engine is running.
5. Check to be sure that the horn sounds
intermittently and the headlights blink on
and off when the door is opened. WARNING
NOTE 6. Disarm the system by unlocking all doors  Before operating the power windows,
 If the UNLOCK button on the remote control and the rear hatch by using the keyless make sure that nothing can be trapped
transmitter, or the driver’s or front passen- entry system or the F.A.S.T.-key opera- (head, hands, fingers, etc.) in the window.
ger’s door lock/unlock switch is pressed tion.  Never leave the vehicle with the key in the
when all doors and the rear hatch are closed ignition switch.
and no door is opened within approximately
 Never leave a child alone in the vehicle.
30 seconds, re-arming will automatically Power windows
occur. N00510800325
 The amount of time after unlocking until the
vehicle relocks automatically can be Main switch
adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer for details. The main switch located on the driver’s door
 Once the system has been disarmed, it can- can be used to operate all door windows.
not be rearmed except by repeating the arm-
A window can be opened or closed by operat-
ing procedure.
ing the corresponding switch.
Press the switch down to open the window,
and pull up the switch to close it.
Testing the theft-alarm system If the driver’s door window switch is fully
N00510601131
pressed down/pulled up, the driver’s door
Use the following procedure to test the sys- 1- Open (down) window automatically opens/closes com-
tem: 2- Close (up) pletely.

Power windows
If you want to stop the window movement,
operate the switch lightly in the reverse direc-
Sub switch Safety mechanism (Driver’s
tion. door window only)
N00528800089
If a hand or head is trapped, for safety the

door window is automatically lowered a little.
After the door window is lowered, pull up the
switch again to close the door window.
5
WARNING
 If the safety mechanism is activated three
or more times successively, the safety
mechanism will be temporarily cancelled.
1- Close (up) If a hand or head subsequently gets
1- Driver’s door window switch 2- Open (down) trapped, a serious injury can result.
2- Front passenger door window switch  The safety mechanism is deactivated while
3- Left rear door window switch Each sub switch can be used for its own pas- the switch is pulled up continuously.
Therefore be especially careful that hands
4- Right rear door window switch senger door window, unless the driver’s win-
or head are not trapped in the door win-
5- Window lock switch dow lock switch is activated.
dow opening.
 Do not deliberately trap your hands or
Timer function head in order to activate the safety mecha-
nism.
Your hand or head could be trapped and
The power windows can be run up or down personal injury could result.
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
tion.
The door windows can be opened or closed CAUTION
for a 30 second period after the ignition  The safety mechanism is deactivated just
switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” before the door window closes. This allows
position. However, once the driver’s door or the door window to close completely. There-
the front passenger’s door is opened, the fore be especially careful that fingers are not
power windows cannot be operated. trapped in the door window opening.

Sunroof (if so equipped)

will open or close only the driver’s door win- rear door windows down or partially opened.
NOTE dow. To unlock the switch, press it again. This is a normal occurrence that can be mini-
 The safety mechanism can be activated if the
mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
driving conditions or other circumstances
door windows open, open the front door win-
cause the door window to be subjected to a
physical shock similar to that caused by dows as well as the rear door windows to
trapped hand or head. minimize the condition.
 If the safety mechanism is activated 3 or
5 more times consecutively, the safety mecha-
nism is deactivated and normal closing of the
N00511000669
door window will be aborted.
Use the following method to return to normal
operation. WARNING
1. If the door window is open, repeatedly  Do not stick your head, hands or anything
pull up the power window switch to fully else in the sunroof opening.
close the door window. 1- Lock
 Before operating the sunroof, make sure
2. With fully closing the window, release 2- Unlock
that nothing can be trapped (head, hands,
the switch and then pull up the switch fingers, etc.).
again for about 1 second.  Never leave a child (or other person who is
WARNING incapable of safely operating the sunroof
 Before driving with a child in the vehicle, switch) alone in the vehicle.
Lock switch be sure to lock the window switch to make
it inoperative. Children tampering with
N00549000127
the switch could easily trap their hands or The sunroof can be opened and closed with
When this switch is in the lock mode, the the ignition switch in the “ON” position.
heads in the window.
main switch for passenger door window and
the sub switch cannot be used to open or
close the door window, and the main switch
What to do if you hear wind
buffeting when driving
N00551400014
Wind buffeting can be described as the per-

ception of pressure on the ears or a booming
or rumbling sound. Your vehicle may exhibit
wind buffeting when driving with one or both

To close Safety mechanism
Press the switch (3), the sunroof automati- If a hand or head is trapped in the closing
cally closes. sunroof opening, the safety mechanism will
To stop the moving sunroof, press the switch. cause the sunroof to re-open automatically.
The opened sunroof will become operational
again after a few seconds.
To tilt up If the safety mechanism is activated 5 or 5
more times consecutively, normal closing of
When the switch (2) is pressed, the rear edge the sunroof will be aborted.
of sunroof raises for ventilation. As an emergency measure, the sunroof can be
closed in small increments until it is com-
To open To tilt down pletely closed by repeatedly pressing the
switch (2).
Press the switch (1), the sunroof automati- After performing the emergency measure,
Press the switch (3).
cally opens and the sunroof will stop several consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
centimeters this side of the full open position. dealer.
Press the switch (1) again, and the sunroof Timer function
will be fully open. NOTE
To stop the moving sunroof, press the switch. The sunroof can be operated when the igni-  The safety mechanism can be activated if the
tion switch is in the “ON” position. The sun- driving conditions or other circumstances
NOTE roof can be opened or closed for a 30 seconds cause the sunroof to be subjected to a physi-
 The sunroof stops just before reaching the period after the ignition switch is turned to cal shock similar to that caused by a trapped
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. However, hand or head.
fully open position. If the vehicle is driven
with the sunroof in this position, wind buf- once the driver’s door or the front passenger’s
feting is lower than with the sunroof fully door is opened, the sunroof cannot be oper-
open. ated until the ignition switch is turned on WARNING
again.  The safety mechanism is deactivated while
the switch (2) is pressed continuously.
Therefore be especially careful that hands
or head are not trapped in the sunroof
opening.

WARNING NOTE
 Do not deliberately trap your hands or  Release the switch when the sunroof has
head in order to activate the safety mecha- reached a completely open or completely
nism. closed position.
Personal injury and malfunction of the  If the sunroof does not operate when the sun-
sunroof could result. roof switch is operated, release the switch
and check whether something is trapped by
5 CAUTION
the sunroof. If nothing is trapped, have the
sunroof checked at an authorized Mitsubishi
 The safety mechanism is deactivated just Motors dealer.
before the sunroof closes. This allows the  Be careful when tilting up the sunroof if a ski
sunroof to close completely. Therefore be carrier or a roof carrier is installed. Depend-
especially careful that fingers are not trapped CAUTION ing on the model of ski carrier or roof carrier,
in the sunroof opening.  Do not attempt to close the sunshade when the sunroof may contact the carrier when the
the sunroof is opened. sunroof is tilted up.
 Be careful that hands are not trapped when  Be sure to close the sunroof completely
closing the sunshade. when washing the vehicle or when leaving
Sunshade the vehicle.
 Do not put any wax on the weatherstrip
The sunshade can be opened or closed manu- NOTE (black rubber) around the sunroof opening. If
ally while the sunroof is closed. it is waxed, the weatherstrip cannot maintain
 Be sure to tilt down the sunroof before clos-
When the sunroof is opened, the sunshade a weatherproof seal with the sunroof.
ing the sunshade.
will also open automatically.  After washing the vehicle or after rain be
 When leaving the vehicle unattended, be
sure to wipe off any water that is on the sun-
sure to close the sunroof and without the
roof before operating it.
ignition key.
 Operating the sunroof repeatedly with the
 Do not try to operate the sunroof if it is fro-
engine turned off will run down the battery.
zen closed (after snowfall or during extreme
Operate the sunroof only while the engine is
cold).
running.
 Do not sit on or place heavy luggage on the
sunroof or roof opening edge.
 Do not apply any force that may cause dam-
age to the sunroof.

Parking brake
Parking brake To apply To release

N00511400344
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-

plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,
and then move the gearshift lever to 1st (on a
uphill) or “R” (Reverse) (on a downhill) posi-
tion for vehicles equipped with a manual
transaxle, set the selector lever {continuously 5
variable transmission (CVT)} or the gearshift
lever (Twin Clutch SST) to “P” (PARK) posi-
tion for vehicles equipped with CVT or Twin
Clutch SST.
1- Pull the lever up without pushing the 1- Pull the lever up slightly.
button at the end of hand grip. 2- Push and hold the button at the end of
When the parking brake is set and the the hand grip.
ignition switch is in the “ON” position, 3- Push the lever downward.
the brake warning light in the instru-
ment cluster will come on. When parking on a hill, apply the parking
Before driving, be sure to release the brake and turn the front wheels toward the
parking brake. curb on a downhill grade, away from the curb
on an uphill grade.

Steering wheel tilt lock lever
CAUTION Steering wheel tilt lock lever WARNING

 Before driving, be sure that the parking N00511500172  When releasing the tilt lock lever {moving
brake is fully released and brake warning it to the position (2)}, be sure to hold the
To adjust the steering wheel height, release
light is off. steering wheel firmly. Otherwise, the
If you drive without the parking brake fully
the tilt lock lever while holding the steering steering wheel may slip down too sud-
released, the warning display will appear on wheel by hand, and raise or lower the steering denly.
the information screen in the multi-informa- wheel to the desired height.
After adjustment, securely lock the lever by
5 tion display.
If a vehicle is driven without releasing the pulling it upward. Inside day/night rearview
parking brake, the brakes will be overheated, mirror
resulting in ineffective braking and possible
N00548600070
brake failure.
Adjust the inside rearview mirror only after
Warning light making any seat adjustments so as to have a
clear view to the rear of the vehicle.
WARNING
 Do not attempt to adjust the inside rear-
view mirror while driving. This can be
dangerous.
Be sure to adjust the mirror before driv-
1- Locked ing.
2- Released
WARNING
 After adjusting, make sure the lock lever
is secured in the locked (1) position.
 Do not attempt to adjust the steering
wheel while driving. This can be danger-
ous.

Inside day/night rearview mirror
Type 1 To reduce the glare
Type 1
The day/night knob (A) at the bottom of the

mirror can be used to adjust the mirror to
Type 2
reduce the glare from the headlights of vehi- 5
cles behind you during night driving.
To adjust the mirror position

Adjust the inside mirror to maximize the It is possible to move the mirror up/down and
view through the rear window. left/right to adjust its position.
To adjust the vertical mirror

position
1- Daytime position
It is possible to move the mirror up and down
2- Night position
to adjust its position.
Type 2
When the headlights of the vehicles behind

you are very bright, the reflection factor of
the rearview mirror is automatically changed
to reduce the glare.

Outside rearview mirrors
WARNING To adjust the mirror position

 Do not attempt to adjust the outside rear-
view mirrors while driving. This can be The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted
dangerous. when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driv- “ACC” position.
ing. Move the lever (A) to the same side as the
 Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. mirror you wish to adjust.
5 The objects you see in the mirror will look
smaller and farther away than they
appear in a regular flat mirror.
Do not use this mirror to estimate the dis-
tance of vehicles following you when
Normally, use the automatic mode. When the
changing lanes.
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion, the reflection factor of the mirror is
automatically changed.
NOTE
 Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner
on the sensor (1), as reduced sensitivity L- Left outside mirror adjustment
could result. R- Right outside mirror adjustment
Press the switch (B) to adjust the mirror posi-

Outside rearview mirrors tion.
N00512200192
Adjust the outside rearview mirrors only after 1- Up

making any seat adjustments so you have a 2- Down
clear view to the rear of the vehicle. 3- Right
4- Left

Ignition switch
The indicator light (A) will illuminate while
NOTE the defogger is on.
Manual transaxle CVT or Twin Clutch
 After adjusting, return the lever to the SST
The heater will be turned off automatically in
“•”(off) position (C).
about 20 minutes.
To fold the mirror

The outside mirror can be folded in toward 5
the side window to prevent damage when
parking in tight locations.
LOCK
The engine is off and the steering wheel is

locked. The key can be inserted and removed
only when the switch is in this position.
Ignition switch
N00512400628
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-

ACC
key]
For information on operations for vehicles Allows operation of electrical accessories
equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key, refer to with the engine off.
Heated mirror (if so equipped) “F.A.S.T.-key: Ignition switch” on page 5-16.
N00549300175
[Except for vehicles equipped with the

ON
When the rear window defogger switch is F.A.S.T.-key]
pressed with the engine running, the outside The engine runs and all accessories can be
rearview mirrors are defogged or defrosted. used.
Current will flow through the heater element
inside the mirrors, thus clearing away frost or
condensation.

Ignition switch
(Twin Clutch SST) to the “P” (PARK) posi-
START NOTE tion, and then turn the key to the “LOCK”
• The time until the power cuts out can be
position, and remove.
Engages the starter. After the engine starts, changed to about 60 minutes.
release the key and it will return automati- • The ACC power auto-cutout function can
be deactivated. CVT or Twin Clutch SST
cally to the “ON” position.
For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.
5 NOTE
 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code To remove the key
which the transponder inside the key sends N00550900168
must match the one registered to the immobi- For vehicles equipped with a manual trans-
lizer computer. axle, when removing the key, push the key in
(Refer to “Electronic immobilizer” on page at the “ACC” position and keep it depressed
5-4.)
until it is turned to the “LOCK” position, and
remove.
NOTE
ACC power auto-cutout func-  For vehicles equipped with a CVT or Twin
Manual transaxle Clutch SST, the key cannot be removed
tion unless the selector lever (CVT) or the gear-
N00539601097 shift lever (Twin Clutch SST) is set to the
After about 30 minutes has elapsed with the “P” (PARK) position, which allows the igni-
ignition switch in the “ACC” position, the tion switch to turn to the “LOCK” position.
function automatically cuts out the power for
the audio system and other electric devices
that can be operated with that position. CAUTION
When the ignition switch is turned from the  Do not remove the ignition key from the
“ACC” position, the power is supplied again ignition switch while driving. The steering
to those devices. wheel will lock, causing loss of control.
For vehicles equipped with a continuously
variable transmission (CVT) or Twin Clutch
NOTE SST, when removing the key, first set the
 It is possible to modify functions as follows: selector lever (CVT) or the gearshift lever

Steering wheel lock
CAUTION NOTE
 If the engine is turned off while driving, the  If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft
power brake booster will stop functioning lock may sometimes make it difficult to turn
and braking efficiency will be reduced. Also, the key from “LOCK” position to “ACC”
the power steering system will not function position. Firmly turn the steering wheel to
and it will require greater effort to manually the left or to the right as you turn the key.
steer the vehicle.
 Do not leave the key in the “ON” position for
a long time when the engine is not running.
5
This will cause the battery to run down.
Starting and stopping the
 Do not turn the key to the “START” position engine
when the engine is running. It will damage N00542100057
the starter motor.
To lock Tips for starting
Steering wheel lock Remove the key at the “LOCK” position.
N00512500179
 Do not operate the starter motor continu-
Turn the steering wheel until it is locked. ously for longer than 15 seconds as this
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- could run the battery down or damage the
key] starter motor. If the engine does not start,
For information on operations for vehicles To unlock
turn the ignition switch back to the
equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key, refer to “LOCK” position, wait a few seconds,
“F.A.S.T.-key: Steering wheel lock” on page Turn the key to the “ACC” position while and then try again. Trying repeatedly with
5-20. moving the steering wheel slightly. the engine or starter motor still turning
will damage the starter mechanism.
F.A.S.T.-key]
CAUTION  If the engine will not start because the bat-
 Remove the key when leaving the vehicle. tery is weak or discharged, refer to
“Jump-starting the engine” (on page 8-2)
for instructions.

Starting and stopping the engine

 [Except for vehicles equipped with the automatically controls the release of fuel.
turbocharger]
WARNING There is usually no need to depress the accel-
The engine is warmed up enough for driv- erator pedal when starting the engine.
ing when the bar graph of engine coolant The starter should not be run for more than 15
temperature display starts to move. A lon- bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and seconds at a time.
ger warm up period will only consume extremely poisonous, could build up and To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds
extra fuel. cause serious injury or death. between attempts to restart the engine.
 [For vehicles equipped with the turbo-
5 charger] 1. Make sure all occupants are properly
The engine is warmed up enough for driv- CAUTION seated with seat belts fastened.
ing when the bar graph of engine coolant 2. Insert the ignition key.
 Do not push-start the vehicle.
temperature display starts to move. Driv- 3. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
 Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive
ing before the bar graph moves may cause at high speeds until the engine has had a
4. Press and hold the brake pedal down with
deterioration of turbocharger performance chance to warm up. your right foot.
and driveability. A longer warm up period  Release the ignition switch as soon as the 5. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way
will only consume extra fuel. engine starts. Otherwise, the starter motor down (manual transaxle).
 On vehicles equipped with the Twin will be damaged.
Clutch SST, the following may occur after NOTE
the engine is started, but they do not indi-  For models equipped with a manual trans-
cate an abnormality. Starting the engine axle, the starter will not operate unless the
• You may hear operational sounds of the N00542200159 clutch pedal is fully depressed (Clutch inter-
Twin Clutch SST and you may feel lock). This is a safety feature.
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
vibration in the vehicle body. key]
• If you shift the gearshift lever into the For information on operation for vehicles
“N” (NEUTRAL) position and depress equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key, refer to
the accelerator pedal, increases in the “F.A.S.T.-key: Starting the engine” on page
engine speed will be limited. 5-20.

F.A.S.T.-key]
Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni-
cally controlled fuel injection system, which


6. On vehicles equipped with manual trans- 8. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” 3. If the engine still will not start, the engine
axle, place the gearshift lever in the “N” position without pressing the accelerator could be flooded with too much gasoline.
(Neutral) position. pedal. Release the key when the engine While depressing the brake pedal on vehi-
On vehicles equipped with continuously starts. cles equipped with CVT or the clutch
variable transmission (CVT) or Twin pedal on the vehicles equipped with man-
Clutch SST, make sure the selector lever NOTE ual transaxle, push the accelerator pedal
(CVT) or the gearshift lever (Twin Clutch  Minor noises may be heard on engine start- all the way down and hold it there, then
SST) is in the “P” (PARK) position. up. These will disappear as the engine warms crank the engine for 5 to 6 seconds.
up. Return the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
5
NOTE position and release the accelerator pedal.
 On vehicles equipped with CVT, the starter Wait a few seconds, and then crank the
will not operate unless the selector lever is in When the engine is hard to start engine again for 5 to 6 seconds while
the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi- depressing the brake pedal or the clutch
tion. pedal, but do not push the accelerator
After several attempts, you may experience
On vehicles equipped with Twin Clutch SST, pedal. Release the ignition key if the
that the engine still does not start.
the starter will not operate unless the gear-
engine starts. If the engine fails to start,
shift lever is in the “P” (PARK) position or
1. Make sure that all electric devices, such repeat these procedures. If the engine still
as lights, air conditioning blower and rear will not start, contact your local Mitsubi-
For safety reasons, start the engine in the “P” window defogger, are turned off. shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of
(PARK) position so that the wheels are 2. While depressing the brake pedal on vehi- your choice for assistance.
locked. cles equipped with continuously variable
transmission (CVT) or the clutch pedal on Startability of continuously vari-
the vehicles equipped with manual trans-
7. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi- axle, press the accelerator pedal halfway
able transmission (CVT) vehicles
tion and make certain that all warning and hold it there, then crank the engine. or Twin Clutch SST vehicles at
lights are functioning properly before Release the accelerator pedal, immedi- extremely cold ambient tempera-
starting the engine. ately after the engine starts. ture
When the ambient temperature is -4 °F (-20

°C) or lower on vehicles equipped with CVT,
-22 °F (-30 °C) or lower on vehicles equipped
with Twin Clutch SST, it may not be possible


to start from a stand-still even with the selec- 3. For vehicles equipped with a manual
tor lever (CVT) or the gearshift lever (Twin transaxle, turn the ignition switch to the
NOTE
 For vehicles equipped with Twin Clutch
Clutch SST) in the “D” (DRIVE) position. “LOCK” position to stop the engine, and
SST, the engine will stop and the vehicle
This phenomenon occurs because the trans- then move the gearshift lever to the 1st
power will turn off approximately 1 second
axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does (on a uphill) or “R” (Reverse) (on a down- after the ignition switch is turned to the
not indicate a problem. If it occurs, place the hill) position. “LOCK” position.
selector lever (CVT) or the gearshift lever For vehicles equipped with continuously
(Twin Clutch SST) in the “P” (PARK) posi- variable transmission (CVT) or Twin The reason for this is that, in the time from
5 tion and let the engine idle for at least 10 min- Clutch SST, place the selector lever when the ignition switch is turned to the
utes. (CVT) or the gearshift lever (Twin Clutch “LOCK” position until the engine stops, the
The transaxle will warm up, and you will be SST) in the “P” (PARK) position, and gears inside the Twin Clutch SST disengage
so that the engine will start smoothly the
able to start normally. then turn the ignition switch to the
next time it is started.
Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up “LOCK” position to stop the engine. Two clutches installed in the Twin Clutch
operation. SST alternately engage and disengage to
achieve smooth shifting.
Idle speed in high altitude area In addition, the gear on the side with the free
clutch is engaged, therefore, quick shifting is
N00547600028
performed.
At high altitude locations, the idle speed may If the engine was stopped with the gear
be higher. This is done in order to stabilize engaged like this, it would provide resistance
the idle speed when the power steering sys- the next time the engine is started. Therefore,
tem and other systems operate. It does not the gear disengages in the approximately 1-
indicate a malfunction. second period until the engine stops.
SST, do not operate the gearshift lever or the
Stopping the engine accelerator pedal for approximately 1 second
N00542300059 until the engine stops.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Fully engage the parking brake while
depressing the brake pedal.

Turbocharger operation (if so equipped)
NOTE Turbocharger operation (if so

equipped)
SST, if the temperature inside the engine
N00537300064
compartment is high, the cooling fans (A)
will continue to operate for some time even
if the engine is stopped. CAUTION
Therefore, the operation sound of the cooling  Do not run the engine at high speeds (for
fans may be heard even after the engine is
stopped. This sound is normal and does not
example, by revving it or by accelerating
rapidly) immediately after starting it.
5
indicate a malfunction.  Do not stop the engine immediately after
After operating for a period of time, the cool- high-speed or uphill driving. First allow the
ing fans will stop automatically. 1- Air compressor
engine to idle to give the turbocharger a
chance to cool down.
2- Compressed air
 Engine oil must be properly maintained to
3- Cylinder
avoid engine and/or turbocharger damage. 4- Turbo fin
To better protect your engine and turbo- 5- Turbine
charger, use fully synthetic engine oil. 6- Exhaust gas
Turbocharger Manual transaxle (if so

equipped)
The turbocharger increases engine power by N00512700113
pushing large amounts of air into the engine’s
*: Front of the vehicle cylinders. The finned parts inside the turbo- The shift pattern below is shown on the gear-
charger turn at extremely high speeds and are shift lever. Press the clutch pedal all the way
subjected to extremely high temperatures. down while shifting gears.
They are lubricated by engine oil and cooled
by engine oil and coolant. If the engine oil is
not replaced at the specified intervals, the
bearings may seize or emit abnormal noise.

Manual transaxle (if so equipped)
CAUTION Changing gears while the vehi-

 Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal cle is moving
because this will cause premature clutch N00548101027
wear or damage.
 Do not coast in the “N” (Neutral) position Always use care to change the gear with the
(illegal in many states). vehicle speed matched to the engine speed.
 Do not use the gearshift lever as a handrest, Proper shifting will improve fuel economy
and prolong engine life.
5 because this can result in premature wear of
the transaxle shift forks. Avoid shifting down at high speed, as this
may cause excessive engine speed (the
tachometer needle into the red zone) and
NOTE damage the engine.
NOTE  If it is hard to shift into 1st, depress the
 During cold weather, shifting may be diffi- clutch pedal a second time; the shift will then
cult until the transaxle lubricant has warmed be easier.
NOTE
up. This is normal and not harmful to the  The gearshift indicator shows recommended
 To shift into reverse from 5th gear, move the
transaxle. gearshift points for fuel-efficient driving. It
gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position,
and then shift it into reverse. shows a “ ” when an upshift is recom-
mended, and it shows a “ ” when a down-
To start shift is recommended.
Proper shift points
Press the clutch pedal all the way down and N00537400049
shift into 1st or “R” (Reverse) position. Then Always use care to change the gear with the
gradually release the clutch pedal while vehicle speed matched to the engine speed.
depressing the accelerator pedal. Proper shifting will improve fuel economy
and prolong engine life.
CAUTION
 Do not move the gearshift lever into reverse CAUTION
while the vehicle is moving forward; doing  Avoid downshifting that may cause the
so will damage the transaxle. tachometer pointer to enter the red zone.
This puts the engine at risk of being dam-
aged.

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)
Upshifting Shift point Upshift speeds Driving precautions

N00512900131 4th gear to 5th gear 45 mph (72 km/h) N00513100231
For the best fuel economy and performance in  Do not use the gearshift lever as a han-
using your manual transaxle, upshift as listed drest. This can result in premature wear of
Downshifting the transaxle shift forks.
below. N00513000096
At low altitude locations, shift at the vehicle It is recommended that you downshift to a
Maximum possible driving speed
speeds listed. Upshifting earlier during cruise lower gear when needed to maintain the 5
conditions (relatively steady speeds) will desired speed, according to the table.
improve your fuel economy. Avoid downshifting at too high a speed. The Shift Maximum possible driving
engine may suffer damage. points speed
Upshift speeds To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake 1st gear 31 mph (50 km/h)
Shift point life, shift down to 2nd or 1st when descend-
Acceleration Cruise 2nd gear 62 mph (100 km/h)
ing a steep hill.
1st gear to 15 mph (24 15 mph (24 Downshifting is also important to avoid “lug- 3rd gear 87 mph (140 km/h)
2nd gear km/h) km/h) ging” the engine at too low a speed, such as 4th gear 121 mph (195 km/h)
2nd gear to 28 mph (45 19 mph (31 when turning a corner or when driving up a
3rd gear km/h) km/h) steep hill.
 The table above shows the maximum rec-
3rd gear to 36 mph (58 33 mph (53 ommended driving speed for in each gear.
4th gear km/h) km/h) Recommended downshifting speed Do not drive near or at these speeds for
4th gear to 45 mph (72 45 mph (72 prolonged periods of time.
5th gear km/h) km/h) Downshifting speed Shift point
Under 20 mph Shift down from cur- Continuously variable
At high altitude locations, upshift as listed (32 km/h) rent gear to 2nd gear. transmission (CVT) (if so
below. 20 to 30 mph (32 to Shift down from cur- equipped)
48 km/h) rent gear to 3rd gear.
Shift point Upshift speeds N00513200229
1st gear to 2nd gear 15 mph (24 km/h) The CVT will automatically and continuously
2nd gear to 3rd gear 25 mph (40 km/h) change its gear ratio depending on road and
3rd gear to 4th gear 40 mph (64 km/h)


driving conditions. This helps achieve 2. Move the selector lever to the desired
smooth driving and excellent fuel efficiency. position.
Also you can manually shift up and shift
down the transmission. Refer to “Sports
mode” on page 5-66.
NOTE
 The selector lever cannot be moved from “P”
(PARK) to another position if the ignition
DRIVING UPHILL switch is at the “LOCK” or “ACC” position,
5 or the key has been removed, or if the brake
pedal is not pressed and held down.
The transmission prevents unnecessary
upshifts even when the accelerator pedal is
released and ensures smooth driving.
Except for vehicles with manual
gate
DRIVING DOWNHILL
The CVT has 2 forward selector positions
According to the conditions, the transmission and 1 reverse selector position.
will automatically shift to a lower gear ratio The CVT selects an optimum ratio automati-
to achieve stronger engine braking. This may cally when the selector lever is in the “D”
help reduce your need to use the service (DRIVE) or “L” (LOW) position, depending
brake. on the speed of the vehicle and the position of
the accelerator pedal.
Selector lever operation The selector lever has 5 positions.
N00513800397
With the brake pedal depressed,
set the selector lever in the gate to
As an additional safety precaution, models
operate.
equipped with a CVT have a shift-lock device
that holds the selector lever in the “P” Set the selector lever in the gate to
(PARK) position. To move the selector lever operate.
from the “P” (PARK) position to another
position, follow the steps below.
1. Press and hold the brake pedal down.


(DRIVE) position, depending on the speed of
WARNING the vehicle and the position of the accelerator
 Always depress the brake pedal when
pedal.
shifting the selector lever into a selector
The selector lever (A) has 2 gates; the main
position from the “P” (PARK) or “N”
(NEUTRAL) position. gate (B) and the manual gate (C).
When beginning to drive, do not shift the
selector lever from the “P” (PARK) or
“N” (NEUTRAL) position while depress-
ing the accelerator pedal.
5
Doing so is dangerous because the vehicle
will “jump” forward or backward.
With the brake pedal depressed,

NOTE set the selector lever in the gate to
 To ensure proper transmission operation,
operate.
stop at each detent position when shifting. Set the selector lever in the gate to
After shifting, check the position in the operate.
 If the brake pedal is not depressed and held, NOTE
the shift-lock device activates to prevent the  In the main gate, the selector lever has 4 WARNING
selector lever from being moved from the positions.  Always depress the brake pedal when
“P” (PARK) position.  For information on manual gate operation, shifting the selector lever into a selector
 For a shift indicated by in the illustration, please refer to “Sports mode” on page 5-66. position from the “P” (PARK) or “N”
depress the brake pedal before moving the (NEUTRAL) position.
selector lever. If you attempt to move the When beginning to drive, do not shift the
selector lever before depressing the brake selector lever from the “P” (PARK) or
pedal, the selector lever will be immovable. “N” (NEUTRAL) position while depress-
ing the accelerator pedal. Doing so is dan-
gerous because the vehicle will “jump”
Vehicles with manual gate forward or backward.
The CVT selects an optimum ratio automati-

cally when the selector lever is in the “D”


1. Make sure the parking brake is fully 6. Insert a screwdriver in the shift-lock
NOTE applied. release hole (B). Shift the selector lever to
 To ensure proper transmission operation,
2. Stop the engine if it is running. the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while
stop at each detent position when shifting.
3. Insert a screwdriver with a cloth over its pressing the screwdriver down.
After shifting, check the position in the
multi-information display. tip into the notch (A) of the cover. Pry
 If the brake pedal is not depressed and held, gently as shown to remove the cover.
the shift-lock device activates to prevent the
5 selector lever from being moved from the
“P” (PARK) position.
 For a shift indicated by in the illustration,
depress the brake pedal before moving the
selector lever. If you attempt to move the
selector lever before depressing the brake
pedal, the selector lever will be immovable.
When the selector lever cannot be

shifted from the “P” (PARK) posi- 4. Depress the brake pedal with the right
Selector lever position display
N00513900428
tion foot.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” When the ignition switch is turned to the
N00563100021
position. “ON” position, the selector lever position is
When the selector lever cannot be shifted shown on the multi-information display.
from the “P” (PARK) position to another
position while the brake pedal is pressed and NOTE
held down with the ignition switch at the  For vehicles with the Free-hand Advanced
Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), turn the
“ON” position, the battery may be flat or the
ignition switch to the “ACC” position with
shift-lock mechanism may be malfunction-
the emergency key if the vehicle battery is
ing. flat.
Immediately have your vehicle checked by an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice.
If you need to move the vehicle, shift the
selector lever as follows.

Warning display CAUTION CAUTION

N00514000240  If a malfunction occurs in the CVT while [When warning display is showing]
Type 1 driving, the warning display or the It may be that there is something unusual
warning display will appear on the informa- happening in the CVT, causing a safety
or tion screen in the multi-information display. device to activate. Have your vehicle
In this case, immediately park your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
in a safe place and follow these procedures: Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
Type 2 choice as soon as possible. 5
[When warning display is showing]
or The continuously variable transmission Selector lever positions
(CVT) fluid is overheating. The engine con-
N00514200372
trol may activate to lower the CVT fluid tem-
When the warning display or the warn- perature, causing the engine revolutions and
ing display appears on the information screen vehicle speed to decrease. In this case, take “P” PARK
in the multi-information display while you one of the following procedures:
are driving, there could be a malfunction in • Slow down your vehicle. This position locks the transmission to pre-
the CVT. • Stop your vehicle in a safe place, put the vent the vehicle from moving. The engine can
selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position, be started from the “PARK” position.
and open the engine hood with the engine
running to allow the engine to cool down.
“R” REVERSE
After a while, confirm that the warning
display is no longer showing. It is safe to
continue driving if the display is no longer Move the lever to this position only after the
showing. If the warning display remains or vehicle has come to a complete stop.
flashes frequently, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
CAUTION
choice.  Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R”
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
motion. If the lever is shifted into the “P”
(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position while
the vehicle is in motion, the transmission
may be damaged.


the selector lever from the “D” (DRIVE)
“N” NEUTRAL CAUTION position into the manual gate (1). To return to
 To prevent transmission damage, never shift
“D” (DRIVE) operation, push the selector
At this position, the transmission is disen- into the “D” (DRIVE) position from the “R”
lever back into the main gate (2).
gaged. It is the same as the neutral position on (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
motion. In sports mode, rapid shifting is possible sim-
a manual transaxle and should be used when ply by operating the selector lever or spor-
the vehicle is not moving for an extended tronic steering wheel paddle shifter.
length of time during driving, such as in a Unlike the manual transaxle, sports mode
5 traffic jam. “L” LOW (except for vehicles with
allows shifting with the accelerator pedal
manual gate) depressed.
WARNING
This position is for driving up very steep hills
 Never move the selector lever to the “N”
and for engine braking at low speeds when
NOTE
(NEUTRAL) position while driving since
 For vehicles equipped with the sportronic
you could accidentally slip it into the “P” driving down steep hills.
steering wheel paddle shifter, sports mode
(PARK) or “R”(REVERSE) position,
can be operated even when the selector lever
damaging the transmission.
WARNING is in the main gate (2). Also, you can return
 To prevent the vehicle from rolling when to the “D” operation in any of following
 This position can be used for maximum
stopped on a slope, the engine should be ways. When returning to “D” operation, the
engine braking.
started in the “P” (PARK) position, not in selector lever position display will change to
Be very careful not to shift into “L”
“N” (NEUTRAL) position. “D” (DRIVE) position.
(LOW) suddenly. Sudden engine braking
 To prevent rolling, always keep your foot • Pull the +(SHIFT UP) side sportronic steer-
may cause the tires to skid.
on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in ing wheel paddle shifter forward (toward
Select this position according to the road
“N” (NEUTRAL) position, or when shift- the driver) for over 2 seconds.
conditions and vehicle speed.
ing into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
• Stop the vehicle
tion.
• Push the selector lever from the “D”
Sports mode (if so equipped) (DRIVE) position into the manual gate (A)
and push the selector lever back into the
“D” DRIVE N00514400420
main gate (B).
This position is used for most city and high- Vehicles with manual gate
way driving. The transmission will automati-
cally and continuously change its gear ratio Whether the vehicle is stationary or in
depending on road and driving conditions. motion, sports mode is selected by pushing
SHIFT UP CAUTION NOTE

SHIFT  By rapidly moving the selector lever or spor-  Move the selector lever gently between the
DOWN tronic steering wheel paddle shifter to the “- manual and main gates and between posi-
(SHIFT DOWN)” side twice, it is possible to tions in the manual gate. And do not operate
SHIFT skip one shift range (i.e., 3rd to 1st or 4th to sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter vio-
DOWN 2nd). Since sudden engine braking or accel- lently. Excessive force could damage the
eration can cause a loss of traction, down- selector lever or sportronic steering wheel
SHIFT shifts must be made carefully in accordance
with the vehicle’s speed.
paddle shifter.
5
UP
 On vehicles with a sportronic steering wheel
Except for vehicles with manual
paddle shifter, shift ranges may not change
+ (SHIFT UP) when the lateral paddle shifters are operated gate
Transmission shifts up once by each opera- at the same time.
tion. While driving with the selector lever in the
“D” (DRIVE), sports mode can be selected
- (SHIFT DOWN) NOTE by pulling one of the sportronic steering
Transmission shifts down once by each  Shift ranges can only be selected in a for- wheel shifters toward you.
operation. ward direction from 1st to 6th. To reverse or In sports mode, rapid shifting is possible sim-
park the vehicle, move the selector lever to ply by operating the sportronic steering wheel
the “R” (REVERSE) or “P” (PARK) posi-
paddle shifter.
CAUTION tion.
Unlike the manual transaxle, sports mode
 Upward shifts do not take place automati-  To maintain good running performance, the
transmission may refuse to perform an
allows shifting with the accelerator pedal
cally in sports mode. The driver must make depressed.
upward shifts in accordance with prevailing upshift when the selector lever or sportronic
road conditions, making sure the engine rpm steering wheel paddle shifter is moved to the
remains below the red zone on the tachome- “+(SHIFT UP)” position at certain vehicle NOTE
ter. speeds. Also, to prevent over-revving of the  To return to “D” (DRIVE) operation, pull the
engine, the transmission may refuse to per- sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter on
form a downshift when the shift lever or
the +(UP) side for longer than 2 seconds, or
sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter is park the vehicle to change the selector lever
moved to the “-(SHIFT DOWN)” position at position indicator to “D” (DRIVE) and
certain vehicle speeds. When this happens, a
return to “D” (DRIVE) operation.
buzzer sounds to indicate that a downshift is
not going to take place.

NOTE CAUTION NOTE

 When the sportronic steering wheel paddle  By rapidly moving the sportronic steering  Do not operate sportronic steering wheel
shifter is operated with the selector lever in wheel paddle shifter to the “- (SHIFT paddle shifter violently. Excessive force
the “L” (LOW) position, gear is not shifted DOWN)” side twice, it is possible to skip could damage the sportronic steering wheel
because the selectable shift range is limited. one shift range (i.e., 3rd to 1st or 4th to 2nd). paddle shifter.
Since sudden engine braking or acceleration
can cause a loss of traction, downshifts must
Sports mode display
5 be made carefully in accordance with the
vehicle’s speed. N00538800170
SHIFT DOWN  Shift ranges may not change when the lateral In sports mode, the currently selected shift
paddle shifters are operated at the same time. range is displayed on the information screen
in the multi-information display.
SHIFT UP
NOTE
 Shift ranges can only be selected in a for-
ward direction from 1st to 6th. To reverse or
park the vehicle, move the selector lever to
+ (SHIFT UP) the “R” (REVERSE) or “P” (PARK) posi-
Transmission shifts up once by each operation.
tion.  To maintain good running performance, the
transmission may refuse to perform an
- (SHIFT DOWN) upshift when the sportronic steering wheel
Transmission shifts down once by each paddle shifter is moved to the “+(SHIFT
operation. UP)” position at certain vehicle speeds.
Also, to prevent over-revving of the engine,
the transmission may refuse to perform a
downshift when the sportronic steering
CAUTION wheel paddle shifter is moved to the “-
 Upward shifts do not take place automati- (SHIFT DOWN)” position at certain vehicle
cally in sports mode. The driver must make speeds. When this happens, a buzzer sounds
upward shifts in accordance with prevailing to indicate that a downshift is not going to
road conditions, making sure the engine rpm take place.
remains below the red zone on the tachome-
ter.


For longer waiting periods with the engine
Operation of the CVT CAUTION running, the selector lever should be placed in
N00514500333  Do not rev the engine with the brake pedal
the “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
pressed when the vehicle is stationary.
CAUTION This can damage the CVT.
 Before selecting a position with the engine Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal CAUTION
running and the vehicle stationary, fully while holding down the brake pedal with the  To avoid transmission overheating, never try
depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehi- selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) position, to keep your vehicle stationary on a hill by
cle from creeping.
Do not release the brakes until you are ready
the engine revolutions may not rise as high
as when performing the same operation with
using the accelerator pedal. Always apply
the parking brake and/or service brake.
5
to drive away. The vehicle will begin to the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL)  Unexpected acceleration may occur if the
move as soon as the CVT is engaged, espe- position. selector lever is in a position other than “P”
cially when the engine speed is high (fast (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL).
idle or air conditioning on). Before driving off from a stop, make sure
Passing acceleration
 Depress the brake pedal with the right foot. that the selector lever is in “D” (DRIVE)
N00514900063
Using the left foot could cause driver move- position or “Sports mode” position.
ment delay in case of an emergency. To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE)
 To prevent sudden acceleration, never run position (when passing another vehicle) push
the engine at high rpms when shifting from the accelerator to the floor if it is safe to do so Parking
the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi- in traffic conditions. The CVT will automati- N00515100062
tion. cally downshift.
 Operating the accelerator pedal while the To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
other foot is resting on the brake pedal will plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,
affect braking efficiency and may cause pre-
NOTE and then move the selector lever to the “P”
mature wear of brake pads.  In sports mode, downshifts do not take place (PARK) position.
 Use the selector lever in the correct shift when the accelerator is depressed all the way If you are going to leave the vehicle unat-
to the floor.
position in accordance with driving condi- tended, always switch off the engine and
tions. carry the key.
Never coast downhill backward in the driv-
ing shift position { “D” (DRIVE), “L” Waiting
(LOW) or sports mode} or coast forward in N00515000074
the “R” (REVERSE) position.
For short waiting periods, such as at traffic
Engine stopping and increased brake pedal
and steering effort could lead to an accident.
lights, the vehicle can be left in selector lever
position and held stationary with the service
brake.
Twin Clutch SST (Sportronic Shift Transmission) (if so equipped)

2. Once the vehicle is moving on a level Manual shift  P.5-76
NOTE road, move the selector lever back to “D”
 On a slope, be sure to apply the parking
(DRIVE) position.
brake before moving the selector lever to the Gearshift lever operation
“P” (PARK) position. If you move the selec- N00539800047
tor lever to the “P” (PARK) position before NOTE As an additional safety precaution, models
applying the parking brake, it may be diffi-
 When the warning display or the equipped with a Twin Clutch SST have a
cult to disengage the selector lever from the
warning display appears on the information shift-lock device that holds the gearshift lever
5 “P” (PARK) position when next you drive
the vehicle, requiring application of a strong screen in the multi-information display, there in the “P” (PARK) position. To move the
force to the selector lever to move from the could be a malfunction in the CVT. Refer to gearshift lever from the “P” (PARK) position
“P” (PARK) position. “Continuously variable transmission (CVT): to another position, follow the steps below.
Warning display” on page 5-65.
1. Press and hold the brake pedal down.
When the CVT makes no speed 2. Move the gearshift lever to the desired
change Twin Clutch SST (Spor- position.
N00515300208 tronic Shift Transmission) (if
If the CVT does not shift while driving, or so equipped)
NOTE
your vehicle does not pick up enough speed  The gearshift lever cannot be moved from
N00539700046
when starting on an uphill slope, there may be “P” (PARK) to another position if the igni-
tion switch is at the “LOCK” or “ACC” posi-
something unusual happening in the transmis- The Twin Clutch SST is a transmission that,
tion, or the key has been removed, or if the
sion, causing a safety device to activate. Have through integrated control of the engine and
brake pedal is not pressed and held down.
your vehicle checked at an authorized Mit- transmission, is able to achieve both the
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of smooth shifting of an automatic transaxle and
your choice as soon as possible. the acceleration and fuel economy close to a The Twin Clutch SST has 6 forward gears
manual transaxle. In addition, the control and 1 reverse gear.
1. If your vehicle has difficulty moving mode can be selected from two types to suit The individual gears are selected automati-
uphill, shift the selector lever into “L” the driving conditions. cally, depending on the position of the gear-
(LOW) position (except for vehicles with Together with manual shifting, the transmis- shift lever, the speed of the vehicle and the
sport mode) or 2nd shift range of the sion is capable of responding to a variety of position of the accelerator pedal.
sports mode. driving circumstances. The gearshift lever (A) has 2 gates; the main
This method might not work depending shift gate (B) and the manual shift gate (C).
on the type of transmission malfunction. Twin Clutch SST control mode  P.5-75

WARNING
 If the pull-ring is always pulled up when
using the gearshift lever, the gearshift
lever may be accidentally shifted into the
“P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position.
Do not pull up the pull-ring when making
shifts shown by in the illustration.
 Always depress the brake pedal when 5
shifting the gearshift lever into the other
position from the “P” (PARK) or “N”
(NEUTRAL) position.
When beginning to drive, do not shift the
NOTE gearshift lever from the “P” (PARK) or
 In the main shift gate, the gearshift lever has “N” (NEUTRAL) position while depress-
4 positions. ing the accelerator pedal. Doing so is dan-
 For information on manual shift gate opera- gerous because the vehicle will “jump”
The pull-ring (D) must be pulled
tion, please refer to “Manual shift” on page forward or backward.
up while the brake pedal is
5-76.
depressed to move the gearshift
lever.
NOTE
The gearshift lever will move
 For a shift indicated by in the illustration,
without pulling up the pull-ring depress the brake pedal before moving the
(D). gearshift lever. If you attempt to move the
The pull-ring (D) must be pulled gearshift lever before depressing the brake
up to move the gearshift lever. pedal, the gearshift lever will be immovable.
 Do not accelerate immediately after moving
the gearshift lever. It may take some time for
the transmission to shift to the selected gear.
 When the gearshift lever is operated when
the Twin Clutch SST fluid temperature is
low, the time required to shift to the selected
gear may be longer than usual.

Gearshift lever position display When the gearshift lever position If the gearshift lever position dis-
N00539900110 display blinks play is not showing
When the ignition switch is turned to the N00562500015
“ON” position, the gearshift lever position is When the gearshift lever is placed in the “R” There may be a problem in the Twin Clutch
shown on the multi-information display. (REVERSE) position, the gearshift lever SST.
position display on the multi-information dis- If this occurs, the safety device operates and
play may blink and the vehicle will not move prevents the vehicle from moving. Therefore,
5 because the gears in the transmission have perform the following procedure.
not engaged.
If this occurs, perform the following proce- 1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop
dure. the engine.
2. Restart the engine.
1. Depress the brake pedal with your right
foot and place the gearshift lever in the If the gearshift lever position display is
“N” (NEUTRAL) position. shown and the vehicle can move after this
2. Place the gearshift lever in the “R” procedure is performed, there is no malfunc-
(REVERSE) position, and confirm that tion.
In addition, when the vehicle is driven with the gearshift lever position display stops If the gearshift lever position display is not
the gearshift lever in the “D” (DRIVE) posi- blinking. shown and the vehicle cannot move, or if this
tion, the forward gear number is shown. 3. Repeat 1 and 2 above if the gearshift lever problem occurs repeatedly, have the vehicle
position display continues to blink. checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
soon as possible.
WARNING
through  To avoid unintended vehicle movement,
keep brake pedal applied with your right
foot and do not depress the accelerator
pedal, while the gearshift lever position
display is blinking.


authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a to function as if the gearshift lever was in the
Warning display repair facility of your choice. “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
N00540000049
At this time, the vehicle temporarily cannot
CAUTION be driven.
or If this occurs, take the following measures.
 When warning display is shown, your
vehicle may not accelerate normally, even if 1. Depress the brake pedal and stop the vehi-
When the warning display or the warn- the accelerator pedal is depressed. Use cau- cle in a safe place.
ing display appears on the information screen tion when necessary to drive the vehicle. 2. Place the gearshift lever in the “P” 5
in the multi-information display while you (PARK) position, and then open the
are driving, take the following measures. engine hood with the engine running to
NOTE cool the engine.
 If the vehicle is continuously driven on hilly
When warning display is show- 3. After a while, check that the warning
roads or in an aggressive manner involving
ing high engine rpm, sudden acceleration and/or display has gone out, and then stop the
N00543100054 deceleration, the vehicle transmission may engine if the warning display has gone
The temperature of the Twin Clutch SST fluid vibrate. out.
is high. This vibration is to alert the driver that the 4. If the engine can be restarted, the vehicle
If this occurs, take one of the following mea- Twin Clutch SST fluid temperature has risen.
can be driven normally.
It does not indicate a malfunction.
sures.
If this occurs, perform the same measures for
If the warning display remains on or comes
 Reduce the vehicle speed. when the warning appears. If the vibra- on frequently, have the vehicle checked by an
 Stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the tion stops, the vehicle can be driven nor- authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
gearshift lever in the “P” (PARK) posi- mally. repair facility of your choice.
tion, and then open the engine hood with
the engine running to cool the engine. If vehicle is driven with warning dis- When warning display is show-
played
After a while, check that the warning dis-
ing
play has gone out. If the vehicle continues to be driven after the N00543200026
If the display goes out, the vehicle can be warning display appears, and the tempera- A safety device in the Twin Clutch SST has
driven normally. ture of the Twin Clutch SST fluid continues been activated due to a possible problem in
If the warning display remains on or comes to rise, the transmission protection control the Twin Clutch SST or in the engine elec-
on frequently, have the vehicle checked by an may be activated and cause the transmission tronic control module.


If this occurs, perform the following proce-
“R” REVERSE WARNING
dure.
 To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop Move the lever to this position only after the stopped on a slope, the engine should be
the engine. vehicle has come to a complete stop. started in the “P” (PARK) position.
Although the engine can be started when
2. Restart the engine.
the vehicle is in the “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
CAUTION tion, for safety reasons, do not start the
If the warning display goes out, there is no
5 abnormal condition.
 Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R”
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
engine in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
 Always keep your foot on the brake pedal
However, if the warning display remains on motion. If the lever is shifted into the “P” when the vehicle is in “N” (NEUTRAL)
or comes on frequently, have the vehicle (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position while position, or when shifting into or out of
checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors the vehicle is in motion, the transmission “N” (NEUTRAL) position, to prevent roll-
may be damaged. ing.
soon as possible.
“D” DRIVE
“N” NEUTRAL
CAUTION
This position is used for most city and high-
 When warning display is shown, your At this position, the transmission is disen- way driving. Engine shifting and braking are
vehicle may not accelerate normally, even if gaged. It is the same as the neutral position on
the accelerator pedal is depressed. Use cau-
done automatically as needed, depending on
a manual transaxle and should be used when road conditions.
tion when necessary to drive the vehicle. the vehicle is not moving for an extended
length of time during driving, such as in a
traffic jam. CAUTION
Gearshift lever positions (Main  Never shift into the “D” (DRIVE) position
from the “R” (REVERSE) position while the
shift gate) WARNING vehicle is in motion.
N00540100037
 Never move the gearshift lever to the “N” If the lever is shifted into the “D” (DRIVE)
(NEUTRAL) position while driving since from the “R” (REVERSE) position while the
“P” PARK you could accidentally slip it into the “P” vehicle is in motion, the transmission may be
(PARK) or “R”(REVERSE) position and damaged.
the engine speed could rise, damaging the
This position locks the transmission to pre-
transmission.
vent the vehicle from moving. The engine can
be started from the “PARK” position.

NOTE Twin NOTE

 For information on manual shift gate opera-
Clutch SST  When continuously driving on closed circuit
Characteristic
tion, please refer to “Manual shift” on page control tracks or at other locations where the engine
5-76. mode is operated at high speeds and under a heavy
 When the engine is cold, upshifts occur at a Control mode for driving on load, the Twin Clutch SST fluid temperature
higher vehicle speed than when the engine is mountain roads, roads with will have a tendency to rise.
warm. In this case, if the temperature rises too high,
uphill and downhill slopes,
This control is performed to quickly warm
up the engine. It does not indicate a malfunc-
and freeways with long the warning display will appear on the 5
downhill slopes where engine information screen in the multi-information
tion. After the vehicle has been driven for a display to alert the driver.
while, upshifts will occur at the regular braking is necessary.
engine speeds. Compared to “NORMAL” If the warning display appears, be sure to
SPORT mode, shifting occurs at refer to “Warning display” on page 5-73 and
higher engine speeds and is follow the appropriate measures.
quicker. In addition, quick  The Twin Clutch SST control mode can be
Twin Clutch SST control mode selected both when “D” range operation is
N00540200067
downshifting is possible
when the accelerator pedal is selected and when manual shifting is
Select the control mode from the following depressed for quick accelera- selected.
two types to suit the driving conditions. tion or when the brakes are  If you select “SPORT” mode while the
engine is cold, the transmission may shift up
applied.
Twin at different speeds compared to that when the
Clutch SST engine is warm.
Characteristic This is simply the operation of the control
control
system to warm the engine quickly. It does
mode
not indicate a malfunction.
Control mode for normal  For slippery road surfaces, such as roads
NORMAL driving on local roads, free- with accumulated snow, “NORMAL” mode
(Control ways, and the like. is recommended for smooth shifting at low
mode when Smooth shifting is performed engine speeds.
engine is at low engine speeds for eco-
started) nomical driving with good
ride quality.

Twin Clutch SST control mode To shift from “SPORT” mode to “NOR-
switch MAL” mode
N00540300055
While the vehicle is stopped or being driven,
When the ignition switch is set to the “ON” push the Twin Clutch SST control mode
position, operate the Twin Clutch SST control switch rearward.
mode switch (A) to change the control mode.
5 NOTE
 If the Twin Clutch SST control mode switch
is continuously pressed after a control mode
has been selected, an erroneous operation
prevention function operates and the control
mode is automatically set to the “NORMAL”
mode.
Manual shift
N00540500044
If you would like to select a control mode
again, return the ignition switch to the Using the gearshift lever (A) or the sportronic
“ACC” or “LOCK” position and restart the steering wheel shifters (B), shifting can be
engine. Then, push the Twin Clutch SST performed manually.
control mode switch.
When the engine is started, the control mode
is automatically set to the “NORMAL” mode.
Use the following procedures to change the Twin Clutch SST control mode
control mode. display
N00540400072
To shift from “NORMAL” mode to
When the ignition switch is set to the “ON”
“SPORT” mode
position, the currently selected control mode
While the vehicle is stopped or being driven, is displayed on the multi-information display.
push the Twin Clutch SST control mode
switch forward.


Shifting can be performed even while the
accelerator pedal is depressed.
NOTE
 If the gearshift lever or sportronic steering
This allows the driver to enjoy sporty driving,
wheel shifters are operated repeatedly, the
such as quick cornering, by nimbly down-
transmission will also shift repeatedly.
shifting to reduce vehicle speed just before
 In order to ensure driving performance,
entering a curve. upshifting may not occur depending on the
vehicle speed even if the gearshift lever or
CAUTION sportronic steering wheel shifters are oper-
5
 When manually shifting while the vehicle is ated. In addition, in order to prevent exces-
being driven, select the correct shift position sive engine speed, the buzzer sounds and
to control the engine speed so that the downshifting may not occur depending on
tachometer indicator does not enter the red the vehicle speed even if the gearshift lever
zone. or sportronic steering wheel shifters are Shifting up and shifting down
operated.
 Sudden engine braking and rapid accelera-
tion can cause the vehicle to skid. Shift down  When driving in an aggressive manner Each time the gearshift lever is pulled rear-
according to road conditions and vehicle involving high engine rpm, sudden accelera- ward, the transmission shifts up 1 gear.
speed. tion and/or deceleration, the Twin Clutch In addition, each time the gearshift lever is
SST could take longer to shift due to higher pushed forward, the transmission shifts down
 If both the left and right sportronic steering
fluid temperatures. 1 gear.
wheel shifters are operated at the same time,
the transmission may not change gears.
Shifting using the gearshift lever
N00540600016 SHIFT DOWN
NOTE Selecting manual shifting
 Only the forward gears 1 to 6 can be
selected. While the vehicle is stopped or being driven,
To reverse or park, place the gearshift lever
move the gearshift lever from the “D” SHIFT UP
in the “R” (REVERSE) or “P” (PARK) posi-
(DRIVE) position in the main shift gate
tion.
toward the driver’s seat to select manual
 During manual shifting, downshifting will be
performed automatically when the vehicle shifting.
slows down and the transmission will down-
shift to 1st gear before the vehicle stops.

NOTE Shifting using the sportronic steer-

 After manual shifting is selected using the ing wheel shifters
gearshift lever, shifting up and down can also N00540700017
be performed using the sportronic steering
wheel shifters. Selecting manual shifting
While the vehicle is stopped or being driven

Returning to “D” range operation
with the gearshift lever in the “D” (DRIVE)
5 Move the gearshift lever toward the front pas- position, manual shifting can be selected by
senger’s seat to return to automated shifting. pulling one of the sportronic steering wheel
shifters toward you.
- (SHIFT DOWN) + (SHIFT UP) Shifting down
Each time the - (SHIFT DOWN) sportronic

steering wheel shifter is pulled, the transmis-
sion shifts down 1 gear.
NOTE
 When the gearshift lever is moved to the “D”
(DRIVE) position from the manual shift
gate, it may automatically select a gear dif-
ferent from the gear selected during manual
shifting depending on vehicle speed or driv- Shifting up
ing conditions.
Each time the + (SHIFT UP) sportronic steer-
ing wheel shifter is pulled, the transmission
shifts up 1 gear.

NOTE NOTE Operation of the Twin Clutch

 After manual shifting is selected using the  When the transmission returns to “D” range SST
sportronic steering wheel shifters, shifting up operation from manual shifting, it may auto- N00540800047
and down can also be performed using the matically shift up or down from the gear
gearshift lever. selected using manual shifting depending on CAUTION
the vehicle speed or driving conditions.
 Before selecting a position with the engine
Returning to “D” range operation  If manual shifting is selected using the spor-
running and the vehicle stationary, fully
When the gearshift lever is in the “D”

tronic steering wheel shifters, “D” range
operation will again be selected by moving
depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehi- 5
cle from creeping.
(DRIVE) position, pull the + (SHIFT UP) the gearshift lever from the “D” (DRIVE)
Do not release the brakes until you are ready
sportronic steering wheel shifter toward you position toward the driver’s seat, then return
to drive away. The vehicle will begin to
for 2 seconds or more to return to “D” range it toward the front passenger’s seat.
move as soon as the Twin Clutch SST is
operation. engaged.
Manual shift display  Depress the brake pedal with the right foot.
N00543000079 Using the left foot could cause driver move-
ment delay in case of an emergency.
In manual shift, the currently selected gear is
 To prevent sudden acceleration, never run
displayed on the multi-information display.
the engine at high rpms when shifting from
the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
tion.
 Operating the accelerator pedal while the
through other foot is resting on the brake pedal will
affect braking efficiency, may cause prema-
ture wear of brake pads and may cause
engine damage.
 Use the gearshift lever in the correct shift
position in accordance with driving condi-
NOTE tions.
 If manual shifting is selected using the spor- Never coast downhill backward in the driv-
tronic steering wheel shifters when the gear- ing shift position { “D” (DRIVE) or manual
shift lever is in the “D” (DRIVE) position, shifting} or coast forward in the “R”
the transmission will automatically return to (REVERSE) position.
“D” range operation before the vehicle stops. Engine stopping and increased brake pedal
and steering effort could lead to an accident.

CAUTION Uphill/downhill driving CAUTION

 Do not rev the engine with the brake pedal N00541600026 • If the vehicle is continuously driven at low
pressed when the vehicle is stationary. speeds using the tendency of the vehicle to
DRIVING UPHILL
This can cause sudden acceleration and dam- creep forward, the vehicle will vibrate or
age the Twin Clutch SST. The Twin Clutch SST may not upshift to a the warning display will appear on the
Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal
higher shift position if the computer deter- information screen in the multi-information
while holding down the brake pedal with the
mines the current speed cannot be maintained display to alert the driver that the Twin
5 gearshift lever in the “D” (DRIVE) position,
the engine revolutions may not rise as high once a higher shift position is engaged. Clutch SST fluid temperature has risen.
For smoother vehicle performance, if you After that, if the Twin Clutch SST fluid
as when performing the same operation with
release the throttle while climbing a steep temperature rises even higher, the transmis-
the gearshift lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL)
sion protection control will operate.
position. grade, the Twin Clutch SST may not upshift.
If this occurs, the vehicle may suddenly
This is normal, as the computer is temporarily reverse as if the gearshift lever was in the
Passing acceleration preventing shifting. After reaching the top of “N” (NEUTRAL) position and cause an
N00540900019
the hill, normal shift function will resume. accident.
To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE) If the warning display appears or the
position (when passing another vehicle) push CAUTION transmission protection control operates,
the accelerator to the floor if it is safe to do so  Do not use the tendency of the vehicle to refer to “When warning display is
in traffic conditions. The Twin Clutch SST creep forward in order to drive at low speeds
showing” on page 5-73.
up hills.
will automatically downshift.
The transmission may be damaged and an
accident may occur due to the following con-
DRIVING DOWNHILL
NOTE ditions.
When traveling down steep grades, the com-
 In manual shift, downshifts do not take place • The Twin Clutch SST fluid temperature
puter may automatically select a lower shift
when the accelerator is depressed all the way will rise and can cause transmission dam-
age.
position. This function assists engine braking
to the floor.
efforts, reducing the need for using the ser-
vice brakes.
Waiting
N00541000020
For short waiting periods, such as at traffic

lights, the vehicle can be left in gearshift

lever position and held stationary with the
CAUTION What to do if the following occur
service brake.
For longer waiting periods with the engine • If the vehicle is kept in a stopped position with the Twin Clutch SST
by depressing the accelerator pedal instead N00541200051
running, place the gearshift lever in the “N”
of the brake pedal, the vehicle will vibrate
(NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking If there is a problem in the Twin Clutch SST
brake, while holding the vehicle stationary or the warning display will appear on or engine electronic control module, the fol-
with the service brake. the information screen in the multi-infor- lowing may occur.
mation display to alert the driver that the
Prior to moving off after having stopped the
vehicle, make sure that the gearshift lever is
Twin Clutch SST fluid temperature has  Twin Clutch SST does not shift. 5
risen.  Vehicle cannot move.
in “D” (DRIVE) position or manual shift After that, if the Twin Clutch SST fluid
position.  Twin Clutch SST acceleration is slow.
temperature rises even higher, the transmis-
 Vehicle does not creep.
sion protection control will operate.
 “Shift shock” is large.
CAUTION If this occurs, the vehicle may suddenly
 Shifting occurs at higher engine speed.
reverse as if the gearshift lever was in the
 Do not rev the engine unnecessarily while  Response is slow.
“N” (NEUTRAL) position and cause an
the vehicle is stationary. Unexpected acceler-
accident.
ation may occur if the gearshift lever is in a If any of these occurs, perform the following
position other than “P” (PARK) or “N” If the warning display appears or the
procedure.
(NEUTRAL). transmission protection control operates,
 Do not keep the vehicle in a stopped position refer to “When warning display is
on an uphill slope by depressing the acceler-
When warning display is showing
showing” on page 5-73.
ator pedal instead of the brake pedal.
The temperature of Twin Clutch SST fluid is
The transmission may be damaged and an
accident may occur due to the following con- Parking high.
ditions. N00541100018
Refer to “Warning display” on page 5-73 and
• The Twin Clutch SST fluid temperature follow the appropriate measures.
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
will rise and can cause transmission dam- plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,
age. When the engine malfunction indicator
and then move the gearshift lever to the “P”
(PARK) position. (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check
engine light”) comes on or blinking
There could be a malfunction in the engine

electronic control module.

All-wheel drive system (if so equipped)

Have the vehicle checked by an authorized However, if the vehicle does not move or excessive strain. All-wheel drive vehicles
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility accelerate normally, or if this problem occurs should be driven only under the same condi-
of your choice as soon as possible. repeatedly, have the vehicle checked by an tions as are suitable for ordinary front-wheel
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a drive vehicles.
When the gearshift lever position display repair facility of your choice as soon as possi-
is not showing ble.
Cautions on handling of all-
A safety device in the Twin Clutch SST has
CAUTION wheel drive vehicles
5 been activated due to a possible malfunction
N00530800158
in the Twin Clutch SST.  When the Twin Clutch SST fluid tempera-
Refer to “If the gearshift lever position dis- ture is high, the engine idle speed when the
play is not showing” on page 5-72 and follow vehicle is stopped may increase or the vehi- Tires and wheels
the appropriate measures. cle will have a weak tendency to creep.
After that, if the Twin Clutch SST fluid tem-
Since driving torque can be applied to the
perature rises even higher, the warning four wheels, the driving performance of the
When warning display is showing or display will appear. vehicle when operating in all-wheel drive is
when no warning is showing in the multi-
greatly affected by the condition of the tires.
information display
A safety device in the Twin Clutch SST has All-wheel drive system (if so Pay close attention to the tires.
been activated due to a possible malfunction equipped)  Install only the specified tires on all
in the Twin Clutch SST or in the engine elec- N00516400046 wheels. Refer to “Tires and wheels” on
tronic control module. page 11-5.
All-wheel drive vehicles are propelled by  Be sure all four tires and wheels are the
Perform the following procedure. engine power distributed constantly and same size and type.
appropriately to all four wheels. When it is necessary to replace any of the
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop Not only does this ensure enhanced handling
the engine. tires or wheels, replace all four.
on dry, paved roads but also permits better  All tires should be rotated before the wear
2. Restart the engine. traction when driving on slippery, wet or difference between the front and rear tires
snow-covered roads and when moving out of is recognizable.
If the vehicle moves and accelerates normally
mud.
after this procedure is performed, there is no
These vehicles, however, are not designed Good vehicle performance cannot be
malfunction.
for off-road use, and are unsuitable for expected if there is a difference in wear
driving on bumpy ground that may cause

ACD (Active center differential system) (if so equipped)

between tires. Refer to “Tire rotation” on
page 9-22.
CAUTION CAUTION
 Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with the  Do not over-rely on the ACD. Even the ACD
 Check the tire inflation pressure regularly. front or rear wheels on the ground (Type A cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
or Type B) as illustrated. This could result in from acting on the vehicle. This system, like
damage to the drivetrain, or unstable towing. any other system, has limits and cannot help
CAUTION If you tow all-wheel drive vehicles, use Type you to maintain traction and control of the
 Always use tires of the same size, type, and C or Type D equipment. vehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driv-
brand that have no wear differences. Using
tires of different size, type, brands or degree
ing can lead to accidents. It is the driver’s
responsibility to drive carefully. This means
5
taking into account the traffic, road and envi-
of wear, will increase the differential oil tem- Jacking up all-wheel drive vehi- ronmental conditions.
perature and result in possible damage to the
driving system. Further, the drive train will cles  Be sure to use tires that are the same speci-
be subjected to excessive loading, possibly fied size, type, and brand, and have no differ-
leading to oil leakage, component seizure, or ence in the amount of wear for all four
other serious failures. WARNING wheels. Otherwise, the ACD may not work
 Do not start or run the engine while the properly.
vehicle is on the jack. The jack could slip
out of position and result in an accident.
Towing
NOTE
 If the parking brake lever is pulled up while
ACD (Active center differ- the vehicle is moving, the center differential
is designed to switch to a free state condition
ential system) (if so equipped) which will allow the rear wheel to lock eas-
N00538500050 ier.
The ACD is a system that improves accelera-

tion performance and straight-ahead stability
by regulating the differential limiting action ACD control mode
N00545400035
and power drive distribution of the center dif-
ferential. Select the control mode from the following
three types to suit the driving conditions.

ACD (Active center differential system) (if so equipped)

ACD control The currently selected control mode is dis-
Operation played on the multi-information display.
mode
In addition, when the control mode is
Normally, use this control changed, the selected mode appears on the
TARMAC mode. Use this mode for interrupt display screen of the information
paved roads. screen in the multi-information display.
Use this control mode when The control mode display will appear on the
driving on somewhat slip- information screen for a few seconds, and
5 GRAVEL pery road surfaces, such as then the original screen will return.
wet road surfaces and gravel
roads.
CAUTION
Use this control mode when
driving on slippery road sur-
NOTE  The ACD control mode display may flash
under aggressive driving conditions.
SNOW  The control mode can be changed while the
faces, such as snow-covered At this time, ACD control is temporarily sus-
vehicle is moving.
roads. pended in order to protect the ACD device,
 The selected control mode is stored in mem- but this will not affect normal driving.
ory even if the engine is stopped. After the vehicle is driven for a while, if the
However, if a battery terminal is discon-
ACD control mode switch nected, the control mode stored in memory
ACD control mode display remains on, the
N00545500036 ACD control will start operating again.
will be erased and the control mode will be
When the ignition switch is set to the “ON” set to the “TARMAC” mode.
position, operate the “AWC” switch to
change the control mode. ACD warning display
ACD control mode display N00545700096
Each time the switch is pushed, the control N00545600053 When there is a malfunction in the system,
mode changes in the order “TARMAC” 
the warning display will appear on the
“GRAVEL”  “SNOW”  “TARMAC”.
information screen in the multi-information
display.
In addition, the ACD control mode display in
Example: “TARMAC” mode is selected. section A will go out at the same time.

Limited-slip differential (if so equipped)
NOTE NOTE
 If the ambient temperature drops and the vis-  Even if there is a difference in the amount of
cosity of the AWC control fluid increases, traction the wheels can get, if both of them
the warning may be displayed. are spinning, the limited-slip differential will
At this time, ACD control is temporarily sus- not be effective.
pended, but this will not affect normal driv-
ing.
After the vehicle is driven for a while, if the CAUTION 5
engine is restarted after the AWC control
 Never start the engine while one of the front
fluid warms up or the ambient temperature
or rear wheels is jacked up and the others in
increases, the ACD control will start operat-
contact with the ground; doing so may cause
ing again if the warning display goes out.
the vehicle to jump forward.
CAUTION  Continuously attempting to extract the vehi-
 The system may be malfunctioning. cle from snow, mud, etc. while using high
Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the Limited-slip differential (if so engine rpm may damage the limited-slip dif-
engine. ferential.
equipped)
Restart the engine and check whether the  Using a compact spare wheel will adversely
N00517400085
warning display goes out. affect the limited-slip differential; replace
the compact spare wheel with a standard size
If the warning display goes out, there is A limited-slip differential is applied for rear
wheel as soon as possible.
no abnormal condition. If the warning
wheel differential. The features of this lim-
display does not go out or appears fre-
ited-slip differential are described below:
quently, it is not necessary to stop the vehicle
immediately, but we recommend that you
Just as with a conventional differential, the Service brake
have your vehicle inspected. wheel on one side is allowed to turn at a dif- N00517500262
ferent speed from the wheel on the other side

when the vehicle is cornering. The difference Brake pedal
between the limited-slip differential and a
conventional differential is that if the wheel
Overuse of the brake can cause poor brake
on one side of the vehicle loses traction, a
response and premature wear of the brake
greater amount of torque is applied to the
pads and linings.
wheel on the other side to improve traction.
When driving down a long or steep hill, use
engine braking by downshifting.

Hill start assist (for vehicles equipped with Twin Clutch SST)
erly, the rest of the brake system will still
WARNING work, but the vehicle will not slow down as
WARNING
 Do not leave any objects near the brake  Driving with worn brake pads will make it
quickly.
pedal or let a floor mat slide under it; harder to stop, and can cause an accident.
You will know this has happened if you find
doing so could prevent the full pedal
stroke that would be necessary in an you need to depress the brake pedal down
emergency. Make sure that the pedal can further, or harder when slowing down or stop-
be operated freely at all times. Make sure ping, or if the brake warning light and the Hill start assist (for vehicles
5 the floor mat is securely held in place. warning display in the multi-information dis- equipped with Twin Clutch
play come on.
SST)
CAUTION WARNING
N00562600061
 It is important not to drive the vehicle with The hill start assist makes it easy to start off
 Never coast downhill with the engine OFF.
your foot resting on the brake pedal when on a steep uphill slope by preventing the
Keep the engine running whenever your
braking is not required. This practice can vehicle is in motion. If you turn off the
vehicle from moving backwards. It keeps the
result in very high brake temperatures, pre- engine while driving, the power brake braking force for about 2 seconds when you
mature pad and lining wear, and possible booster will stop working and your brakes move your foot from the brake pedal to the
damage to the brakes. will not work as well. accelerator pedal.
 If the power assist is lost or if either brake
hydraulic system stops working properly, CAUTION
Power brakes take your vehicle to an authorized Mit-
 Do not overly rely on the hill start assist to
N00517600393 subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
prevent backwards movement of the vehicle.
of your choice immediately.
Your vehicle is equipped with power brakes Under certain circumstances, even when hill
for more braking force with minimal brake start assist is activated, the vehicle may
pedal effort. move backwards if the brake pedal is not suf-
Your brakes are designed to operate at full
Brake pad wear alarm ficiently depressed, if the vehicle is heavily
N00532500087 loaded, or if the road is very steep or slip-
capacity, even if the power assist is lost.
The disc brakes have an alarm that makes a pery.
If the power assist is lost, the effort needed to
metallic squeal when the brake pads have  The hill start assist is not designed to keep
press the brake pedal is greater. the vehicle stopped in place on uphill slopes
If you should lose the power assist for some worn down enough to need service. If you
for more than 2 seconds.
reason, the brakes will still work. hear this sound, have the brake pads replaced
If the power brake unit or either of the two at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
brake hydraulic systems stops working prop- a repair facility of your choice.

Brake assist system
CAUTION NOTE CAUTION

 When facing uphill, do not rely on using the • The gearshift lever is in any position other  Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the
hill start assist to maintain a stopped position than “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL). engine.
as an alternative to depressing the brake • The vehicle is completely stationary, with Restart the engine and check whether the dis-
pedal. the brake pedal depressed. play/indicator goes out, in which case the hill
Doing so could cause an accident. • The parking brake is released. start assist is again working normally.
 Do not turn the ignition switch to the  The hill start assist will not operate if the If they remain displayed or reappear fre-
“LOCK” or “ACC” position while the hill
start assist is operating. The hill start assist
accelerator pedal is depressed before the quently, it is not necessary to stop the vehicle
immediately, but the vehicle should be
5
brake pedal is released.
could stop operating, which could result in inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
 The hill start assist also operates when
an accident. Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
reversing on an uphill slope.
choice as soon as possible.
To operate Warning display

N00562700088
N00562800089
Brake assist system
1. Stop the vehicle completely using the N00567300076
If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-
brake pedal. The brake assist system is a device assisting
tem, the following display/indicator will turn
2. Release the brake pedal and the hill start drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal
on.
assist will maintain the braking force firmly such as in emergency stop situations
applied while stopping for approximately and provides greater braking force.
2 seconds. - ASC indicator
3. Depress the accelerator pedal and the hill If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the
start assist gradually will decrease the brakes will be applied with more force than
braking force as the vehicle starts mov- Warning display usual.
ing.
CAUTION
NOTE  The brake assist system is not a device
 The hill start assist is activated when all of designed to exercise braking force greater
the following conditions are met. than its capacity. Make sure to always keep a
• The engine is running. sufficient distance between vehicles in front
(The hill start assist will not be activated CAUTION of you without relying too much on the brake
while the engine is starting or immediately assist system.
 If the warning is displayed, the hill start
after the engine is started.)
assist will not operate. Start off carefully.

Anti-lock braking system
NOTE Driving hints CAUTION

 Once the brake assist system is operational,  The anti-lock braking system cannot prevent
it maintains great braking force even if the  When using the anti-lock brakes (sudden accidents. It is your responsibility to take
brake pedal is lightly released. braking), steering is slightly different safety precautions and to drive carefully.
To stop its operation, completely remove from normal driving conditions. Use the  To prevent failure of the anti-lock braking
your foot from the brake pedal. steering wheel carefully. system, be sure all four wheels and tires are
 The brake assist system may become opera-  Always keep a safe distance from the the same size and the same type.
5 tional when the brake pedal is fully
depressed even if it has not been depressed
vehicle in front of you. Even if your vehi-  Never install a limited-slip differential as the
anti-lock braking system may not function
cle is equipped with the anti-lock braking
suddenly. normally.
system, leave a greater braking distance
 When the brake assist system is in use while Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi
when:
driving, you may feel as if the depressed Motors dealer.
• Driving on gravel or snow-covered
brake pedal is soft, the pedal moves in small
motions in conjunction with the operation roads.
• Driving on uneven road surfaces.
noise, or the vehicle body and the steering
 Operation of anti-lock braking system is
NOTE
wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake
 After your vehicle is driven a short distance
assist system is operating normally and does not restricted to situations where brakes
after starting the engine, you will hear the
not indicate faulty operation. Continue to are applied suddenly. This system may
sound coming from the engine compartment.
depress the brake pedal. also prevent the wheels from locking These are the normal sounds the anti-lock
 You may hear an operation noise when the when you drive over manholes, steel braking system makes when performing a
brake pedal is suddenly or fully depressed roadwork plates, road markings, or any self-check. It does not indicate a malfunc-
while stationary. This does not indicate a uneven road surface. tion.
malfunction and the brake assist system is
 When the anti-lock braking system is in  The anti-lock braking system can be used
operating normally.
use, you may feel the brake pedal vibrat- after the vehicle has reached a speed over
ing and hear a unique sound. You may approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). It stops
also feel as if the pedal resists being working when the vehicle slows below
Anti-lock braking system pressed. approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).
N00517900282 In this situation, simply hold the brake
The anti-lock braking system helps prevent pedal down firmly. Do not pump the
the wheels from locking up when braking. brake, which will result in reduced
This helps you keep control of your vehicle braking performance.
and its direction.

Anti-lock braking system
Anti-lock braking system warn- CAUTION If the warning light/display

ing light/display  Any of the following warning light/display comes on while driving
N00531600616
behavior indicates that the anti-lock braking N00531700545
system is not functioning and only the stan-
Warning light
dard brake system is working. (The standard
brake system will still work properly.) If this If only the anti-lock braking sys-
happens, take your vehicle to an authorized tem warning light/display comes
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice as soon as possible.
on 5
Warning display type 1 • When the ignition switch is in the “ON”  Avoid hard braking and high-speed driv-
position, the warning light does not come ing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
on or it remains on and does not go off Test the system by restarting the engine
• The warning light comes on while driving and driving at a speed of about 12 mph
• The warning display appears while driving (20 km/h) or higher.
If the warning light/display then remain
Warning display type 2 off during driving, there is no problem.
However, if the warning light/display do
not disappear, or if they come on again
when the vehicle is driven, have the vehi-
cle checked by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or repair facility of your
choice as soon as possible.
If there is a malfunction in the system, the
anti-lock braking system warning light will
come on and the warning display will appear If the anti-lock braking system
on the information screen in the multi-infor- warning light/display and brake
mation display. warning light/display come on at
Under normal conditions, the anti-lock brak- the same time
ing system warning light only comes on when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” Warning light
position and goes off a few seconds later.

Power steering system

NOTE Rear
 The anti-lock braking system warning light
and brake warning light illuminate at the
same time and the warning displays appear
alternately on the information screen in the
5
After driving on icy roads
N00529200051
Warning display type 2 After driving on snow or icy roads, remove

any snow and ice which may have been left
around the wheels. On vehicles that have an Power steering system
anti-lock braking system, be careful not to N00518000310
damage the wheel speed sensors (A) or the The power steering system operates while the
cables located at each wheel. engine is running. It helps reduce the effort
needed to turn the steering wheel.
Front The power steering system has mechanical
steering capability in case the power assist is
lost. If the power assist is lost for some rea-
son, you will still be able to steer your vehi-
The anti-lock braking system and brake force cle, but you will notice it takes much more
distribution function may not work, so hard effort to steer. If this happens, have your vehi-
braking could make the vehicle unstable. cle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi
Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving. Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact an choice.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or repair
facility of your choice.

Active stability control (ASC)

Type 2
WARNING Electric power steering system
 Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is (EPS) (if so equipped)
moving. Stopping the engine would make
N00547200053
the steering wheel extremely hard to turn,
possibly resulting in an accident.
NOTE
 During repeated full-lock turning of the
If there is a malfunction in the system, the
Hydraulic power steering sys- steering wheel (for example, while you are
manoeuvring the vehicle into a parking
warning display will appear on the informa- 5
tem (HPS) (if so equipped) space), a protection function may be acti- tion screen in the multi-information display.
N00547100052 vated to prevent overheating of the power
steering system. This function will make the CAUTION
steering wheel gradually harder to turn. In
CAUTION this event, limit your turning of the steering
 If the warning display appears while the
 Do not leave the steering wheel turned all the engine is running, have the vehicle inspected
wheel for a while. When the system has
way in one direction. This can cause damage by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
cooled down, the steering effort will return
to the power steering system. a repair facility of your choice as soon as
to normal.
possible. It may become harder to turn the
 If you turn the steering wheel while the vehi- steering wheel.
cle is stationary with the headlights on, the
headlights may become dim. This behavior
is not abnormal. The headlights will return to
their original brightness after a short while. Active stability control
(ASC)
N00559100091
Electronic power steering system
The active stability control (ASC) takes over-
warning display all control of the anti-lock braking system,
traction control function and skid control
Type 1 function to help maintain the vehicle’s control
and traction. Please read this section in con-
junction with the page on the anti-lock brak-
ing system, traction control function and skid
control function.


Anti-lock braking system  P.5-88 slippery roads or during rapid steering
Traction control function  P.5-92
NOTE maneuvers. It works by controlling the engine
• When the vehicle is driven for a while after
Skid control function  P.5-92 output and the brake on each wheel.
the engine is turned on.
 When the ASC is activated, you may feel a
CAUTION vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whin- NOTE
 Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the ASC ing sound from the engine compartment.  The skid control function operates at speeds
cannot prevent the natural laws of physics This indicates that the system is operating of about 9 mph (15 km/h) or higher.
5 from acting on the vehicle. This system, like
any other system, has limits and cannot help
normally. It does not indicate a malfunction.
 When the anti-lock braking system warning
you to maintain traction and control of the light is illuminated, the ASC is not active.
vehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driv-
“ASC OFF” switch
N00559400212
ing can lead to accidents. It is the driver’s
responsibillty to drive carefully, This means Traction control function The ASC is automatically activated when the
taking into account the traffic, road and envi- N00559200047 ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
ronmental conditions. On slippery surfaces, the traction control tion. You can deactivate the system by press-
 Be sure to use the same specified type and function prevents the drive wheels from spin- ing down the “ASC OFF” switch for 3
size of tire on all four wheels. Otherwise, the ning excessive, thus helping the vehicle to seconds or longer.
ASC may not work properly.
start moving from a stopped condition. It also When the ASC is deactivated, the dis-
 Do not install any aftermarket limited-slip
provides sufficient driving force and steering play/indicator will turn on. To reactivate the
differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ASC
performance as the vehicle turns while press- ASC, momentarily press the “ASC OFF”
may stop functioning properly.
ing the acceleration pedal.
switch ; the display/indicator is turned off.
NOTE CAUTION
 An operation noise may be emitted from the  When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy
engine compartment in the following situa- road, be sure to install snow tires and drive
tions. The sound is associated with checking the vehicle at moderate speeds.
the operations of the ASC. At this time, you
may feel a shock from the brake pedal if you
depress it. These do not indicate a malfunc- Skid control function
tion.
N00546800023
• When the ignition switch is set to the “ON”
position. The skid control function is designed to help
the driver maintain control of the vehicle on


ASC OFF display/ASC OFF indica-
CAUTION -
tor
NOTE
 For safety reasons, the “ASC OFF” switch  The display/indicator may come on when
This display/incicator will turn on
should be operated when your vehicle is
when the ASC is turned off with the you start the engine. This means that the bat-
stopped.
“ASC OFF” switch. tery voltage momentarily dropped when the
 Be sure to keep the ASC on while driving in engine was started. It does not indicate a
normal circumstances.
NOTE malfunction, provided that the display goes
out immediately.
 The combination of items shown on the dis-
play varies depending on the vehicle model.
 When a spare tire has been put on your vehi- 5
NOTE cle, the gripping ability of the tire will be
 Using the “ASC OFF” switch turns off both lower, making it more likely that the dis-
the skid control function and the traction
control function. CAUTION play/indicator will blink.
 When moving out of mud, sand or fresh  When display/indicator blinks, ASC is
snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not operating, which means that the road is slip-
allow the engine speed to increase. In such pery or that your vehicle’s wheels are begin-
ASC warning display
situations, temporarily turning off ASC with ning to slip. If this happens, drive slower. N00546600106
the “ASC OFF” switch will make it easier to  If the temperature in the braking system con- If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-
move out your vehicle. tinues to increase due to continuous brake tem, the following display/indicator will turn
 If you continue to press the “ASC OFF”
control on a slippery road surface, the dis- on.
switch after the ASC is turned off, the “mis-
taken operation protection function” will play/indicator will blink. To prevent the
brake system from overheating, the brake ASC indicator
activate and the ASC will turn back on. -
control of the traction control function will
be temporarily suspended. The engine con- ASC OFF display/ASC OFF indicator
-
trol of the traction control function and nor-
ASC operation display or ASC mal brake operation will not be affected.
OFF display Park your vehicle in a safe place. When the
N00546500105
temperature in the braking system has come
ASC operation display/ASC indica- down, the display/indicator will be turned

- off and the traction control function will start
tor
operating again.
The display/indicator will blink
when the ASC is operating.

Cruise control
Towing CAUTION
N00546300057  On vehicles equipped with manual transaxle,
do not move the gearshift lever to the “N”
CAUTION (Neutral) position while driving at a set
 When towing the vehicle with only the front speed without depressing the clutch pedal.
wheels or only the rear wheels raised off the The engine will run too fast and might be
ground, do not place the ignition switch in damaged.
5 NOTE the “ON” position. Placing the ignition
 The combination of items shown on the dis- switch in the “ON” position could cause the
play varies depending on the vehicle model. ASC to operate, resulting in an accident. NOTE
Note that the correct towing method depends  Cruise control may not be able to keep your
on the transmission type and the vehicle’s speed on uphills or downhills.
drive configuration.
CAUTION For details, refer to “Towing” on page 8-13.
 Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill.
 The system may be malfunctioning. You may use the accelerator pedal if you
Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the want to stay at your set speed.
engine.  Your speed may increase to more than the set
Restart the engine and check whether the dis- Cruise control speed on a steep downhill. You have to use
play/indicator goes out. If they go out, there N00518301583
the brake to control your speed. As a result,
is no abnormal condition. If they do not go the set speed driving is deactivated.
Cruise control is an automatic speed control
out or if they turn on frequently, it is not nec-
essary to stop the vehicle immediately, but system that keeps a set speed. It can be acti-
you should have your vehicle inspected by vated at speeds from about 25 mph
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a (40 km/h). Cruise control does not work at
repair facility of your choice as soon as pos- speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
sible.
CAUTION
 When you do not wish to drive at a set speed,
turn off the cruise control for safety.
 Do not use cruise control when driving con-
ditions will not allow you to stay at the same
speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet,
slippery, on a steep downhill slope.

Cruise control
Cruise control switches D- “CANCEL” switch To activate

N00518400369
Used to deactivate the set speed driving. 1. With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
Type 1
tion, press the “ON OFF” switch (A) to
NOTE turn on the cruise control. The “CRUISE”
 When operating the cruise control switches, indicator light in the meter cluster will
press the cruise control switches correctly. come on.
The set speed driving may be deactivated
Type 1
5
automatically if two or more switches of the
Type 2 cruise control are pressed at the same time.
A- “ON OFF” switch
Used to turn on and off the cruise control.
B- “COAST SET” switch
Used to reduce the set speed and to set the

desired speed.
C- “ACC RES” switch
Used to increase the set speed and to return to

the original set speed.

Cruise control
2. Confirm that the Twin Clutch SST control
Type 2 mode is set to “NORMAL” (on vehicles
NOTE
 When you release the “COAST SET” switch,
equipped with Twin Clutch SST).
the vehicle speed will be set.
Refer to “Twin Clutch SST control mode”
on page 5-75.
NOTE To increase the set speed

N00518500315
5  The cruising speed cannot be set when the
Twin Clutch SST control mode is set to There are 2 ways to increase the set speed.
“SPORT” mode.
“ACC RES” switch
3. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired
speed, then press and release the “COAST
Press and hold the “ACC RES” switch (C)
SET” switch (B) when the “CRUISE”
while driving at the set speed, and your speed
indicator light is illuminated. The vehicle
will then gradually increase.
NOTE will then maintain the desired speed.
When you reach your desired speed, release
 If the cruise control is on when the ignition Type 1 the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
switch is turned to “LOCK” or “ACC” posi- set.
tion, cruise control will be on automatically
the next time you start the engine. The
“CRUISE” indicator light will also be on.
 If the battery voltage is insufficient, the
memory data for the cruise control may be
erased.
As a result, the “CRUISE” indicator light Type 2
may not come on when you restart the
engine.
If this happens, press the “ON OFF” switch
once again to turn on the cruise control.

Cruise control
Type 1 Type 1 Type 1
Type 2
Type 2 5
Type 2
To increase your speed in small amounts, To slow down your speed in small amounts,
press the “ACC RES” switch for less than press the “COAST SET” switch for less than
about 1 second and release it.
To decrease the set speed about 1 second and release it.
N00518600244
Each time you press the “ACC RES” switch, Each time you press the “COAST SET”
your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) There are 2 ways to decrease the set speed. switch, your vehicle will slow down by about
faster. 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
“COAST SET” switch
Accelerator pedal Brake pedal
Press and hold the “COAST SET” switch (B)
While driving at the set speed, use the accel- while driving at the set speed, and your speed While driving at the set speed, use the brake
erator pedal to reach your desired speed and will slow down gradually. pedal, which disengages the cruise control,
then press the “COAST SET” switch (B) and When you reach your desired speed, release then press the “COAST SET” switch (B) and
release the switch momentarily to set a new the switch. Your new cruising speed is now release the switch momentarily to set a new
desired cruising speed. set. desired cruising speed.

Cruise control
Type 1
Type 1
5
Type 2 Type 2
To temporarily decrease the speed
Depress the brake pedal to decrease the

speed. To return to the previously set speed,
To temporarily increase or press the “ACC RES” switch (C).
To deactivate
decrease the speed Refer to “To resume the set speed” on page
N00518800477
N00541700027 5-99. The set speed driving can be deactivated as

follows:
To temporarily increase the speed
 Press the “ON OFF” switch (A). (Cruise
control will be turned off.)
Depress the accelerator pedal as you would  Press the “CANCEL” switch (D).
normally. When you release the pedal, you
will return to your set speed.

Cruise control
 Depress the brake pedal.  When the active stability control (ASC)
starts operating.
CAUTION
Type 1  When the set speed driving is deactivated
Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)”
automatically in any situation other than
on page 5-91.
those listed above, there may be a system
malfunction.
WARNING Press the “ON OFF” switch to turn off the
cruise control and have your vehicle
 On vehicles equipped with continuously
variable transmission (CVT) or Twin
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
5
Type 2 Clutch SST, although the set speed driving
choice.
will be deactivated when shifting to the
“N” (NEUTRAL) position, never move the
selector lever (CVT) or the gearshift lever
(Twin Clutch SST) to the “N” (NEU- To resume the set speed
TRAL) position while driving. N00518900250
You would have no engine braking and
could cause a serious accident.
If the set speed driving is deactivated by the
condition described in “To deactivate” on
The set speed driving is deactivated automati- page 5-98, you can resume the previously set
Also, the set speed driving may be deacti- speed by pressing the “ACC RES” switch (C)
cally in any of the following ways. vated as follow: while driving at a speed of about 25 mph (40
 When you depress the clutch pedal (on  When the engine speed rises and km/h) or higher.
vehicles equipped with manual transaxle). approaches the tachometer’s red zone (the
 When your speed slows to about 10 mph red-colored part of the tachometer dial).
(15 km/h) or more below the set speed
because of a hill, etc.
 When your speed slows to about 25 mph
(40 km/h) or less.
 When the Twin Clutch SST control mode
is set to “Sport” mode (on vehicles
equipped with Twin Clutch SST).
Refer to “Twin Clutch SST control mode”
on page 5-75.

SC00000600-3.fm 100 ページ２０１３年２月１５日　金曜日　午後２時３１分
Type 1 NOTE
• On vehicles with Type 1 sensor which has
the metallic air valve (B), replace grommet
(C) with a new one when the tire is
replaced.
• On vehicles with Type 2 sensor which has
the rubber air valve (D), replace rubber
5 Type 2 valve (D) with new one when the tire is
replaced.
For details, please contact your authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
WARNING Type 1
 The spare wheel does not have a tire infla-
tion pressure sensor.
Under either of the following conditions, When the spare tire is used, the tire pres-
however, using the switch does not allow you sure monitoring system will not work
to resume the previously set speed. In these properly.
See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
situations, repeat the speed setting procedure:
dealer as soon as possible to replace or
repair the original tire.
 The “ON OFF” switch is pressed. Type 2
 The ignition switch is turned OFF.
 “CRUISE” indicator light is turned OFF.
NOTE
 The tire pressure monitoring system is not a
Tire pressure monitoring substitute for regularly checking tire infla-
tion pressures.
system Be sure to check the tire inflation pressures
N00530201508
as described in “Tires” on page 9-17.
The tire pressure monitoring system uses tire  The tire inflation pressure sensor (A) is
inflation pressure sensors (A) on the wheels installed in the illustrated location.
to monitor the tire inflation pressures. The
system only indicates when a tire is signifi-
cantly under-inflated.

Type 2
Tire pressure monitoring sys- CAUTION
tem warning light/display  If a malfunction is detected in the tire pres-
N00532700122
sure monitoring system, the tire pressure
monitoring system warning light will blink
for approximately 1 minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. The warning light
will issue further warnings each time the
CAUTION engine is restarted as long as the malfunction
5
When the ignition switch is turned to the  If the tire pressure monitoring system warn- exists.
“ON” position, the tire pressure monitoring ing light does not illuminate when the igni- Check to see whether the warning light goes
system warning light normally illuminates tion switch is turned to the “ON” position, it off after few minutes driving.
and goes off a few seconds later. means that the tire pressure monitoring sys- If it then goes off during driving, there is no
tem is not working properly. Have the sys- problem.
If one or more of the vehicle tires (except for tem inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi However, if the warning light does not go
the spare tire) is significantly under-inflated, Motors dealer. off, or if it blinks again when the engine is
the warning light will remain illuminated In such situations, a malfunctioning of the restarted, have the vehicle inspected by an
system may be preventing the monitoring of authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
while the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
the tire pressure. Avoid sudden braking, In such situations, a malfunctioning of the
tion. system may be preventing the monitoring of
sharp turning and high-speed driving.
Refer to “If the warning light/display illumi- the tire pressure. For safety reasons, when
nates while driving” on page 5-102 and take the warning light appears while driving,
the necessary measures. avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and
high-speed driving.
NOTE
 In addition, the warning display is displayed
on the information screen in the multi-infor-
NOTE
mation display.  In addition, the warning display is displayed
on the information screen in the multi-infor-
Type 1 mation display.


Type 1 nificantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
overheat and can lead to tire failure. allow the TPMS to continue to function prop-
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency erly.
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-
cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
If the warning light/display illu-
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s minates while driving
Type 2 responsibility to maintain correct tire pres- N00532800439
5 sure, even if under-inflation has not reached 1. If the tire pressure monitoring system
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS warning light illuminates, avoid hard
low tire pressure telltale. braking, sharp steering maneuvers and
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a high speeds. You should stop and adjust
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the tires to the proper inflation pressure as
the system is not operating properly. The soon as possible. Adjust the spare tire at
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined the same time. Refer to “Tires” on page
should be checked monthly when cold and
with the low tire pressure telltale. 9-17.
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the When the system detects a malfunction, the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. telltale will flash for approximately one min- NOTE
ute and then remain continuously illuminated.  In addition, the warning display is displayed
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size
This sequence will continue upon subsequent on the information screen in the multi-infor-
than the size indicated on the vehicle placard
mation display.
or tire inflation pressure label, you should vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
 When inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
determine the proper tire inflation pressure exists.
sure, do not apply excessive force to the
for those tires.) When the malfunction indicator is illumi-
valve stem to avoid breakage.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has nated, the system may not be able to detect or
 After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring signal low tire pressure as intended. sure, always reinstall the valve cap on the
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety valve stem.
pressure telltale when one or more of your of reasons, including the installation of Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could
tires is significantly under-inflated. replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the get into the valve, resulting in damage to the
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure tell- vehicle that prevent the TPMS from function- tire inflation pressure sensor.
tale illuminates, you should stop and check ing properly. Always check the TPMS mal-  Do not use metal valve caps, which may
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate function telltale after replacing one or more cause a metal reaction, resulting in corrosion
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that and damage of the tire inflation pressure sen-
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a sig-
sors.


 A window tint that affects the radio wave
NOTE NOTE signals is installed.
 Once adjustments have been made, the warn-  To avoid the risk of damage to the tire infla-
ing light will go off after a few minutes of tion pressure sensors, have any punctured
driving. tire repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi NOTE
Motors dealer. If the tire repair is not done by  Tire inflation pressures vary with the ambi-
2. If the tire pressure monitoring system an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is ent temperature. If the vehicle is subjected to
warning light remains illuminated after not covered by your warranty. large variations in ambient temperature, the
you have been driving for about 20 min-
utes after you adjust the tire inflation pres-
 Do not use an aerosol puncture-repair prod-
uct on any tire. Such a spray could damage
tire inflation pressures may be under-inflated
(causing the warning light/display to come
5
sure, one or more of the tires may have a the tire inflation pressure sensors. Have any on) when the ambient temperature is rela-
puncture. Inspect the tire and if it has a puncture repaired by an authorized Mitsubi- tively low. If the warning light/display
shi Motors dealer. comes on, adjust the tire inflation pressure.
puncture, have it repaired by an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as
possible. The tire pressure monitoring system may not
work normally in the following circum- Whenever the tires and wheels
WARNING stances: are replaced with new ones
N00532900179
 If the warning light/display illuminates  A wireless facility or device using the
while you are driving, avoid hard braking, If new wheels with new tire inflation pressure
same frequency is near the vehicle.
sharp steering maneuvers and high sensors are installed, their ID codes must be
speeds. Driving with an under-inflated tire
 Snow or ice is stuck inside the fenders
programmed into the tire pressure monitoring
adversely affects vehicle performance and and/or on the wheels.
system. Have tire and wheel replacement per-
can result in an accident.  The tire inflation pressure sensor’s battery
formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
is dead.
dealer to avoid the risk of damaging the tire
 Wheels other than Mitsubishi genuine
inflation pressure sensors. If the wheel
CAUTION wheels are being used.
replacement is not done by an authorized
 If a tire has a puncture, replace that tire with  Wheels that are not fitted with tire infla-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is not covered by
the spare tire. Driving on a punctured tire tion pressure sensors are being used.
your warranty.
could lead to an accident.  Wheels whose ID codes are not memo-
 The warning light/display may not illuminate rized by the vehicle are used.
immediately in the event of a tire blowout or  Compact spare tire is fitted on a road
rapid leak. wheel.

Rear-view camera (if so equipped)
CAUTION Rear-view camera (if so Location of rear-view camera

 The use of non-genuine wheels will prevent
equipped)
the proper fit of the tire inflation pressure The rear-view camera (A) is in the rear hatch,
N00546201167
sensors, resulting in air leakage or damage to
at the left side of the rear hatch handle.
the sensors.
When the gearshift lever or the selector lever
is in the “R” (REVERSE) position with the
ignition switch in the “ON” position, the rear-
5 General information view image will be displayed on the screen of
N00533001259
the Mitsubishi Multi-Communication Sys-
Your tire pressure monitoring system oper- tem or the DISPLAY AUDIO in the center
ates on a radio frequency subject to Federal panel.
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules When the gearshift lever or the selector lever
(For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry is shifted out of the “R” (REVERSE) posi-
A
Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). tion, the rear-view image will go off.
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC
Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt WARNING
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two con-
 Never rely solely on the rear-view camera CAUTION
to clear the area behind your vehicle.  If the camera lens gets dirty, a clear image
ditions. Always check visually behind and all cannot be obtained. As necessary, rinse the
around your vehicle for persons, animals, lens with clean water and gently wipe with a
 This device may not cause harmful inter- obstructions or other vehicles. Failure to clean, soft cloth.
ference. do so can result in vehicle damage, serious
 To avoid damaging the camera;
 This device must accept any interference injury or death.
• Do not rub the cover excessively or polish
received, including interference that may  The rear-view camera is an aid system for
it by using an abrasive compound.
cause undesired operation. backing up, but it is not a substitute for
• Do not disassemble the camera.
your visual confirmation.
• Do not splash hot water directly on the lens.
 The view on the screen is limited, and
CAUTION objects outside the view, such as under the • Do not spray the camera and its surround-
 Changes or modifications not expressly bumper or around either corner of the ings with high-pressure water.
approved by the manufacturer for compli- bumper end, cannot be seen on the screen. • Make sure that the rear hatch is securely
ance could void the user’s authority to oper- closed when backing up.
ate the equipment.

Rear-view camera (if so equipped)
Reference lines on the screen CAUTION Case 2

 The rear-view camera uses a wide-angle
Reference lines and upper surface of the rear lens. As a result, images and distances shown
on the screen are not exact.
bumper (A) are displayed on the screen.
 Actual distance may be different from dis-
 Red line (B) indicates approximately tance indicated by the lines on the screen,
20 inches (50 cm) behind the rear bumper. depending on the loading condition of the
 Two Green lines (C) indicate approxi-
vehicle and road surface condition.
The reference lines for distance and vehicle A- Actual objects 5
mately 8 inches (20 cm) outside of the width are based on a level, flat road surface. B- Objects shown on the screen
vehicle body. In the following cases, objects shown on the
 Short transverse lines (1 to 3) indicate dis- screen will appear to be farther off than they
tance from the rear bumper. actually are. CAUTION
• When the rear of the vehicle is weighed  The reference lines for distance and vehicle
down with the weight of passengers and width are intended to indicate the distance to
luggage in the vehicle. (Case 1) a flat object such as a level, flat road surface.
• When there is an upward slope at the back. They may not indicate correct distance
(Case 2) depending on the shape of an obstacle.
For example, when there is an object behind
the vehicle that has upper sections projecting
Case 1 in the direction of the vehicle, the reference
lines on the screen will indicate that point A
is the farthest point and point B is the closest
point to the vehicle. In reality, point A and B
are actually the same distance from the vehi-
1: Approximately at the rear edge of the cle, and point C is farther off than point A
and B.
rear bumper
2: Approximately 39 inches (100 cm)
A- Actual objects
3: Approximately 79 inches (200 cm) B- Objects shown on the screen

Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster Type 1

N00519000362
NOTE Type 2
 Monitor brightness is adjusted automatically
1- Tachometer P.5-106
by sensors.
2- Multi-information display P.5-108
 On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi-
Communication System, it is possible to
Information screen display list
change the display language of the screen. P.5-130
For details, please refer to the separate 3- Speedometer P.5-106
owner’s manual. 4- Rheostat meter illumination button
 Under certain circumstances, it may become P.5-107
difficult to see an image on the screen, even
when the system is functioning correctly.
• In a dark area, such as at night. Speedometer
• When water drops or condensation are on
the lens.
N00519100233
Tachometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in
• When sun light or headlights shine directly N00519200247
into the lens.

miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour
The tachometer shows engine revolutions per
(km/h).
minute. This allows the driver to determine
the most efficient shift position (manual
transaxle), selector position {continuously
variable transmission (CVT)} or shift posi-

Instrument cluster
tion (Twin Clutch SST) and engine speed
combinations.
NOTE
 If you press and hold the button for longer
This gauge also assists in evaluating engine
than about 1 second when the parking lights
performance.
are illuminated, the brightness level changes
to the maximum level. Pressing and holding
the button for longer than about 1 second
again returns the brightness level to the pre-
vious level.
5
1- Brightness display
2- Rheostat illumination button
NOTE
 You can adjust to 8 different levels respec-
CAUTION tively for when the tail lights are illuminated
 The red zone indicates an engine speed and when they are not.
beyond the range of safe operation.  If the vehicle is equipped with the automatic
 Select the correct shift position (manual light control, when the light switch is in a
transaxle), selector position (CVT) or gear- position other than the “OFF” position, the
shift position (Twin Clutch SST) to control meter illumination switches automatically to
the engine speed so that the tachometer indi- the adjusted brightness, depending on the
cator does not enter the red zone. brightness outside the vehicle.
 The brightness level of the instruments is
stored in memory when the ignition switch is
turned off.
Rheostat meter illumination
button
N00554900179
Each time you press this button, there is a

sound and the brightness of the instruments
changes.
Multi-information display
N00555000249
The multi-information display displays warnings, the odometer, trip odometer, service reminder, engine coolant temperature, fuel remaining, out-
side temperature, Twin Clutch SST control mode, ACD control mode, gearshift lever position, selector lever position, average and momentary
fuel consumption, driving range, average speed, instrument brightness, etc.
It is also possible to change elements such as the language and units used on the multi-information display.
5
With ignition switch is “OFF” With ignition switch is “ON” position {Continuously With ignition switch is “ON” position
position variable transmission (CVT), Twin Clutch SST} (Manual transaxle)
Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 2
1- 3- Door ajar warning display screen (With 6- Information screen (With ignition
Warning display screen (With igni-
ignition switch in the “OFF” position) switch in the “ON” position) P.5-114
tion switch in the “OFF” position)
P.5-112 Interrupt display screen (With ignition
P.5-109
4- Warning display screen (With igni- switch in the “ON” position) P.5-117
2- Information screen (With ignition
tion switch in the “ON” position) 7- Outside temperature display screen
switch in the “OFF” position)
P.5-114 P.5-118
P.5-110
5- Active stability control (ASC) OFF dis- 8- Fuel remaining display screen
Interrupt display screen (With ignition
play screen (if so equipped) P.5-114 P.5-119
switch in the “OFF” position)
P.5-111

9- Engine coolant temperature display (if information display by operating the multi-
so equipped) P.5-114
NOTE information meter switch.
 The display screen is different depending on
10- Twin Clutch SST control mode display
whether the ignition switch in the “OFF” or
screen (Twin Clutch SST) P.5-76 “ON” position.
11- Selector lever position display screen Refer to “Information screen (With ignition
(CVT) P.5-64 switch in the “OFF” position)” on page
Gearshift lever position display screen 5-110.
(Twin Clutch SST) P.5-72
12- ACD control mode display screen
Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition
switch in the “OFF” position)” on page
5
(Twin Clutch SST) P.5-84 5-131.
13- ECO mode indicator (if so equipped) Refer to “Information screen (With ignition
switch turned from “OFF” to “ON” posi-
P.5-119
tion)” on page 5-113.
14- Gearshift indicator display screen (if so
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition
equipped) P.5-60 switch in the “ON” position)” on page 5-114.
NOTE switch in the “ON” position)” on page 5-134. warning display screen (With
 The fuel units, temperature units, display ignition switch in the “OFF”
language, and other settings can be changed.
Refer to “Changing the function settings position)
(With ignition switch in the “ON” position)”
Multi-information meter switch N00555200212
N00555100178
on page 5-121. If you press the multi-information meter
The multi-information meter switch is a but- switch and return from the warning display
ton marked “INFO” on the left side of the
dash. screen to the previous screen, the warning
Each time the multi-information meter switch is displayed.
is operated, a sound is emitted and the multi- Refer to “Returning to the display screen
information display changes between infor- from before the warning display” on page
mation such as warnings, service reminder, 5-111.
average and momentary fuel consumption, This mark is also displayed if there is another
driving range, average speed and ACD con- warning other than the one displayed. When
trol mode display (if so equipped). the cause of the warning display is elimi-
It is also possible to change elements such as nated, the warning goes out automatically.
the language and units used on the multi-
NOTE Type 1 Odometer/Trip odometer

When there is a warning display N00555400142
 When the warning is displayed, the warn-
ing display screen can be redisplayed on the Each time you lightly press the multi-infor-
information screen. mation meter switch, the display screen
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition changes as follows:
5-110. Odometer/Trip odometer  Odome-
5 Refer to “Information screen (With ignition ter/Trip odometer  Service reminder 
switch in the “ON” position)” on page 5-114. Redisplay of a warning display screen 
When there is no warning display
Odometer/Trip odometer .
Type 2
Information screen (With igni- When there is a warning display Odometer
tion switch in the “OFF” posi- Shows the total distance traveled.
tion)
N00555300154
Trip odometer
Each time you lightly press the multi-infor-
mation meter switch, the display screen Shows the distance traveled between two
changes in the following order. points.
Usage examples for trip odometer , trip
1- Odometer (Type 1)/Trip odometer odometer :
2- Odometer (Type 1)/Trip odometer
3- Service reminder
4- Redisplay of a warning display screen

It is possible to measure two currently
traveled distances, from home using trip
NOTE
Type 1  Both trip odometers and can count
odometer and from a particular point
up to 9999.9 miles/kilometers.
on the way using trip odometer . When a trip odometer goes past 9999.9
To reset the trip odometer: miles/kilometers, it returns to 0.0 miles/kilo-
To return the display to 0, hold down the meters.
multi-information meter switch for about  When the battery is disconnected, the memo-
2 seconds or more. Only the currently dis- ries of trip odometer displays and 5
played value will be reset. are cleared, and their displays return to “0.0
Example: miles/kilometers”.
If trip odometer is displayed, only trip Type 2
odometer will be reset. Service reminder
N00555500039
Shows the distance and number of months

until the next periodic inspection.
Refer to “Service reminder” on page 5-119.
Interrupt display screen (With

ignition switch in the “OFF”
position)
N00559600184
NOTE
When there is information to be announced,
 If there is no warning display, the switching
such as a key reminder, the buzzer sounds and
sequence is: Odometer/Trip odometer 
switches to the warning display screen. Refer
Odometer/Trip odometer  service to the appropriate page and take the necessary
reminder  Odometer/Trip odometer . measures.
When the cause of the warning display is
eliminated, the warning display goes out
automatically.

Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition Refer to “Information screen (With ignition
switch in the “OFF” position)” on page Type 1 switch in the “OFF” position)” on page
5-131. 5-110.
Type 1 Door ajar warning display

(With ignition switch in the
Type 2 “OFF” position)
5 N00559700101
Type 2
If any of the doors or the rear hatch is not
completely closed, the open door or rear
hatch warning is displayed.
Type 1
1- Information generated
2- Cause eliminated NOTE
 Warning display screens with a “ ” or
Returning to the display screen “ ” mark displayed in the upper right of the Type 2
screen can be switched. If you want to switch
from before the warning display
the display, press the multi-information
meter switch as follows.
Even if the cause of the warning display is
“ ”: Press lightly.
not eliminated, you can return to the screen
that was displayed before the warning dis- “ ”: Press for about 2 seconds or more. 1- Doors and rear hatch are closed
play. 2- Doors or rear hatch is open (driver’s
If you press the multi-information meter Redisplay of a warning display screen door is open in this example)
switch, the display screen switches to the
screen display from before the warning and When the warning is displayed, if you
the warning (A) is displayed. lightly press the multi-information meter
switch a few times, the warning display
screen you switched from is redisplayed.

Information screen (With igni- System check screen Service reminder

tion switch turned from “OFF”
When the ignition switch is turned to the When the time for periodic inspection arrives,
to “ON” position)
“ON” position, the system check screen is the warning display is displayed for a few
N00555800188
displayed for about 4 seconds. If there is no seconds after the screen that is initially dis-
When the ignition switch is turned to the fault, information screen (when the ignition played when the ignition switch is turned
“ON” position, the display screen changes in switch is “ON”) is displayed. “ON”. Refer to “Service reminder” on page
the following order. If there is a fault, the screen changes to warn- 5-119. 5
ing display. Refer to “Warning display list
(when the ignition switch is “ON”)” on page Type 1
Type 1
5-134.
Type 1 Type 2
Type 2 Type 2
1- Screen when the ignition switch is ACD control mode display

“OFF” NOTE screen (if so equipped)
2- System check screen  The system check screen display varies
N00545900056
3- Screen when the ignition switch is depending on your equipment.
“ON” The operation status of the ACD control
mode is displayed.
Refer to “ACD control mode” on page 5-83.

If there is a fault in the ASC, the “ASC OFF”
warning display screen (With display illuminates. Type 1
ignition switch in the “ON” Refer to “ASC OFF switch” on page 5-92.
position)
N00555200124
Information screen (With igni- When there is no warning display
This is displayed when you press the multi- tion switch in the “ON” posi-
information meter switch and switch the
tion)
5 warning display screen.
N00556200219
This mark is also displayed if there is another
Each time you lightly press the multi-infor- When there is a
warning other than the one displayed.
warning display
When the cause of the warning display is mation meter switch, the display screen Type 2
eliminated, the warning goes out automat- changes in the following order.
ically.
NOTE
 When the warning is displayed, the warn-
ing display screen can be redisplayed on the
information screen. When there is a
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition warning display
5-110 or “Information screen (With ignition 1- Odometer (Type 1)/Trip odometer
switch in the “ON” position)” on page 5-114.
2- Odometer (Type 1)/Trip odometer
3- Service reminder
4- Engine coolant temperature display
Active stability control (ASC) (Type 1)
OFF display screen (if so equipped) 5- Driving range display (Type 1)
N00556100058 6- Average speed display, average fuel
consumption display, momentary fuel
This is displayed when the Active stability
consumption display (Type 1)
control (ASC) is turned off with the “ASC
7- Driving range display, momentary fuel
OFF” switch.
consumption display (Type 2)
8- Average fuel consumption display, Service reminder
momentary fuel consumption display
NOTE
 The driving range is determined based on the
(Type 2)
Shows the distance and number of months fuel consumption data. This may vary
9- Average speed display, momentary fuel depending on the driving conditions and hab-
consumption display (Type 2) until the next periodic inspection.
Refer to “Service reminder” on page 5-119. its. Treat the distance displayed as just a
10- Function setting screen rough guideline.
11- Redisplay of a warning display screen  When you refuel, the driving range display is
Engine coolant temperature dis- automatically updated.
5
NOTE play However, if you only add a small amount of
fuel, the correct value will not be displayed.
 While driving, the function setting screen is
Fill to a full tank whenever possible.
not displayed even if you operate the multi- Shows the engine coolant temperature.
information meter switch. Always park the  When your vehicle is stopped on an
vehicle in a safe place before operating. If the coolant becomes hot, “ ” will blink. extremely steep hill, the driving range value
Refer to “Changing the function settings Pay careful attention to the engine coolant may change. This is due to the movement of
(With ignition switch in the “ON” position)” temperature display while you are driving. fuel in the tank and does not indicate any
on page 5-121. problem.
 The display setting can be changed to the
 When there is information to be announced, CAUTION preferred units (miles or km).
such as a system fault, the tone sounds and
the screen display is changed.  If the engine is overheating, “ ” will blink. Refer to “Changing the function settings
Refer to “Interrupt display screen (With igni- In this case, the bar graph is on the red zone. (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)”
tion switch in the “ON” position)” on page Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place on page 5-121.
5-117. and take the required measures. Refer to
“Engine overheating” on page 8-4.
Odometer/Trip odometer Average speed display

Driving range display
The operation method is the same as when This displays the average speed from the last
the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position. Shows the approximate driving range (how reset to the present.
For further details, refer to “Odometer/Trip many more miles or kilometers you can There are 2 types of mode settings as follows.
odometer” on page 5-110. drive) with the current fuel level. When this For details on how to change the average
driving range falls below 30 miles (50 km), “- speed display setting, refer to “Changing the
--” is displayed. function settings (With ignition switch in the
Refuel as soon as possible. “ON” position)” on page 5-121.

Manual reset mode NOTE Manual reset mode

 “---” is displayed when the average speed
 When the average speed is being dis- cannot be measured.  When the average fuel consumption is
played, if you hold down the multi-infor-  The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset being displayed, if you hold down the
mation meter switch, the average speed mode”. multi-information meter switch, the aver-
displayed at that time is reset.  The display setting can be changed to the age fuel consumption displayed at that
 When the ignition switch is turned to the preferred units (mph or km/h). time is reset.
5 “ON” position from the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position, the mode setting
Refer to “Changing the function settings
 When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position from the “ACC” or
changes automatically from manual to on page 5-121. “LOCK” position, the mode setting
auto.  The average speed display memories for auto changes automatically from manual to
Switching to auto occurs automatically. If reset mode and manual reset mode are erased auto.
switching to manual mode is done, how- if the battery is disconnected. Switching to auto occurs automatically. If
ever, the data from the last reset is dis- switching to manual mode is done, how-
played. Average fuel consumption display ever, the data from the last reset is dis-
played.
Auto reset mode This displays the average fuel consumption
from the last reset to the present. Auto reset mode
 When the average speed is being dis- There are 2 types of mode settings as follows.
played, if you hold down the multi-infor- For details on how to change the average fuel  When the average fuel consumption is
mation meter switch, these calculations consumption display setting, refer to “Chang- being displayed, if you hold down the
will be reset to zero. ing the function settings (With ignition switch multi-information meter switch, these cal-
 When the ignition switch has been set to in the “ON” position)” on page 5-121. culations will be reset to zero.
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position for about  When the ignition switch has been set to
The “ ” mark in the momentary fuel gauge
4 hours or more, the average speed dis- the “ACC” or “LOCK” position for about
shows the average fuel consumption. (Type
play will automatically reset. 4 hours or more, the average speed dis-
2)
play will automatically reset.
NOTE
 The average speed display and the average
fuel consumption display can be reset sepa-
rately in both auto reset mode and manual
reset mode.

When the momentary fuel consumption sur-
NOTE passes the average fuel consumption, the
Interrupt display screen (With
 The average speed display and the average
momentary fuel consumption is displayed ignition switch in the “ON”
fuel consumption display can be reset sepa-
rately in both auto reset mode and manual
with a green bar graph. (Type 2) position)
reset mode. Be conscious of maintaining the momentary N00556300177
 “---” is displayed when the average fuel con- fuel consumption above the average fuel con-
sumption cannot be measured. sumption, it can help you drive with the better Warning display
fuel consumption.
 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
mode”.
5
When there is information to be announced,
 Average fuel consumption may vary depend NOTE such as a system fault, a tone sounds and the
on the driving conditions (road conditions,  When the momentary fuel consumption can- information screen is switched to the warning
how you drive, etc.) The actual fuel con- not be measured, a bar graph is not shown.
sumption may differ from the fuel consump-
display screen.
 The display setting can be changed to the Refer to the warning list and take the neces-
tion displayed, so treat the fuel consumption
preferred units {mpg (US), mpg (UK), L/100 sary measures. Refer to “Warning display list
displayed as just a rough guideline.
km or km/L}.
 The average fuel consumption display mem- (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)”
ories for auto reset mode and manual reset on page 5-134.
mode are erased if the battery is discon- on page 5-121. When the cause of the warning display is
nected.
 It is possible to cancel the green bar graph. eliminated, the warning display goes out
 The display setting can be changed to the Refer to “Changing the function settings automatically.
preferred units {mpg (US), mpg (UK),L/100 (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)”
km or km/L}. on page 5-121. Returning to the display screen from
(With ignition switch in the “ON” position)” before the warning display
on page 5-121.
Function setting screen Even if the cause of the warning display is
not eliminated, you can return to the screen
that was displayed before the warning dis-
Momentary fuel consumption dis- The “Display language”, “Temperature unit”,
play.
play “Fuel consumption unit”, and “Average fuel
consumption and speed reset method” set- If you press the multi-information meter
tings can be modified as desired. switch, the display screen switches to the
While driving, the momentary fuel consump- For further details, refer to “Changing the
tion is shown with a bar graph. screen display from before the warning and
function settings (With ignition switch in the
“ON” position)” on page 5-121. the warning (A) is displayed.

switch a few times, the warning display
Type 1 screen you switched from is redisplayed.
Outside temperature display
screen
N00556500108
Other interrupt displays
Shows the temperature outside the vehicle.
The operation status of each system is dis-
Type 2 played on the information screen. NOTE
5 For further details, refer to the appropriate  The display setting can be changed to the
page in the warning display list. preferred units (°F or °C).
Refer to “Other interrupt displays (With igni- Refer to “Changing the function settings
tion switch in the “ON” position)” on page
on page 5-121.
5-140.
 Depending on factors such as the driving
conditions, the displayed temperature may
Selector lever position display vary from the actual outside temperature.
NOTE screen {continuously variable
 Warning display screens with a “ ” or transmission (CVT)} Twin Clutch SST control mode
N00556400051
“ ” mark displayed in the upper right of the
Shows the position of the selector lever.
display screen (Twin Clutch
screen can be switched. If you want to switch
the display, press the multi-information Refer to “Selector lever operation” on page SST)
meter switch as follows. 5-62. N00545100032
“ ”: Press lightly. The operation status of the Twin Clutch SST

Gearshift lever position display control mode is displayed. Refer to “Twin
“ ”: Press for about 2 seconds or more.
Clutch SST control mode” on page 5-75.
screen (Twin Clutch SST)
N00545800068
Redisplay of a warning display Shows the position of the gearshift lever.

ACD control mode display
screen Refer to “Gearshift lever operation” on page screen (if so equipped)
5-70. N00545900069
When the warning is displayed, if you The operation status of the ACD control
lightly press the multi-information meter mode is displayed.

Refer to “ACD control mode” on page 5-83.
NOTE Type 1
 It may take several seconds to stabilize the
ECO mode indicator (if so display after refilling the tank.
equipped)  If fuel is added with the ignition switch in
the “ON” position, the remaining fuel dis-
N00568700019
play may indicate an incorrect fuel level.
This indicator will be displayed when fuel-
Type 2
efficient driving is achieved. 5
Fuel tank filler door mark
Fuel remaining display screen
N00556600154
The arrow (A) indicates that the fuel tank
filler door is located on the left side of the
Shows the amount of fuel remaining.
vehicle. (Refer to “Filling the fuel tank” on
page 3-4.)
Type 1 Type 2
NOTE
Fuel remaining warning display  On hills or curves, the display may be incor-
rect due to the movement of fuel in the tank.
When the fuel level runs low, the information
screen changes to the interrupt display of the
fuel remaining warning display and the mark Service reminder
(B) on the fuel remaining display flashes N00556700201
slowly. If this warning display appears, refuel
Displays the approximate time until the next
as soon as possible.
recommended periodic inspection. “---” is
displayed when the inspection time has
CAUTION arrived.
 Running out of gas could damage the cata-
lytic converter. If the warning display
appears, refuel as soon as possible.

2. This informs you that a periodic inspec-
NOTE To reset
tion is due. Contact an authorized Mit-
 Except for vehicles equipped with Twin
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
Clutch SST, shows the time until the periodic The “---” display can be reset while the igni-
of your choice to have the system
inspection every 6 months (7,500 miles or tion switch is in the “OFF” position. When
12,000 km). checked.
the display is reset, the time until the next
 For vehicles equipped with Twin Clutch periodic inspection is displayed and the warn-
At that time, when the ignition switch is
SST, the service reminder time can be modi-
switched from the “OFF” position to the ing display is no longer displayed when the
5 fied by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer, to adjust for severe usage, etc. Refer “ON” position, the warning display is dis- ignition switch is switched from the “OFF”
to “Severe maintenance schedule” in your played for a few seconds on the informa- position to the “ON” position.
vehicle’s Warranty and Maintenance Man- tion screen.
ual. For further information, please contact 1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Type 1 tion meter switch, the information screen
changes to the service reminder display
screen.
Type 1
Type 1
Type 2
Type 2
Type 2
3. After your vehicle is inspected at an

1. Shows the time until the next periodic authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it
inspection. displays the time until the next periodic
inspection.
NOTE
 Shows the distance in units of 100 miles (100
km) and the time in units of 1 month.

2. Press and hold the multi-information Type 2
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
CAUTION
 The customer is responsible for making sure
more) to display “ ” and make it flash. that regular inspections and maintenance and
(If there is no operation for about 10 sec- periodic inspections and maintenance are
onds with this indicator flashing, the dis- performed.
play returns to the previous screen.) Inspections and maintenance must be per-
3. With this indicator flashing, if you lightly formed to prevent accidents and malfunc-
If any of the doors or the rear hatch is not
press the multi-information meter switch, tions.
completely closed, this displays the open 5
the screen switches from “---” to door or rear hatch.
“CLEAR”. After that, the time until the If the speed increases to about 5 mph (8
next periodic inspection is shown. NOTE km/h) or higher with a door or rear hatch ajar,
 The “---” display cannot be reset while the
a buzzer will sound 4 times to inform you that
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
Type 1 a door or rear hatch is ajar.
 When “---” is displayed, after a certain dis-
tance and a certain period of time, the dis-
play is reset and the time until the next CAUTION
periodic inspection is displayed.  Always make sure that the warning display
 If you accidentally reset the display, consult goes out before beginning to drive.
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for
Type 2 assistance.
Changing the function settings

Door ajar warning display (With ignition switch in the
(With ignition switch in the “ON” position)
N00556801179
“ON” position) 1. Park your vehicle in a safe place.
N00555700103
Fully apply the parking brake and move
Type 1 the gearshift lever (manual transaxle) into
the “N” (Neutral) position, the selector
lever {continuously variable transmission
(CVT)} or the gearshift lever (Twin
Clutch SST) into the “P” (PARK) posi-
tion.

2. When you lightly press the multi-informa- 3. Press and hold the multi-information 4. Select the item to change on the menu
tion meter switch, the information screen meter switch (for about 2 seconds or screen and change to the desired setting.
changes to the function setting screen. more) to switch from the setting mode For further details on the operation meth-
Refer to “Information screen (With igni- screen to the menu screen. ods, refer to the following sections.
tion switch in the “ON” position)” on
page 5-114. Type 1 Refer to “Changing the reset mode for
average fuel consumption and average
speed” on page 5-123.
5 Type 1 Type 2 Refer to “Changing the fuel consumption
display unit” on page 5-123.
Refer to “Changing the temperature unit”
Type 2 on page 5-124.
Refer to “Changing the display language”
on page 5-125.
Refer to “Operation sound setting” on
page 5-125.
Refer to “Changing the amount of time
until “REST REMINDER” is displayed”
CAUTION on page 5-126.
 For safety, stop the vehicle before operating. Refer to “Changing the turn signal sound”
While driving, even if you operate the multi-
NOTE
on page 5-127.
information meter switch, the function set-  To return the menu screen to the function set-
ting screen, press and hold the multi-infor- Refer to “Changing the momentary fuel
ting screen is not displayed.
mation meter switch (for about 2 seconds or consumption display (Type 2)” on page
more). 5-127.
 If no operations are made within about 15 Refer to “Returning to the factory set-
seconds of the menu screen being displayed, tings” on page 5-128.
the display returns to the function setting
screen.

3. Press and hold the multi-information  When the ignition switch has been set to
Changing the reset mode for aver-
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or the “ACC” or “LOCK” position for about
age fuel consumption and average more) to switch in sequence from A or 1 4 hours or more, the average fuel con-
speed (Auto reset mode)  M, 2 or P (Manual sumption display and the average speed
N00557000197 reset mode)  A or 1 (Auto reset mode). display will automatically reset.
You can change the mode condition for the The setting will change to the selected
average fuel consumption and average speed mode condition.
NOTE
display to “Auto reset” or “Manual reset”.
 The average speed display and average fuel 5
Manual reset mode consumption display can be reset separately
1. Press and hold the multi-information
in both auto reset mode and manual reset
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or  If you press and hold the multi-informa- mode.
more) to switch from the setting mode tion meter switch when the average fuel  The average speed display memories and
screen to the menu screen. consumption and average speed are dis- average fuel consumption memories for auto
Refer to “Changing the function settings played, these calculations will be reset to reset mode and manual reset mode are erased
(With ignition switch in the “ON” posi- zero. if the battery is disconnected.
tion)” on page 5-121.  When the ignition switch is turned to the  The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter “ON” position from the “ACC” or mode”.
switch to select “AVG” (average fuel con- “LOCK” position, the mode setting
sumption and average speed setting). changes automatically from manual to
auto. Changing the fuel consumption
Type 1 Switching to auto occurs automatically. If display unit
switching to manual mode is done, how- N00557100097
ever, the data from the last reset is dis- The fuel consumption display unit can be
played. changed. The distance, speed, and amount
units are also changed to match the selected
Type 2 Auto reset mode fuel consumption unit.
 When the average fuel consumption and

average speed are being displayed, if you
hold down the multi-information meter
switch, these calculations will be reset to
zero.

1. Press and hold the multi-information 4. Lightly press the multi-information meter
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or switch to switch in sequence from km/L
NOTE
 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
more) to change from the setting mode L/100 km mpg (US) mpg (UK)
the unit setting is erased and is automatically
screen to the menu screen. RETURN km/L.
set to {mpg (US) or L/100 km}.
(With ignition switch in the “ON” posi- The distance and speed units are also changed
tion)” on page 5-121. in the following combinations to match the
Type 1 Type 2
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
5 switch to select “AVG UNIT” (fuel con-
selected fuel consumption unit.
sumption display unit setting). Distance

Fuel Speed (aver-
(driving
Type 1 economy age speed)
range)
mpg (US) mile(s) mph
mpg (UK) mile(s) mph
km/L km km/h
Type 2 L/100 km km km/h

Changing the temperature unit
N00557200144
more) to change the setting to the selected
unit. The temperature display unit can be changed.

NOTE meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
 The display units for the driving range, the more) to change from the setting mode
average fuel consumption, the average speed screen to the menu screen.
more) to display “AVG UNIT” (fuel con- and the momentary fuel consumption are Refer to “Changing the function settings
sumption display unit setting). changed, but the units for the indicating nee- (With ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
dle (speedometer), the odometer and the trip tion)” on page 5-121.
odometer will remain unchanged.

2. Lightly press the multi-information meter 3. Press and hold the multi-information
Changing the display language
switch to select “ ” (temperature unit meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
N00557300158
setting). more) to display “LANGUAGE” (lan-
The language of the multi-information dis- guage setting).
Type 1 play can be changed. 4. Lightly press the multi-information meter
switch to select the desired language.
more) to change from the setting mode
more) to change the setting to the selected
5
screen to the menu screen.
language.
Type 2 (With ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
NOTE
the language setting is erased and is automat-
switch to select “LANGUAGE” (lan-
ically set to ENGLISH.
guage setting).
 If “---” is selected in the language setting, a
warning message is not displayed when there
Type 1 is a warning display or interrupt display.
more) to change in sequence from °F  Operation sound setting
°C  °F. N00557400133
The setting is changed to the selected tem- Type 2 You can turn off the operation sounds of the
perature unit. multi-information meter switch and rheostat
meter illumination button.
NOTE
the unit setting is erased and is automatically
set to °F (°C). more) to switch from the setting mode
(With ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter 2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
NOTE switch to select “ALARM” (rest time set-
switch to select “ ” (operation sound  The operation sound setting only deactivates
setting). ting).
the operation sound of the multi-information
meter switch and rheostat meter illumination Type 1
Type 1 button. The warning display and other
sounds cannot be deactivated.
5 Changing the amount of time until

“REST REMINDER” is displayed
Type 2
N00557500150 Type 2
The amount of time until the display appears
can be changed.

more) to switch from the setting mode
3. Press and hold the multi-information Refer to “Changing the function settings 3. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or (With ignition switch in the “ON” posi- meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
more) to switch in sequence from ON tion)” on page 5-121. more) to display “ALARM” (rest time
(operation sound on)  OFF (operation setting).
sound off)  ON (operation sound on).
The setting is changed to the selected con-
dition. Type 1 Type 2
NOTE
the operation sound setting is erased and is
automatically set to “ON” (operation sound
on).

4. Lightly press the multi-information meter 2. Lightly press the multi-information meter 1. Press and hold the multi-information
switch to select the amount of time until switch to select . (changing the turn meter switch for about 2 seconds or more
the display appears. signal sound) to switch from the setting mode screen to
5. Press and hold the multi-information the menu screen.
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or Type 1 Refer to “Changing the function settings
more) to change the setting to the selected (With ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
time. tion)” on page 5-121.
NOTE 5
switch to select . (changing the
 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of momentary fuel consumption display)
the unit setting is erased and is automatically Type 2
set to the “OFF”.
 The drive time is reset when the ignition
switch is in the “OFF” position.
Changing the turn signal sound

N00563500070
It is possible to change the turn signal sound. 3. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch for about 2 seconds or more
1. Press and hold the multi-information to switch in sequence from 1 (turn signal
meter switch for about 2 seconds or more sound 1)  2 (turn signal sound 2)  1
to switch from the setting mode screen to 3. Press and hold the multi-information
(turn signal sound 1). meter switch for about 2 seconds or more
the menu screen. The setting changes to the selected turn
Refer to “Changing the function settings to switch in sequence from ON (with the
signal sound. green bar graph)  OFF (without the
tion)” on page 5-121. green bar graph)  ON (with the green
Changing the momentary fuel con- bar graph).
sumption display (Type 2) The setting changes to the selected bar
N00563600013 graph setting.
It is possible to change the bar graph setting
of the momentary fuel consumption display.

Returning to the factory settings
N00557600180
more), the buzzer sounds and all of the
All of the function settings can be returned to function settings are returned to the fac-
their factory settings. tory settings.
NOTE
5 more) to change from the setting mode  The factory settings are as follows.
• Average fuel consumption and average
speed reset mode: A (Auto reset)
• Fuel consumption display unit: mpg (US)
or L/100 km
• Temperature unit: °F (Fahrenheit) or °C
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter (Celsius)
switch to select “RESET” (return to the • Display language: ENGLISH
factory settings). • Cooperative language setting: A
• Operation sounds: ON (Operation sound
Type 1
on)
• “REST REMINDER” display: OFF
• Turn signal sound: Turn signal sound 1
• Momentary fuel consumption with the
green bar graph (Type 2): ON
Type 2

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

N00557700035
Indicator and warning light list

N00557801277
Type A Type B
5
1- Position indicator P.5-141 7- Tire pressure monitoring system warn- 13- Engine malfunction indicator (“SER-
2- High beam indicator P.5-141 ing light P.5-101 VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check
3- Charging system warning light 8- Brake warning light P.5-142 engine light”) P.5-142
P.5-143 9- Cruise control indicator P.5-95 14- Active stability control (ASC) OFF
4- Turn signal indicator/hazard warning 10- Seat belt reminder/warning light indicator (if so equipped) P.5-93
light P.5-141 P.4-12 15- Active stability control (ASC) indicator
5- Front fog light indicator (if so 11- Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) P.5-93
equipped) P.5-141 warning light 16- Information screen display list
6- Anti-lock braking system warning light  P.4-29 P.5-130
P.5-89 12- ECO mode indicator (if so equipped)
P.5-119

Information screen display list NOTE

N00557900040 • Abnormal voltage or a static electricity dis-
When there is information to be announced, charge is generated by the operation of
installed electronics (including after-market
such as light reminders, the tone sounds and
parts).
the screen switches to the displays shown
If the warning display has occurred a number
below. Refer to the appropriate page and take
of times, take your vehicle to an authorized
the necessary measures.
5 When the cause of the warning display is
of your choice and have the system checked.
eliminated, the warning display goes out
automatically.
5-131.
switch in the “ON” position)” on page 5-134.
Refer to “Other interrupt displays (With igni-
tion switch in the “ON” position)” on page
5-140.
NOTE
 In the following cases, a warning may be dis-
played on the information screen and the
buzzer may sound for a few seconds, at
times.
This is caused by the system picking up
interference such as strong electromagnetic
waves or noise, and is not a functional prob-
lem.
• An extremely strong electromagnetic wave
is received from a source such as an illegal
radio set, a spark from a wire, or a radar sta-
tion.

Warning display list (With ignition switch in the “OFF” position)

N00558001247
Screen type 1 Screen type 2 Cause Do this (Reference)

 You have forgotten to remove the key from  Remove the key.
the ignition switch. Refer to “Key reminder system” on page
5-37.
5
 You have forgotten to turn off the lights.  Refer to “Light auto-cutout function (head-
lights and other lights)” on page 5-147.
 The theft-alarm is operating.  Refer to “Theft-alarm system” on page

5-41.
 Immobilizer is registered.  Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-

theft starting system)” on page 5-4, 5-28.


 After turning off the engine, an attempt  Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
was made to open the driver’s door with (PUSH OFF) position.
the ignition switch in any position other Refer to “Ignition switch return reminder
than “LOCK” (PUSH OFF). system” on page 5-38.
 An attempt was made to lock all the doors  Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
and the rear hatch with the ignition switch (PUSH OFF) position.
5 in any position other than “LOCK” (PUSH Refer to “Ignition switch turn-off reminder
OFF). system” on page 5-19.


 There is a fault in the F.A.S.T.-key.  Refer to “F.A.S.T.-key” on page 5-11.

Warning display list (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)

N00558101307

 There is a fault in the EPS.  Have the vehicle inspected by an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
facility of your choice as soon as possible.
5 Refer to “Electric power steering system
(EPS)” on page 5-91.


 There is a fault in the F.A.S.T.-key.  Refer to “F.A.S.T.-key” on page 5-11.
 Immobilizer is registered.  Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-

theft starting system)” on page
5-4, 5-28.


 The brake fluid level is low.  Park the vehicle in a safe place and contact
 There is a fault in the brake system. an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
a repair facility of your choice for assis-
tance.
Refer to “Brake warning display” on page
5-143.
5  There is a fault in the Anti-lock braking  Avoid sudden braking and high-speed driv-
system. ing, park the vehicle in a safe place, and
take corrective measures. Refer to “Anti-
lock braking system warning light/display”
on page 5-89.
 The tire pressure in one of the tires (except  Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
spare tire) is low. tem” on page 5-100.
 There is a fault in the Tire Pressure Moni-  Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
toring System. tem” on page 5-100.
 One of the doors or the rear hatch is not  Close the door or rear hatch.
completely closed. Refer to “Door ajar warning display (With
The open door or rear hatch is displayed. ignition switch in the “OFF” position)” on
page 5-112.


 The engine hood is open.  Close the engine hood.
Refer to “Engine hood” on page 9-3.
 The engine is overheated.  Park the vehicle in a safe place and take
corrective measures. 5
Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-4.
 The continuously variable transmission  Park the vehicle in a safe place and take
(CVT) fluid or Twin Clutch SST fluid tem- corrective measures.
perature is increased. Refer to “Continuously variable transmis-
sion (CVT)” on page 5-61.
Refer to “Twin Clutch SST” on page 5-70.
 The seat belt is not fastened when the igni-  Fasten your seat belt properly.
tion switch is in the “ON” position. Refer to “Driver’s seat belt reminder/warn-
ing light and display” on page 4-12.
 There is a fault in the fuel system.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
have the system checked.
 The vehicle is being driven with the park-  Release the parking brake.
ing brake still applied. Refer to “Brake warning display” on page
5-143.


 There is a fault in the engine oil circulation  Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as
system. possible and contact an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of
your choice to have the system checked.
Refer to “Oil pressure warning display” on
page 5-144.
5  There is a fault in the charging system.  Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as
possible and contact an authorized Mit-
your choice for assistance.
Refer to “Charging system warning dis-
play” on page 5-144.
 There is a fault in the SRS airbag or the  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
seat belt pre-tensioner system. dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
Refer to “SRS warning light/display” on
page 4-29.
 There is a fault in the Active stability con-  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
trol (ASC). dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
have the system checked. Refer to “Active
stability control (ASC)” on page 5-91.
 There is a fault in the CVT.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

 A safety device in the Twin Clutch SST dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
has been activated due to a possible mal- have the system checked.
function in the Twin Clutch SST or in the Refer to “Continuously variable transmis-
engine electronic control module. sion (CVT)” on page 5-61.
Refer to “Twin Clutch SST (Sport shift
transmission)” on page 5-70.


 There is a fault in the ACD (Active center  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
differential system). dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
Refer to “ACD (Active center differential
system)” on page 5-83.
 The fuel is running low.  Refuel as soon as possible.
Refer to “Fuel remaining display screen” 5
on page 5-119.
 The outside temperature is 37 °F (3 °C) or  Be careful driving on frozen ground.

less.  The ground may be frozen even when this
warning is not displayed, so drive care-
fully.
 The timing chain may be worn.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice to

Other interrupt displays (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)

N00558201265
The operation status of each system is displayed on the information screen. For further details, refer to the appropriate page for each system.
Screen System operation status Reference

 When the Active stability control (ASC) is  Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)”
operating. on page 5-91.
5
This informs you that a periodic inspection is due.
Screen type 1 Screen type 2 Do this

Have an inspection made by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. For further details, refer
to “Service reminder” on page 5-119.
The rest time can be set.

Indicators
Screen type 1 Screen type 2 Do this
Park the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine, and take a rest.
Use this display as rough guide for taking rests during a long drive.
The interval from the start of your trip until this message is displayed can be set.
Refer to “Changing the function settings (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)” on page
5-121.
The display and buzzer alert the driver when the set time is reached. If you continue to drive
without having a rest, the buzzer sounds about every 5 minutes to encourage you to take a rest. 5
 In the following cases, the time driven is reset and the display returns to the previous dis-
play screen. After this, when the set time is reached again, the display and buzzer encourage
you to take a rest.
• The buzzer sounds 3 times.
• The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position.
• The multi-information meter switch is held (for about 2 seconds or more).
Indicators NOTE Front fog light indicator

N00519900127  If the indicator flashes faster than usual or if N00520200218
the indicator stays on without flashing, check This indicator comes on while the front fog
for a malfunctioning turn signal light bulb or
Turn signal indicators/Hazard turn signal connection.
lights are on.
warning lights
N00520000229 Position indicator
The arrows will flash in time with the corre- High beam indicator N00551300026
sponding exterior turn signals when the turn N00520100086 This indicator light illuminates while the
signal lever is used. A blue light comes on when the headlights position lights are on.
are on high beam.
Both arrows will flash when the hazard warn-
ing flasher switch is pressed.

Warning lights
Warning lights CAUTION Engine malfunction indicator

N00520300147 • When the brake warning light does not go (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON”
out even when the parking brake is
released. or “Check engine light”)
Brake warning light • When the brake warning light stays on N00520500790
N00520400366
while driving. This indicator is a part of the onboard diag-
When the ignition switch is turned to the • If the above occurs, avoid sudden braking nostic (OBD) system which monitors the
5 “ON” position, this indicator normally comes and high-speed driving. Park the vehicle in emissions, engine control system or continu-
on and goes out a few seconds later. A warn- a safe place, and contact an authorized Mit- ously variable transmission (CVT) control
ing is also displayed in the multi-information subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of system/Twin Clutch SST control system. If a
display. your choice as soon as possible.
problem is detected in one of these systems,
The warning light also illuminates after start-  The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the
this indicator illuminates or flashes. When the
ing the engine under the following condi- following manner when brake performance
is deteriorated.
tions: tion, this indicator normally comes on and
• Confirm that the vehicle slows down when
you press down on the brake pedal harder goes off after the engine has started.
 When the parking brake is still applied.
than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal
 When the brake fluid level is low. This indicator will come on if the fuel tank
may go all the way to the floor.
 When the brake system circuit is not filler cap is not properly tightened. If this
• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking
working properly. indicator comes on and stays on after refuel-
to reduce your speed and slowly apply the
parking brake. ing, stop the engine and check that the cap is
Before driving, be sure that the parking brake Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the properly tightened. (Turn the cap clockwise
is fully released and brake warning light is stop lights to alert the vehicles behind you. until you hear clicking sounds.)
off.  Do not suddenly apply the parking brake If this indicator does not go off after several
while driving. This may cause the rear seconds or lights up while driving, have the
CAUTION wheels to lock and cause an accident. system checked as soon as possible at an
 If the brake warning light and the anti-lock authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
braking system warning light are illuminated repair facility of your choice.
at the same time, the braking force distribu-
tion function will not operate, so the vehicle
may be destabilized during sudden braking
under the following conditions.

Information screen display
CAUTION NOTE Information screen display

 Driving for a long time with the engine mal-  Do not disconnect the battery cable when the N00558300025
function indicator on may cause more dam- engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE
age to the emission control system. This ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) is
could also affect fuel economy and drivabil- on.
Brake warning display
N00558400101
ity. The engine electronic control module stores
 If this indicator does not come on when the critical OBD information (especially exhaust Type 1
tion, have the system checked at an autho-
emission data), which may be lost if the bat-
tery cable is disconnected while the engine
5
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair malfunction indicator is on. This will make it
facility of your choice. difficult to diagnose the cause of future prob-
 If the engine malfunction indicator comes on lems.
while the engine is running, avoid driving at
high speeds. Type 2
During vehicle operation with the indicator Charging system warning light
on, the vehicle may not accelerate when you N00520600296
depress the accelerator pedal.
When the vehicle is stationary with the indi- This light comes on in the event of a malfunc-
cator on, you must depress the brake pedal tion in the charging system or when the igni-
more firmly than usual since the engine tion switch is turned to the “ON” position
idling speed is higher than usual and a vehi- (engine off). A warning is also displayed in This warning is displayed if the vehicle is
cle equipped with a CVT or a Twin Clutch the multi-information display. When the being driven with the parking brake still
SST has a stronger tendency to creep for- engine is started, the light should go out. applied. The warning light in the instrument
ward. Check to make sure that the light has gone cluster only comes on when the parking brake
out before driving. is applied.
CAUTION CAUTION
 If the warning light stays on while the engine  If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
is running, park your vehicle in a safe place parking brake, the brakes will overheat,
as soon as possible and contact an authorized resulting in ineffective braking and possible
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility brake failure.
of your choice to have the system checked. If this warning is displayed while driving,
release the parking brake.

Information screen display

Type 1 Type 2
CAUTION
 If the brake warning display, brake warning
light, and the Anti-lock braking system
warning light are illuminated at the same
time, the braking force distribution function
will not operate, so the vehicle may be desta-
bilized during sudden braking. Avoid sudden
Type 2 If there is a fault in the charging system, the
5 braking and high-speed driving. Park the
vehicle in a safe place, and contact an autho-
warning display is displayed on the informa-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair tion screen in the multi-information display.
facility of your choice. The warning light in the instrument cluster
 The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the also illuminates.
following manner when brake performance
When the ignition switch is turned to the

is deteriorated. CAUTION
• Confirm that the vehicle slows down when
“ON” position, if the brake fluid is low, this  If warnings are displayed while the engine is
you press down on the brake pedal harder
warning is displayed. running, park your vehicle in a safe place as
than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal
The warning light in the instrument cluster soon as possible and contact an authorized
may go all the way to the floor.
also illuminates. • Should the brakes fail, use engine braking of your choice to have the system checked.
to reduce your speed and slowly apply the
CAUTION parking brake.
Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the
 If this warning stays on and does not go out
stop lights to alert the vehicles behind you. Oil pressure warning display
while driving, there is a danger of ineffective N00558700061
braking. If this happens, park the vehicle in a
Type 1
safe place, and contact an authorized Mit- Charging system warning dis-
your choice.
play
N00558600073
Type 1

Combination headlights and dimmer switch

Type 2
Combination headlights and
dimmer switch
N00522501775
Headlights
If the engine oil pressure drops while the
engine is running, the warning display is dis-
NOTE
5
played on the information screen in the multi-
 Do not leave the headlights and other lights
information display.
on for a long period of time when the engine
is not running. The battery will run down.
OFF All lights off
CAUTION  When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
 If the vehicle is driven while the engine oil is washed, the inside of the lens sometimes Parking, tail, front and rear side-
low, or the oil level is normal but the warn- becomes foggy. This is the same as when marker lights, license plate and
ing is displayed, the engine may overheat window glass mists up on a humid day, and instrument panel lights on
and damage may result. does not indicate a problem. When the light
is switched on, the heat will dry out the fog.
Headlights and other lights on
 If the warning is displayed while the engine
is running, park your vehicle in a safe place However, if water collects inside the light,
as soon as possible and check the engine oil have it checked by an authorized Mitsubishi If your vehicle is equipped with daytime run-
level. Motors dealer or a repair facility of your ning lights, the combinations of switch opera-
 If this warning display comes on when the choice. tions and illuminated lights differ in
engine oil level is proper, have your vehicle accordance with the following conditions.
checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. Type 1 [When the engine is started and the parking
brake is released]
Rotate the switch to operate the lights.
NOTE The daytime running lights will be illumi-
 The oil pressure warning display does not nated.
show the amount of oil. The oil level must be
checked using the dipstick. The daytime running lights illumi-
OFF
nated


The daytime running lights illumi- The daytime running lights illumi-
OFF
nated nated
Parking, tail, front and rear side- The daytime running lights illumi-
marker lights, license plate and nated
instrument panel lights on AUTO Headlights and other lights turn on
Headlights and other lights on and off automatically in accor-
dance with outside light level.
5 The daytime running lights illumi-
NOTE
nated
 Once the daytime running light come on,
they do not go out until the ignition switch is Parking, tail, front and rear side-
turned to the “LOCK” or “ACC” position. marker lights, license plate and
OFF All lights off
instrument panel lights on
Headlights and other lights turn on
[The engine is not running, or the engine is Headlights and other lights on
AUTO and off automatically in accor-
running but the parking brake has not been dance with outside light level.
released]
Parking, tail, front and rear side- NOTE
The engine starts when the lights are off. marker lights, license plate and  Once the daytime running light come on,
instrument panel lights on they do not go out until the ignition switch is
OFF All lights off turned to the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.
Headlights and other lights on
Parking, tail, front and rear side-
marker lights, license plate and [When the engine is not running, or when the
If your vehicle is equipped with daytime run-
instrument panel lights on engine is running but the parking brake is not
ning lights, the combinations of switch opera-
released]
Headlights and other lights on tions and illuminated lights differ in
accordance with the following conditions. The engine starts when the lights are off.
Type 2 [When the engine is started, and the parking
OFF All lights off
brake is released]
Headlights and other lights turn on
Rotate the switch to operate the lights.
The daytime running lights will be illumi- AUTO and off automatically in accor-
nated. dance with outside light level.


Parking, tail, front and rear side- • If the ignition switch is turned to any
Light auto-cutout function position other than “LOCK” and the
marker lights, license plate and
instrument panel lights on
(headlights and other lights) driver’s door is opened, a low-pitched
N00532601623 constant buzzer will sound to remind
Headlights and other lights on  If the ignition key is turned to “LOCK” or you to return the ignition switch.
“ACC” position or removed from the
ignition switch and the driver’s door is  If the ignition switch is turned to “LOCK”
NOTE
opened with the light switch in the “ ” or “ACC” position with the driver’s door
 The sensitivity of the automatic on/off con-
or “ ” position, the lights automatically closed and the light switch in the “ ” or
5
trol can be adjusted.
For further information, please contact your turn off. “ ” position, the lights will stay on for
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a about 3 minutes and then turn off auto-
repair facility of your choice. [When using a key to start the engine] matically.
 Do not cover the sensor (A) for the automatic • If the driver’s door is opened after the
on/off control by affixing a sticker or label to key is removed from the ignition switch,
the windshield. a high-pitched constant tone will sound NOTE
to remind you to turn off the lights.  The light auto-cutout function can be deacti-
vated.
• If the driver’s door is opened with the
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
key in the ignition switch, a low-pitched
dealer for details.
tone will sound to remind you to remove
the key.
[When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start the

When you want to keep the lights
engine] on:
 If the lights do not turn on or off with the • If the ignition switch is turned to the
switch in the “AUTO” position, manually “LOCK” position and the driver’s door If the light switch is turned to the “ ” or
operate the switch and we recommend you to is opened, a high-pitched constant “ ” position again after the engine is turned
have your vehicle checked. buzzer will sound to remind you to turn off, the about 3 minutes auto-cutout function
off the lights. described above will not work. The lights (the
parking lights, tail lights and license plate
lights) will stay on and will not turn off auto-
matically.


from the ignition switch while the lights are
NOTE on, the buzzer will sound to remind you to
 When the engine is started using the key, if
turn off the lights.
the driver’s door is opened and the key is
removed, the headlight reminder buzzer
intermittently emits a high-pitched sound. If When using the F.A.S.T.-key to
the key is still in the ignition the key start the engine
reminder buzzer intermittently emits a low-
5 pitched sound.
The buzzer stops when the driver’s door is If the driver’s door is opened with the ignition
closed. (A warning is also displayed in the switch in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position, or
multi-information display.) if the ignition switch is moved to the
 When the engine is started using the “LOCK” position while the lights are on, the
F.A.S.T.-key, if the driver’s door is opened buzzer will sound to remind you to turn off
and the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” the lights. Headlight flasher
position, the headlight reminder buzzer inter- N00550000156
mittently emits a high-pitched sound. If the In either case, the lights and buzzer will turn You can flash the high beams by pulling the
ignition switch is in any position other than off automatically.
“LOCK”, the ignition switch on reminder lever gently toward you (2). The lights will
Or you can turn the light switch to the “OFF” go back to normal when you let go. While the
buzzer intermittently emits a low-pitched
position to stop the buzzer. high beam is on, you will see a blue light on
sound.
The buzzer stops when the driver’s door is the instrument panel.
closed. (A warning is also displayed in the Dimmer (high/low beam
multi-information display.)
change) NOTE
N00549900155  You can flash the high beams by pulling the
To change the headlights from high beam to lever toward you, even if the light switch is
Headlight reminder buzzer off.
low beam and vice versa, pull the turn signal
N00549800167  If you turn the lights off with the headlights
lever to fully toward you (1). Switch the
set to high-beam illumination, the headlights
headlights to low beam as a courtesy when-
When using a key to start the ever there are oncoming vehicles, or when
are automatically returned to their low-beam
setting when the light switch is next turned
engine there is traffic moving ahead of you. An illu-
to the “ ” position.
minated blue light in the instrument cluster
If the driver’s door is opened with the key in indicates when the headlights are on high
the “LOCK” or “ACC” position or removed beam.


1. Turn the combination headlights and dim-
Welcome light NOTE mer switch to the “OFF” or “AUTO”
N00563201146 • Push the LOCK button (B) on the remote
position (for vehicles equipped with the
This function turns on the front side-marker control transmitter.
automatic light control).
and parking lights for about 30 seconds after 2. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
the UNLOCK button (A) on the remote con- position. Also, if a key was used to start
trol transmitter is pressed when the combina- the engine, remove the key from the igni-
tion headlights and dimmer switch is in the tion switch.
“OFF” or “AUTO” position (for vehicles 3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition
5
equipped with the automatic light control). switch to the “LOCK” position, pull the
On vehicles equipped with the automatic light turn signal lever toward you.
control, the welcome light function will oper-
ate only when it is dark outside the vehicle. • Turn the combination headlights and dim-
mer switch to the “ ” or “ ” position.
• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
tion.
 It is possible to modify functions as follows:
• The headlights can be set to come on in the
low beam setting.
• The welcome light function can be deacti-
vated.
dealer.
Coming home light

NOTE N00547301149
 While the welcome light function is operat- This function turns on the headlights in the
ing, perform one of the following operations low beam setting for about 30 seconds after
to cancel the function. the ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”
position.

Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped)

4. The headlights will come on in the low
beam setting for about 30 seconds. After Headlight leveling switch (if WARNING
 To avoid distraction while driving, always
the headlights go off, the headlights can so equipped)
perform headlight adjustments before
be turned on again in the low beam setting N00537100062
vehicle operation.
for about 30 seconds by pulling the turn
signal lever toward you within 60 seconds The direction of the headlight beam (the
of turning the ignition switch to the direction in which the light shines) alters
according to the number of people and the NOTE
“LOCK” position. To turn on the head-
5 lights again after 60 seconds of turning load in the vehicle. Lower the headlight angle  Start adjusting when the knob is at the “0”
if it is too high due to the number of people position (when the beam is at its highest).
the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi-
and/or the load in the vehicle so that the head-  Keep the knob in the “0” position except
tion, repeat the process from step 1. when using the knob to lower the headlight
lights’ glare does not distract the drivers of
beam angle.
NOTE approaching vehicles. First set the light
 Always return the knob to the “0” position
 While the coming home light function is switch to the “ ” position, then turn the when the load is removed and the people
operating, perform one of the following headlight leveling switch knob to lower the have left the vehicle.
operations to cancel the function. beam. The greater the number on the head-
• Pull the turn signal lever toward you. light leveling switch knob, the lower the
• Turn the combination headlights and dim- beam will point. Turn signal lever
mer switch to the “ ” or “ ” position. Set the switch to the appropriate position so
N00522601561
• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi- that the headlight beam is level with the road.
tion. When changing lanes, or to making a gradual
 It is possible to modify functions as follows: turn, hold the lever in the “lane change” posi-
• The time that the headlights remain on can tion (1). It will return to the neutral position
be changed. when you let go. Use the full position (2)
• The coming home light function can be when making a normal turn. The lever will
deactivated. return to the neutral position when the turn is
For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors complete. There may be times when the lever
dealer. does not return to the neutral position. This
usually happens when the steering wheel is
turned only slightly. You can easily return the
lever by hand.
Also, when you move the lever to (1) slightly
then release it, the turn signal lights and indi-

Hazard warning flasher switch

cator light in the instrument cluster will flash
three times.
NOTE NOTE
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors  If you keep the flashers on for several hours
dealer for details. with the engine turned off, the battery will
run down.
Hazard warning flasher

switch Front fog light switch (if so
N00522700233
equipped)
5
N00522800407
The front fog lights illuminate only when the

headlights are on low beam.
Turning the knob in the direction of the “ON”
position turns on the front fog lights as well
NOTE as the indicator in the instrument cluster. To
 A light in the instrument panel flashes to turn them off, turn the knob in the direction of
show when the front and rear turn signal the “OFF” position.
lights are working properly.
The knob will return to the neutral position
If this light flashes faster than usual, check
If you press the flasher switch, the front and when it is released.
for a burned out light bulb or malfunctioning
connection. rear turn signals will flash intermittently, and
If the panel light does not come on when the so will the hazard warning lights. This is an
lever is moved, check for a blown fuse or a emergency warning system and should not be
burned out bulb in the panel. used when the vehicle is in motion, except for
Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized
emergencies.
of your choice.
If you need to leave your vehicle, the flashers
 It is possible to modify functions as follows:
will keep working after the ignition switch is
• Deactivate the turn signal light 3-flash
turned off.
function for lane changes.
• Adjust the time required to operate the
lever for the 3-flash function.

Wiper and washer switch
NOTE Windshield wipers

 If the headlights are switched to high beam, N00542900026
the front fog lights will go out; they will illu-

minate again when the headlights are NOTE
switched back to low beam.  To ensure a clear rearward view, the rear
 If the light switch is rotated to the “OFF” or window wiper will automatically perform
“ ” position while the front fog lights are several continuous operations if the gearshift
5 illuminated, they will automatically turn off. lever or the selector lever is put in the “R”
position while the windshield wipers are
They can be turned back on again by rotating
operating.
the light switch back to “ ” position, and
Refer to “Rear window wiper and washer”
turning the knob in the direction of the “ON” MIST- Misting function
on page 5-156.
position. The wipers will operate once.
 Do not use fog lights except in conditions of OFF- Off
fog, otherwise excessive light glare may
Except for vehicles equipped with INT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive)
temporarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers.
LO- Slow
rain sensor
HI- Fast
N00569101033
Wiper and washer switch The windshield wiper and washer can be
N00523000611 operated with the ignition switch in the “ON” To adjust intermittent intervals
or “ACC” position.
CAUTION If the blades are frozen to the windshield, do With the lever in the “INT” (speed sensitive
 If the washer is used in cold weather, the not operate the wipers until the ice has melted intermittent operation) position, the intermit-
washer fluid sprayed against the glass may and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper tent intervals can be adjusted by turning the
freeze, which may hinder visibility. Warm motor may be damaged. knob (A).
the glass with the defroster before using the
washer.

1- Fast MIST- Misting function

2- Slow The wipers will operate once.
Vehicles equipped with rain sensor OFF- Off
N00569401036 INT- Auto-wiper control
NOTE The windshield wipers can be operated with Rain sensor
 The speed-sensitive-operation function of the ignition switch in the “ON” or “ACC” The wipers will automatically oper-
the windshield wipers can be deactivated. position. ate depending on the amount of
For further information, please contact your moisture on the windshield.
If the blades are frozen to the windshield or
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a LO- Slow
rear window, do not operate the wipers until
the ice has melted and the blades are freed, HI- Fast
otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
Misting function
Rain sensor (if so equipped)
The misting function can be used when the
ignition switch is in the “ON or “ACC” posi- Can only be used when the ignition switch is
tion. “ON” position.
The wipers will operate once if the wiper If the lever is put in the “AUTO” position, the
lever is raised to the “MIST” position and rain sensor (A) will detect the extent of rain
released. This operation is useful when it is (or snow, other moisture, dust, etc.) and the
drizzling, etc. The wipers will continue to wipers will operate automatically.
operate while the lever is held in the “MIST” Keep the lever in the “OFF” position if the
position. windshield is dirty and the weather is dry.


Wiper operation under these conditions can
scratch the windshield and damage the wip-
CAUTION NOTE
If your hands get trapped, you could suffer  The wipers may automatically operate when
ers.
injuries or the wipers could malfunction. To things such as insects or foreign objects are
deactivate the rain sensor, place the lever in affixed to the windshield on top of the rain
the “OFF” position. sensor or when the windshield is frozen.
Objects affixed to the windshield will stop
the wipers when the wipers cannot remove
5 NOTE them. To operate the wipers again, move the
 To protect the rubber parts of the wipers, this lever to the “LO” or “HI” position.
operation of the wipers does not take place Also, the wipers may operate automatically
when the vehicle is stationary and the ambi- due to strong direct sunlight or electromag-
ent temperature is about 32 °F (0 °C) or netic wave. To stop the wipers, move the
lower. lever to the “OFF” position.
 Do not cover the sensor by affixing a sticker  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
or label to the windshield. Also, do not put dealer or a repair facility of your choice
any water-repellent coating on the wind- when replacing the windshield glass.
CAUTION shield. The rain sensor would not be able to
 With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi- detect the extent of rain, and the wipers To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor
tion and the lever in the “AUTO” position, might stop working normally.
the wipers may automatically operate in the  In the following cases, the rain sensor may With the lever in the “AUTO” (rain sensor)
situations described below. be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked position, it is possible to adjust the sensitivity
• When cleaning the outside surface of the at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or of the rain sensor by turning the knob (B).
windshield, if you touch the rain sensor. a repair facility of your choice.
• When cleaning the outside surface of the • When the wipers operate at a constant inter-
windshield, if you wipe with a cloth the rain val despite changes in the extent of rain.
sensor. • When the wipers do not operate even
• When using an automatic car wash. though it is raining.
• A physical shock is applied to the wind-
shield.
• A physical shock is applied to the rain sen-
sor.


“ACC” position. The wipers will continue to
operate while the lever is held in the “MIST”
Windshield washer
N00504601341
position.
To turn on the windshield washer, pull the
lever toward you with the ignition switch in
either the “ON” or “ACC” position.
The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the
windshield by pulling the lever toward you.
When the wipers are not in operation or in 5
intermittent operation, by pulling the lever
toward you, the wipers will operate several
“+”- Higher sensitivity to rain times while the washer fluid is being sprayed.
“-”- Lower sensitivity to rain Also, by releasing the lever soon after pulling
it toward you, the washer fluid will be
sprayed several times while the wipers are
NOTE The wipers will operate once if the lever is operating several times. (Intelligent washer)
 Automatic operation (rain droplet sensitive) Intelligent washer will stop operating with
moved to the “AUTO” position and the knob
can be changed to intermittent operation any operation of the lever.
(vehicle-speed sensitive, or at adjustable
(C) is turned in the “+”direction when the
intervals). ignition switch is “ON” position.
For further information, please contact your
Misting function
Move the lever in the direction of the arrow

and release, to operate the wipers once.
Use this function when you are driving in

mist or drizzle.
The wipers will operate once if the lever is
raised to the “MIST” position and released NOTE
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or  It is possible to modify functions as follows:

NOTE - Washer fluid will be sprayed onto the NOTE

rear window glass while the knob is
• Intelligent washer can be deactivated.  The wiper intermittent operation time can be
turned fully in either direction.
• The wipers can be set to operate again after adjusted.
When the washer fluid is sprayed, the See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
about 6 seconds.
wiper will automatically operate 2 or dealer for details.
dealer. 3 times.  The washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment.
5 Rear window wiper and washer NOTE Check the fluid level regularly and refill if
 The rear window wiper will automatically necessary. (Refer to “Washer fluid” on page
N00523201434
perform several continuous operations if the 9-12.)
The rear window wiper and washer can be gearshift lever or the selector lever is put in
operated when the ignition switch is in the the “R” position while the windshield wipers
“ON” or “ACC” position.
Precautions to observe when
or the rear window wiper is operating. (auto-
matic operation mode) using wipers and washers
Turn the knob to operate the rear window After the automatic operation, the rear win- N00523500209
wiper. dow wiper will stop operating if the knob is

in the “OFF” position. If the knob is in the CAUTION
“INT” position, the rear window wiper will  If the washer is used in cold weather, the
return to the intermittent operation. washer fluid sprayed onto the glass might
It is possible to set the rear window wiper to freeze, blocking your view. In cold weather,
perform the automatic operation only if the heat the glass with the defroster before using
gearshift lever or the selector lever is put in the washer.
the “R” position while the rear window
wiper is operating with the knob in the
“INT” position. NOTE
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
 Do not use the wipers when the windshield is
dealer for details.
dry. This could scratch the glass and wear the
 If the knob is in the “OFF” position, turn the
wiper blades prematurely.
OFF- Off knob to the “INT” position twice quickly to
 Before using the wipers in cold weather,
operate the rear window wiper continuously.
INT- The wiper operates continuously for check to be sure that the wiper blades are not
(continuous operation mode)
several seconds then operates inter- Turn the knob to the “OFF” position to stop
frozen to the windshield. Using the wipers
mittently at intervals of about 8 sec- while the blades are frozen could cause the
the rear window wiper continuous operation.
onds. wiper motor to burn out.

Electric rear window defogger switch
NOTE CAUTION
 If the wipers become blocked by ice or other  Do not place stickers, tape, or other items
deposits on the glass, the motor may still that are attached with adhesive over the grid
burn out even if the wiper switch is OFF. If wires on the rear window.
deposits form on the windshield, park your  When cleaning the inside rear window, use a
vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine, soft cloth and wipe lightly over the grid
and clean the glass so that the wipers can wires.
operate smoothly.
 Avoid using the washer for more than 20 sec-
5
onds at a time. Do not operate the washer NOTE
when the fluid reservoir is empty or the  If your vehicle is equipped with heated mir-
pump may fail.
After about 20 minutes of operation, the sys- rors, mist can also be removed from the out-
 During cold weather, add a recommended side rearview mirrors when the rear window
tem will shut off automatically.
washer solution that will not freeze in the defogger switch is pressed. (Refer to
To switch the defogger OFF before 20 min-
washer reservoir. Otherwise the washer may “Heated mirror” on page 5-53.)
not work or may be damaged. utes have passed, press the switch again. The
 Replace the wiper blades when they are indicator light will go out and the defogger
worn. Use the proper size replacement will turn off.
blades. If you have questions, ask your If you need the defogger for more than 20 Horn switch
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. minutes, press the switch again. This will add N00523800169
20 more minutes. To honk the horn, press around the “ ” mark

Electric rear window defog- on the steering wheel.
CAUTION
ger switch  The rear window defogger is not designed to
N00523700315
Type 1
melt snow. Remove any snow manually
The electric rear window defogger can be before using the rear window defogger.
used when the engine is running.  Use the rear window defogger only after the
The indicator light (A) will come on when engine has started and is running. Be sure to
you press the electric rear window defogger turn the defogger switch off immediately
switch. Electric current will flow through the after the window is clear to save on battery
power.
heating wires on the rear window to help
clear away moisture or frost.

Link System (if so equipped)

Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of The system is equipped with a voice recogni-
Type 2
BLUETOOTH SIG, INC. tion function, which allows you to make
hands-free calls by simple switch operations
and voice command operations using a
Link System End User License defined voice tree.
Agreement
N00563800015 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can be used
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
5 You have acquired a device that includes soft-
ware licensed by Mitsubishi Motors Corpora- “ACC” position.
tion from JOHNSON CONTROLS Inc (the
automotive experience business unit), and Before you can use the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
their subsequent 3rd party suppliers. For a face, you must pair the Bluetooth® device
complete list of these 3rd party products and and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. Refer to “Con-
Link System (if so equipped) their end user license agreements, please go
necting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and
N00563701079
to the following website.
http://www.jciblueconnect.com/faq/fulldis- Bluetooth® device” on page 5-165.
The Link System takes overall control of the
devices connected via the USB input terminal closure.pdf
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
or the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allowing the BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.
connected devices to be operated by using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so
switches in the vehicle or voice commands. equipped) WARNING
See the following section for details on how
to operate.
N00563901202  Although the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface
allows you to make hands-free calls, if you
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allows for mak- choose to use the cellular phone while
Refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on page ing/receiving hands-free calls in the vehicle driving, you must not allow yourself to be
5-158.
Refer to “USB input terminal” on page 5-180. using a Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone distracted from the safe operation of your
based on the wireless communication tech- vehicle. Anything, including cellular
Refer to “Listen to Audio Files on a USB phone usage, that distracts you from the
Device” on page 7-46. nology commonly known as Bluetooth®. It safe operation of your vehicle increases
Refer to “Listen to Bluetooth Audio” on page also allows the user to play music, saved in a your risk of an accident.
7-49. Bluetooth® music player, from the vehicle’s  Refer to and comply with all state and
speakers. local laws in your area regarding cellular
phone usage while driving.

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)
NOTE NOTE Steering control switch and

 If the ignition switch is left in the “ACC”  For detail of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, microphone
position, the accessory power will automati- refer to the following web site: N00564001112
cally turn off after a certain period of time [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
and you will no longer be able to use the You can see to access the MITSUBISHI
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The accessory MOTORS NORTH AMERICA web site.
power comes on again if the ignition switch [For vehicles sold in Canada]
is turned from the “ACC” position. Refer to
“ACC power auto-cutout function” on page
You can see to access via the MITSUBISHI
MOTORS web site.
5
5-54. Please read and agree the “Warning about
 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot be used Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies”
because it connects other than MITSUBISHI
if the Bluetooth® device has a dead battery
MOTORS web site.
or the device power is turned off.
http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
 Hands-free calls will not be possible if your ucts/index.html
phone does not have service available.
 Software updates by cellular phone/digital
 Some Bluetooth® devices are not compatible audio device manufacturers may
with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. change/alter device connectivity.
 You can confirm the Link System software
Steering control switch and microphone  1- Volume up button
version by pressing the HANG-UP button 3
times (press and hold 2 times and then press P.5-159 2- Volume down button
briefly) within 10 seconds. Voice recognition function  P.5-161 3- SPEECH button
Useful voice commands  P.5-162 4- PICK-UP button
Speaker enrollment function  P.5-163 5- HANG-UP button
6- Microphone
Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and
the Bluetooth® device  P.5-165
Operating a music player connected via Blue- Volume up button
tooth®  P.5-170
How to make or receive hands-free calls  Press this button to increase the volume.
P.5-170
Phonebook function  P.5-172


 Press this button during a call to end the
Volume down button PICK-UP button
current call.
 Press this button when an incoming call is When another call is on hold, you will
Press this button to decrease the volume. switch to that call.
received to answer the telephone.
 If this button is pressed in the voice recog-
SPEECH button NOTE nition mode, the voice recognition mode
 On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi will be deactivated.
 Press this button to change to voice recog-
5 nition mode.
Multi-Communication System, pressing the
PICK-UP button except when an incoming
While the system is in voice recognition NOTE
call is received to answer the telephone will
mode, “Listening” will appear on the  When you press the SPEECH button to enter
activate the voice recognition of the Blue-
voice recognition mode with a cellular phone
audio display. tooth® 2.0 interface. paired to the system, current information on
the cellular phone, such as “remaining bat-
NOTE  When another call is received during a tery life,” “signal strength” or “roaming,”
 On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi will be displayed on the audio display.*
call, press this button to put the first caller
Multi-Communication System, pressing the *: Some cellular phones will not send this
on hold and talk to the new caller.
SPEECH button will beep and activated the
• In such circumstances, you can press the information to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
voice recognition mode of Mitsubishi Multi-
button briefly to switch between callers.  Call waiting and three-way calls can be used
Communication System. When you use the
You will switch to the first caller and the by the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, only if it is
voice recognition of the Bluetooth® 2.0
other caller will be put on hold. possible to use those services with your cel-
interface, press the PICK-UP button.
• To establish a three-way call in such situ- lular phone.
ations, press the SPEECH button to enter
 If you press the button briefly while in
voice recognition mode and then say
voice recognition mode, it will interrupt Microphone
“Join calls.”
prompting and allow voice command N00575800025
input.
HANG-UP button Your voice will be recognized by a micro-
Pressing the button longer will deactivate
phone in the overhead console, allowing you
the voice recognition mode.
 Press this button when an incoming call is to make hands-free calls with voice com-
 Pressing this button briefly during a call
received to refuse the call. mands.
will enable voice recognition and allow
voice command input.


5. The voice guide will say “English (Span-
NOTE NOTE ish, French or Japanese) selected. Is this
 If a cellular phone is within close proximity  For best performance and further reduction
correct?” Say “Yes.”
of the microphone, it may distort the sound of ambient noise, the vehicle windows
If you say “No,” the system will return to
quality. In this case, place the cellular phone should be closed, lower the blower speed and
as far as possible from the microphone. refrain from conversation with your passen- Step 4.
gers while engaging the voice recognition
function. NOTE
Voice recognition function  Some voice commands have alternative
commands.
 The voice guide will repeat the same mes-
sage twice. The first message is in the cur-
5
N00564101126
 Depending on the selected language, some rent language, and the second message is in
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped functions may not be available. the selected language.
with a voice recognition function.  If many entries are registered in the vehicle
Simply say voice commands and you can per- phonebook, changing the language will take
Selecting the language a longer time.
form various operations and make or receive
 Changing the language deletes the mobile
hands-free calls. 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
phonebook imported to the Bluetooth® 2.0
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
With the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, voice rec- interface. If you wish to use it, you will have
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
to import it again.
ognition is possible for US English, North vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
American Spanish, Canadian French and Jap- nication System).
anese. The factory setting is “English.” 2. Say “Setup.” 6. When the voice guide says “English
3. Say “Language.” (Spanish, French or Japanese) selected,”
NOTE 4. The voice guide will say “Select a lan- the language change process will be com-
 If the voice command that you say differs guage: English, Spanish, French or Japa- pleted and the system will return to the
from the predefined command or cannot be nese.” Say the desired language. main menu.
recognized due to ambient noise or some (Example: “English”)
other reason, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface
will ask you for the voice command again up
to 3 times.


allows you to decrease the possibility that a
Useful voice commands setting is accidentally changed.
Setting the passcode
N00564200016
The confirmation function can be turned on Use the following procedure to turn on the
or off by following the steps below. security function by setting a passcode.
Help function
N00564300017 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
5 with a help function.
If you say “Help” when the system is waiting vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
for a voice command input, the system will nication System). nication System).
tell you a list of the commands that can be 2. Say “Setup.” 2. Say “Setup.”
used under the circumstances. 3. Say “Confirmation prompts.” 3. Say “Passcode.”
4. The voice guide will say “Confirmation 4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is dis-
prompts are <on/off>. Would you like to abled. Would you like to enable it?”
Canceling turn confirmation prompts <off/on>.” Answer “Yes.”
N00564400018
Answer “Yes” to change the setting or Answer “No” to cancel the setting of the
There are 2 cancel functions. answer “No” to keep the current setting. passcode and return to the main menu.
If you are at the main menu, say “Cancel” to 5. The voice guide will say “Confirmation 5. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4-
exit from the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. prompts are <off/on>” and then the sys- digit passcode. Remember this passcode.
If you are anywhere else within the system, tem will return to the main menu. It will be required to use this system.”
say “Cancel” to return to the main menu. Say a 4-digit number which you want to
Security function set as a passcode.
Confirmation function setting N00564601121 6. For confirmation purposes, the voice
guide will say “Passcode <4-digit pass-
N00564501029 It is possible to use a passcode as a security
code>. Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.”
function by setting a passcode of your choice
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped Answer “No” to return to the passcode
with a confirmation function. for the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. input in Step 5.
With the confirmation function activated, you When the security function is turned on, it is 7. When the registration of the passcode is
are given more opportunities than normal to necessary to make a voice input of a 4-digit completed, the voice guide will say “Pass-
confirm a command when making various passcode in order to use all functions of the code is enabled” and the system will
settings to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. This Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, except for recep- return to the main menu.
tion.


5. When the disabling of the passcode is
NOTE NOTE completed, the voice guide will say “Pass-
 Passcode will be required to access the sys-  You can reenter the passcode as many times
code is disabled” and the system will
tem after the next ignition cycle. as you want.
return to the main menu.
 It is required for a little time after engine  If you have forgotten your passcode, say
stop that the entered passcode is actually “Cancel” to quit the voice input mode and
recorded in the system. then check with an authorized Mitsubishi Speaker enrollment function
If the ignition switch is made to “ACC” or Motors dealer. N00564700011
“ON” or the engine is started immediately
after engine stop, there is a case when the The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can use the 5
Disabling the passcode
entered passcode is not recorded in the sys- speaker enrollment function to create a voice
tem. At this time, please try to enter the pass- Use the following procedure to turn off the model for one person per language.
code again. security function by disabling the passcode. This makes it easier for the Bluetooth® 2.0
interface to recognise voice commands said
Entering the passcode
NOTE by you.
 System must be unlocked to disable the pass- You can turn a voice model registered with
If a passcode has been set and the security
code. the speaker enrollment function on and off
function is enabled, the voice guide will say
whenever you want.
“Hands-free system is locked. State the pass-
code to continue” when the SPEECH button 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
(except for vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- Speaker enrollment
Communication System) or PICK-UP button nication System) or PICK-UP button (for N00564801093
(for vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- It takes about 2 to 3 minutes to complete the
nication System) is pressed to enter voice rec- nication System). speaker enrollment process.
ognition mode. Say the 4-digit passcode 2. Say “Setup.” To ensure the best results, run through the
number to enter the passcode. 3. Say “Passcode.” process while in the driver’s seat, in an envi-
4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is ronment that is as quiet as possible (when
If the entered passcode is wrong, the voice there is no rain or strong winds and the vehi-
enabled. Would you like to disable it?”
guide will say “<4-digit passcode>, Incorrect cle windows are closed). Please turn off your
Answer “Yes.”
passcode. Please try again.” Enter the correct phone while in speaker enrollment to prevent
Answer “No” to cancel the disabling of
passcode. interruption of the process.
the passcode and return to the main menu.
Use the following procedure for speaker
enrollment.


1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the 4. The voice guide will say “This operation 5. The voice guide will prompt for phrase 1.
gearshift lever (manual transaxle) in the must be performed in a quiet environment Repeat the corresponding phrase listed in
“N” (Neutral) position, or the selector while the vehicle is stopped. See the table “Enrollment commands” on page
lever {continuously variable transmission owner’s manual for the list of required 5-180.
(CVT)} or gearshift lever (Twin Clutch training phrases. Press and release the The system will register your voice and
SST) in the “P” (PARK) position, and SPEECH button when you are ready to then move on to the registration of the
then pull the parking brake lever. begin. Press the HANG-UP button to can- next command. Continue the process until
cel at any time.” all phrases have been registered.
5 NOTE Press the SPEECH button to start the
 Speaker enrollment is not possible unless the speaker enrollment process. NOTE
vehicle is parked. Make sure you park the  To repeat the most recent voice training com-
vehicle in a safe area before attempting NOTE mand, press and release the SPEECH button.
speaker enrollment.  If you do not start the speaker enrollment  If you press the HANG-UP button anytime
process within 3 minutes after pressing the during the process, the system will beep and
SPEECH button, the speaker enrollment stop the speaker enrollment process.
2. Press the SPEECH button (except for
function will time out.
The voice guide will say “Speaker enroll- 6. When all enrollment commands have
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for ment has timed out.” The system will then
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- been read out, the voice guide will say
beep and the voice recognition mode will be
nication System). deactivated.
“Speaker enrollment is complete.” The
3. Say “Voice training.” system will then end the speaker enroll-
ment process and return to the main
menu.
NOTE
 Completing the speaker enrollment process
will turn on the voice model automatically.
 The commands “Help” and “Cancel” will not
work in this mode.

Enabling and disabling the voice Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 To pair
model and retraining interface and Bluetooth® device
N00564901065
N00565001207 To pair a Bluetooth® device with the Blue-
You can turn a voice model registered with Before you can make or receive hands-free tooth® 2.0 interface, follow the steps below.
the speaker enrollment function on and off
calls or play music using the Bluetooth® 2.0
whenever you want. 1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the
interface function, you must pair the Blue-
You can also retrain the system. gearshift lever (manual transaxle) in the
Use the following procedure to perform these tooth® device and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. “N” (Neutral) position, or the selector 5
actions. lever {continuously variable transmission
NOTE (CVT)} or gearshift lever (Twin Clutch
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for  Pairing is required only when the device is SST) in the “P” (PARK) position, and
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- used for the first time. Once the device has then pull the parking brake lever.
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for been paired with the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- face, all you need is to bring the device into NOTE
nication System). the vehicle next time and the device will
 You cannot pair any Bluetooth® device with
2. Say “Voice training.” connect to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface auto-
3. If you have completed a speaker enroll- the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface unless the vehi-
matically (if supported by the device).
ment process once already, the voice cle is parked. Before pairing a Bluetooth®
guide will say either “Enrollment is device with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,
®
enabled. Would you like to disable or Up to 7 Bluetooth devices can be paired confirm that the vehicle is parked in a safe
location.
retrain?” or “Enrollment is disabled. with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
Would you like to enable or retrain?” If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are
4. When enrollment is “enabled,” the voice available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or 2. Press the SPEECH button (except for
model is on; when enrollment is “dis- music player most recently connected is auto- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
abled,” the voice model is off. Say the nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
matically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0
command that fits your needs. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
interface.
Say “Retrain” to start the speaker enroll- nication System).
ment process and recreate a new voice 3. Say “Setup.”
You can also change a Bluetooth® device to
model. (Refer to “Speaker enrollment” on 4. Say “Pairing Options.”
be connected.
page 5-163.)


5. The voice guide will say “Select one of
the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”
NOTE NOTE
 The pairing code entered here is only used  If you enter the wrong number, the voice
Say “Pair.”
for the Bluetooth® connection certification. guide will say “Pairing failed” and the pair-
It is any 4-digit number the user would like ing process will be cancelled.
NOTE to select. Confirm the number is right, and try pairing
 If 7 devices have already been paired, the it again.
Remember the pairing code as it needs to be
voice guide will say “Maximum devices
paired” and then the system will end the keyed into the Bluetooth® device later in the
8. The voice guide will say “Please say the
5 pairing process. To register a new device, pairing process.
name of the device after the beep.” You
delete one device and then repeat the pairing Depending on the connection settings of the
can assign a desired name for the Blue-
process. Bluetooth® device, this code may have to be
(Refer to “Selecting a device: Deleting a entered each time you connect the Blue- tooth® device and register it as a device
device” on page 5-166.) tooth® device to the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- tag. Say the name you want to register
face. For the default connection settings, after the beep.
refer to the instructions for the device.
6. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4- NOTE
digit pairing code.” Say a 4-digit number. 7. The voice guide will say “Start pairing  When the confirmation function is on, after
When the confirmation function is on, the procedure on the device. See the device repeating the device tag you have said, the
system will confirm whether the number manual for instructions.” Enter in the voice guide will ask “Is this correct?”
said is acceptable. Answer “Yes.” Bluetooth® device the 4-digit number you Answer “Yes.”
Answer “No” to return to pairing code have registered in Step 6. To change the device tag, answer “No” and
selection. then say the device tag again.
NOTE
NOTE 9. The voice guide will say “Pairing com-
 Depending on the Bluetooth® device, it may
 Some Bluetooth® devices require a specific take a few minutes to pair it with the Blue- plete,” after which a beep will be played
pairing code. Please refer to the device man- and the pairing process will end.
tooth® 2.0 interface.
ual for pairing code requirements.
 If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog-
nize the Bluetooth® device, the voice guide Selecting a device
will say “Pairing has timed out” and the pair- N00565101064
ing process will be cancelled.

If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are
Confirm that the device you are pairing sup-
available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or
ports Bluetooth®, and try pairing it again.
music player most recently connected is auto-


matically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 4. After the voice guide says “Please say,”
To select a music player
interface. the numbers of the cellular phones and
You can connect to the other cellular phone or device tags of corresponding cellular 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
music player by following setting change pro- phones will be read out in order, starting vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
cedures. with the cellular phone that has been most nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
recently connected. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
Say the number of the cellular phone that nication System).
To select a cellular phone
you want to connect to.
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for When the confirmation function is on, the
2. Say “Setup.”
3. Say “Select music player.”
5
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- system will ask you again whether the
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for phone that you want to connect to is cor-
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- rect. Answer “Yes” to continue and con-
nication System). nect to the cellular phone.
2. Say “Setup.” Answer “No,” and the voice guide will
3. Say “Select phone.” say “Please say.” Say the number of the
phone that you want to connect to.
NOTE
 You can connect to a phone at any time by
pressing the SPEECH button and saying the
number, even before all of the paired num-
bers and device tags of corresponding cellu-
lar phones are read out by the system.
5. The selected phone will be connected to

the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The voice
guide will say “<device tag> selected”
and then the system will return to the
main menu.


4. After the voice guide says “Please say,” 6. For confirmation purposes, the voice
Deleting a device
the numbers of the music players and guide will say “Deleting <device tag>
device tags of corresponding music play- Use the following procedure to delete a <number>. Is this correct?” or “Deleting
ers will be read out in order, starting with paired Bluetooth® device from the Blue- all devices. Is this correct?”
the music player that has been most Answer “Yes” to delete the phone(s).
recently connected. tooth® 2.0 interface. Answer “No,” the system will return to
Say the number of the music player that 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for Step 4.
you want to connect to. 7. The voice guide will say “Deleted,” and
5 When the confirmation function is on, the
then the system will end the device dele-
system will ask you again whether the vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- tion process.
music player that you want to connect to nication System).
is correct. Answer “Yes” to continue and 2. Say “Setup.” NOTE
connect to the music player. 3. Say “Pairing Options.”  If the device deletion process fails for some
Answer “No,” and the voice guide will 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of reason, the voice guide will say “Delete
say “Please say.” Say the number of the failed” and then the system will cancel delet-
music player that you want to connect to. ing the device.
Say “Delete.”
5. After the voice guide says “Please say,”
NOTE the numbers of the devices and device
 You can connect to a music player at any To check a paired Bluetooth®
tags of corresponding devices will be read
time by pressing the SPEECH button and
out in order, starting with the device that device
saying the number, even before all of the N00565201023
has been most recently connected. After it
paired numbers and device tags of corre-
sponding music players are read out by the completes reading all pairs, the voice You can check a paired Bluetooth® device by
system. guide will say “or all.” following the steps below.
Say the number of the device that you
want to delete from the system. 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
5. The selected music player will be con- If you want to delete all paired phones vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
nected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. from the system, say “All.” nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
The voice guide will say “<device tag> vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
selected” and then the system will return nication System).
to the main menu. 2. Say “Setup.”
3. Say “Pairing Options.”


4. The voice guide will say “Select one of 5. The voice guide will say “Please say,” and
NOTE
read out the numbers of the Bluetooth®
 You can change the music player to be con-
Say “List.” devices and device tags of corresponding
nected by pressing and releasing the
5. The voice guide will read out device tags devices in order, starting with the Blue-
SPEECH button and then saying “Select
of corresponding devices in order, starting music player” while the list is being read. tooth® that has been most recently con-
with the Bluetooth® device that has been nected.
most recently connected. After all paired device tags have been
Changing a device tag
6. After the device tags of all paired Blue-
N00565301024
read, the voice guide will say “Which 5
tooth® devices have been read, the system device, please?” Say the number of the
You can change the device tag of a paired cel-
will say “End of list, would you like to device tag you want to change.
lular phone or music player.
start from the beginning?”
Follow the steps below to change a device
To hear the list again from the beginning,
tag.
NOTE
answer “Yes.”  You can press and release the SPEECH but-
When you are done, answer “No” to 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for ton while the list is being read, and immedi-
return to the main menu. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- ately say the number of the device tag you
want to change.
NOTE vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
 If you press and release the SPEECH button nication System). 6. The voice guide will say “New name,
and say “Continue” or “Previous” while the 2. Say “Setup.” please.” Say the name you want to regis-
list is being read, the system will advance or 3. Say “Pairing Options.” ter as a new device tag.
rewind the list. 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of When the confirmation function is on, the
Say “Continue” to proceed to the device with the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” voice guide will say “<New device tag>.
the next highest number or “Previous” to Say “Edit.” Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.”
return to the phone with the previous num- Answer “No,” you can say the new device
ber.
tag you want to register again.
 You can change the device tag by pressing
7. The device tag is changed.
and releasing the SPEECH button and then
When the change is complete, the voice
saying “Edit” while the list is being read.
guide will say “New name saved” and
 You can change the phone to be connected
by pressing and releasing the SPEECH but- then the system will return to the main
ton and then saying “Select phone” while the menu.
list is being read.


4. The voice guide will say “Dialing <num-
Operating a music player con- To make a call
ber recognized>.”
nected via Bluetooth® N00565601085
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will then
N00565401054 You can make a call in the following 3 ways
make the call.
For the operation of a music player connected using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface: When the confirmation function is on, the
via Bluetooth®, refer to “Listen to Bluetooth  By saying a telephone number
system will confirm the telephone number
Audio” on page 7-49. again. To continue with that number,
 By using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface’s
5 phonebook
answer “Yes.”
To change the telephone number, answer
How to make or receive hands-  By redialing a telephone number “No.” The system will say “Number
free calls please” then say the telephone number
N00565500074 Making a call by using the telephone again.
You can make or receive hands-free calls number
using a Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone NOTE
You can make a call by saying the telephone
connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. number.  In the case of English, the system will recog-
You can also use the phonebooks in the Blue- nise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for number “0.”
tooth® 2.0 interface to make calls without
dialing telephone numbers. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface supports num-
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for bers (0 to 9) and characters (+, # and *).
To make a call P.5-170 vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-  The maximum supported telephone number
Send function P.5-172 nication System). length is as follows:
Receiving calls P.5-172 2. Say “Dial.” • International telephone number: + and tele-
Mute function P.5-172 3. After the voice guide says “Number phone numbers (to 18 digits).
Switching between hands-free mode and pri- please,” say the telephone number. • Except for international telephone number:
vate mode P.5-172 telephone numbers (to 19 digits).
Making a call using a phonebook

NOTE
 Hands-free calls may not operate correctly You can make calls using the vehicle phone-
when you place or receive the call directly
book or mobile phonebook of the Bluetooth®
from your cellular phone, instead of using
2.0 interface.
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.


For details on the phonebooks, refer to 4. If there is only 1 match, the system will 5. If only 1 telephone number is registered
“Phonebook function” on page 5-172. proceed to Step 5. under the name you just said, the voice
If there are 2 or more matches, the voice guide will proceed to Step 6.
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for guide will say “More than one match was If 2 or more telephone numbers are regis-
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- found, would you like to call <returned tered that match the name you just said,
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for name>.” If that person is the one you want the voice guide will say “Would you like
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- to call, answer “Yes.” to call <name> at [home], [work],
nication System). Answer “No,” the name of the next [mobile], or [other]?” Select the location
2. Say “Call.” matching person will be uttered by the to call.
5
voice guide.
NOTE NOTE
 If you say “Call” when the vehicle phone- NOTE  If the name you selected has matching data
book and the mobile phonebook are empty,  If you say “No” to all names read by the sys- in the vehicle phonebook but no telephone
the voice guide will say “The vehicle phone- tem, the voice guide will say “Name not number is registered under the selected loca-
book is empty. Would you like to add a new found, returning to main menu” and the sys- tion, the voice guide will say
entry now?” tem will return to the main menu. “{home/work/mobile/other} not found for
Answer “Yes,” and the voice guide will say <name>. Would you like to add location or
“Entering the phonebook - new entry menu.” try again?”
You can now create data in the vehicle Say “Try again,” and the system will return
phonebook. to Step 3.
Answer “No,” the system will return to the Say “Add location” and you can register an
main menu. additional telephone number under the
selected location.
3. After the voice guide says “Name please,”  If the name you selected has matching data
in the mobile phonebook but no telephone
say the name you want to call, from those
number is registered under the selected loca-
registered in the phonebook. tion, the voice guide will say
“{home/work/mobile/other} not found for
<name>. Would you like to try again?”
Answer “Yes,” and the system will return to
Step 3.
Answer “No,” and the call will be cancelled.
Start over again from Step 1.


6. The voice guide will say “Calling <name> “<numbers> SEND” to generate DTMF
Mute function
<location>” and then the system will dial tones.
N00565900010
the telephone number. For example, if during a call you need to sim-
ulate the pressing of a phone button as a At any time during a call, you can mute the
NOTE response to an automated system, press the vehicle microphone.
 When the confirmation function is on, the SPEECH button and speak “1 2 3 4 pound Pressing the SPEECH button and then saying
system will check if the name and location of send” and the 1234# will be sent via your cel- “Mute” during a call will turn ON the mute
the receiver are correct. If the name is cor- lular phone. function and mute the microphone.
5 rect, answer “Yes.” Saying “Mute off” in the same way will turn
To change the name or location to call, off the mute function and cancel the mute on
answer “No.” The system will return to Step Receiving calls the microphone.
3. N00565800019
If an incoming phone call is received while

Switching between hands-free
the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”
Redialing position, the audio system will be automati- mode and private mode
N00566600014
You can redial the last number called, based cally turned on and switched to the incoming
on the history of dialed calls in the paired cel- call, even when the audio system was origi- The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can switch
lular phone. nally off. between hands-free mode (hands-free calls)
The voice guide announcement for the and private mode (calls using cellular phone).
Use the following procedure to redial. incoming call will be output from the front If you press the SPEECH button and say
passenger’s seat speaker. “Transfer call” during a hands-free call, you
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for If the CD player or radio was playing when can stop the hands-free mode and talk in pri-
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- the incoming call was received, the audio sys- vate mode.
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for tem will mute the sound from the CD player To return to hands-free mode, press the
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- or radio and output only the incoming call. SPEECH button again and say “Transfer
nication System). To receive the call, press the PICK-UP button call.”
2. Say “Redial.” on the steering wheel control switch.
When the call is over, the audio system will
return to its previous state.
Phonebook function
Send function N00566000018
N00565700018
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface has 2 types of
During a call, press the SPEECH button to
unique phonebooks that are different from the
enter voice recognition mode, then say
phonebook stored in the cellular phone. They


are the vehicle phonebook and the mobile  To register a telephone number in 4. The voice guide will say “Name please.”
phonebook. Say your preferred name to register it.
the vehicle phonebook
These phonebooks are used to register tele- N00580500046
phone numbers and make calls to desired
You can register a telephone number in the
NOTE
numbers via voice recognition function.  If the maximum number of entries are
vehicle phonebook in the following 2 ways:
already registered, the voice guide will say
Reading out a telephone number, and select-
“The phonebook is full. Would you like to
NOTE ing and transferring 1 phonebook entry from delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to
 Disconnecting the battery cable will not the phonebook of the cellular phone. delete a registered name. 5
delete information registered in the phone- If you say “No,” the system will return to the
book. main menu.
 To register by reading out a tele-
phone number
N00580600050 5. When the name has been registered, the
Vehicle phonebook 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for voice guide will say “home, work,
N00566101117
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- mobile, or other?” Say the location for
This phonebook is used when making calls nication System) or PICK-UP button (for which you want to register a telephone
with the voice recognition function. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- number.
Up to 32 names can be registered in the vehi- nication System).
cle phonebook per language. 2. Say “Phonebook.” NOTE
Also, each entry has 4 locations associated 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of  When the confirmation function is on, the
with: home, work, mobile and other. You can the following: new entry, edit number, voice guide will say “<Location>. Is this cor-
register one telephone number for each loca- edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or rect?” Answer “Yes.”
tion. import contact.” Say “New entry.” Answer “No” to return to location selection
in Step 5.
You can register a desired name as a name for If a telephone number has been registered for
any phonebook entry registered in the vehicle the selected location, the voice guide will say
phonebook. “The current number is <telephone number>,
Names and telephone numbers can be number please.”
changed later on. If you do not want to change the telephone
number, say “cancel” or the original number
The vehicle phonebook can be used with all to keep it registered.
paired cellular phones.


6. The voice guide will say “Number  To select and transfer one phone- 2. Say “Phonebook.”
please.” Say the telephone number to reg- 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
book entry from the phonebook of
ister it. the following: new entry, edit number,
the cellular phone
N00580700022
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
NOTE import contact.” Say “Import contact.”
You can select 1 phonebook entry from the
 In the case of English, the system will recog- 4. The voice guide will say “Would you like
phonebook of the cellular phone and register
nise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the to import a single entry or all contacts?”
number “0.” it in the vehicle phonebook.
Say “Single entry.”
5 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will become
7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone
NOTE ready to receive transferred phonebook
 Transfer is not permitted unless the vehicle is data.
number you have just read, and then reg-
parked. Before transferring, make sure that
ister the number.
the vehicle is parked in a safe location.
When the telephone number has been reg- NOTE
 All or part of data may not be transferred,
istered, the voice guide will say “Number even when the cellular phone supports Blue-
 If the maximum number of entries are
saved. Would you like to add another already registered, the voice guide will say
tooth®, depending on the compatibility of “The phonebook is full. Would you like to
number for this entry?” the device.
To add another telephone number for a delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to
 The maximum supported telephone number delete a registered name.
new location for the current entry, answer length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of If you say “No,” the system will return to the
“Yes.” The system will return to location 20 digits or more will be truncated to the first main menu.
selection in Step 5. 19 digits.
Answer “No” to end the registration pro-  If telephone numbers contain characters
cess and return to the main menu. other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters 5. After the voice guide says “Ready to
are deleted before the transfer. receive a contact from the phone. Only a
NOTE  For the connection settings on the cellular home, a work, and a mobile number can
 When the confirmation function is on, after phone side, refer to the instructions for the be imported,” the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
cellular phone.
repeating the telephone number you have face will receive the phonebook data from
read, the voice guide will ask “Is this cor-
the Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone.
rect?” Answer “Yes.” 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
Answer “No” to return to telephone number
registration in step 6.
nication System).


6. Operate the Bluetooth® compatible cellu- 8. The voice guide will say “Adding  Editing a telephone number
lar phone to set it up so that the phone- <name>.” N00579900037
book entry you want to register in the When the confirmation function is on, the 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
vehicle phonebook can be transferred to system will ask if the name is correct. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
Answer “Yes.” nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
Answer “No,” the voice guide will say vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
“Name please.” Register a different name. nication System).
NOTE
9. The voice guide will say “Numbers 2. Say “Phonebook.”
 If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog- saved.” 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
5
®
nise the Bluetooth compatible cellular 10. The voice guide will say “Would you like the following: new entry, edit number,
phone or the connection takes too much to import another contact?” edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
time, the voice guide will say “Import con-
Answer “Yes” if you want to continue import contact”. Say “Edit number.”
tact has timed out” and then the system will
with the registration. You can continue to 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the
cancel the registration. In such case, start
over again from Step 1.
register a new phonebook entry from Step name of the entry you would like to edit,
 Pressing the HANG-UP button or pressing
5. or say list names.” Say the name of the
and holding the SPEECH button will cancel Answer “No,” the system will return to phonebook entry you want to edit.
the registration. the main menu.
NOTE
7. When the reception is complete, the voice  To change the content registered in  Say “List names,” and the names registered
in the phonebook will be read out in order.
guide will say “<Number of telephone the vehicle phonebook
Refer to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to
numbers that had been registered in the N00579800023
the list of registered names” on page 5-176.
import source> numbers have been You can change or delete a name or telephone
imported. What name would you like to number registered in the vehicle phonebook.
use for these numbers?” You can also listen to the list of names regis-
Say the name you want to register for this tered in the vehicle phonebook.
phonebook entry.
NOTE
NOTE  The system must have at least one entry.
 If the entered name is already used for other
phonebook entry or similar to a name used
for other phonebook entry, that name cannot
be registered.


5. The voice guide will say “Home, work, 8. Once the telephone number is registered, 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the
mobile or other?” Select and say the loca- the voice guide will say “Number saved” name of the entry you would like to edit,
tion where the telephone number you and then the system will return to the or say list names.” Say the name you want
want to change or add is registered. main menu. to edit.
When the confirmation function is on, the
system will check the target name and NOTE NOTE
location again. Answer “Yes” if you want  If the location where a telephone number  Say “List names,” and the names registered
to continue with the editing. was already registered has been overwritten in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer
5 Answer “No,” the system will return to with a new number, the voice guide will say to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to the list
Step 3. “Number changed” and then the system will of registered names” on page 5-176.
6. The voice guide will say “Number, return to the main menu.
please.” Say the telephone number you 5. The voice guide will say “Changing
want to register. <name>.”
 Editing a name
N00580100039 When the confirmation function is on, the
NOTE 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for system will check if the name is correct.
 If the telephone number is already registered vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- Answer “Yes” if you want to continue
in the selected location, the voice guide will nication System) or PICK-UP button (for with the editing based on this information.
say “The current number is <current num-
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- Answer “No,” the system will return to
ber>. New number, please.” Say a new tele-
nication System). Step 4.
phone number to change the current number.
2. Say “Phonebook.” 6. The voice guide will say “Name please.”
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of Say the new name you want to register.
7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone the following: new entry, edit number, 7. The registered name will be changed.
number. edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or When the change is complete, the system
When the confirmation function is on, the import contact.” Say “Edit name.” will return to the main menu.
system will ask if the number is correct.
Answer “Yes.”  Listening to the list of registered names
Answer “No,” the system will return to N00580200027
the Step 3. 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for

nication System).


2. Say “Phonebook.”  Deleting a telephone number 5. If only one telephone number is registered
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of N00580300031 in the selected phonebook entry, the voice
the following: new entry, edit number, 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for guide will say “Deleting <name> <loca-
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- tion>.”
import contact.” Say “List names.” nication System) or PICK-UP button (for If multiple telephone numbers are regis-
4. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will read out the vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- tered in the selected phonebook entry, the
entries in the phonebook in order. nication System). voice guide will say “Would you like to
2. Say “Phonebook.” delete [home], [work], [mobile], [other],
5. When the voice guide is done reading the
list, it will say “End of list, would you like 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of or all?”
5
to start from the beginning?” When you the following: new entry, edit number, Select the location to delete, and the voice
want to check the list again from the edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or guide will say “Deleting <name> <loca-
beginning, answer “Yes.” import contact.” Say “Delete.” tion>.”
When you are done, answer “No” to 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the
return to the previous or main menu. name of the entry you would like to NOTE
delete, or say list names.” Say the name of  To delete the telephone numbers from all
NOTE the phonebook entry in which the tele- locations, say “All.”
 You can call, edit or delete a name that is phone number you want to delete is regis-
being read out. tered. 6. The system will ask if you really want to
Press the SPEECH button and say “Call” to delete the selected telephone number(s) to
call the name, “Edit name” to edit it, or NOTE go ahead with the deletion, answer “Yes.”
“Delete” to delete it.  Say “List names,” and the names registered Answer “No,” the system will cancel
The system will beep and then execute your in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer deleting the telephone number(s) and then
command. to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to the list return to Step 4.
 If you press the SPEECH button and say of registered names” on page 5-176.
“Continue” or “Previous” while the list is
being read, the system will advance or
rewind the list. Say “Continue” to proceed to
the next entry or “Previous” to return to the
previous entry.


7. When the telephone number deletion is 4. For confirmation purposes, the voice The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface automatically
complete, the voice guide will say guide will ask “Are you sure you want to converts from text to voice the names regis-
“<name> <location> deleted” and then erase everything from your hands-free tered in the transferred phonebook entries,
the system will return to the main menu. system phonebook?” Answer “Yes.” and creates names.
If all locations are deleted, the system will Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all
say “<name> and all locations deleted” registered information in the phonebook
and the name will be removed from the and return to the main menu.
NOTE
 Only the mobile phonebook transferred from
phonebook. If numbers still remain under 5. The voice guide will say “You are about
5 the entry, the name will retain the other to delete everything from your hands-free
the connected cellular phone can be used
with that cellular phone.
associated numbers. system phonebook. Do you want to con-
 You cannot change the names and telephone
tinue?” Answer “Yes” to continue. numbers in the phonebook entries registered
 Erasing the phonebook Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all in the mobile phonebook. You cannot select
N00580400029 registered information in the phonebook and delete specific phonebook entries, either.
You can delete all registered information and return to the main menu. To change or delete any of the above, change
from the vehicle phonebook. 6. The voice guide will say “Please wait, the applicable information in the source
erasing the hands-free system phone- phonebook of the cellular phone and then
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for book” and then the system will delete all transfer the phonebook again.
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- data in the phonebook.
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for When the deletion is complete, the voice To import a devices phonebook
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- guide will say “Hands-free system phone-
Follow the steps below to transfer to the
nication System). book erased” and then the system will
return to the main menu. mobile phonebook the phonebook stored in
2. Say “Phonebook.”
the cellular phone.
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
the following: new entry, edit number, Mobile phonebook
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or N00566201062
NOTE
import contact.” Say “Erase all.”  Transfer should be completed while the vehi-
All entries in the phonebook stored in the cel- cle is parked. Before transferring, make sure
lular phone can be transferred in a batch and that the vehicle is parked in a safe location.
registered in the mobile phonebook.  The already stored phonebook in the mobile
Up to 7 mobile phonebooks, each containing phonebook is overwritten by the stored
up to 1,000 names, can be registered. phonebook in the cellular phone.


5. The voice guide will say “Importing the 6. When the transfer is complete, the voice
NOTE contact list from the mobile phonebook. guide will say “Import complete” and
 All or part of data may not be transferred,
This may take several minutes to com- then the system will return to the main
even when the cellular phone supports Blue-
plete. Would you like to continue?” menu.
tooth®, depending on the compatibility of Answer “Yes,” transferring to the mobile
the device.
phonebook the phonebook stored in the
 Only a home, a work, and a mobile number
cellular phone will start.
General information
can be imported. N00566300053
Answer “No,” the system will return to
 The maximum supported telephone number
the main menu. MODEL: MMC FCC ID: CB2MDGMY10 5
length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of IC: 279B-MDGMY10
20 digits or more will be truncated to the first
19 digits. NOTE Your Bluetooth® 2.0 interface operates on a
 If telephone numbers contain characters  The transfer may take some time to complete radio frequency subject to Federal Communi-
other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters depending on the number of contacts. cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi-
are deleted before the transfer.  If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface could not be cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada
 For the connection settings on the cellular connected to the Bluetooth® compatible cel- Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This
phone side, refer to the instructions for the lular phone, the voice guide will say “Unable device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
cellular phone. to transfer contact list from phone” and then Rules and RSS-210 of the Industry Canada
the system will return to the main menu. Rules. Operation is subject to the following
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for two conditions:
 If you press the HANG-UP button or press
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- and hold the SPEECH button during the data
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for transfer, the transfer will be cancelled and  This device may not cause harmful inter-
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- the system will return to the main menu. ference.
nication System).  If an error occurs during the data transfer, all  This device must accept any interference
2. Say “Phonebook.” transfer will be cancelled and the voice guide received, including interference that may
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of will say “Unable to complete the phonebook cause undesired operation.
the following: new entry, edit number, import” and then the system will return to
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or the main menu.
import contact.” Say “Import contact.”  If there are no contacts in the phonebook, the CAUTION
4. The voice guide will say “Would you like voice guide will say “There are no contacts  Changes or modifications not expressly
on the connected phone.” approved by the manufacturer for compli-
to import a single entry or all contacts?”
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
Say “All contacts.”
ate the equipment.


The term “IC:” before the radio certification The following explains how to connect and 3. Connect a commercially available USB
number only signifies that Industry Canada remove a USB memory device or iPod. connector cable (C) to the USB memory
technical specifications were met. Refer to the following sections for details on device (B).
The antenna used for this transmitter must not how to play music files:
be co-located or operating in conjunction Refer to “Listen to Audio Files on a USB
with any other antenna or transmitter. End- Device” on page 7-46.
users and installers must be provided with
installation instructions and transmitter oper- *:“iPod” is a registered trademark of Apple
5 ating conditions for satisfying RF exposure Inc. in the United States and other coun-
compliance. tries.
Enrollment commands
N00566401093 How to connect a USB memory
device 4. Connect the USB connector cable (C) to
N00566800074
the USB input terminal (D).
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn
tion.
2. Open the USB input terminal cover (A) in
the glove compartment.
USB input terminal (if so

equipped)
N00566701054
You can connect your USB memory device or

iPod* to play music files stored in the USB
memory device or iPod.


2. Open the USB input terminal cover (A) in 4. Connect the Dock connector (C) to the
WARNING the glove compartment. USB input terminal (D).
 An open glove compartment door can
cause a serious injury or death to the front
passenger in an accident, even if the pas-
senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always
keep the glove compartment door closed
when driving.
5
NOTE
 Do not connect the USB memory device to
the USB input terminal directly.
The USB memory device may be damaged.
 When closing the glove compartment, be 3. Connect the Dock connector (C) to the
careful not to trap the USB connector cable. iPod (B).
WARNING
 An open glove compartment door can
cause a serious injury or death to the front
5. To remove the USB connector cable, turn passenger in an accident, even if the pas-
the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi- senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always
tion first and perform the installation steps keep the glove compartment door closed
in reverse. when driving.
How to connect an iPod NOTE

N00566900059
 When closing the glove compartment, be
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn careful not to trap the connector cable.
tion.
NOTE 5. To remove the Dock connector, turn the
 Use a genuine Dock connector from Apple ignition switch to the “LOCK” position
Inc. first and perform the installation steps in
reverse.

Sun visors
Apple Inc. in the United States and other Item Condition
Types of connectable devices countries.
and supported file specifica- File format
MP3, WMA, AAC,
WAV
tions NOTE
N00567000015 Maximum number of
 Depending on the type of the USB memory
device or other device connected, the con-
levels Level 8
Device types nected device may not function properly or (including the root)
5 N00567100087 the available functions may be limited.

 It is recommended to use an iPod with firm-
Number of folders 700
Devices of the following types can be con- Number of files 65,535
ware updated to the latest version.
nected.
 You can charge your iPod by connecting it to
the USB input terminal when the ignition
Model name Condition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. Sun visors
Storage capacity of  Do not keep your USB memory device or N00524600294
USB memory device iPod in your vehicle. Fold the sun visor downward (1) to reduce
256 Mbytes or more
 It is recommended that you back up the files front glare while driving. To reduce side
F/W Ver.1.1.1 or glare, turn the visor to the side (2).
iPod touch* in case of data damage.
later
 Do not connect to the USB input terminal
iPod classic* F/W Ver.1.0 or later any device (hard disk, card reader, memory
reader, etc.) other than the connectable
iPod (fifth genera- F/W Ver.1.2.2 or
devices specified in the previous section.
tion)* later
The device and/or data may be damaged. If
iPod nano (fifth gen- any of these devices was connected by mis-
F/W Ver.1.2 or later
eration)* take, remove it after turning the ignition
switch to the “LOCK” position.
iPod nano (second F/W Ver.1.1.2 or
generation)* later
Models other than Digital audio player File specifications
USB memory supporting mass N00567200017
devices and iPods storage class
You can play music files of the following
specifications that are saved in a USB mem-
*: “iPod touch,” “iPod classic,” “iPod” and ory device or other device supporting mass
“iPod nano” are registered trademarks of storage class.

12 V power outlet
12 V power outlets are located in front of the
Vanity mirror Card holder floor console (Type 1, Type 2) and inside of
Cards can be slipped into the front (A) of the the floor console box (Type 3).
The vanity mirrors are located on the back of
lid of the vanity mirror.
the sun visors.
NOTE
 If your vehicle is equipped with two 12 V
power outlets, both power outlets can be
used simultaneously. 5
CAUTION
 Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory
operating at 12 V and 120 W or less.
When using two 12 V power outlets simulta-
neously, make sure that the total power con-
sumption of these does not exceed 120 W at
12 V.
12 V power outlet
N00525000569
Type 1, Type 2
CAUTION
 Be aware that using electronic equipment The accessory can be operated when the igni-
with the engine off may run the battery tion switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
down. To use a “plug-in” type accessory, pull out the
 When the 12 V power outlet is not in use, be plug, then insert the plug in the socket.
sure to put on the plug or close the 12 V
power outlet cover. This will prevent the 12
V power outlet from becoming dirty and pos-
sibly short-circuiting.

Interior lights
Type 1 Dome light (Front)/Reading

lights
N00525801287
Dome light (Front)
5 The dome light can be turned on by sliding

the dome light switch.
Type 2
Interior lights
N00525300487
1- (DOOR)
The dome light comes on when any door
or the rear hatch is opened. When all the
Type 3 doors and the rear hatch are closed, the
dome light goes off after approximately
1- Cargo room light P.5-186 30 seconds. However, the light goes off
The accessory can be operated when the igni- 2- Dome light (Rear)(if so equipped) immediately if:
tion switch is in any position. P.5-185
To use a “plug-in” type accessory, open the 3- Dome light (Front)/Reading lights
cover, then insert the plug in the socket. P.5-184

Interior lights
 The doors and the rear hatch are 2- (OFF)
closed while the ignition switch is in
The dome light goes off.
the “ON” position.
 The driver’s door is closed after all
the other doors and the rear hatch are Reading lights
closed while the lock knob of the N00553800070
driver’s door is in the lock position.
Regardless of the dome light switch position,
 The doors and the rear hatch are
closed and the power door lock switch
when you press the lens, the light on the side 5
that is pressed illuminates; when you press
is used to lock the doors.
the lens again, the light goes off.
 The keyless entry system remote con-
trol transmitter is used to lock the 1- (ON)
doors and the rear hatch.
 In vehicles equipped with the The dome light comes on.
F.A.S.T.-key, the doors and the rear 2- ()
hatch are locked using the F.A.S.T.- The dome light comes on when any
key. door or the rear hatch is opened. When
all the doors and the rear hatch are
NOTE closed, the dome light goes off after
 When the engine is started using the key approximately 30 seconds. However,
while the doors and rear hatch are closed, if the light goes off immediately if:
you remove the key, the dome light will illu-
minate for approximately 30 seconds before  The doors and the rear hatch are
going off. closed while the ignition switch is
 When the engine is started using the Dome light (Rear) (if so equipped) in the “ON” position.
F.A.S.T.-key while the doors and rear hatch N00525401502  The driver’s door is closed after all
are closed, if the ignition switch is moved to the other doors and the rear hatch
the “LOCK” position, the dome light will The dome light can be turned on by sliding
are closed while the lock knob of
illuminate for approximately 30 seconds the dome light switch.
the driver’s door is in the lock posi-
before going off.
tion.
 The time until the light goes off can be
adjusted. See your authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer for details.

Interior lights
 The door and the rear hatch are Cargo room light Interior light auto-cutout func-
closed and the power door lock
switch is used to lock the doors.
N00526200063
tion (dome light and other
 The keyless entry system remote
lights)
N00526301478
control transmitter is used to lock
the doors and the rear hatch. If any of the interior lights are left on with the
ignition switch in the “LOCK” position, the
 In vehicles equipped with the
5 F.A.S.T.-key, the doors and the rear
lights go off automatically after about 30
minutes.
hatch are locked using the
The lights come on again if the ignition
F.A.S.T.-key.
switch is turned to the “ON” or “ACC” posi-
tion, any door or the rear hatch is opened and
NOTE closed, or the keyless entry system or
1- (ON) F.A.S.T.-key is operated.
 When the engine is started using the key
while the doors and the rear hatch are closed, The light illuminates regardless of
if you remove the key, the dome light will whether the rear hatch is open or
closed.
NOTE
illuminate for approximately 30 seconds
2-  The interior light auto-cutout function can be
before going off.
deactivated. The time until the lights auto-
 When the engine is started using the The light illuminates when the rear
matically go off can be adjusted. See your
F.A.S.T.-key while the doors and the rear hatch is opend, and goes off when the authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for
hatch are closed, if the ignition switch is rear hatch is closed. details.
moved to the “LOCK” position, the dome 3- (OFF)
light will illuminate for approximately 30 The light remains off regardless of
seconds before going off.
whether the rear hatch is open or
 The time until the light goes off can be
closed.
adjusted. See your authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer for details.
3- (OFF)
The dome light goes off.

Storage spaces
Storage spaces
N00526400498
CAUTION
 Never leave lighters, carbonated drink cans,
or spectacles in the cabin when parking the
vehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin will
become extremely hot, so lighters and other
flammable items may catch fire and
5
unopened drink cans (including beer cans)
may rupture. The heat may also deform or
crack plastic spectacle parts.
1- Cargo floor boxes (if so equipped)
 Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while
P.5-189 WARNING
driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a 2- Floor console box P.5-188  An open glove compartment door can
storage space could otherwise cause injuries 3- Front console tray (if so equipped) cause a serious injury or death to the front
during a sudden stop. P.5-188 passenger in an accident, even if the pas-
4- Front console boxes (if so equipped) senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always
P.5-188 keep the glove compartment door closed
NOTE 5- Glove compartment P.5-187 when driving.
 Do not leave valuables in any storage space
when leaving the vehicle.
Glove compartment NOTE
N00551500246
 The USB input terminal (if so equipped) is
located in the glove compartment. For
To open the glove compartment, pull the details, refer to “USB input terminal” on
lever (A). page 5-180.
Card holder
There is a card holder on the inside of the

glove compartment.

Storage spaces
CAUTION Lower box

 Do not use the front console tray as an ash-
tray.
This could cause a fire.
Front console boxes (if so equipped)

5 N00546401097
To open, push the lid.
NOTE Upper box

 Up to 2 cards will fit in the card holder.
CAUTION
 Do not use the front console boxes as an ash-
Front console tray (if so equipped) tray.
N00547800017
This could cause a fire.
The front console tray is on the front console

part. Floor console box
N00551600175
To open the floor console box, lift the right

release lever (A) and raise the lid.

Cup holder
Cargo floor boxes (if so equipped) Type 1

N00552300023
The boxes for storing articles are located

inside the luggage compartment.
To use the boxes, raise the lids (A).
Tissue holder
The tissue holder (A) is located on the under- Type 2

side of the floor console box lid.
To use the cup holder, open up the lid.
Cup holder
N00527300351
For the front seat
The cup holder is located the middle of the

floor console.
The cup holder is designed for holding cups
or drink-cans securely.

Bottle holder
CAUTION Bottle holder

 Do not drink beverages while driving your N00502800049
vehicle.
This is distracting and could cause an acci- CAUTION
dent.  Do not drink beverages while driving your
vehicle. This is distracting and could cause
an accident.
5 For the rear seat  Vibration and shaking while driving may
N00537000162
cause beverages to spill. Be very careful, as
spilling hot beverages could cause burns.
This cup holder is located in the rear seat arm
rest (A).
Pull the rear arm rest down to use the cup
NOTE
holder.
 Make sure all lids are tightly closed when
Rear shelf panel
N00528200070
storing beverages that are in plastic bottles,
etc.
 Some beverages may not be stored, depend-
WARNING
ing on the size and shape of the plastic bot-  To avoid obstructing your rearward view,
tles, etc. never place anything on the rear shelf
panel. In the event of sudden braking or
an accident, objects placed on the rear
There are bottle holders located on both sides shelf panel could strike occupants causing
of the front seats. injury.

Dual height adjustable cargo floor board (if so equipped)

2. Hang the strap (C) of the rear shelf panel
To install on the hook (D).
CAUTION
 Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when
1. Insert the concave portion (A) on the loading and unloading luggage. The heat
underside of the rear shelf panel into the from the exhaust could cause burns.
inside protruding portion (B) on both  Handle the board with care so as to not injure
sides of the luggage compartment. your fingers and your hands.
5
NOTE
 Before handling the board, remove any lug-
gage from the luggage compartment.
 When loading heavy luggage, the board must
be set in the lower position to avoid damage
to the board.
To remove
1. Raise the rear part of the board.
Follow this procedure in reverse to remove.

WARNING
 Lightly push the rear shelf panel to make Dual height adjustable
sure that the concave portion (A) is set
firmly in the protruding portion (B) on cargo floor board (if so
both sides of the luggage compartment. equipped)
Unsecured rear shelf panel can strike
N00562400027
occupants causing injury in the event of
sudden braking or an accident. To increase the capacity of the luggage com-
partment, the board can be lowered.
CAUTION
 The exhaust pipe remains hot for a while
after stopping the engine, so be sure not to
touch it.

Assist grip
2. Pull the board toward you until the front
part is lowered. Assist grip
N00559000029
These grips are to support the body by hand

while seated in the vehicle.
WARNING
 Do not put a hanger or any heavy or
3. Push the board in all the way with the
pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur-
front part lowered, then set the board into
tain airbag was activated, any such item
place. could be propelled away with great force
and could prevent the curtain airbag from
CAUTION inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly
 Do not use the assist grips when getting into on the coat hook (without using a hanger).
or out of the vehicle. Make sure there are no heavy or sharp
The assist grips could detach and cause an objects in the pockets of clothes that you
accident. hang on the coat hook.
Coat hook
N00553600124
There is a coat hook on the rear seat assist

4. Make sure the board is set firmly in place.
grip of the driver’s side.
5. Follow this procedure in reverse to return
the board to its original position.

Driving safety
Fuel economy....................................................................................6-2
Driving, alcohol and drugs ...............................................................6-2
Floor mat...........................................................................................6-2
Vehicle preparation before driving ...................................................6-3
Safe driving techniques.....................................................................6-4 6
Driving during cold weather.............................................................6-4
Braking .............................................................................................6-5
Parking..............................................................................................6-6
Loading information .........................................................................6-6
Cargo loads .....................................................................................6-10
Trailer towing .................................................................................6-11
Fuel economy
retaining clip on the driver’s floorboard to
Fuel economy Driving, alcohol and drugs secure the floor mat. When used, this clip will
N00628800107 N00628900052
help prevent the floor mat from moving for-
Fuel economy is dependent on many factors. Drunk driving is one of the most frequent ward and possibly interfering with the opera-
Your personal driving habits can have a sig- causes of accidents. tion of the pedals. To prevent the floor mat
nificant effect on your fuel use. Several rec- Your driving ability can be seriously impaired from moving forward and possibly interfering
ommendations for achieving the greatest fuel even with blood alcohol levels far below the with the operation of the pedals, Mitsubishi
economy are listed below. legal minimum. If you have been drinking, genuine floor mats are recommended.
don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
 Whenever accelerating from a stop,
6 always accelerate slowly and smoothly.
drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or use
public transportation. Drinking coffee or tak-
To install the floor mat
 When parked for even a short period, do ing a cold shower will not make you sober.
N00628700050
not idle the engine. Shut it off. 1. Place the floor mat to fit the shape of the
Similarly, prescription and nonprescription
 Plan your trips to avoid unnecessary floorboard.
drugs affect your alertness, perception and
stops. 2. Align the floor mat with the installation
reaction time. Consult with your doctor or
 Keep your tires inflated to the recom- holes over the retaining clips.
pharmacist before driving while under the
mended pressures. 3. Secure the floor mat with retaining clips.
influence of any of these medications.
 For freeway driving, maintain a speed of
approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when
traffic, roadway and weather conditions
WARNING
 NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE.
safely permit.
Your perceptions are less accurate, your
 Keep your air filter clean and your vehicle
reflexes are slower and your judgment is
lubricated according to the recommenda- impaired.
tions in this manual.
 Always keep your vehicle well main-
tained. A poorly maintained engine
wastes fuel and costs money. Floor mat
 Do not overload your vehicle. N00628600017
The original equipment floor mat provided

with your vehicle was specifically designed NOTE
for your vehicle. Always properly position  The shape of the mat and the number of
the floor mat and assure it does not interfere retaining clips may vary depending on the
with operation of the pedals. Always use the vehicle model.
6-2 Driving safety

Vehicle preparation before driving

 Move the driver’s seat as far backward as
WARNING possible, while still keeping good visibil-
 If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not
ity, and good control of the steering
properly installed, it can interfere with the
wheel, brakes, accelerator, and controls.
operation of the pedals. Interference with
the pedals can cause unintended accelera- Check the instrument panel indicators and
tion and/or increased stopping distances multi-information display for any possible
resulting in a crash and injury. Always problem.
make sure the floor mat does not interfere  Move the front passenger seat as far back
with the accelerator or brake pedal. as possible.
 Always use the retaining clip on the
driver’s floorboard to secure the floor
 Make sure that infants and small children 6
are properly restrained in accordance with
mat. all laws and regulations.
 Always install the mat with the correct
side facing down. Vehicle preparation before
 Never install a second mat over or under Defrosters
an existing floor mat.
driving
N00629000685
 Do not use a floor mat designed for Check these by selecting the defroster mode,
another model vehicle even if it is a Mit- For a safer and more enjoyable trip, always and set the blower switch on high. You should
subishi genuine floor mat. observe the following: be able to feel the air blowing against the
 Before driving, be sure to check the fol- windshield.
lowing:
• Periodically check that the floor mat is
Seat belts and seats (Refer to “Defrosting or defogging (wind-
shield, door windows)” on page 7-9, 7-14,
properly secured with the retaining clips.
 Before starting the vehicle, make certain 7-19, 7-24.)
If you remove the floor mat while clean-
ing the inside of your vehicle or for any
that you and all passengers are seated and
wearing their seat belts properly (with
other reason, always check the condition
children in the rear seat, in appropriate
Tires
of the floor mat after it has been rein-
stalled. restraints), and that all the doors and the
• While the vehicle is stopped with the rear hatch are locked. Check all the tires for heavy tread wear or
engine off, check that the floor mat is not uneven wear patterns. Look for stones, nails,
interfering with the pedals by depressing glass, or other objects stuck in the tread. Look
the pedals fully. for any tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check
the wheel nuts for tightness, and the tires
(including spare tire) for proper pressures.
Driving safety 6-3

Safe driving techniques

Replace your tires before they are heavily can avoid an accident or injury. However, if
worn out. you give extra attention to the following Driving during cold weather
As your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres- areas, you can better protect yourself and N00629400458
sure monitoring system, there is a risk of your passengers:  Check the battery, including terminals and
damage to the tire inflation pressure sensors cables. During extremely cold weather,
when the tire is replaced on the rim. Tire  Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic, the battery will not be as strong. Also, the
replacement should, therefore, be performed road and weather conditions. Leave plenty battery power level may drop because
only by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors of stopping distance between your vehicle more power is used for cold starting and
dealer. and the vehicle ahead. driving.
 Before changing lanes, check your mir- Before driving the vehicle, check to see if
6 rors and use your turn signal light. the engine runs at the proper speed and if
Lights  While driving, watch the behavior of the headlights are as bright as normally.
other drivers, bicyclists, and pedestrians. Charge or replace the battery if necessary.
Have someone watch while you turn all the  Always obey applicable laws and regula- During extreme cold weather, it is possi-
exterior lights on and off. Also check the turn tions. Be a polite and alert driver. Always ble that a very low battery could freeze.
signal indicators and high-beam indicators on leave room for unexpected events, such as
the instrument panel. sudden braking. WARNING
 If you plan to drive in another country,  The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
obey their vehicle registration laws and gas. Any spark or flame can cause the bat-
Fluid leaks tery to explode, which could cause serious
make sure you will be able to get the right
fuel. injury or death.
Check the ground under the vehicle after Always wear protective clothes and a face
parking overnight, for fuel, water, oil, or mask when working with your battery, or
other leaks. Make sure all the fluid levels are let a skilled mechanic do it.
correct. Also, if you can smell fuel, you need
to find out why immediately and have it  Warm the engine sufficiently. After start-
fixed. ing the engine, allow a short warm-up
time to distribute oil to all cylinders and
turbocharger. Then drive your vehicle
Safe driving techniques slowly.
N00629200078
Even this vehicle’s safety equipment, and

your safest driving, cannot guarantee that you
6-4 Driving safety

Braking
 Stay at low speeds at first so that the [For vehicles with turbocharger sold in cially when the brakes are wet, to confirm
transaxle, transfer case and rear axle oil U.S.A.] they work normally.
have time to spread to all the lubrication A film of water can be formed on the brake
points.  Mitsubishi Motors recommends that the discs and prevent normal braking after driv-
 Manual transaxle can be harder to shift in standard equipment tires be replaced with ing in heavy rain or through large puddles, or
cold weather conditions. This is normal winter tires when the vehicle is going to after the vehicle is washed. If this occurs, dry
and shifting will get easier as the transaxle be used in winter. the brakes out by driving slowly while lightly
warms up. The standard equipment tires provided depressing the brake pedal.
 Check the engine antifreeze. with this vehicle are summer tires and use
a high-grip compound that provides supe-
If there is not enough coolant because of a
rior grip. When driving in cold weather 6
leak or from engine overheating, add Mit-
subishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life The road grip, however, is reduced in win-
Coolant Premium or equivalent. ter. On snowy roads, ice can form on the braking
Please read this section in conjunction When replacing the standard equipment system, making the brakes less effective.
with the “Engine coolant” on page 9-8. tires with winter tires, all four tires must While driving in such conditions, pay close
be replaced using radial identicalsize win- attention to preceding and following vehicles
ter tires. and to the condition of the road surface. From
WARNING time to time, lightly depress the brake pedal
 Never open the radiator cap when the and check how effective the brakes are.
radiator is hot. You could be seriously Braking
burned. N00629500488
All the parts of the brake system are critical

When driving downhill
to safety. Have the vehicle serviced by an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a It is important to take advantage of the engine
repair facility of your choice at regular inter- braking by shifting to a lower shift position
vals according to the “WARRANTY AND while driving on steep downhill roads in
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. order to prevent the brakes from overheating.
When brakes are wet
Check the brake system while driving at a

low speed immediately after starting, espe-
Driving safety 6-5

Parking
SST) to the “P” (PARK) position. This pre-
Parking vents loading the parking brake against the
WARNING
 Do not park your vehicle in areas where
N00629600261
transaxle. When this happens, it is difficult to
combustible materials such as dry grass or
move the selector lever (CVT) or gearshift
leaves can come in contact with a hot
Parking on a hill lever (Twin Clutch SST) out of the “P” exhaust, since a fire could occur.
(PARK) position.
When parking on a hill, set the parking brake,
and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a Parking with the engine run- When leaving the vehicle
downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill.
ning
6 If necessary, apply chocks to wheels.
When leaving the vehicle unattended, always
Never leave the engine running while you carry the key and lock all doors and the rear
For vehicles equipped with man- take a short sleep/rest. Also, never leave the hatch.
ual transaxle engine running in a closed or poorly venti- Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit
lated place. area.
Place the gearshift lever into the “R”
(Reverse) position when parking on a down- WARNING Loading information
hill slope, into the 1st position when parking  Leaving the engine running risks injury or N00629900323
on an uphill slope. death from accidentally moving the gear- It is very important to know how much
shift lever (manual transaxle or Twin
weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is
For vehicles equipped with contin- Clutch SST) or the selector lever (CVT) or
called the vehicle capacity weight and
from the accumulation of toxic exhaust
uously variable transmission fumes in the passenger compartment. includes the weight of all occupants, cargo
(CVT) or Twin Clutch SST and non-factory-installed options. The tire
and loading information placard located on
the driver’s door sill of your vehicle will
Be sure that the parking brake is firmly set Where you park show how much weight it may properly carry.
when parked and that the selector lever
(CVT) or gearshift lever (Twin Clutch SST)
Your front bumper can be damaged if you
is in the “P” (PARK) position.
scrape it over curbs or parking stop blocks.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set
Be careful when traveling up or down steep
the parking brake before moving the selector
slopes where your bumper can scrape the
lever (CVT) or gearshift lever (Twin Clutch
road.
6-6 Driving safety

Loading information
 Accessory weight: the combined weight
WARNING (in excess of those standard items which
Tire and loading information
 Never overload your vehicle. Overloading
may be replaced) of automatic transmis- placard
can damage your vehicle, adversely affect
sion, power steering, power brakes, power N00630100341
vehicle performance, including handling
and braking, cause tire failure, and result windows, power seats, radio, and heater, The tire and loading information placard is
in an accident. to the extent that these items are available located on the driver’s door sill.
as factory- installed equipment (whether
installed or not).
It is important to familiarize yourself with the
 Vehicle capacity weight: the rated cargo
following terms before loading your vehicle:
and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg)* 6
 Vehicle maximum load on the tire: load times the vehicle’s designated seating
on an individual tire that is determined by capacity.
distributing to each axle its share of the  Production options weight: the combined
maximum loaded vehicle weight and weight of those installed regular produc-
dividing by two. tion options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kg)
 Vehicle normal load on the tire: load on an in excess of those standard items which
individual tire that is determined by dis- they replace, not previously considered in
tributing to each axle its share of the curb curb weight or accessory weight, includ-
weight, accessory weight, and normal ing heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof This placard shows the maximum number of
occupant weight and dividing by two. rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim. occupants permitted to ride in your vehicle as
 Maximum loaded vehicle weight: the sum  Normal occupant weight: 150 lbs (68 kg)* well as “the combined weight of occupants
of - times the number of specified occupants. and cargo” (A), which is called the vehicle
(a) Curb weight; (In your vehicle the number is 3) capacity weight. The weight of roof road is
(b) Accessory weight;  Occupant distribution: distribution of included in the definition of “cargo” when
(c) Vehicle capacity weight; and occupants in a vehicle as specified. (In determining the vehicle capacity weight. This
(d) Production options weight. your vehicle the distribution is 2 in front, placard also tells you the size and recom-
 Curb weight: the weight of a motor vehi- 1 in second row seat) mended inflation pressure for the original
cle with standard equipment including the equipment tires on your vehicle. For more
*:150 lbs (68 kg) is the weight of one per-
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and cool- information, refer to “Tires” on page 9-17.
son as defined by U.S.A. and Canadian
ant. regulations.
Driving safety 6-7

Loading information
Type 1 5. Determine the combined weight
Steps for Determining Correct
of luggage and cargo being loaded
Load Limit
N00630201235
on the vehicle. That weight may
1. Locate the statement “The com- not safely exceed the available
bined weight of occupants and cargo and luggage load capacity
cargo should never exceed XXX calculated in Step 4.
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
placard. trailer, load from your trailer will
6 2. Determine the combined weight be transferred to your vehicle.
of the driver and passengers that Consult this manual to determine
will be riding in your vehicle. how this reduces the available
Type 2 cargo and luggage load capacity
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from of your vehicle.
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
NOTE
4. The resulting figure equals the
 The above steps for determining
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For exam- correct load limit were written in
ple, if the “XXX” amount equals accordance with U.S.A. regula-
1400 lbs. and there will be five tions.
150 lbs. passengers in your vehi- Your vehicle cannot tow a
cle, the amount of available cargo trailer, so step 6 is irrelevant.
and luggage load capacity is 650
lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) =650
lbs.)
6-8 Driving safety

Loading information
NOTE
 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total cargo/load capacity of your vehicle with varying
seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load capacity of your vehicle.
 For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
 Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWR’s, vehicle loading, see the “Specifications” section of
this manual.
Driving safety 6-9

Cargo loads
Cargo loads WARNING WARNING

N00629700493  To reduce the risk of serious injury or  Make sure that the weight of luggage and
death, the combined weights of the driver, the roof carrier do not exceed the maxi-
passengers and cargo and must never mum roof load, 110 lb (50 kg). If the maxi-
Cargo load precautions exceed the vehicle capacity weight. mum roof load is exceeded, this could
 Exceeding the vehicle capacity weight will cause damage to the vehicle or result in an
To determine the cargo load capacity for your accident.
adversely affect vehicle performance,
vehicle, subtract the weight of all vehicle including handling and braking, and may  The total weight of all occupants and lug-
occupants from the vehicle capacity weight. cause an accident. gage, including your roof load, must not
For added information, if needed, refer to
6 “Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit”
 Do not load cargo or luggage higher than exceed the vehicle capacity weight. For
more information, refer to “Tire and load-
the top of the seatback. Be sure that your
on page 6-8. cargo or luggage cannot move when your ing information placard” on page 11-3.
DO NOT USE the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- vehicle is in motion.  Roof load is determined by adding the
ing and Gross Axle Weight Rating numbers Having either the rear view blocked, or weight of the roof carrier and the weight
listed on the safety certification label (A) your cargo being thrown inside the cabin of the luggage placed on the roof carrier.
located on the inside sill of the driver’s door if you suddenly have to brake can cause a  For additional information, refer to
as the guide for passengers and/or cargo serious accident or injury or death. “Maximum roof load” on page 11-4.
weight.  Put cargo or luggage in the cargo area of
your vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly. CAUTION
 Do not load luggage directly onto the roof.
Use a roof carrier that properly fits your
Loading cargo on the roof vehicle.
N00630400083 For installation, refer to the instruction man-
ual provided with the roof carrier.
WARNING  Place the luggage on the carrier so that its
 Weight placed on the roof of the vehicle weight is distributed evenly with the heaviest
will raise the vehicle’s center of gravity items on the bottom. Do not load items that
and adversely affect its handling charac- are wider than the roof carrier.
teristics. As a result, driving errors or
emergency maneuvers could lead to a loss
of control and result in an accident. Drive
slowly and avoid excessive maneuvers
such as sudden braking or quick turning.
6-10 Driving safety

Trailer towing
CAUTION Refitting the covers

 Before driving and after traveling a short dis-
tance, always check the load to make sure it 1. With each cover, put the tabs (C) on the
is securely fastened to the roof carrier. cover in the holes (D) in the roof.
Stop the vehicle periodically and check that 2. Slide the cover (B) toward the rear of the
the load remains secure. If the load is not vehicle to install it.
secure, it could fall from the vehicle and
damage your vehicle, another vehicle or cre-
ate a road hazard.
6
NOTE
 To prevent wind noise or reduction in gas
mileage, remove the roof carrier when not in Attaching the roof carrier
use.
 Before using an automatic car wash, check Slide each cover (B) toward the front of the
with the attendant to determine if the roof vehicle to remove it.
carrier should be removed.
 Be sure that adequate clearance is main-
tained for raising the sunroof and/or rear
hatch when installing a roof carrier. (For
vehicle with sunroof only)
Trailer towing
N00629801332
Roof carrier mounting brakets

N00630600072
When installing the roof carrier, use the

brackets (A).
The brackets (A) are located under each cover
(B).
Driving safety 6-11

Trailer towing
WARNING
 Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing.
It may not be possible to maintain control
or adequate braking.
6-12 Driving safety

Comfort controls
Vents .................................................................................................7-2
Manual air conditioning with MAX A/C mode (if so equipped) .....7-4
Manual air conditioning without MAX A/C mode (if so equipped) 7-9
Automatic air conditioning with Fahrenheit scale (if so equipped)7-14
Automatic air conditioning with Celsius scale (if so equipped).....7-20
Important air conditioning operating tips .......................................7-25
Air purifier ......................................................................................7-26
7
AM/FM radio/CD player (if so equipped).....................................7-26
Handling of Discs ..........................................................................7-29
Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC) ....................................................7-31
Important Points on Safety for the Customer ................................7-35
Operation Keys ..............................................................................7-36
Listen to Radio ...............................................................................7-39
Listen to Satellite Radio (if so equipped) .......................................7-40
Listen to CDs .................................................................................7-42
Listen to MP3s ...............................................................................7-43
Listen to an iPod ............................................................................7-44
Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device .........................................7-46
Listen to Bluetooth Audio (if so equipped) ....................................7-49
Use AUX (if so equipped) ..............................................................7-50
Display Indicator ...........................................................................7-52
Audio Quality and Volume Balance Adjustment ...........................7-53
System Settings ..............................................................................7-54
Troubleshooting ..............................................................................7-57
Antenna...........................................................................................7-59
General information about your radio ............................................7-60
Vents
Vents Left Right Left Right

N00729900210
A- Knob A- Knob
7 1- Close 1- Close
2- Open 2- Open
1- Center vents
2- Side vents
Side vents NOTE
 On rare occasions, air from the vents of an
Air flow and direction adjust- Move the knob to make adjustments. air-conditioned vehicle may be foggy. This is
ments To close the vent, move the knob to the out-
only moist air cooling suddenly and does not
indicate a problem.
N00730200255 side as far as possible.
 Do not let drinks or other liquids get into the
vents as they could prevent the air condition-
Center vents ing from operating normally.
Move the knob to make adjustments.

To close the vent, move the knob to the inside Changing the mode selection
as far as possible. N00736400565
To change the position and amount of air

flowing from the vents, turn the mode selec-
tion dial. Refer to “Mode selection dial” on
page 7-5, 7-10, 7-16, 7-21.
7-2 Comfort controls

Vents
These symbols are used in the next several
illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air
coming from the vents.
: Small amount of air from the vents
: Medium amount of air from the vents
: Large amount of air from the vents
Face position
Air flows only to the upper part of the passen-

*- if so equipped *- if so equipped
ger compartment. 7
NOTE Foot/Defroster position
 With the mode selection dial between the
“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly Air flows to the leg area, the windshield and
to the upper part of the passenger compart- the door windows.
ment. With the mode selection dial between
the “ ” and “ ” positions, air flows
mainly to the leg area.
Foot position
Air flows mainly to the leg area.

Foot/Face position
Air flows to the upper part of the passenger

compartment, and flows to the leg area.
*- if so equipped
Comfort controls 7-3

Manual air conditioning with MAX A/C mode (if so equipped)
NOTE Manual air conditioning Blower speed selection dial

 With the mode selection dial between the
with MAX A/C mode (if so N00736500146
“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly When the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
to the leg area. With the mode selection dial equipped) tion, select the blower speed by turning the
between the “ ” and “ ” positions, air N00730300315 blower speed selection dial.
flows mainly to the windshield and the door Turning the dial clockwise will increase the
The air conditioning can only be used while
windows. blower speed; turning the dial counterclock-
wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to
the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow
Defroster position Control panel will stop.
7 N00730500274
Air flows mainly to the windshield and the

door windows.
A- Temperature control dial

B- Air selection switch
C- Blower speed selection dial Temperature control dial
D- Air conditioning switch N00736600219
E- Mode selection dial Turn the temperature control dial clockwise

F- Electric rear window defogger switch to make the air warmer. Turn it counterclock-
P.5-157 wise to make the air cooler.

When the air conditioning turns on, the air 7

NOTE selection is controlled automatically.
 While the engine coolant temperature is low, Air selection switch
When the air conditioning turns off, the air
the temperature of the air from the heater N00736800367
selection automatically goes back to the out-
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, Normally, use the outside air position to keep
even if you have selected warm air with the side air position.
the windshield and side windows clear and to The air selection indicator light (A) shows the
dial. quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-
 For instructions on how to use the “MAX selected position.
shield.
A/C” position (A), refer to “For quick cool-
ing” on page 7-8. To change the air selection, simply press the NOTE
air selection switch. A sound will be made  When the air conditioning operates with the
every time you push the switch. air selection switch (A) in the outside air
Mode selection dial position, the system automatically deter-
N00736700151  Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF} mines whether to continue using outside air
To change the amount of air flowing from the  Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON} or to perform recirculation.
If the outside temperature is high, the system
vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to
selects recirculation to achieve rapid cooling
“Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2. and causes the air selection indicator in the
switch to illuminate. When the air condition-
ing turns off or the blower speed selection
dial is set to the “OFF” position, the air
selection automatically goes back to the out-
side position.


If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in • When the setting has changed from dis-
some way, use the recirculation position.
NOTE abled to enabled,
• If outside air was selected:
Switch to the outside air position every now the system will beep two times and the
Outside air is continued
and then to keep the windows from fogging indicator light will flash three times.
up.
Personalizing the air selection
NOTE
CAUTION (Changing the function setting)
 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
N00702100015
 Using recirculated air for a long time may control”.
cause the windows to fog up. You can change the following functions to  While the mode selection dial is set between
match your preference. “ ” and “ ” position, the air selection
7 NOTE  Enable automatic air control:

will automatically change to the outside air
position, even if the system is set to “Disable
 While the mode selection dial is set between When the air conditioning operates, the automatic air control”, in order to prevent
air selection switch will be automatically windows from fogging up.
“ ” and “ ” position, the air condition-
ing compressor will run automatically. The
controlled.
outside air position will also be selected
 Disable automatic air control:
automatically. (In this case, the air condition- Air conditioning switch
ing indicator will not change.) Even when the air conditioning operates,
N00731000449
 When the temperature control dial is set to the air selection switch will not be auto-
matically controlled. Push the switch, and the air conditioning
the “MAX A/C” position, the air selection
compressor will turn on. The air conditioning
will be automatically set to the recirculation
position.  Changing the settings indicator light (A) will come on.
 When the temperature control dial is in the Press the air selection switch for about 10 A sound will be made every time you push
“MAX A/C” position, if it is set to a position seconds or longer. the switch.
other than “MAX A/C”, the setting for the When the setting has changed, the system
air selection switch is selected as described will beep and the indicator light will flash.
below. The selection of recirculated air or • When the setting has changed from
outside air depends on the setting before enabled to disabled,
“MAX A/C” was used. the system will beep three times and the
• If automatic control was set: indicator will flash three times.
Automatic control is continued
• If recirculated air was selected:
Recirculated air is continued

NOTE
 If a problem is detected in the air condition-
ing compressor, the air conditioning indica-
tor light (A) blinks. Press the air
conditioning switch once to turn it off, then
once more to turn it back on. If the air condi-
tioning indicator light (A) does not blink,
there is no problem. If it does blink, have it
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
 Sometimes, for example after using a high-
Push the switch again and the air condition- pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet, 7
and the air conditioning indicator light (A)
ing compressor will stop and the indicator
blinks temporarily. Wait for a while, press
NOTE
light (A) goes off. the air conditioning switch once to turn the  For quick heating, set the blower speed
system off, then once more to turn it back on. selection dial to the position shown in the
illustration.
CAUTION Once the water evaporates, the blinking will
 When using the air conditioning, the idling stop.
speed may slightly increase as the air condi-
tioning compressor is switched on/off auto-
matically. Especially for vehicles with a Operating the air conditioning
continuously variable transmission (CVT),
while the vehicle is stationary, fully depress
system
N00731100222
the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from
creeping.
Heating
Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” posi-

tion and set the air selection switch (A) to the
outside air position.
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise
or counterclockwise to the desired tempera-
ture. Select the best speed to fit your needs.

SC00000800-5.fm 8 ページ２０１３年２月１５日　金曜日　午後３時５４分
Cooling NOTE NOTE

N00731200278  To cool the leg areas, set the mode selection  When the temperature control dial is set to a
For ordinary cooling dial to the “ ” position. position other than “MAX A/C”, the air
selection will automatically change to out-
For quick cooling side air. The air conditioning will revert to
the previous condition in which the “MAX
A/C” position was not selected.
Combination of unheated air and

heated air
7 N00731300211
Set the mode selection dial to one of the posi-

tions shown in the illustration and set the air
selection switch (A) to the outside air posi-
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” tion.
position.
2. Push the air selection switch (A) to set it 1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated
to the outside air position. position. or slightly warm air (depending upon the
3. Push the air conditioning switch (B). 2. Set the temperature control dial to the position of the temperature control dial) flows
4. Change the temperature by turning the “MAX A/C” position. to the upper part of the passenger compart-
control dial clockwise or counterclock- 3. Set the blower speed to the highest posi- ment.
wise. tion.
5. Set the desired blower speed.
NOTE
NOTE  When the temperature control dial is set to
 If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in the “MAX A/C” position, the air condition-
some way, push the air selection switch (A) ing compressor will run automatically and
to set it to the recirculation position. Let in the light will come on. The recirculation
some outside air from time to time for good position will be selected automatically. In
ventilation. this case, you cannot turn the air condition-
ing off or select the outside air position.

Manual air conditioning without MAX A/C mode (if so equipped)

2. Select your desired blower speed by turn-
Defrosting or defogging (wind- NOTE
ing the blower speed selection dial.
shield, door windows) 3. Select your desired temperature by turn-  While the mode selection dial is set between
N00731400531
ing the temperature control dial. “ ” and “ ” position, you cannot turn
the air conditioning off or select the recircu-
CAUTION For quick defrosting lation position. This prevents the windows
 For safety, make sure you have a clear view from fogging up.
through all the windows.  To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the
side vents toward the door windows.
 When defrosting, do not set the temperature
Set the mode selection dial (between “ ”
control dial near the “MAX A/C” cool posi-
and “ ”) to remove frost or mist from the tion. This will blow cool air on the window
windshield and door window. glass and fog it up. 7
For ordinary defrosting
Manual air conditioning
Use this setting to keep the windshield and
door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
without MAX A/C mode (if so
leg area heated (when driving in rain or equipped)
snow). 1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” N00730300269
position.
2. Set your blower to the maximum speed. The air conditioning can only be used while
3. Set the temperature to the highest posi- the engine is running.
tion.
NOTE
 While the mode selection dial is set between
outside air position will also be automati-
cally selected. (In this case, the air condition-
ing indicator will not change.)
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”
position.

Control panel NOTE

N00730500287  While the engine coolant temperature is low,
the temperature of the air from the heater
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,
even if you have selected warm air with the
dial.
Mode selection dial

N00736700177
To change the amount of air flowing from the

7 vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to
Temperature control dial “Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2.
N00736600176
C- Blower speed selection dial Turn the temperature control dial clockwise
D- Air conditioning switch to make the air warmer. Turn it counterclock-
E- Mode selection dial wise to make the air cooler.
F- Electric rear window defogger switch
P.5-157
Blower speed selection dial

N00736500133
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-

tion, select the blower speed by turning the
blower speed selection dial.
Turning the dial clockwise will increase the
Air selection switch
N00736800279
blower speed; turning the dial counterclock-
wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to Normally, use the outside air position to keep
the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow the windshield and side windows clear and to
will stop.


quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-
NOTE Personalizing the air selection
shield.
 When the air conditioning operates with the (Changing the function setting)
To change the air selection, simply press the air selection switch (A) in the outside air N00702100057
air selection switch. A sound will be made position, the system automatically deter-
You can change the following functions to
mines whether to continue using outside air
every time you push the switch. match your preference.
or to perform recirculation.
If the outside temperature is high, the system
 Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF}  Enable automatic air control:
selects recirculation to achieve rapid cooling
 Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON} When the air conditioning operates, the
and causes the air selection indicator in the
switch to illuminate. Press the air selection air selection switch will be automatically
switch to return to outside air. controlled.
 Disable automatic air control: 7

If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in Even when the air conditioning operates,
some way, use the recirculation position. the air selection switch will not be auto-
Switch to the outside air position every now matically controlled.
and then to keep the windows from fogging
up.  Changing the settings
Press the air selection switch for about 10
seconds or longer.
CAUTION
When the setting has changed, the system
 Using recirculated air for a long time may
will beep and the indicator light will flash.
When the air conditioning turns on, the air cause the windows to fog up.
• When the setting has changed from
selection is controlled automatically.
enabled to disabled,
The air selection indicator light (A) shows the
NOTE the system will beep three times and the
selected position.
indicator will flash three times.
 While the mode selection dial is set to the
• When the setting has changed from dis-
“ ” position, the air conditioning com-
abled to enabled,
pressor will run automatically. The outside
the system will beep two times and the
air position will also be selected automati-
cally. (In this case, the air conditioning indi- indicator light will flash three times.
cator will not change.)


Push the switch again and the air condition-
NOTE ing compressor will stop and the indicator
Operating the air conditioning
light (A) goes off. system
control”. N00731100219
“ ” position, the air selection will auto- CAUTION
 When using the air conditioning, the idling
Heating
matically change to the outside air position,
even if the system is set to “Disable auto- speed may slightly increase as the air condi-
matic air control”, in order to prevent win- tioning compressor is switched on/off auto- Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” posi-
dows from fogging up. matically. Especially for vehicles with a tion and set the air selection switch (A) to the
continuously variable transmission (CVT),
outside air position.
while the vehicle is stationary, fully depress
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise
7 Air conditioning switch
the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from
or counterclockwise to the desired tempera-
creeping.
N00731000452 ture. Select the best speed to fit your needs.
Push the switch, and the air conditioning
compressor will turn on. The air conditioning NOTE
indicator light (A) will come on.  If a problem is detected in the air condition-
A sound will be made every time you push ing compressor, the air conditioning indica-
the switch. tor light (A) blinks. Press the air
conditioning switch once to turn it off, then
once more to turn it back on. If the air condi-
tioning indicator light (A) does not blink,
there is no problem. If it does blink, have it
 Sometimes, for example after using a high-
pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet,
and the air conditioning indicator light (A)
NOTE
the air conditioning switch once to turn the  For quick heating, set the blower speed
system off, then once more to turn it back on. selection dial to the position shown in the
Once the water evaporates, the blinking will illustration.
stop.

Cooling NOTE
N00731200249  To cool the leg areas, set the mode selection
For ordinary cooling dial to the “ ” position.
Combination of unheated air and

heated air
N00731300224
Set the mode selection dial to the positions

shown in the illustration and set the air selec-
tion switch (A) to the outside air position.
7
The air flow will be directed to the leg area
and the upper part of the passenger compart-
ment. Set the desired blower speed.
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated
position. or slightly warm air (depending upon the
2. Push the air selection switch (A) to set it position of the temperature control dial) flows
to the outside air position. to the upper part of the passenger compart-
3. Push the air conditioning switch (B). ment.
4. Change the temperature by turning the
control dial clockwise or counterclock-
wise.
5. Set the desired blower speed.
NOTE
 If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in
some way, push the air selection switch (A)
to set it to the recirculation position. Let in
some outside air from time to time for good
ventilation.

Automatic air conditioning with Fahrenheit scale (if so equipped)

2. Set the air selection switch (A) to the out-
Defrosting or defogging (wind- NOTE
side air position.
shield, door windows) 3. Select your desired blower speed by turn-  If the mode selection dial is set to the “ ”
N00731400544
ing the blower speed selection dial. position, you cannot turn the air conditioning
4. Select your desired temperature by turn- off or select the recirculation position. This
CAUTION prevents the windows from fogging up.
ing the temperature control dial.
 For safety, make sure you have a clear view  To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the
through all the windows. side vents toward the door windows.
For quick defrosting
control dial near the maximum cool position.
Set the mode selection dial (between “ ”
This will blow cool air on the window glass
and “ ”) to remove frost or mist from the and fog it up.
7 windshield and door window.
For ordinary defrosting Automatic air conditioning

Use this setting to keep the windshield and with Fahrenheit scale (if so
door windows clear of mist, and to keep the equipped)
leg area heated (when driving in rain or N00731500284
snow).
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” the engine is running.
position.
2. Set your blower to the maximum speed.
3. Set the temperature to the highest posi-
tion.
NOTE
“ ” position, the air conditioning com-
pressor will run automatically. The outside
air position will also be automatically
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” selected.
position.

Control panel NOTE

N00711801578  There is an interior air temperature sensor
(G) in the illustrated position.
Never place anything over the sensor, since
doing so will prevent it from functioning
properly.
7
Temperature control dial
N00737000265
C- Blower speed selection dial Use this dial to adjust the temperature in the
D- Air conditioning switch passenger compartment. Turn the temperature
Blower speed selection dial control dial clockwise to make the air
E- Mode selection dial N00736900094
F- Electric rear window defogger switch warmer. Turn it counterclockwise to make the
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi- air cooler.
P.5-157
tion, select the blower speed by turning the
blower speed selection dial.
Turning the dial clockwise will increase the
blower speed; turning the dial counterclock-
wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to
the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow
will stop.


7-17.  Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF}
NOTE Outside air is introduced into the passen-
 While the engine coolant temperature is low,
Mode selection dial ger compartment.
 Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON}
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, N00737100093
even if you have selected warm air with the Air is recirculated inside the passenger
To change the amount of air flowing from the compartment.
dial. vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to
 When the temperature is set to the highest or “Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2.
the lowest setting under the AUTO opera-
tion, the air selection and the air conditioning
will be automatically changed as follows.
Also, if the air selection is operated manually
7 after an automatic changeover, manual oper-
ation will be selected.
• Quick Heating (When the temperature is set
to the highest setting)
Outside air will be introduced and the air
conditioning will stop.
• Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set
to the lowest setting)
Inside air will be recirculated and the air When the air conditioning turns on, the air
conditioning will operate. selection is controlled automatically. When
the air conditioning turns off, the air selection
Air selection switch automatically goes back to the outside air
The above indicates the factory settings. You N00737200238 position.
can personalize the air selection switch and
Normally, use the outside air position to keep If high cooling performance is desired, or if
air conditioning switch to match your per-
the windshield and side windows clear and to the outside air is dusty or contaminated in
sonal preferences.
quickly remove fog or frost from the wind- some way, use the recirculation position.
Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
shield. Switch to the outside air position every now
repair facility of your choice for assistance.
and then to keep the windows from fogging
Refer to “Personalizing the air conditioning To change the air selection, simply press the up.
switch (Changing the function setting)” on air selection switch. A sound will be made
page 7-18. every time you press the switch.
Refer to “Personalizing the air selection
(Changing the function setting)” on page


CAUTION Air conditioning switch
Even when the mode selection dial or the
 Using recirculated air for a long time may N00737300314
blower speed selection dial is set to the
cause the windows to fog up. Push the switch, and the air conditioning
“AUTO” position, the air selection switch
will not be automatically controlled. compressor will turn on. The air conditioning
 Changing the settings: indicator light (A) will come on.
NOTE Press the air selection switch for about 10 A sound will be made every time you push
 If the mode selection dial is set between the switch.
seconds or longer.
“ ” and “ ”, you cannot turn the air con- When the setting has changed, the system
ditioning off or select the recirculation posi- will beep and the indicator light will flash.
tion.
This prevents the windows from fogging up.
 When the mode selection dial or the blower
enabled to disabled, 7
speed selection dial is set to the “AUTO”
the system will beep three times and the
position again after manual operation, the air indicator will flash three times.
selection switch will also be automatically • When the setting has changed from dis-
controlled. abled to enabled,
the system will beep two times and the
indicator light will flash three times.
Personalizing the air selection
(Changing the function setting) NOTE Push the switch again and the air condition-
N00760000063  The factory setting is “Enable automatic air ing compressor will stop and the indicator
You can change the following functions to control”. light (A) goes off.
match your preference.  While the mode selection dial is set between
“ ” and “ ” position, the air selection
 Enable automatic air control: will automatically change to the outside air
CAUTION
When the mode selection dial or the position, even if the system is set to “Disable  When using the air conditioning, the idling
blower speed selection dial is set to the automatic air control”, in order to prevent
windows from fogging up. tioning compressor is switched on/off auto-
matically. Especially for vehicles equipped
will also be automatically controlled. with a continuously variable transmission
(CVT) or Twin Clutch SST while the vehicle
is stationary, fully depress the brake pedal to
prevent the vehicle from creeping.


 Enable automatic air conditioning control:
NOTE When the mode selection dial or blower
NOTE
 If a problem is detected in the air condition-  While the mode selection dial is set between
speed selection dial has been set to the
ing compressor, the air conditioning indica- “ ” and “ ” position, the air condition-
“AUTO” position or when the tempera-
tor light (A) blinks. Press the air ing will run automatically, even if the system
conditioning switch once to turn it off, then ture control dial has been set to the mini-
is set to “Disable automatic air conditioning
once more to turn it back on. If the air condi- mum temperature, the air conditioning
control”, in order to prevent windows from
tioning indicator light does not blink there is switch is automatically controlled.
fogging up.
no problem. If it does blink, have it checked  Disable automatic air conditioning con-
at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or trol:
a repair facility of your choice. The air conditioning switch is not auto- Operating the air conditioning
 Sometimes, for example after using a high- matically controlled, unless the air condi- system (automatic mode)
7 pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet, tioning switch is used. N00731700358
and the air conditioning indicator light (A)  Changing the settings:
Press the air conditioning switch for about
the air conditioning switch once to turn the
10 seconds or longer.
system off, then once more to turn it back on.
Once the water evaporates, the blinking will When the setting has changed, the system
stop. will beep and the indicator light will flash.
Personalizing the air conditioning the system will beep three times and the
switch (Changing the function set-
• When the setting has changed from dis-
ting) abled to enabled,
N00759800074
the system will beep two times and the In normal conditions, use the system in the
You can change the following functions to indicator light will flash three times. AUTO mode and follow these procedures:
match your preference.
NOTE 1. Set the blower speed selection dial to the
“AUTO” position.
conditioning control”.


2. Select the temperature control dial to the the desired positions. To return to automatic leg area heated (when driving in rain or
desired temperature. The temperature can operation, set the dials to the “AUTO” posi- snow).
be set within a range of around 61 to 89. tion.
The temperature will increase as the dial
is turned to the right. Defrosting or defogging (wind-
3. Set the mode selection dial to the
shield, door windows)
N00732400280
The vents (except between “ ” and “ ”), CAUTION

recirculation/outside air, blower speed, and  For safety, make sure you have a clear view
ON/OFF of air conditioning will be con- through all the windows.
trolled automatically. 7
To remove frost or mist from the windshield
NOTE and door windows, use the mode selection 1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”
 Set the temperature at about 75 under normal dial (“ ” or “ ”). position.
conditions. 2. Select your desired blower speed by turn-
 While the engine coolant temperature is low, For ordinary defrosting ing the blower speed selection dial.
3. Select your desired temperature by turn-
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, Use this setting to keep the windshield and
ing the temperature control dial.
even if you have selected warm air with the door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
dial. To prevent the windshield and windows
from fogging up, the vent mode will be
changed to “ ” or “ ” and the blower
speed will be reduced.

system (manual mode)
N00731800072
Blower speed and vent mode may be con-

trolled manually by setting the blower speed
selection dial and the mode selection dial to
Automatic air conditioning with Celsius scale (if so equipped)

For quick defrosting E- Mode selection dial
NOTE F- Electric rear window defogger switch
P. 5-157
control dial to the maximum cool position.
This will blow cool air on the window glass
and fog it up. NOTE
 There is an interior air temperature sensor
(G) in the illustrated position.
Automatic air conditioning Never place anything over the sensor, since
with Celsius scale (if so doing so will prevent it from functioning
properly.
equipped)
7 N00731500297
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”

position.
2. Set your blower to the maximum speed.
3. Set the temperature to the highest posi-
tion. Control panel
N00711801581
NOTE
 While the mode selection dial is set between
Blower speed selection dial
N00736900111
outside air position will also be selected When the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
automatically. tion, select the blower speed by turning the
 If the mode selection dial is set between blower speed selection dial.
“ ” and “ ” you cannot turn the air con- Turning the dial clockwise will increase the
ditioning off or select the recirculation posi- blower speed; turning the dial counterclock-
tion. This prevents the windows from wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to
fogging up. A- Temperature control dial the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow
 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the B- Air selection switch will stop.
side vents toward the door windows. C- Blower speed selection dial
D- Air conditioning switch


7-22.
NOTE
 While the engine coolant temperature is low,
the temperature of the air from the heater Mode selection dial
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, N00737100136
even if you have selected warm air with the To change the amount of air flowing from the
dial. vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to
 When the temperature is set to the highest or “Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2.
the lowest setting under the AUTO opera-
tion, the air selection and the air conditioning
will be automatically changed as follows.
Also, if the air selection is operated manually
after an automatic changeover, manual oper- 7
ation will be selected.
Temperature control dial • Quick Heating (When the temperature is set
N00737000278 to the highest setting)
Use this dial to adjust the temperature in the Outside air will be introduced and the air
passenger compartment. Turn the temperature conditioning will stop.
control dial clockwise to make the air • Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set
to the lowest setting)
warmer. Turn it counterclockwise to make the
Inside air will be recirculated and the air
air cooler. conditioning will operate.
Air selection switch

The above indicates the factory settings. You N00737200241
can personalize the air selection switch and
Normally, use the outside air position to keep
air conditioning switch to match your per-
the windshield and side windows clear and to
sonal preferences.
quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-
Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
shield.
repair facility of your choice for assistance.
Refer to “Personalizing the air conditioning To change the air selection, simply press the
switch (Changing the function setting)” on air selection switch. A sound will be made
page 7-23. every time you press the switch.
Refer to “Personalizing the air selection
(Changing the function setting)” on page


 Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF} • When the setting has changed from dis-
Outside air is introduced into the passen-
CAUTION abled to enabled,
 Using recirculated air for a long time may
ger compartment. the system will beep two times and the
cause the windows to fog up.
 Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON} indicator light will flash three times.
Air is recirculated inside the passenger
compartment.
Personalizing the air selection NOTE
(Changing the function setting)  The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
N00760000076
control”.
You can change the following functions to
“ ” position, the air selection will auto-
7 matically change to the outside air position,
even if the system is set to “Disable auto-
 Enable automatic air control:
matic air control”, in order to prevent win-
When the mode selection dial or the
dows from fogging up.
blower speed selection dial is set to the
will also be automatically controlled.
Air conditioning switch
N00737300327
When the air conditioning turns on, the air Even when the mode selection dial or the
blower speed selection dial is set to the Push the switch, and the air conditioning
selection is controlled automatically. When
“AUTO” position, the air selection switch compressor will turn on. The air conditioning
the air conditioning turns off, the air selection indicator light (A) will come on.
automatically goes back to the outside air will not be automatically controlled.
 Changing the settings: A sound will be made every time you push
position.
Press the air selection switch for about 10 the switch.
If high cooling performance is desired, or if
the outside air is dusty or contaminated in seconds or longer.
some way, use the recirculation position. When the setting has changed, the system
Switch to the outside air position every now will beep and the indicator light will flash.
and then to keep the windows from fogging • When the setting has changed from
up. enabled to disabled,
the system will beep three times and the


 Enable automatic air conditioning control:
NOTE When the mode selection dial or blower
 If a problem is detected in the air condition-
speed selection dial has been set to the
ing compressor, the air conditioning indica-
“AUTO” position or when the tempera-
tor light (A) blinks. Press the air
conditioning switch once to turn it off, then ture control dial has been set to the mini-
once more to turn it back on. If the air condi- mum temperature, the air conditioning
tioning indicator light does not blink there is switch is automatically controlled.
no problem. If it does blink, have it checked  Disable automatic air conditioning con-
at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or trol:
a repair facility of your choice. The air conditioning switch is not auto-
 Sometimes, for example after using a high- matically controlled, unless the air condi-
Push the switch again and the air condition- pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet, tioning switch is used. 7
and the air conditioning indicator light (A)  Changing the settings:
ing compressor will stop and the indicator
light (A) goes off. Press the air conditioning switch for about
the air conditioning switch once to turn the
10 seconds or longer.
system off, then once more to turn it back on.
When the setting has changed, the system
CAUTION Once the water evaporates, the blinking will
will beep and the indicator light will flash.
 When using the air conditioning, the idling stop.
tioning compressor is switched on/off auto-
matically. Especially for vehicles equipped Personalizing the air conditioning the system will beep three times and the
with a continuously variable transmission indicator will flash three times.
switch (Changing the function set-
(CVT) or Twin Clutch SST while the vehicle • When the setting has changed from dis-
is stationary, fully depress the brake pedal to
ting) abled to enabled,
N00759800087
prevent the vehicle from creeping. the system will beep two times and the
You can change the following functions to indicator light will flash three times.
NOTE
conditioning control”.


2. Select the temperature control dial to the operation, set the dials to the “AUTO” posi-
NOTE desired temperature. The temperature can tion.
be set within a range of around 18 to 32.
“ ” position, the air conditioning will run The temperature will increase as the dial
automatically, even if the system is set to Defrosting or defogging (wind-
is turned to the right.
“Disable automatic air conditioning control”,
3. Set the mode selection dial to the
shield, door windows)
in order to prevent windows from fogging N00732400453
up.
CAUTION
The vents (except “ ”), recirculation/out-  For safety, make sure you have a clear view
Operating the air conditioning side air, blower speed, and ON/OFF of air through all the windows.
system (automatic mode) conditioning will be controlled automatically.
7 N00731700286
To remove frost or mist from the windshield
NOTE and door windows, use the mode selection
 Set the temperature at about 25 under normal dial (“ ” or “ ”).
conditions.
 While the engine coolant temperature is low, For ordinary defrosting
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, Use this setting to keep the windshield and
even if you have selected warm air with the door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
dial. To prevent the windshield and windows leg area heated (when driving in rain or
from fogging up, the vent mode will be snow).
changed to “ ” or “ ” and the blower
speed will be reduced.
In normal conditions, use the system in the
AUTO mode and follow these procedures:
1. Set the blower speed selection dial to the system (manual mode)
“AUTO” position. N00731800098
Blower speed and vent mode may be con-

trolled manually by setting the blower speed
selection dial and the mode selection dial to
the desired positions. To return to automatic
Important air conditioning operating tips

1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” 3. When running the air conditioning, make
NOTE sure the air intake, which is located in
position.
2. Set the air selection switch (A) to the out- front of the windshield, is free of obstruc-
“ ” position, the air conditioning com- tions such as leaves. Leaves collected in
side air position.
pressor will run automatically. The outside the air-intake chamber may reduce air
3. Select your desired blower speed by turn-
air position will also be selected automati-
ing the blower speed selection dial. flow and plug the water drains.
cally.
4. Select your desired temperature by turn-
 While the “ ” position is selected, you
ing the temperature control dial. Air conditioning system refrig-
cannot turn the air conditioning off or select
For quick defrosting
the recirculation position. erant and lubricant recommen-
This prevents the windows from fogging up.
 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the
dations
side vents toward the door windows. 7
 When defrosting, do not set the temperature If the air conditioning seems less effective
control dial to the maximum cool position. than usual, the cause might be a refrigerant
This will blow cool air on the window glass leak.
and fog it up. Have the system inspected by your authorized
of your choice.
Important air conditioning
operating tips
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” N00733700280
position. 1. Park the vehicle in the shade whenever

2. Set your blower to the maximum speed. possible. Parking in the hot sun makes the
3. Set the temperature to the highest posi- vehicle interior extremely hot which then
tion. requires more time to cool. If it is neces-
sary to park in the sun, open the windows
for the first few minutes of air condition-
ing to expel the hot air.
2. Afterwards, keep the windows closed
when the air conditioning is in use. The
entry of outside air through open windows
will reduce cooling efficiency.
Air purifier
The air filter’s ability to collect pollen and
CAUTION dirt is reduced as it becomes dirty, so replace
NOTE
 The air conditioning system in your vehicle  To listen to the audio system while the
it periodically. For the maintenance interval,
must be charged with the refrigerant HFC- engine is not running, turn the ignition
refer to the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-
134a and the lubricant SUN-PAG56. switch to the “ACC” position.
Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will NANCE MANUAL”. If the ignition switch is left in the “ACC”
cause severe damage and may require replac- position, the accessory power will automati-
ing your vehicle’s entire air conditioning NOTE cally turn off after a certain period of time
system.  Operation in certain conditions such as driv- and you will no longer be able to use the
The release of refrigerant into the atmo- ing on a dusty road and frequent use of the audio system. The accessory power comes
sphere is not recommended. air conditioning can lead to reduction of ser- on again if the ignition switch is turned from
The new refrigerant HFC-134a in your vehi- vice life of the filter. When you feel that the the “ACC” position. Refer to “ACC power
7 cle is designed not to harm the earth’s ozone
layer. However, it may contribute slightly to
air flow is lower than normal or when the auto-cutout function” on page 5-54.
windshield or windows start to fog up easily,  If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,
global warming. replace the air filter. it may create noise in the audio equipment.
It is recommended that the old refrigerant be Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a This does not mean that anything is wrong
saved and recycled for future use. repair facility of your choice for assistance. with your audio equipment. In such a case,
use the cellular phone at a place as far away
as possible from the audio equipment.
During a long period of disuse AM/FM radio/CD player (if
 If foreign objects or water get into the audio
equipment, or if smoke or a strange odor
so equipped) comes from it, immediately turn off the
The air conditioning should be operated for at audio system and have it checked at an
N00734302098
least five minutes each week, even in cold authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
weather. This includes the quick defrosting The audio system can only be used when the repair facility of your choice. Never try to
mode. Operating the air condition system ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” repair it yourself. Avoid using the audio sys-
weekly maintains lubrication of the compres- tem until it is inspected by a qualified per-
position.
sor internal parts to keep the air conditioning son.
in the best operating condition.  If the audio system is damaged by foreign
objects, water, or fire, have the system
checked by a qualified Mitsubishi Motors
Air purifier technician.
N00733800151
The air conditioning system is equipped with

an air filter to remove pollen and dust.

AM/FM radio/CD player (if so equipped)
NOTE Trademarks NOTE

 The audio amplifier (if so equipped) is N00715300024  Please refer to your vehicle’s user manual
located under the front left seat.  Product names and other proper names regarding the iPod/iPhone that can be used
Do not subject the amplifier to a strong are the trademarks or registered trade- with vehicles equipped with a Bluetooth®
impact. marks of their respective owners. 2.0 interface.
It could damage the amplifier or malfunc-  Furthermore, even if there is no specific
tioning could result.
denotation of trademarks or registered
trademarks, these are to be observed in
Important Points on Usage their entirety.
N00715000021
7
iPod/iPhone Playback Function (if
so equipped) “Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone”
mean that an electronic accessory has
 This product supports audio playback been designed to connect specifically to
from iPod/iPhone devices, however dif- iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been
fering versions mean that playback cannot certified by the developer to meet Apple
be guaranteed. performance standards.
 Please be aware that depending on the iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and
iPod/iPhone model or version, operation iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
may differ. registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Apple is not responsible for the operation
How to Clean of this device or its compliance with
N00715200023
safety and regulatory standards.
 If the product becomes dirty, wipe with a
soft cloth. NOTE
 If very dirty, use a soft cloth dipped in  iPod and iTunes licensing allows individual
neutral detergent diluted in water, and users to privately reproduce and play back
then wrung out. Do not use benzene, thin- non- copyrighted material as well as material
ners, or other chemical wipes. This may that may be legally copied and reproduced.
harm the surface. Infringement of copyright is prohibited.

AM/FM radio/CD player (if so equipped)
5th generation 5th generation 160GB (2009) 160GB (2007) 80GB

(video) (video)
60GB 80GB 30GB
7
6th generation 5th generation 4th generation (video)

8GB 16GB (video camera) 8GB 16GB
8GB 16GB
3rd generation 2nd generation 1st generation

(video) (aluminum) 1GB 2GB 4GB
4GB 8GB 2GB 4GB 8GB

Handling of Discs
4th generation 3rd generation 2nd generation 1st generation

8GB 32GB 64GB 32GB 64GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
7
16GB 32GB 64GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB
N00715400025
handling of discs.
Handling of Discs This explains care that should be taken in the

Handling of Discs
 If discs are not going to be used for a long Maxi-
Important Points on Handling
period of time, remove these from the mum Com-
product. Type Size
 Fingerprints or other marks on the read playback ments
surface of the disc may result in its con- time
tent being more difficult to read. When Disc Playback Environment CD-DA 5 inches 74 minutes —
holding the disc, grip both edges, or one (12 cm)
edge and the center hole, in order that the In cold environments such as in mid-winter
read surface is not touched. when the interior of the vehicle is cold, turn-
 Do not affix paper or stickers, or other- ing the heater on and immediately trying to CD-TEXT 5 inches 74 minutes —
wise damage the disc. use the product may cause condensation (12 cm)
 Do not forcefully insert a disc if another is (water droplets) to form on the disc and inter-
7 already within the device. This can result nal optical components, and this may prevent
in damage to discs, or malfunction. the product from operating correctly. CD-R/RW 5 inches — •Disc
(12 cm) contain-
In these conditions, remove the disc, and wait ing MP3
Cleaning a short time before use. files
 Periodically clean the read surface of the Copyright
disc. When cleaning, do not wipe in a cir-
cular motion. Instead, wipe gently out- Actions such as unauthorized reproduction,
wards from the center of the disc to the broadcast, public performance, or rental of
outer edge. discs that comprise other than personal use Discs That May Not Be Played Back
 New discs may have burring around the are prohibited by law.
outer edge or in the hole in the center.  Playback of discs other than those
Ensure you check for these. If there are described in “Types of Disc That Can Be
burrs, these may lead to faulty operation,
Types of Disc That Can Be Played Back” is not guaranteed.
therefore ensure these are removed. Played Back  3 inches (8 cm) discs may not be used.
N00715500026  Do not insert irregularly-shaped discs (for
The following marks are printed on the disc example, heart-shaped), as these may
Important Points on Storage
label, package, or jacket. result in malfunction. Additionally, discs
 When not using discs, ensure these are that have transparent portions may not be
kept in cases, and stored out of direct sun- played back.
light.

Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)

 Discs that have not been finalized cannot • There may be noise during playback.
be played back. • There may be jumping in the audio.
CAUTION
 CD-ROM and CD-R/RW media can only
 Even if recorded using the correct format • The disc may not be recognized.
play back MP3 format audio files.
on a recorder or computer, application • The first track may not be played back.
 Actions such as copying audio CDs or files
software settings and environments; disc • It may take longer than usual until start
and either distributing these to others for free
peculiarities, damage, or marking; or dirt of playback of tracks. or for charge, or uploading files via the Inter-
or condensation on the lens inside the • Playback may start from within the net or other means to servers is an infringe-
product may render the disc unplayable. track. ment of the law.
 Depending on the disc, some functions • Some parts may not be played back.  Do not append the file extensions “.mp3”,
may not be used, or the disc may not play • Tracks may freeze during playback. “.wma”, or “.m4a”, to other than
back. • Tracks may be displayed erroneously. MP3/WMA/AAC format files. Playing back
 Do not use discs with cracks or warps. discs with these types of files recorded upon 7
 If the disc has stickers affixed, remains them may cause the files to be incorrectly
from removed stickers, or affixed adhe-
Audio Files identified for playback, which may lead to
sive, then do not use the disc. (MP3/WMA/AAC) loud noise, resulting in speaker damage or
accident.
 Discs that have decorative labels or stick- N00715600027
ers may not be used. This product can play back MP3/WMA/AAC
format audio files recorded on CD-ROM, NOTE
Nonstandard CDs CD-R/RW, and USB devices.  Depending on the condition of the disc
recorder or recording software used, correct
This product will play back audio CDs, how- There are limitations on the files and media
playback may not be possible. In these cases,
ever please be aware of the following points that can be used, therefore read the following refer to the user manual for your product or
regarding CD standards. prior to recording MP3/WMA/AAC format software.
audio files on discs or USB devices.  Depending on your computer’s operating
 Ensure that you use discs with on the Additionally, ensure you read the user manu- system, version, software, or settings, files
label surface. als for your CD-R/RW drive and the writing may not have a file extension appended. In
 Playback of other than standard CDs is software, and ensure these are used correctly. these cases, append the file extensions
not guaranteed. Even if the audio can be If the MP3/WMA/AAC format audio files “.mp3”, “.wma”, or “.m4a” when copying
includes title information or other data, then the files.
played back, the audio quality cannot be
this can be displayed.  Files larger than 2GB in size cannot be
guaranteed.
played back.
 When playing back other than standard
CDs, the following may occur.

Data Formats That Can Be Speci-

ROOT Name fica- Explanation
Played Back Folder
tion
N00715700028
Audio file
Format ISO96 Level 1 Maximum 8
Data formats that can be played on discs
specifica- 60 character file
(CD-ROM, CD-R/RW) and USB devices dif-
tions name, and 3
fer.
character file
extension.
Data format DISC USB device
(single-byte
MP3 alphanumeric
7 WMA X
capital letters,
numerals, “_”
1 level 2 level 3 level 4 level 5 level
AAC X may be used)
ISO96 Joliet Files names up
60 to a maximum
Folder Structure exten- 64 characters
N00715800029 sion can be used.
Up to 8 folder levels can be recognized. Multises- Not supported (only first session
You can create a folder structure as in Genre - sion supported)
Artist - Album - Track (MP3/WMA/AAC Maxi- 8 levels (if the root is the 1st
format audio files) for management of tracks. mum level)
number
of levels
Maxi- 700 folders (including root)
mum
folder
number


Speci- What Is MP3? Item Details
Name fica- Explanation N00715900020 Specification MPEG-1 AUDIO LAYER3
tion
MP3 is an abbreviation of “MPEG-1 Audio MPEG-2 AUDIO LAYER3
Maxi- 65,535 files (total number on Layer 3”. MPEG is an abbreviation of
mum file media. Other than MP3, WMA, Sampling MPEG-1: 32/44.1/48
“Motion Picture Experts Group”, and this is a
num- and AAC files not included) frequency MPEG-2: 16/22.05/24
video compression standard used in video
[kHz]
ber*1 CDs, etc.
MP3 is one of the audio compression meth- Bit rate MPEG-1: 32 to 320
File Maximum 64 bytes (for Uni-
ods contained in the MPEG audio standard, [kbps] MPEG-2: 8 to 160
name and code, 32 characters), files/ fold-
folder ers with file/ folder names and reduces the quality of sounds that are
VBR (vari- Support
name longer than this will not be dis- beyond the auditory resolution of the human
able bit rate) 7
restric- played or played back. ear and that are hidden by louder sounds, thus
creating high-quality data with a lower data Channel Stereo/ Joint stereo/ Dual
tions
size. mode channel/ Monaural
USB sup- The recommended file system is Because this can compress CD audio to File exten- mp3
ported FAT32. approximately 1/10 its original data size with- sion
formats 1 partition only out perceptible loss, approximately 10 CDs
Supported ID3 tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1,
can be written to a single CD-R/RW disc.
tag informa- Ver. 2.2, Ver. 2.3, Ver. 2.4
*1:Do not include other than
MP3/WMA/AAC files. However, if stor- tion (ISO-8859-1, UTF-16 (Uni-
ing many tracks within the same folder, CAUTION code)), Titles, Artist name,
these may not be recognized even if less  MP3 files different to the standards at right Album name
may not play back correctly, or file/folder
than the maximum number of tracks. In Maximum 64 characters
names may not be displayed correctly.
these cases, divide the tracks up into mul- number of
tiple folders. characters
that can be
Standards for MP3 Files That Can
indicated on
NOTE Be Played Back the display
 The order in which folders and audio files
are displayed on this product may be differ- Specifications for MP3 files that can be
ent to how they are displayed on a computer. played are as below.

What Is WMA? Item Details CAUTION

N00716000028 Specification Windows Media Audio  AAC supports digital rights management
WMA is an abbreviation of Windows Media Version7.0/8.0/9.0 (DRM). This product cannot play back AAC
files protected using this system.
Audio, and this is an audio compression for- Sampling fre- 32/44.1/48
 AAC files different to the standards at right
mat from Microsoft. This is a compression quency [kHz]
may not play back correctly, or file/folder
format that has a higher compression ratio
Bit rate [kbps] 48 to 320 names may not be displayed correctly.
than MP3.
VBR Support
(variable bit rate)
NOTE Standards for AAC Files That Can
 Microsoft, Windows Media, and Windows Channel mode Stereo/Monaural
Be Played Back
7 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Cor- File extension wma
poration (USA) and in other countries.
Supported tag WMA tags Specifications for AAC files that can be
information Title name, Artist name, played are as below.
Album name
CAUTION
 WMA supports digital rights management Maximum num- 64 characters Item Details
(DRM). This product cannot play back ber of characters Specification Advanced Audio
WMA files protected using this system. that can be indi- Coding
 WMA files different to the standards at right cated on the dis- MPEG4/AAC-LC
may not play back correctly, or file/folder play MPEG2/AAC-LC
names may not be displayed correctly.
 “Pro”, “Lossless”, and “Voice” are not sup- Sampling MPEG4 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/
ported. What Is AAC? fre- 24/32/44.1/48
N00716100029
quency MPEG2 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/
[kHz] 24/32/44.1/48
AAC is an abbreviation of Advanced Audio
Standards for WMA Files That Coding, and this is an audio compression Bit rate MPEG4 8 to 320
Can Be Played Back standard used in “MPEG-2” and “MPEG-4”. [kbps] MPEG2 8 to 320
This features 1.4x the compression of MP3,
Specifications for WMA files that can be with comparable audio quality. VBR Support
played are as below. (variable bit rate)
Channel mode Stereo/Monaural

Important Points on Safety for the Customer

Item Details WARNING WARNING
File extension m4a  The driver should not perform compli-  During thunderstorms, do not touch the
cated operations while driving. antenna or the front panel.
Supported tag AAC tags or ID3 tags
Performing complicated operations while This may lead to electrical shock from
information Title, Artist name,
driving may prevent the driver looking lightning.
Album name where they are going, and cause an acci-
Maximum number 64 characters dent.
of characters that Therefore stop the vehicle in a safe loca- CAUTION
can be indicated on tion before performing such operations.  Do not block ventilation holes or heat sinks
the display  Do not use during malfunctions, such as on the product.
when no sound is audible. Blocking ventilation holes or heat sinks may
This may lead to accident, fire, or electric prevent heat from escaping from within the 7
Important Points on Safety shock. product, leading to fire or malfunction.
 Ensure water or other foreign objects do
for the Customer not enter the product.
 Do not turn the volume up to the extent that
you cannot hear sounds from outside the
N00716200020 This may lead to smoking, fire, electric vehicle while driving.
This product features a number of pictorial shock, or malfunction. Driving without being able to hear sounds
indications as well as points concerning han-  Do not insert foreign objects into the disc from outside the vehicle may result in an
dling so that you can use the product cor- slot. accident.
rectly and in a safe manner, as well as prevent This may lead to fire, electric shock, or  Do not insert your hand or fingers into the
malfunction. disc slot.
injury or damage to yourself, other users, or
 In the event of abnormalities occurring This may result in injury.
property.
when foreign objects or water enter the
product, resulting in smoke or a strange
WARNING smell, immediately stop using the product,
 The driver should not pay close attention and consult an authorized Mitsubishi
to the display while driving. Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
This may prevent the driver looking choice.
where they are going, and cause an acci- Continuing to use the product may result
dent. in accident, fire, or electric shock.
 Do not disassemble or modify the product.
This may lead to malfunction, fire, or elec-
tric shock.

Operation Keys
Operation Keys Adjust Volume Insert/Eject Discs

N00716300021 N00716500023 N00716600024
1. Turn the PWR/VOL key to adjust the vol- 1. Insert the disc into the disc slot with the
ume. label surface up.
Turn the Power ON/ OFF
N00716400022
1. Press the PWR/VOL key.
Disc slot
7
Disc
*Label side
Turn the PWR/VOL key clockwise to Push the disc in a certain amount, and the
increase, and counterclockwise to product will pull the disc in, and playback
decrease the volume. will start.
Turn the power on, and resume playback
from the previous status. 2. Press the key.
2. Press the PWR/VOL key. NOTE This will eject the disc from the product,
Turn the power OFF.  The maximum value for volume is 45, and so remove the disc.
the minimum is 0.
NOTE  The initial setting for volume is “17”. CAUTION
 Hold down the steering MODE key to also  When replacing discs, first ensure that the
turn the audio function ON/OFF. vehicle is stopped in an area in which stop-
ping is permitted.
 Do not insert your hand, fingers, or foreign
objects into the disc slot. This may lead to
injury, smoking, or fire.
 3 inches (8 cm) CDs are not supported.

Operation Keys
Explanation of Buttons
N00716700025
This explains names and functions of each part.
1- key 5- RADIO key 9- PTY key

Use to eject a disc. Switch the radio and the band. PTY searches and scans can be per-
6- PWR/VOL key formed while receiving radio RBDS
2- 3 key/4 key
Adjust the volume, and turn the power broadcasts.
For audio, rewind/fast forward.
ON/OFF. Search channels in the satellite radio*1.
For radio, use as preset keys 3 and 4.
7- MEDIA key 10- SCAN key
3- 2RDM key
Switch between CD and other sources. For audio, play scan playback; for
For audio, play random playback; for
Hold down the key to switch to AUX. radio, scan for stations.
radio, use as preset key 2.
8- DISP key 11- Disc slot
4- 1RPT key
Switch the content of the display. 12- PAGE key
For audio, play repeat playback; for
radio, use as preset key 1. Display indicator page advance.

Operation Keys
13- 5 key 3- MODE key
Steering wheel audio remote Hold down to turn the audio function
Play/Pause Bluetooth Audio*2, and use control switches
as preset key 5 for radio. ON/OFF. Additionally, each time this is
N00716800055
pressed, this switches the audio source.
14- 6 key
The order of switching is as shown
Return during audio track search, and
below.
stop Bluetooth Audio*2. If devices are not connected, then these
For radio, use as preset key 6. are to be skipped, and the next source
15- key/ key selected.
For audio, select audio track/file; for
radio, perform automatic station selec-
7 tion. CD or MP3
Select channels in the satellite radio*1. 1
iPod* or USB device
16- MENU key
Bluetooth Audio*2
Switch to Menu mode. 1- Vol + key, - key
Adjust audio functions and the mobile AM
17- /SEL key
Adjust audio quality and select items. phone function volume. FM1, 2
For radio, manually select stations. 2- CH key, key SIR1, 2, 3, 4*3
Select channels in the satellite radio*1. Select CD and other audio source tracks
1
* : Requires a satellite tuner connection. and radio stations.
Hold down to skip up and down through *1: An iPod cable (available separately) is
*2: Requires a separately-purchased Blue- required.
tooth-capable audio device in equip- tracks.
Hold down to switch the satellite radio *2: Requires a separately-purchased Blue-
ment by type (vehicles with a tooth-capable audio device (vehicles
band during satellite radio reception.
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface). with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).
* : Requires a satellite tuner connection.
3

Listen to Radio
2. Hold down any of the keys from the 1RPT
Listen to Radio /SEL key Increases the frequency
(clockwise) being received. key to the 6 key.
N00716900027
This explains how to listen to AM and FM key Release the button to start A “Beep” sounds, and the preset key is
radio broadcasts. (hold down) seek station selection, and registered.
when a station is received,
key scanning stops.
To Listen to the Radio (hold down) NOTE
 The preset memory can register a maximum
Press the RADIO key to switch the band. of 6 stations for each band.
Scan Station Selection  If a preset key that already has a station reg-
Switch between AM and FM bands. istered is selected, then this is overwritten
The selected band is indicated on the display. Collective search for stations that can be with the new preset. 7
received.  Pressing the preset key will select the previ-
ously registered frequency.
NOTE Press the SCAN key.
 Bands switch in the order AM, FM1, FM2,
SIR1*, SIR2*, SIR3*, and SIR4*. When a station is received, this is played for 5
 If no signal is received, bands will not be
PTY Search
seconds, then the product searches for the
switched to SIR2, SIR3, or SIR4. next station.
During RBDS broadcast reception, select
*: When a satellite tuner is connected PTY (program content), and automatically
NOTE scan for stations.
 Press this button again while receiving the
Manual/Seek Station Selection station to return to normal reception. 1. During FM reception, press the PTY key.
This switches to the PTY selection mode.
2. Press the PTY key to select PTY.
Turn the /SEL key to the frequency to lis-
Preset Memory 3. Press the key or key.
ten to.
The PTY (program content) indicator will
Register the broadcast station in advance, and flash, and station selection will automati-
/SEL key Reduces the frequency cally start.
being received. select this at a later time.
(counter- When a station is received, the frequency
clockwise) 1. Tune in to the frequency to register. is displayed.

Listen to Satellite Radio (if so equipped)

*:If no signal is received, bands will not be
NOTE Listen to Satellite Radio (if so switched.
 This receives the station detected first.
equipped)
 10 seconds after reception, PTY search mode
N00717000025
will be cancelled.
 To receive a different station, press the This section explains how to listen to satellite Select a Station
key or key again. radio.
Press the key or key to select the sta-
NOTE tion.
PTY Scan  A subscription is required to listen to satel-
lite radio. Satellite radio cannot be received Go down one step from the
7 During RBDS broadcast reception, select after the free trial period has expired. key
channel being received.
PTY (program content) to perform a collec-  If no subscription has been made when the
Go up one step from the
free trial period expires, the display will key
tive search for stations. channel being received.
alternate between “CALL” and “888-539-
1. During FM reception, press the PTY key. SIRI”. While the key is held down,
key
This switches to the PTY selection mode. it will cycle down through
(Hold down)
2. Press the PTY key to select PTY. the channels being received.
3. Press the SCAN key. To listen to Satellite Radio While the key is held down,
key
When a broadcast station is received, this it will cycle up through the
(Hold down)
is played for 5 seconds, then the product Press the RADIO key to switch the band. channels being received.
searches for the next station.
Switches between SIR1, SIR2, SIR3, and
SIR4 bands. NOTE
NOTE The selected band is indicated on the display.  When cycling up/down through channels, the
 Press this key again while receiving the sta- channel number display in the upper level of
tion to return to normal reception. the display changes.
NOTE
 When channel number “000” is selected, the
 Bands switch in the order AM, FM1, FM2,
SIRIUS ID (12 digits) is displayed.
SIR1, SIR2*, SIR3*, and SIR4*.
 Switch satellite radio bands by holding down
the key or key on the steering remote
control switch.

Listen to Satellite Radio (if so equipped)
Scan Station Selection NOTE Channel Search

 Press the SCAN key or PTY key again while
Channels are received in order and take 10 receiving the channel to return to normal Other channels can be selected while listen-
reception.
seconds each. ing to a channel.
 Turning the /SET key will cancel.
1. Press the PTY key.
Scan All Channels Switches to the category search mode,
Preset Memory and the category name is indicated on the
Press the SCAN key. display.
All of the channels are scanned. Register the channel in advance, and select 2. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate-
this at a later time. gory. 7
3. Press the /SEL key.
NOTE 1. Tune in to the channel to register. Switches to channel search mode.
 Press this key again while receiving the 2. Hold down any of the keys from the 1RPT
channel to return to normal reception. 4. Turn the /SEL key to select the chan-
 Selecting a channel will cancel this.
key to the 6 key. nel.
A “Beep” sounds, and the preset key is 5. Press the /SEL key.
registered. A “Beep” sounds, and the selected chan-
Scan Category Channels nel is received. (Channel preliminary set-
NOTE ting mode)
1. Press the PTY key.  The preset memory can register a maximum The channel name shown on the display
Switches to the category search mode, of 6 stations per band. flashes.
and the category name is indicated on the  If a preset key that already has a channel reg- Press the /SEL key again to cancel the
display. istered is selected, then this is overwritten search mode and return to normal recep-
2. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate- with the new preset. tion.
gory.  Pressing the preset key will select the previ-
ously registered channel.
6. To continue the search, turn the /SEL
3. Press the SCAN key. key to select the channel.
The channels in the selected category are The preset channels on the display are shown
as “P1” though “P6”. The selected channel is received.
scanned.
Cancels the search mode and returns to
normal reception.

Listen to CDs
NOTE Listen to CDs Switch Playback Mode

 After making preliminary settings in the N00717100026
channel search mode, this will switch to the Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
This explains how to listen to audio CDs
channel being received.
(CD-DA/CD-TEXT). playback are possible.
 Channel number “000” is for the SIRUS ID
display, so it cannot be searched.
 If the “PTY ALL” category is selected, all Play CDs Repeat Playback (RPT)
channels can be searched in the channel
search mode. Press the 1RPT key.
Insert the disc.
 In the category mode, press the PTY key to
cancel search mode. Repeat playback of the track currently being
Insert a disc to automatically start playback.
7  In the channel search mode, press the 6  “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-36) played.
key to return to the category search mode. If a disc is already within the product, press
 In the channel preliminary setting mode, the MEDIA key to switch to CD as the NOTE
press the 6 key to return to the category source.  Pressing again will cancel.
search mode without returning to the previ-  Selecting a track, ejecting, fast forwarding,
ous channel search mode. or rewinding will cancel.
 If there is no operation for 10 seconds, the Select the Track
search mode will be cancelled.
Press the key or key to select the Random Playback (RDM)
track.
Initialize the CODE (Passcode) Press the 2RDM key.
This enables selection of the next or previous
The CODE required for changing the LOCK track.
Play the tracks on the disc in a random order.
settings in the satellite settings is initialized.
(The factory setting is “1111”.) Fast Forward or Rewind NOTE
When the power is off, press the PWR/VOL  Pressing again will cancel.
Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.  Ejecting will cancel this.
key while holding down the /SEL key.
 “Turn the Power ON/OFF” (P7-36) Fast forward/rewind is possible.

Listen to MP3s
If a disc is already within the product, press
Scan Playback (SCAN) Repeat Playback (RPT)
the MEDIA key to switch to CD as the
source.
Press the SCAN key. Press the 1RPT key.
Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks NOTE Repeat playback of the track currently being
on the whole disc in order.  Depending on the file structure, it may take played.
some time to read the contents of the disc.
NOTE NOTE
 Press this button again during playback if  Pressing again will cancel.
you wish to hear that track, and that track Select the Track (File)  Selecting a file, ejecting, fast forwarding, or
will play normally. rewinding will cancel. 7
Press the key or key to select the
track.
Listen to MP3s Folder Repeat Playback
N00717200027
This enables selection of the next or previous
track. Hold down the 1RPT key.
This explains how to listen to audio files on a
disc.
Fast Forward or Rewind Repeat playback of the tracks within the
folder currently being played.
CAUTION
 CD-ROM and CD-R/RW media can only Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
play back MP3 format audio files.
NOTE
Fast forward/rewind is possible.  Pressing again will cancel.
 Even if the file is selected, folder repeat
playback will not be cancelled.
To Listen to MP3s Switch Playback Mode
Insert the disc. Repeat playback, random playback, and scan Random Playback (RDM)
playback are possible.
Insert a disc to automatically start playback.
 “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-36) Press the 2RDM key.

Listen to an iPod
Play the tracks in the folder in a random
order.
Search Tracks Listen to an iPod
N00717300028
Search folders and files, and select a track. By connecting commercially-available

NOTE
iPod/iPhone devices to this product, you can
 Pressing again will cancel.
1. Turn the /SEL key to select the folder. play back tracks on these through the product.
Folder Random Playback Files within the selected folder are dis-
CAUTION
 Do not leave the iPod/iPhone unattended in
played.
the vehicle.
Hold down the 2RDM key. 3. Turn the /SEL key to select the file.  Never hold these devices in your hand to
7 Play all tracks in folders on the disc in a ran- 4. Press the /SEL key. operate while driving, as this is dangerous.
dom order.  No indemnification for data loss resulting
This plays the selected file (track). when the iPod/iPhone is connected to the
product will be possible.
NOTE  Depending on how the devices are handled,
NOTE audio files being damaged or lost, therefore
 While the folder is selected, press the 6 it is recommended that data be backed up.
key to cancel track search mode.
Scan Playback (SCAN)  If there is no operation for 10 seconds after
selecting the folder, then track search mode NOTE
will be cancelled.  Depending on the generation, model, or soft-
Press the SCAN key.
 Select the folder, and hold down the /SEL ware version of the iPod/iPhone, playback
Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks key to start playback from the first track in on this product may not be possible.
in the folder currently being played in order. that folder. (P.7-27) Additionally, playback as
 While the file is selected, press the 6 key explained in this document may not be possi-
to return to the previous operation. ble.
NOTE  While the file is selected, hold down the
 Press this button again during playback if
you wish to hear that track, and that track 6 key to cancel track search mode.
will play normally.  If there is no operation for five seconds after
selecting the file, that file is played back.
 Disc operations such as selecting a track will
cancel track search mode.

Listen to an iPod
NOTE NOTE Fast Forward or Rewind

 Regarding details such as types of  Data containing copyright information may
iPod/iPhone that can be connected to equip- not play back.
Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
ment by type (vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0  It is recommended that the iPod/iPhone
interface), and types of files that can be equalizer settings be set to flat. Fast forward/rewind is possible.
played back, refer to “Types of connectable  Operate the iPod/iPhone while connected to
devices and supported file specifications” on this product.
page 5-182.  If the iPod/iPhone is connected via Bluetooth Switch Playback Mode
 Regarding how to connect the iPod/iPhone, as a Bluetooth-capable audio device, then do
refer to “How to connect an iPod” on page not connect the iPod/iPhone using an iPod Repeat playback and shuffle playback are
5-181. cable. Connection using both methods will
possible.
 When connecting the iPod/iPhone, use a result in erroneous operation. 7
commercially-available iPod connection  If an iPod/iPhone does not operate correctly,
cable. then remove the iPod/iPhone from the prod- Repeat Playback (RPT)
 Set up the device in order that no unsafe uct, reset, then reconnect.
actions, such as plugging in the connection Press the 1RPT key.
cable are taken while driving.
 When inserting and removing the
Play iPod
Repeat playback of the track currently being
iPod/iPhone, for safety’s sake first stop the played.
vehicle. Press the MEDIA key to set the iPod as the
 Depending on the status of the iPod/iPhone, source.
it may take some time until the device is rec- NOTE
ognized, or playback starts. The selected source is indicated on the dis-  Pressing again will cancel.
 Buttons on the product will not operate while play.
iPod/iPhone is connected.
 iPod/iPhone specifications and settings may
Select the Track (File) Shuffle Playback (RDM)
mean that connection is not possible, or
result in differences in operation or display.
Press the 2RDM key.
 Depending on audio data in the iPod/iPhone, Press the key or key to select the
track information may not be displayed cor- track. Play tracks in the category currently being
rectly.
played in a random order.
 Depending on the status of the vehicle and This enables selection of the next or previous
device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back track.
after starting the engine.

Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device

4. Press the /SEL key. you can play back audio files on these
NOTE through the product.
Repeat steps 1 to 4, and search for tracks.
Select the track, and press the /SEL
key to play. CAUTION
Album Shuffle Playback  Do not leave the USB device unattended in
the vehicle.
NOTE  Never hold these devices in your hand to
Hold down the 2RDM key.  While the category (1st level) is selected, operate while driving, as this is dangerous.
press the 6 key to cancel track search  Do not use hard discs, card readers, or mem-
Play back the album in a random order mode. ory readers, as damage may occur to these or
(tracks in any order on the album).  If there is no operation for 10 seconds after to the data contained therein. If these are
7 selecting the category, then track search erroneously connected, then turn the ignition
NOTE mode will be cancelled. switch to the “LOCK” position, then remove.
 Pressing again will cancel.  Select the category, and hold down the  Because of the risk of data loss, it is recom-
/SEL key to start playback from the first mended that files be backed up.
track in that category.  No guarantee is made as regards damage to
the USB device, nor regarding loss or dam-
Search Tracks  While the track is selected, press the 6
age to data contained therein.
key to return to the previous operation.
 Depending on how the devices are handled,
 While the track is selected, hold down the
Search categories or track names, and select a audio files being damaged or lost, therefore
track. 6 key to cancel track search mode. it is recommended that data be backed up.
 If there is no operation for five seconds after
1. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate- selecting the track, that file is played back.
gory.  iPod operations such as selecting a track will NOTE
cancel track search mode.
2. Press the /SEL key. Categories or  Regarding details such as types of USB
tracks within the selected category are devices that can be connected, and USB
input ports, refer to “Device types” on page
displayed.
Listen to Audio Files on a 5-182.
3. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate-  Regarding details of types of files that can be
gory or track. USB Device played back in equipment by type (vehicles
N00717400032
with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface), refer to
By connecting commercially-available USB “File specifications” on page 5-182.
devices such as USB memory to this product,

NOTE NOTE Fast Forward or Rewind

 Regarding how to connect USB devices,  This product can play back MP3, WMA, and
refer to “How to connect a USB memory AAC format audio files.
Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
device” on page 5-180.  Depending on the type of USB device, usage
 When connecting a USB device, use a con- may not be possible, or functions that can be Fast forward/rewind is possible.
nection cable. Failure to use a connection used may be restricted.
cable when connecting may place undue load  The recommended file system for USB
on, or damage the USB connector. memory is FAT32. Switch Playback Mode
 Set up the device in order that no unsafe  The maximum supported capacity for USB
actions, such as plugging in the connection memory is 32GB. Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
cable are taken while driving.  Operate the USB device containing recorded playback are possible.
 When inserting and removing the USB audio files while connected to this product. 7
device, for safety’s sake first stop the vehi-
cle. Repeat Playback (RPT)
 Do not insert other than audio devices into Play Back of Audio Files on a
the USB port. Damage to the device or USB Device Press the 1RPT key.
equipment may result.
 Depending on the status of the USB device, Repeat playback of the track currently being
Press the MEDIA key to set USB as the
it may take some time until the device is rec- played.
ognized, or playback starts.
source.
 Depending on USB devices, buttons on the
The selected source is indicated on the dis- NOTE
product will not operate while the USB
play.
device is connected.  Pressing again will cancel.
 USB device specifications and settings may  Selecting a file will cancel this.
mean that connection is not possible, or Select the Track (File) However, it will not be cancelled in vehicles
result in differences in operation or display. with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
 Depending on audio data in the USB device,
track information may not be displayed cor- Press the key or key to select the
rectly. track.
Folder Repeat Playback
 Depending on the status of the vehicle and
device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back This enables selection of the next or previous
after starting the engine. track. Hold down the 1RPT key.
 Data containing copyright information may
not play back.


Repeat playback of the tracks within the Play the tracks in all folders in a random
folder currently being played. order.
NOTE
 Press this button again during playback if
you wish to hear that track, and that track
NOTE NOTE will play normally.
 Pressing again will cancel.  Pressing again will cancel.
 Selecting a folder will cancel this.  Selecting a folder will cancel this.
 Cycling up/down through files will cancel  Cycling up/down through files will cancel Search Tracks
this. this.
 Even if the file is selected, folder repeat  Even if the file is selected, all folder random
playback will not be cancelled. playback will not be cancelled. Search folders and files, and select a track.
7 1. Turn the /SEL key to select the folder.

Folder Random Playback (RDM) Scan Playback (SCAN) 2. Press the /SEL key.
Files within the selected folder are dis-

Press the 2RDM key. Press the SCAN key. played.
Play tracks in the folder currently being Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks 3. Turn the /SEL key to select the file.
played in a random order. on the whole USB device in order. 4. Press the /SEL key.
This plays the selected file (track).

NOTE NOTE
 Pressing again will cancel.  Press this button again during playback if
 Selecting a folder will cancel this. you wish to hear that track, and that track NOTE
 Cycling up/down through files will cancel will play normally.  While the folder is selected, press the 6
this. key to cancel track search mode.
 Even if the file is selected, folder random  If there is no operation for 10 seconds after
playback will not be cancelled. Folder Scan Playback selecting the folder, then track search mode
will be cancelled.
Hold down the SCAN key.  Select the folder, and hold down the /SEL
All Folder Random Playback key to start playback from the first track in
Play the first 10 seconds of the first track in that folder.
Hold down the 2RDM key. each folder on the USB device in order.

Listen to Bluetooth Audio (if so equipped)

2.0 interface and Bluetooth device” on page
NOTE NOTE 5-165.
 While the file is selected, press the 6 key  Depending on the type of Bluetooth-capable
Operation methods below describe situations
to return to the previous operation. audio devices, usage may not be possible, or
once connection has been completed.
 While the file is selected, hold down the functions that can be used may be restricted.
 Confirm together with the user manuals for
6 key to cancel track search mode.
the commercially-available Bluetooth-capa- NOTE
 If there is no operation for five seconds after ble audio devices.  If the iPod/iPhone is connected via Bluetooth
selecting the file, that file is played back.
 Depending on the type of Bluetooth-capable as a Bluetooth-capable audio device, then do
 Operations such as selecting a track will can- audio devices, volume levels may differ. not connect the iPod/iPhone using an iPod
cel track search mode. There is the danger of loud volumes, so prior cable. Connection using both methods will
to use, it is recommended that you turn the result in erroneous operation.
Listen to Bluetooth Audio (if volume down. 7
 “Adjust Volume” (P.7-36)
so equipped)  Depending on the status of the Bluetooth
audio device, it may take some time until the
Play Bluetooth Audio
N00717500020
device is recognized, or playback starts.
This product can play back tracks on com- 1. Press the MEDIA key to set Bluetooth
 Bluetooth audio device specifications and
mercially-available Bluetooth-capable audio Audio as the source.
settings may mean that connection is not
devices. possible, or result in differences in operation The selected source is indicated on the
or display.
display.
 Depending on audio data in the Bluetooth
CAUTION audio device, track information may not be
 Never hold these devices in your hand to 2. Press the 5 key. Bluetooth Audio play-
displayed correctly.
operate while driving, as this is dangerous. back starts.
 Depending on the status of the vehicle and
 Do not leave the Bluetooth audio device
device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back
unattended in the vehicle.
 Depending on how the devices are handled,
after starting the engine. NOTE
audio files being damaged or lost, therefore  Hold down the 5 key to pause.
it is recommended that data be backed up.  Press the 6 key to stop.
Connect a Bluetooth-capable
Audio Device
Regarding how to connect your Bluetooth

device, refer to “Connecting the Bluetooth®
Use AUX (if so equipped)
Select the Track (File) NOTE Use AUX (if so equipped)

 Each time the 1RPT key is pressed, this N00717600034
switches in the order Repeat OFF, 1 track
Press the key or key to select the
repeat, All track repeat, and Repeat OFF. By connecting external input cables and AUX
track.
devices to this product, you can play back
This enables selection of the next or previous tracks on these devices through the product.
track. Random Playback (RDM)
Hold down the MEDIA key.
Switch to the AUX mode, and “AUX” is dis-
Press the 2RDM key.
Fast Forward or Rewind played.
Play the tracks in the Bluetooth Audio device
7 Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key. in a random order.
Auxiliary Audio connector
(RCA)
Fast forward/rewind is possible. NOTE
Switch Playback Mode
Repeat playback, random playback, and scan Scan Playback (SCAN)

playback are possible.
Press the SCAN key.
Repeat Playback (RPT) Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks
Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA)
A- Left audio input connector (white)
on the whole Bluetooth Audio device in
Press the 1RPT key. B- Right audio input connector (red)
order.
Repeat playback of the track currently being
played. NOTE CAUTION
 Press this button again during playback if  Connect an audio device with external sound
you wish to hear that track, and that track input mode canceled, or with the sound
will play normally. turned down.

Use AUX (if so equipped)
CAUTION
 Even if not inserted, the product will switch
to AUX, therefore take care with volume
levels when not inserted.
NOTE
 Depending on the audio device to be con-
nected, noise may be emitted.
 For power, use the battery power source
included in the audio device to be connected.
Using the connected audio device while 7
charging through the cigarette lighter socket
in the vehicle may lead to noise being emit-
ted through the speakers.
 If no audio devices are connected, then do
not select the external sound input mode. If
external sound input mode is selected while
no audio devices are connected, then sound
may be emitted through the speakers.

Display Indicator
Display Indicator
N00717700022
This explains content of the display indicator.
Change the Display Mode CAUTION During FM Reception

N00717800023  The operation of changing display contents
You can change the content of the display may impede safe driving, therefore check This switches in the order “Frequency”, “Sta-
safety before operation. tion name”, and “Radio text”.
indicator.
Press the DISP key to switch the display con-
tent.
NOTE NOTE
 Radio text has a maximum display of 64
Each time the DISP key is pressed, the dis-  Up to 11 characters may be displayed at one
characters.
play content changes. time. To display 12 or more characters, press
the PAGE key, and subsequent characters  If there is no text information to display, then
will be displayed. “NO MESSAGE” is displayed.

Audio Quality and Volume Balance Adjustment
During Satellite Radio Reception NOTE NOTE

(if so equipped)  If there is no text information to display, then  If there is no text information to display, then
“NO TITLE” is displayed. “NO TITLE” is displayed.
 Displayed genre name in equipment by type
This switches in the order “Channel name”,
(vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).
“Category name”, “Artist name”, “Track
name”, and “Composer name”.
Display the ID3tag  The genre name display may not be possible.
Hold down the DISP key.

NOTE During Bluetooth® 2.0 Audio Play-
 The channel and category have a maximum This switches the ID3tag display.
display of 8 characters. The other items have
back (if so equipped)
a maximum display of 36 characters.
[DISP] Each time the key is pressed, this
switches in the order “Album name”, “Track
N00718300025 7
name”, “Artist name”, “Genre name”*, and Operating details are the same as in “During
“Operating status”. iPod Playback” (P.7-53).
During CD-DA playback
*:Displayed when playing back audio
This switches in the order “Disc title”, “Track files on a USB device (vehicles with a Audio Quality and Volume
title”, and “Operating status”. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface). Balance Adjustment
N00718400026
NOTE Change audio quality settings.

 If there is no text information to display, then NOTE
“NO TITLE” is displayed.  During display of the ID3tag, hold down the
DISP key to switch to the folder title display.
Adjust Audio Quality and Vol-
 The genre name display may not be possible. ume Balance
During MP3/WMA/AAC Play-
1. Press the /SEL key to select settings
back items.
During iPod Playback
N00718200024
This switches in the order “Folder title”, “File Each time the /SEL key is pressed, this
title”, and “Operating status”. This switches in the order “Albums”, “Track
switches in the order BASS, TREBLE,
name”, “Artist name”, “Genre name”, and
FADER, BALANCE, SCV, and Cancel.
“Operating status”.
2. Turn the /SEL key to adjust.
System Settings
Adjust- 2. Press the /SEL key to select settings
Turn counter-
ment Turn clockwise items.
clockwise
items
BASS -6 to 0 0 to +6 Each time the /SEL key is pressed, this
(low low-pass (high low-pass switches in the order Satellite radio set-
volume) volume) tings*1, Gracenote DB*2, PHONE set-
tings, Adjust time, and Cancel.
TRE- -6 to 0 0 to +6
BLE (Low high-pass (High high-pass 3. Turn the /SEL key to set.
volume) volume) 4. Press the /SEL key to determine.
FADER CENTER to FRONT 11 to
7 REAR 11 CENTER
This completes settings, and displays the
next settings item.
(emphasize (emphasize
REAR) FRONT)
*1: Displayed when a satellite tuner is con-
BAL- LEFT 11 to CENTER to nected.
ANCE CENTER RIGHT 11 *2:Displayed when playing back audio files
(emphasize (emphasize (vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).
LEFT) RIGHT)
SCV OFF, LOW MID, HIGH
(Low vehicle (High vehicle
compensated compensated
volume effect) volume effect)
System Settings
N00718500030
Change system settings such as product time.
1. Press the MENU key.

System Settings
Satellite Radio Settings (if so equipped)
Change each satellite radio setting.
Settings
Settings name Settings item Settings content
value
SIRIUS ID — — This displays the SIRIUS ID.
SKIP SETTING SKIP SETTING ON SKIP can be set for each channel. Channels for which SKIP is set are excluded
SELECT CH*1 OFF from the search during up/down channel selecting and scanning.
They can be received when selecting channels using the preset keys or searching
for a station.
7
SKIP SETTING — When “YES” is selected, the SKIP settings for all channels are turned off.
ALL RESET
LOCK SETTING LOCK SETTING ON LOCK can be set for each channel. Channels for which LOCK is set are
SELECT CH*2 OFF excluded from the search during up/down channel selecting and scanning.
If a channel for which LOCK is set is selected when selecting channels using the
preset keys or searching for a station, “CH LCKED” is displayed within about 2
seconds after the channel text is displayed. The sound is muted.
LOCK SETTING — When “YES” is selected and the CODE for settings is input, the LOCK settings
ALL RESET for all channels are turned off.
LOCK SETTING — The CODE required for the LOCK settings is changed. (The factory setting is
EDIT CODE “1111”.)
If the input code is incorrect, “LOCK SETTING WRG LC” is displayed.
*1:Each time the /SET key is pressed, this switches in the order Settings channel select, Change SKIP settings, and Complete settings.
To return to “each channel SKIP setting”, press the 6 key.

System Settings
*2:Once the CODE (passcode) of your choice is entered, each time the /SET key is pressed, this switches in the order Settings channel select,
Change LOCK settings, and Complete settings.
To return to “each channel LOCK setting”, press the 6 key. Input the CODE from the 1 RPT key to the 6 key.
Depending on the vehicle, PHONE settings

Time Setting may not be possible.
NOTE
 Some models may not be confirmed as con-
Set the time manually. nected, or may not connect.
NOTE
 Cancel functions such as the mobile phone Supported profiles
1. Select “YES” at the “Adjust time” screen,
“dial lock”, and connect while on the Hands-free HFP(v1.5)
and press the /SEL key.
standby screen.
7  While connected, mobile phone (receiving
Phonebook
OPP(v1.1), PBAP(v1.0)
The hour can be adjusted. Press the transfer
calls, etc.) operations may not function cor-
/SEL key again to adjust the minutes. rectly.
2. Turn the /SEL key to adjust the time.  Depending on the distance between the prod-
Vehicles without a Bluetooth® 2.0 Inter-
3. Press the /SEL key. uct and the mobile phone, the conditions
within the vehicle, and types of screening,
face
This completes the adjustment. connection may not be possible. In these
A hands-free kit (available separately) is
cases, situate the mobile phone as close as
possible to the product.
required.
NOTE  Even though a Bluetooth-capable mobile
(“Set value” bold typeface indicates factory
 In order to finish adjusting the time, hold phone, characteristics and specifications may default settings.)
down the /SEL key until the seconds are mean that correct operation may not be pos-
reset to “00”. sible. Settings
Settings content
 For safety’s sake, do not operate the mobile value
phone while driving. When operating the PHONE Do not use mobile phone voice
mobile phone, first stop the vehicle in a safe
PHONE Settings location.
OFF cut-in.
 Even though a Bluetooth-capable mobile PHONE During mobile phone voice cut-
Change the mobile phone voice cut- in set- phone, phone specifications and settings may MUTE in, mute the audio.
result in differences in display, or prevent
tings and the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface lan- PHONE During mobile phone voice cut-
correct operation.
guage. ATT in, output audio from all speak-
ers.

Troubleshooting
Settings Gracenote DB (Vehicles with a
Settings content Vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 Interface
value
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)
PHONE During mobile phone voice cut- (“Set value” bold typeface indicates factory
IN-L in, output sound from the left default settings.)
The version number can be confirmed.
front speaker.
Settings Settings
PHONE During mobile phone voice cut- Settings content 1. Select “Gracenote DB” and press the
name value
IN-R in, output sound from the right /SEL key.
front speaker. HFM ENG- Change the hands
2. Turn the /SEL key and select “DB Ver-
voice lan- LISH free module voice
During mobile phone voice cut- sion”.
PHONE guage set- FRENCH language.
in, output sound from the left 3. Press the /SEL key.
IN-LR
and right front speakers.
tings
SPANISH The DB Version is displayed.
7
JAPA-
NESE
Troubleshooting
N00718600031
Please check these items if a message appears on the display, or if you think something is not working properly.
If This Message Appears...
A message is displayed on this product according to the situation.

Troubleshooting
Mode Message Cause Response
CD CHECK DISC The disc is inserted upside down. Insert with the label side up.
The disc has condensation on it. Wait a while before inserting again.
DISC ERROR The disc is damaged. Clean the read surface of the disc.
The disc is dirty.
INTERNAL E The drive has malfunctioned for some reason. Check that there is no problem with the disc, and
insert the disc again. If the problem persists, con-
sult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
7 HEAT ERROR The temperature inside the product is high. Remove the disc, and wait for the internal tempera-
ture to return to normal.
USB FILE ERROR Files that cannot be played are selected. Select files that can be played.
 “Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)” (P.7-31)
USB BUS PWR There is high or low electrical current or voltage. Turn the power OFF and wait a short while. If the
LSI ERROR There is an internal malfunction for some reason. problem persists, consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
UNSUPPORTED Unsupported audio files have been played. Confirm audio files that can be played.
FORMAT  “Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)” (P.7-31)
UNSUPPORTED An unsupported USB device has been connected. Please connect a USB memory device.
DEVICE
iPod NO SONG An iPod/iPhone not containing any tracks has been Connect an iPod/iPhone containing tracks.
connected.
VER ERROR This iPod/iPhone software version is not supported. Please change to a supported software version.
Other ERROR DC An abnormal direct voltage has been sent to the Turn the power OFF and wait a short while. If the
speakers. problem persists, consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Antenna
If You Think Something Is Not Working Properly...
Here is a list of symptoms, causes and responses if you think something is not working properly.
Symptoms Cause Response

There is no sound or quiet The volume is turned to its minimum. Adjust the volume.
sound.  “Adjust Volume” (P.7-36)
The balance or fader is turned to one side. Adjust the balance or fader.
 “Adjust Audio Quality and Volume Balance” (P.7-53)
The disc cannot be A disc is already in the product. Eject the disc. 7
inserted.  “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-36)
There is no disc in the product, but the prod- Press the eject button once.
uct says it is loading.  “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-36)
The disc cannot be played. The disc is inserted upside down. Insert with the label side up.
The disc has condensation on it. Wait a while before inserting.
The disc is dirty. Clean the read surface of the disc.
The sound skips in the The disc is damaged or dirty. Check the disc.
same place.
There is no sound, even if Damage to or dirt on the disc means that its Check the disc. Additionally, if using CD-R/RW discs, their charac-
the disc is inserted. data cannot be read. teristics may render them unable to be played.
Antenna To install
N00734200468
Screw the pole (A) clockwise into the base

To remove (B) until it is securely retained.
Turn the pole (A) counterclockwise.

General information about your radio

(for vehicles sold in U.S.A.). Operation is broadcasts can be received over longer dis-
subject to the following conditions: tances.
 The device may not cause harmful inter-

ference. FM AM
recieved, including interference that may
cause undesirable operation.
CAUTION
 Changes or modifications not expressly
25 to 40 mile radius 100 mile radius
7 approved by the party meeting the above
(40 to 64 km) (160 km)
NOTE conditions could void the user’s authority to
 Be sure to remove the roof antenna in the operate the equipment.
following cases:
• When using an automatic car wash Weak reception (fading)
• When covering your vehicle with a car Signal transmission
cover
• When driving into a structure that has a low FM signals do not follow the earth surface Because of the limited range of FM signals
ceiling nor are they reflected by the upper atmo- and the way FM waves transmit, you may
sphere. For this reason, FM broadcasts cannot experience weak or fading FM reception.
be received over long distances. AM signals When the broadcast is blocked by mountains
or similar obstructions, reception can be dis-
General information about follow the earth’s surface and are reflected by
turbed.
the upper atmosphere. For this reason, AM
your radio
N00733901481
Reflection
Your vehicle’s radio receives both AM and
FM stations. The reason why one can hear FM but not AM
The quality of your reception is affected by in parking garages, under bridges etc., is that
distance, obstacles, and signal interference.
This radio complies with Part 15 of Federal

Communications Commission (FCC) Rules

General information about your radio

FM signals, unlike AM signals, are reflected device. The disturbance is even greater if the
by solid objects such as buildings, etc.
Cross modulation station is weak or poorly tuned.
Because FM signals are easily reflected by If one listens to a weak station and is in the FM reception is not as sensitive to electrical
buildings, this can also cause reception dis- vicinity of another strong station, both sta- disturbances as AM. AM reception is sensi-
turbances. tions might be received simultaneously. tive to electrical disturbances such as power
The direct signal from the broadcast station lines, lightning and other types of similar
reaches the antenna slightly before the electrical phenomena.
reflected signal. This time difference may
cause some reception disturbance or flutter.
This problem occurs primarily in urban areas.
FM stereo reception
Stereo reception requires a high quality

broadcast signal. This means that types of
disturbances mentioned previously become
more marked and the reception range is
somewhat diminished during stereo recep-
tion.
Causes of disturbances
FM reception is affected by the electrical sys-
tems of vehicles in the vicinity, especially
those without an electronic noise suppression
For emergencies
If the vehicle breaks down................................................................8-2

Jump-starting the engine...................................................................8-2
Engine overheating ...........................................................................8-4
Tools and jack ...................................................................................8-5
How to change a tire .........................................................................8-6
Towing ............................................................................................8-13
Operation under adverse driving conditions...................................8-15
8
If the vehicle breaks down

2. Position the vehicles close enough
If the vehicle breaks down Jump-starting the engine together so that the jumper cables can
N00836300204 N00836400654
reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t
If your vehicle breaks down on the road, If the engine cannot be started because the touching each other.
move to the shoulder and turn on the hazard battery is weak or dead, you can start it with
warning flashers. If there is no shoulder, or the battery from another vehicle using jumper CAUTION
the shoulder is not safe, drive in the right lane cables.  Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-
slowly, with the hazard lights flashing, until volt battery. If the other system isn’t 12-volt,
you come to a safe stopping place. Keep the WARNING both systems can be damaged.
flashers flashing.  When using jumper cables to start a vehi-
cle, follow the procedures and be very cau- 3. You could be injured if the vehicles move.
If the engine stops/fails tious. Set the parking brake firmly on each vehi-
cle. Put an automatic transaxle, CVT or
8 Twin Clutch SST in “P” (PARK) or a
If the engine stops, there will be no power
assist to the steering and brakes, making these
CAUTION manual transaxle in “N” (Neutral). Turn
 Do not try to start your vehicle by pushing or the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi-
difficult to use.
towing. Vehicles equipped with continuously tion.
variable transmission (CVT) or Twin Clutch
 The brake booster will not work, so the
brakes will not grip well. The brake pedal
SST cannot be started this way. Pushing or WARNING
towing a vehicle that has a manual transaxle
will be harder to press than usual.  Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
may overheat and damage the catalytic con-
 Since there is no power steering assist, the position on both vehicles. Make sure that
verter. Also, there is more risk of an accident
the cables or your clothes cannot be
steering wheel will be hard to turn. when a vehicle is being pushed or towed.
caught by the fan or drive belt. Personal
injury could result.
When the engine fails at the 1. Take off any metal jewelry such as watch
intersection bands or bracelets that might make an
accidental electrical contact. NOTE
 Turn off all lights, heater, and other electrical
Get help from your passengers, bystanders, loads. This will avoid sparks and help save
etc. to push the vehicle and move it to a safe both batteries.
zone.
8-2 For emergencies

Jump-starting the engine

4. Make sure your battery electrolyte is at 6. Connect one end of one jumper cable to 7. Connect one end of the other jumper cable
the proper level. (Refer to “Checking bat- the positive (+) terminal of the discharged to the negative (-) terminal of the booster
tery electrolyte level” on page 9-15.) battery (A), and the other end to the posi- battery (B), and the other end to the
tive (+) terminal of the booster battery engine block of the vehicle with the low
WARNING (B). battery (A) at the point farthest from the
 If the electrolyte fluid is not visible, or battery.
looks frozen, DO NOT ATTEMPT JUMP
STARTING!! WARNING
The battery might split open or explode if  Be sure to follow the proper order when
the temperature is below the freezing connecting the batteries, of:
point or if it is not filled to the proper
   .
level.
 Make sure that the connection is made
5. For vehicles equipped with turbocharger,
to the engine properly. If the connection is
directly made to the negative side of the
8
remove the air duct and then the battery battery, the flammable gases from inside
upper cover. the battery might catch fire and explode,
(Refer to “Removing and installing the causing personal injury.
battery upper cover” on page 9-14.) NOTE  When connecting the jumper cable, do not
 Open the terminal cover before connecting connect the positive (+) cable to the nega-
the jumper cable to the positive terminal of tive (-) terminal. Otherwise sparks can
the battery. make the battery explode.
(Refer to “Disconnection and connection” on
page 9-16.)
 Use the proper cables suitable for the battery CAUTION
size.  Make sure that the jumper cable will not be
Otherwise heat damage to the cables could caught in the cooling fan or other moving
result. parts in the engine compartment.
 Check the jumper cables for damage and cor-
rosion before use.
For emergencies 8-3

Engine overheating
8. Start the engine in the vehicle providing
the boost. Let the engine idle a few min-
WARNING Engine overheating
 Remove all the caps before charging the
utes, then start the engine in the vehicle N00836500323
battery.
with the low battery. When the engine is overheating, the informa-
 Electrolyte (battery acid) is corrosive
tion screen in the multi-information display
diluted sulphuric acid. If electrolyte comes
NOTE in contact with your hands, eyes, clothes,
will be interrupted and the engine coolant
 If the engine is started with the air duct or the painted surface of your vehicle, temperature warning display will appear.
removed, the noise produced as air is drawn thoroughly flush with water. If electrolyte Also “ ” will blink. If this happens:
into the engine will be greater than when the gets in your eyes, flush them immediately
duct is installed. and thoroughly with water, and get 1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Turn on
prompt medical attention. the hazard warning flashers.
9. After the engine is started, disconnect the  Always wear protective clothing and gog- 2. With the engine still running, carefully
cables in the reverse order from the way gles when working near the battery. raise the engine hood to vent the engine
8 you connected them.  Keep the battery out of the reach of chil- compartment.
10. For vehicles equipped with turbocharger, dren. 3. Check that the cooling fan is running. If
install the battery upper cover and then the fan is not turning, stop the engine
the air duct. As your vehicle has anti-lock immediately and contact an authorized
(Refer to “Removing and installing the brakes Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
battery upper cover” on page 9-14.) ity of your choice for assistance.
WARNING If you drive your vehicle with a low battery WARNING

charge, after the engine has been started by
 Charging your battery while it is still in  To avoid personal injury, keep hands, hair,
your vehicle might cause the battery to using jumper cables, the engine may misfire. jewelry and clothes away from the cooling
catch fire and explode. If you have to This can cause the anti-lock braking system fan. The cooling fan can start at any time.
charge it while in the vehicle, disconnect warning light to blink on and off. This is only
the negative terminal. due to the low battery voltage. It is not a
4. If you see steam or spray coming from
 Keep sparks, cigarettes and flames away problem with the brake system. If this hap-
under the hood, turn off the engine.
from the battery because the battery may pens, fully charge the battery and ensure the
explode. charging system is operating properly.
 Keep your work area well vented when
charging or using the battery in an
enclosed space.
8-4 For emergencies

Tools and jack

5. If you do not see steam or spray coming 8. If the reserve tank needs coolant, you will
from under the hood, leave the engine on probably also need to add coolant to the Tools and jack
until the bar graph for the engine coolant radiator. Do not loosen or remove the N00836600324
temperature warning display on the multi- radiator cap until the engine has cooled
information display goes down. When it down. Storage
is in the middle of the normal zone, you
can start driving again. If the bar graph WARNING The tools and jack are stowed in the luggage
stays in the red zone, turn off the engine.  Removing the radiator cap could scald compartment.
you with escaping hot water or steam.
WARNING When checking the radiator level, cover
 Before raising the engine hood, check to the cap with a cloth before trying to
see if there is steam or spray coming from remove it. Turn it slowly counterclock-
under the hood. Steam or spray coming wise, without pressing down, to the first
from an overheated engine could seriously notch. The pressure in the system will then 8
scald you. be let out. When the pressure is COM-
Do not open the hood until there is no PLETELY LET OUT, press down and
steam or spray. keep turning the cap counterclockwise
until it will come off.
6. When you do not see any more steam or

spray, open the hood. Look for obvious 9. Start the engine, and slowly add coolant, 1- Tools
leaks, such as a split radiator hose. Be up to the bottom of the filler neck. Use 2- Jack
careful as components will be hot. Any plain water if you have to (and replace it
leak source must be repaired. with the right coolant as soon as possible).
7. If there is no obvious leak source, check 10. Replace the radiator cap and tighten it
the coolant level in the reserve tank. If fully. Check the engine coolant tempera-
there is none, or if it is too low, slowly add ture display on the multi-information dis-
coolant. play. You can start driving again when the
bar graph for the engine coolant tempera-
ture display returns to the normal zone.
11. Have your vehicle checked by your autho-
For emergencies 8-5

How to change a tire

3. On vehicles equipped with manual trans-
Tools To remove
axle, turn the ignition switch to the
N00832600124
“LOCK” position, and move the gearshift
Turn the shaft end (1) so that the jack con- lever to the “R” (Reverse) position.
tracts, then remove it from the storage bracket On vehicles equipped with continuously
(A). variable transmission (CVT) or Twin
Clutch SST, move the selector lever
To store (CVT) or the gearshift lever (Twin Clutch
SST) to the “P” (PARK) position, and turn
Turn the shaft end (2) by hand to expand the the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi-
jack until it is held firmly in position. tion.
4. Turn on the hazard flashers and set up a
warning triangle, flashing signal light,
8 1- Tool bag How to change a tire etc., at an adequate distance from the
2- Bar N00836900718 vehicle, and have all your passengers
3- Wheel nut wrench leave the vehicle.
WARNING 5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
 The jack should not be used for any pur- it is raised on the jack, place chocks or
pose other than to change a tire.
Jack  Never get under the vehicle or put any
blocks (A) at the tire that is diagonally
N00832700242
opposite from the tire (B) you are chang-
portion of your body under the vehicle
ing.
Before removing the jack, lift up the board. while it is supported by the jack.
Before changing a tire, first stop your vehicle

in a safe, flat location.
1. Park the vehicle on level and stable

ground.
2. Set the parking brake firmly.
8-6 For emergencies

WARNING WARNING CAUTION

 Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the  Tires, including spare tire, degrade over  Do not go over 50 mph (80 km/h) when driv-
correct tire when jacking up the vehicle. If time with age even when they are not ing with the compact spare tire.
the vehicle moves while jacked up, the being used. It is recommended that tires  Avoid fast starting and braking when driving
jack could slip out of position, leading to over 6 years generally be replaced even if with the compact spare tire.
an accident. damage is not obvious.  Do not drive through automatic car washes
and over obstacles that could possibly dam-
age the underside of your vehicle. Because
NOTE CAUTION the compact spare tire is smaller than the
 The chocks shown in the illustration do not  While the compact spare tire is stowed, the original tire, there is less clearance between
come with your vehicle. It is recommended inflation pressure should be checked at least the ground and your vehicle.
that you purchase chocks or blocks and keep once a month to assure that it remains at the  Because the compact spare tire is designed
them in the vehicle for use if needed. recommended inflation pressure. See the tire only for your vehicle, do not use it on any
 If chocks or blocks are not available, use and loading information placard attached to other vehicle. 8
stones or any other objects that are large the driver’s door sill.  Do not put the compact spare tire on a differ-
enough to hold the wheel in position. Refer to “Tire and loading information plac- ent wheel, and do not put standard tires,
ard” on page 11-3. snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings on the
 Driving with an improperly inflated tire can compact spare wheel. Otherwise, you could
6. Get the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench cause an accident. If you have no choice but damage these parts or other parts on your
ready. to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep vehicle.
Refer to “Tools and jack” on page 8-5. your speed down and avoid sudden steering  Do not use snow chain with your compact
or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the spare tire. Using a chain could cause damage
correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to to your vehicle and loss of the chains.
Spare tire information “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-21.
N00849600302
 The compact spare tire should be used only
temporarily. While the compact spare tire is
To remove the compact spare
Compact spare tire being used, the tire pressure monitoring sys- tire
tem will not function properly. Have the tire N00849701313
replaced or repaired at an authorized Mit- 1. Lift up the board.
The compact spare tire is designed to save
space in the luggage compartment. Its lighter your choice as soon as possible.
weight makes it easier to use if a flat tire  You can use the same wheel nuts on the com-
occurs. pact spare tire wheel.
For emergencies 8-7


2. To remove the spare tire, remove the 2. Place the jack under one of the jacking
installation clamp (A) by turning it coun- points (A) shown in the illustration. Use
terclockwise. the jacking point closest to the tire you
wish to change.
8 To change a tire
N00849800434
NOTE 1. On vehicles equipped with wheel covers,

 The clamp cannot be used for a normal size first remove the covers (refer to “Wheel WARNING
tire. Store a normal size tire under the board. covers” on page 8-12). Then loosen the  Set the jack only at the positions shown
 Put the spare tire under the vehicle body near wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench. Do here. If the jack is set at a wrong position,
the jack. This makes it safer if the jack slips not remove the wheel nuts yet. it could dent your vehicle or the jack
out of position. might fall over and cause personal injury.
 Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur-
face.
Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause
personal injury. Always use the jack on a
flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack,
make sure there are no sand or pebbles
under the jack base.
8-8 For emergencies


3. Rotate the jack by hand until the flange 6. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub sur-
portion (B) fits in the groove (C) at the top
WARNING face (F), hub bolts (G) or in the installa-
 Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the
of the jack. tion holes (H) in the wheel, and then
tire is raised off the ground. It is danger-
mount the spare tire.
ous to raise the vehicle any higher.
 Never get under the vehicle or put any
portion of your body under the vehicle
while it is supported by the jack.
 Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it
sitting on the jack for a long time. Both
are very dangerous.
 Do not use a jack except the one that came
with your vehicle.
 The jack should not be used for any pur-
pose other than to change a tire. 8
4. Insert the bar (D) into the wheel nut  No one should be in your vehicle when
using the jack.
wrench (E). Then put the end of the bar
into the shaft’s jack end, as shown in the  Do not start or run the engine while your WARNING
vehicle is on the jack.  Mount the spare wheel with the valve stem
illustration.
 Do not turn the raised wheel. The tires (I) facing outboard. If you cannot see the
Slowly rotate the wheel nut wrench until
that are still on the ground could turn and valve stem (I), you have installed the
the tire is raised slightly off the ground make your vehicle fall off the jack. wheel backwards.
surface. Operating the vehicle with the spare wheel
installed backwards can cause vehicle
5. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut
damage and result in an accident.
wrench, then take the wheel off.
CAUTION
 Handle the wheel carefully when changing
the tire, to avoid scratching the wheel sur-
face.
For emergencies 8-9


7. [Vehicle with steel wheels]
• Normal wheels and compact spare wheel
Install the wheel nuts (tapered nuts) with
their tapered ends facing inward, then
tighten by hand until the wheel is no lon-
ger loose.
• Compact spare wheel

Install the wheel nuts with their tapered
8 ends facing inward, then tighten by hand
until the wheel is no longer loose.
[Vehicle with aluminum wheels]

• Normal wheels
Temporarily tighten the wheel nuts
(flange nuts) until their flange section
comes in contact with the wheel and it is
no longer loose.
CAUTION
 Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or
the nuts or they will tighten too much.
8-10 For emergencies


9. Tighten the nuts in the order shown in the 11. Check the tire inflation pressure. The rec-
NOTE illustration until each nut has been tight- ommended tire pressure for your vehicle
 Flange nuts can be temporarily used on the
ened to the torque listed here. is listed on the tire and loading informa-
compact spare or steel wheel, but return
65 to 80 ft-lb (88 to 108 N•m) tion placard attached to the driver’s door
them to the original wheel and tire as soon as
possible. sill as shown in the illustration.
 If all four wheels are changed to steel Refer to “Tire inflation pressures” on page
wheels, use tapered nuts. 9-21.
8. Lower the vehicle slowly by rotating the

wheel nut wrench counterclockwise until
the tire touches the ground.
CAUTION
 Never use your foot or a pipe extension to
apply added force to the wheel nut wrench
when tightening the wheel nuts. If you do so, CAUTION
you can over-tighten the wheel nuts and  Driving with an improperly inflated tire can
damage the wheel, wheel nuts and hub bolts. cause an accident. If you have no choice but
to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep
10. Lower the jack all the way and remove it. your speed down and avoid sudden steering
or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the
correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to
“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-21.
 After changing the tire and driving the vehi-
cle about 620 miles (1,000 km), retighten the
wheel nuts to make sure that they have not
come loose.
For emergencies 8-11


Using the same procedure at the other wheel
CAUTION To install
cover notches, work the wheel cover away
 If the steering wheel vibrates when driving
from the wheel to remove it completely.
after changing the tire, have the tire checked
for balance at your nearest authorized Mit- CAUTION
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of  Before installing the wheel cover to the
your choice. wheel, make sure that the tabs (A) on the
 Do not mix one type of tire with another or back of the wheel cover correctly engage the
use a different size from the one listed. This ring (B) to prevent the wheel cover from
would cause early wear and poor handling. coming off. Do not install a wheel cover that
has broken tabs.
To store the flat tire or spare

tire, jack, bar and wheel nut
8 wrench
N00850000159
NOTE
Reverse the removing procedure when stor-
 The wheel cover is made of plastic. Be care-
ing the flat tire or spare tire, jack, bar and
ful when prying it off.
wheel nut wrench.
Refer to “To remove the compact spare tire”
on page 8-7 and “Tools and jack” on page CAUTION
8-5.
 Trying to remove the wheel cover with only
your bare hands can seriously injure your
Wheel covers (if so equipped) fingers.
N00849400209
To remove
Wrap the tip of the bar with a cloth, insert it

deeply into the notch provided in the wheel
cover, and pry the cover away from the
wheel.

Towing
1. Align the tire air valve (C) and the wheel 4. Gently tap the top (H) of the wheel cover.
cover notch (D). Ensure the wheel cover is securely
CAUTION
 Do not attempt to be towed by another vehi-
installed around its entire outer circumfer-
cle with a rope.
ence.
NOTE
 Your vehicle cannot tow any other vehicle.
There may be local regulations concerning

towing in your area. Obey the regulations of
the area where you are driving your vehicle.
8
NOTE
 Full wheel covers have a symbol mark (E)
provided on the reverse side to show the air
valve location. Towing
Before installing the wheel cover to the N00837001902
wheel, make sure that the opening with the
symbol mark is correctly aligned with the air
valve. If your vehicle needs to be
towed
2. Push the bottom (F) of the wheel cover
into the wheel. If towing is necessary, we recommend you to
3. Gently push in both sides (G) of the wheel have it done by a commercial tow truck ser-
cover and hold them in place with both vice.
knees. When towing is required, transport the vehi-
cle using a tow truck.
Incorrect towing equipment could damage
your vehicle.

Towing
Type A Towing the vehicle by a tow CAUTION

truck  [For front-wheel drive vehicle equipped with
the active stability control (ASC)]
If the vehicle is towed with the ignition
CAUTION switch in the “ON” position and only the
front wheels or only the rear wheels raised
 This vehicle must not be towed by a tow
off the ground, the ASC may operate, result-
Type B truck using sling lift type equipment (Type
ing in an accident. When towing the vehicle
Do not tow continuously variable trans- A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will dam-
with only the front wheels or only the rear
mission (CVT) vehicles or all-wheel age the bumper and front end.
wheels raised, keep the ignition switch in the
drive vehicles with this style.  Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with the
“LOCK” or “ACC” position.
front or rear wheels on the ground (Type B or
Type C) as illustrated. This could result in
the driving system damage or vehicle may Towing manual transaxle vehicles
8 jump at the carriage. with rear wheels off the ground
If you tow all-wheel drive vehicles, use Type
Type C
D or Type E equipment.
(Type B)
Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with  Do not tow continuously variable transmis-
this style. sion (CVT) vehicles with the driving wheels Place the gearshift lever in the “Neutral”
on the ground (Type B) as illustrated. If the position.
vehicle is towed like this, the continuously Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” posi-
variable transmission (CVT) fluid may not tion and secure the steering wheel in a
reach all parts of the transmission, thus dam- straight-ahead position with a rope or tie-
Type D
aging it.
down strap. Never place the ignition switch in
If you tow CVT vehicles, use Type C, D or E
the “LOCK” position when towing.
equipment.
 If the manual transaxle is malfunctioning or
damaged, transport the vehicle with the driv- Towing with front wheels off the
Type E ing wheels on a carriage (Type C, D or E) as ground (Type C)
illustrated.
Release the parking brake.

Place the gearshift lever in the “Neutral”
position (manual transaxle) or the selector

Operation under adverse driving conditions

lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position
(CVT).
WARNING On snowy or icy roads
 When trying to rock your vehicle out of a
stuck position, make sure that there are no  When driving on a road covered with
WARNING people nearby. The rocking motion can snow or ice, use snow tires. Tire chains
 To prevent entry of exhaust gas from the make your vehicle suddenly lurch forward cannot be used on your vehicle. There
towing vehicle, set the selection switch to or backward, and injure any bystanders. may be state or local regulations about
the recirculation position. using snow tires. Always check the regu-
lations in your local area before using
On wet roads them. Refer to the section entitled “Snow
Operation under adverse tires” on page 9-23 and “Tire chains” on
page 9-24.
driving conditions CAUTION  Drive slowly. Do not make sudden starts
N00837200705
 Avoid flooded roads. Water is often deeper
than it looks, and you could be seriously hurt
or stops, sharp turns, or slam on the
brakes.
8
If your vehicle becomes stuck in by driving into flood water.  Allow extra distance between your vehi-
sand, mud or snow  When driving in rain, on water-covered cle and the vehicle in front of you, and
roads, or through a car wash, water could get avoid sudden braking.
into the brake discs and make them fail tem-
If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand,  If a skid occurs when the accelerator
porarily. In such cases, lightly press the
or mud, it can often be moved by a rocking pedal is depressed, take your foot off the
brake pedal to see if they are working prop-
motion. Rock your vehicle back and forth to erly. If they are not, press the pedal lightly pedal. Steer gently in the direction of the
free it. several times while driving to dry the brake skid.
Do not rev the engine or spin the wheels. pads or linings, then check them again.  Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock
Constant efforts to free a stuck vehicle can  When driving in rain, a layer of water may braking system (ABS). Hold the brake
cause overheating and transaxle failure. Let form between the tires and the road surface pedal down firmly and keep it depressed.
the engine idle for a few minutes to cool the (aquaplaning). This loosens your tires’ grip Do not pump the brake pedal which will
on the road, making it difficult to steer or result in reduced braking performance.
transaxle before trying again.
brake properly. When driving on a wet road:
If your vehicle is still stuck after several rock-
• Drive your vehicle at a safe speed.
ing attempts, call for a commercial tow truck
• Do not drive on worn tires.
service.
• Always keep the tires at the correct infla-
tion pressures.

Operation under adverse driving conditions

 After parking on snowy or icy road, it
may be difficult to move your vehicle due
CAUTION
• driven on a steep slope;
to freeze-up of the brake. Depress the
accelerator pedal little by little to move
the vehicle after confirming safety of the
vehicle.
CAUTION
 Do not depress the accelerator pedal rapidly.
The vehicle could start moving when it
breaks free from the ice, possibly resulting in
an accident.
8
On a bumpy or rutted road
Drive as slow as possible when driving on

bumpy or rutted roads or over potholes etc.
CAUTION
 Driving on bumpy, rutted roads or over pot-
holes can damage the tires and wheels.
Wheels with low-profiles tires or under-
inflated tires are especially at risk for dam-
age.
 The vehicle’s body, bumper, muffler and
other parts may be damaged if the vehicle is:
• driven over a step (for example, at the
entrance or exit of a parking lot);
• parked too closely against a curb or parking
block, or by the side of a road with curb-
stones;

Vehicle care and maintenance
Service precautions...........................................................................9-2 Fuses ...............................................................................................9-28

Catalytic converter............................................................................9-2 Replacement of light bulbs.............................................................9-33
Engine hood ......................................................................................9-3 Vehicle care precautions .................................................................9-48
View of the engine compartment......................................................9-5 Cleaning the inside of your vehicle ................................................9-48
Engine oil and oil filter .....................................................................9-5 Cleaning the outside of your vehicle ..............................................9-49
Engine coolant ..................................................................................9-8
Air cleaner filter................................................................................9-9
Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped) .............................................9-10
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid (if so equipped) .9-11
Twin Clutch Sportronic shift transmission (Twin Clutch SST) fluid (if 9
so equipped) ................................................................................9-11
Transfer oil (All-wheel drive models) ............................................9-11
Rear axle oil (All-wheel drive models) ..........................................9-11
AWC control fluid (if so equipped) ................................................9-12
Washer fluid....................................................................................9-12
Brake fluid/Clutch fluid (if so equipped)........................................9-13
Power steering fluid (if so equipped)..............................................9-14
Battery.............................................................................................9-14
Tires ................................................................................................9-17
Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped)...........................................9-24
Brake pedal free play ......................................................................9-24
Parking brake lever stroke ..............................................................9-24
Parking brake break-in....................................................................9-24
Wiper blades ...................................................................................9-25
Emission-control system maintenance ...........................................9-25
General maintenance ......................................................................9-26
For cold and snowy weather ..........................................................9-27
Fusible links....................................................................................9-28
Service precautions
Service precautions WARNING

N00937301397  The fan can turn on automatically even if
the engine is not running. Turn the igni-
Taking regular care of your vehicle will pre-
tion switch to the “LOCK” position to be
serve its value and appearance as long as pos- safe while you work in the engine com-
sible. partment.
 Do not smoke or allow open flames around
You can do some of the maintenance work
fuel or the battery. The fumes are flamma-
yourself, and the rest should only be per- ble.
formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors  Be extremely careful when working
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. around the battery. It contains poisonous
If you discover a malfunction or other prob- and corrosive sulfuric acid.
lem, have it corrected by an authorized Mit-  Do not get under your vehicle while it is on Have you purchased the Mitsubishi Motors
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of a jack. Diamond Care Protection Plan? The Plan
your choice. Always use properly rated automotive supplements your new vehicle warranties.
9 This section describes the maintenance jack stands.
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
inspections that you can do yourself, if you so  Handling your vehicle’s parts and materi-
for details.
desire. Follow the instructions and precau- als in the wrong way can injure you. Ask
tions for each procedure. an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
or a repair facility of your choice if you Catalytic converter
have questions.
WARNING N00937400405
 When checking or servicing the inside of The catalytic converter requires you to use
the engine compartment, be sure the unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
engine is stopped and has had a chance to destroy the emission-control effectiveness of
cool down. the converter.
 If you need to work in the engine compart-
ment with the engine running, be espe- Normally, the catalytic converter does not
cially careful that your clothing, hair, etc. require maintenance. However, it is important
does not get caught in the fan, drive belts, to keep the engine properly tuned for the con-
or other moving parts. verter to continue to work properly.
9-2 Vehicle care and maintenance

Engine hood
 Do not idle the engine with any spark plug
CAUTION wires disconnected or removed, such as Engine hood
 Damage to the catalytic converter can result
when performing diagnostic tests. N00937500523
if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
 Do not idle the engine for a long time if it
condition. If the engine malfunctions or mis-
is idling roughly or otherwise obviously
CAUTION
fires, or if your vehicle performance suffers,  For vehicles equipped with turbocharger, to
have it serviced promptly. Running your malfunctioning.
avoid the risk of being burned, do not touch
vehicle when it is overheated may result in  To prevent the catalytic converter from the air outlets (A) and air scoop (B) on the
damage to the converter and vehicle. being damaged from unburned gas, do not engine hood when the engine compartment is
race the engine when turning off the igni- hot (when the engine is running or immedi-
tion switch. ately after the vehicle has been driven).
WARNING  Stop driving the vehicle if you think the
 Do not park or run your vehicle in areas performance is noticeably low, or the
where combustible materials such as dry engine has a malfunction. If you are not
grass or leaves can come in contact with a able to stop driving immediately, slow
hot exhaust, since a fire could occur. down and drive for only a short time.
 Do not put undercoat paint on the cata- Have an inspection made by an authorized
9
lytic converter. Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
ity of your choice as soon as possible.
To reduce the possibility of catalytic con-  In unusual situations involving major
verter damage: engine problems, a burning odor may
indicate severe and abnormal catalytic
 Use UNLEADED GASOLINE ONLY of converter overheating. If this occurs, stop
the type of recommended in “Fuel selec- in a safe place, shut the engine off and let
tion”. the vehicle cool. Once the engine is cool,
 Do not drive with an extremely low fuel immediately take your vehicle to an To open
level. Running out of gas could damage authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
the catalytic converter. repair facility of your choice for service. Use the engine hood release lever (located
 Do not try to start the engine by pushing
under the instrument panel near the driver’s
or towing the vehicle. If the battery is
door) to unlock the engine hood.
weak or run down, use jumper cables to
properly start the engine.
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-3

Engine hood
Pull the lever toward you to release the Release the safety lever and lift the engine Support the engine hood with the hood prop.
engine hood latch. hood. Insert the hood prop securely in the opening
under the hood marked with an arrow.
9 WARNING NOTE
 Never use the release lever to unlatch the  To prevent damage to the engine hood and CAUTION
engine hood while the vehicle is in motion. wipers, make sure the wipers are at resting  Always insert the support prop into the hole
 Do not drive your vehicle unless the position when you open the engine hood. specially made for it. Propping the engine
engine hood is locked. hood at any other place could cause the prop
to slip out and lead to an accident.
 The hood prop can fall out if the hood is
lifted by a strong wind.

View of the engine compartment
To close NOTE Vehicles with turbocharger

 Do not push down strongly on the engine
Unlatch the prop from the engine hood and hood. Depending on how strongly or where
put it back in its retainer. you push down, you could create a dent in
the vehicle body.
 If you drive with the engine hood left open,
warning display is displayed on the informa-
tion screen in the multi-information display.
Type 1 Type 2
1- Power steering fluid reservoir (if so

equipped)
2- Air cleaner filter
3- Brake fluid/Clutch fluid reservoir (if so
equipped) 9
Slowly lower the engine hood about 8 inches 4- Engine coolant reservoir
(20 cm), then let it drop from its own weight. 5- Windshield washer fluid reservoir
6- Engine oil level dipstick
View of the engine compart- 7- Radiator cap
CAUTION ment 8- Engine oil filler cap
 Be careful not to trap your hands or fingers 9- Battery
N00937600670
when closing the engine hood.
 Make sure the engine hood is firmly closed Except for vehicles with turbocharger
before driving.
If you drive without the engine hood com- Engine oil and oil filter
pletely closed, it could open up while driv- N00937701968
ing.
To check and refill engine oil
NOTE It is normal for an engine to use oil. You may
 If this does not close the engine hood prop-
need to add oil between the recommended oil
erly, drop it again from a slightly higher
position.

Engine oil and oil filter

change intervals. Before starting the engine,
check the engine oil level. Refill if necessary. Vehicles with turbocharger NOTE
 Engine oil consumption is greatly influenced
To check the oil level, remove the dipstick, Good by payload, engine speed, etc.
wipe it off, and gently insert it all the way  The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the
into the crankcase. Slowly remove it again. vehicle is subjected to severe conditions (for
example, repeated operation on rough roads,
The oil level must not go above the line on
in mountainous regions, on roads with many
the dipstick. uphill and downhill gradients, or over short
distances). Consequently, the oil will require
If the level does not reach the line, which
earlier replacement in accordance with the
shows the smallest amount of oil required, schedule in the “WARRANTY AND MAIN-
remove the oil filler cap on the engine valve TENANCE MANUAL”.
cover, and fill to within the “Good” range. CAUTION
 Overfilling the crankcase will cause oil aera-
Except for vehicles with turbocharger tion and loss of oil pressure, which could Engine oil identification mark
9 damage the engine.
 For vehicles equipped with turbocharger, Mitsubishi Motors recommends using only
Good engine oil must be properly maintained to engine oils with the ILSAC certification sym-
avoid engine and/or turbocharger damage. bol on the front of the container.
To better protect your engine and turbo-
charger, use fully synthetic engine oil.
ILSAC certification symbol
WARNING
 Used engine oil is poisonous, and can dam-
age your skin. Prolonged and repeated
contact may cause serious skin disorders,
including dermatitis and cancer. Don’t let
used oil touch your skin. Wash thoroughly
after working with it.
 Keep used oil out of the reach of children.

Engine oil and oil filter

If you cannot find oils with the ILSAC certi-
Except for vehicles equipped with Vehicles equipped with turbo-
fication symbol, use an API classification SN
or higher oil with the following label. turbocharger charger
This mark appears on the top of the oil con-
tainer and tells you two important things
about the oil.
API service symbol
SAE 0W-20 engine oil is strongly recom-

mended for optimum fuel economy and cold NOTE
9
starting.  Select engine oil of the proper SAE viscosity
1- The top portion shows the quality of
If SAE 0W-20 is not available, the ILSAC number according to the atmospheric tem-
the oil.
certification oil of other viscosity grades can perature.
2- The center portion shows the SAE
be temporarily used.  SAE 0W-30 and 0W-40 engine oil are rec-
grade of the oil viscosity. ommended to use to improve engine start-
ability on a very cold weather condition.
Recommended engine oil vis-

cosity To replace the oil filter
N00955000083 N00955100055
Use engine oil with the proper thickness for The oil filter should be replaced at the time or
the outdoor temperatures where you will be mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND
driving. MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
Only use high quality replacement filters on
this vehicle. The manufacturer’s specifica-
tions for Genuine Mitsubishi oil filters

Engine coolant
require that the filter can withstand a pressure Except for vehicles with turbocharger *: similar high quality ethylene glycol based
of 256 psi (1.8 MPa). A Genuine Mitsubishi non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and
oil filter is the best replacement filter. non-borate coolant with long life hybrid
Follow the installation instructions printed on FULL organic acid technology
the filter.
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Coolant provides
LOW excellent protection against corrosion and
Engine coolant rust formation on all metals, including alumi-
N00937800555 num, and prevents blockages in some parts of
engine.
To check the coolant level If you need to add coolant often, or if the
level in the reserve tank does not drop when
The coolant reserve tank (A) lets you quickly Vehicles with turbocharger the engine cools, the cooling system should
see when you need to add coolant. When the be pressure-tested for leaks. Take your vehi-
cle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
9 engine is cold, the level in the reserve tank
should be between the “FULL” and “LOW”
FULL
or a repair facility of your choice for testing.
marks. The radiator usually stays full so there
is no reason to remove the radiator cap (B) LOW CAUTION
except when you check the coolant freeze  Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or
point or replace the antifreeze coolant. any engine coolants that contain them. Using
the wrong antifreeze can corrode aluminum
parts.
*- Front of the vehicle  The required concentration of anti-freeze dif-
fers depending on the expected ambient tem-
perature.
To add coolant Above -31 °F (-35 °C) : 50 %concentration
of anti-freeze
Below -31 °F (-35 °C) : 60 %concentration
Use “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long of anti-freeze
Life Coolant Premium” or an equivalent*. You can check the concentration level with a
gauge from an automotive supply store, or
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
service station can check it for you.

Air cleaner filter

 Your vehicle uses a special radiator cap 1. Remove the two clips (A), then remove
CAUTION that stays sealed and lets the coolant flow the duct (B).
 Do not use water to adjust the concentration
from the reserve tank back to the radiator
of coolant. Except for vehicles with turbocharger
when the engine cools down. If you need
 Do not top off the tank with plain water only.
to change the cap, use the exact same
Water by itself boils at a lower temperature
and does not stop rust or freezing. If the kind.
water freezes, it will damage your cooling  Check the coolant freeze point in the radi-
system. Do not use tapwater. It can cause ator with the proper gauge, and only when
corrosion and rust. it is safe. If you add antifreeze, the con-
tents of the reserve tank must be protected
against freezing.
Radiator cap  Keep the front of the radiator and con-
denser clean.
The radiator cap must be tight sealed to pre-  If the temperature of the engine coolant
vent losing coolant which may result in Vehicles with turbocharger
does not rise after the engine is warmed-
engine damage. Only use a Genuine Mitsubi- up, take your vehicle to an authorized
9
shi Parts radiator cap, or an approved equiva- Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
lent. ity of your choice to have the thermostat
checked, and replaced if necessary.
WARNING
 Wait for the engine to cool down before
opening the radiator cap. Otherwise hot
Air cleaner filter
N00937901436
steam or boiling coolant could spray up
from the radiator and scald you. The air cleaner filter will get dirty and dusty
from use and not filter properly. Replace it
with a new filter using the schedule in the
Points to remember “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL”.
 Do not overfill the reserve tank.

Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped)

2. Except for vehicles equipped with turbo-
charger, while holding down the tab (C),
Type 2 NOTE
 Except for vehicles equipped with turbo-
pull out the connector (D).
charger, make sure that the connector is
properly reconnected.
Vehicles with turbocharger
4. Install the air cleaner filter and put the

cover back on in its original position.
5. Put the duct back on in its original posi-
9 3. Unclamp and take out the air cleaner fil- NOTE tion.
ter.  Genuine Mitsubishi Motors Parts are recom-
mended when replacing the air cleaner filter.
Type 1
 After replacing the air cleaner filter, make Manual transaxle oil (if so
sure that the hinges at the bottom of cover equipped)
are firmly set.
N00938200165
Except for vehicles with turbocharger

Whenever the manual transaxle oil level is
checked, add oil to maintain the proper level,
if necessary.
Refill or change the oil according to the table.
Oil type
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine

Lubricant NEW MULTI GEAR OIL API
Classification GL-3

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid (if so equipped)

Viscosity Twin Clutch Sportronic shift Transfer oil (All-wheel drive
SAE 75W-80
range
transmission (Twin Clutch models)
Continuously variable SST) fluid (if so equipped) N00938400242
N00938300049 Whenever the transfer oil level is checked,

transmission (CVT) fluid (if add oil as necessary to maintain the proper
The Twin Clutch Sportronic shift transmis- level.
so equipped)
sion (Twin Clutch SST) should be maintained Fill or change the oil according the table.
N00938100063
and serviced by an authorized Mitsubishi
The continuously variable transmission Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice to obtain the best performance and Oil type
(CVT) should be maintained and serviced by
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a longest life. It is important that the transmis-
repair facility of your choice to obtain the sion fluid is kept at the correct level. Mitsubishi Motors Genuine
Lubricant
best performance and longest life. It is impor- LSD gear oil or equivalent
tant that the transmission fluid is kept at the Fluid type 9
correct level.
Rear axle oil (All-wheel
Use only Mitsubishi Motors Genuine SSTF-I
Fluid type to ensure optimum transmission performance. drive models)
N00915200230
Use only “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine CAUTION Whenever the oil level is checked, add oil as
CVTF-J4” transmission fluid to ensure opti-  Using the improper transmission fluid may
necessary to maintain the proper level.
mum transmission performance. damage the transaxle. Fill or change oil according to the table.
Special additives Oil type

Special additives
Mitsubishi Motors Corporation does not rec- Mitsubishi Motors Genuine
Mitsubishi Motors Corporation does not rec- Lubricant
ommend the addition of any fluid additives to LSD gear oil or equivalent
the transmission. ommend the addition of any fluid additives to
the transmission.

AWC control fluid (if so equipped)

2. Remove the cover (B) while pressing the
AWC control fluid (if so top of the cover (B) and the hook (C).
NOTE
 Do not spill the fluid onto the luggage com-
equipped)
partment. If the fluid spilled, wipe it up
N00915300042
immediately.
To check the fluid level 4. To install the cover, perform the removal
steps in reverse.
The AWC control fluid reservoir is in the lug-
gage compartment. Fluid type
NOTE Lubricant DIAMOND ATF SP III
 Check the fluid level in the reservoir 90 min-
utes or more after turning the ignition switch 3. Check to make certain that the AWC con-
9 to the “LOCK” position. trol fluid level is always between the
Washer fluid
“MAX” and “MIN” level markings on the
N00938600273
fluid reservoir and refill the fluid, if nec-
1. Remove the lid of the cargo floor box (A) The windshield washer fluid reservoir is in
essary.
on the right side. the engine compartment.

Brake fluid/Clutch fluid (if so equipped)

Check the washer fluid level at regular inter- If the fluid level falls markedly in a short
vals and add washer fluid to reservoir if nec- Brake fluid/Clutch fluid (if so length of time, it indicates leaks from the
essary. equipped) brake system.
Open the reservoir cap and check the fluid N00938700216 If this occurs, have the vehicle checked by an
level with the dipstick. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
The brake fluid and the clutch fluid share the repair facility of your choice.
reservoir tank.
Fluid type
To check the fluid level
Use brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or
The fluid level must be between the “MAX” DOT 4. The reservoir cap must be tightly
and “MIN” marks on the reservoir. sealed to keep dirt and water out.
CAUTION 9
 Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch,
mix with, or get into the brake fluid. This
MAX will damage the seals.
During cold weather  Be careful when handling brake fluid. It can
damage painted surfaces.
MIN  Use only the listed brake fluid. Different
When freezing weather is anticipated, flush
brands of brake fluid have different addi-
out the water in the reservoir by operating the
tives, and these can cause a chemical reac-
pump. Fill the reservoir with windshield anti- tion. Do not mix brands of brake fluid.
freeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate  Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to keep
the system for a few seconds to flush out the The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the the brake fluid from evaporating.
residual water. brake pads, but this does not indicate any
abnormality.
The fluid in the master cylinder should be

checked when doing other work under the
engine hood. The brake system should also be
checked for leaks at the same time.

Power steering fluid (if so equipped)
Power steering fluid (if so Battery To remove

equipped) N00939100826
1. Remove the two clips (A), and then
N00939000388 The condition of the battery is very important remove the air duct (B).
for quick starting and to keep the vehicle’s
electrical system working properly. Check the
To check the fluid level battery regularly.
Check the fluid level in the reservoir while WARNING

the engine is idling.  An SRS airbag sensor is located in the
Check to make certain that the power steering front of the engine compartment near the
fluid level is always between the “MAX” and battery.
“MIN” level markings on the fluid reservoir When checking or replacing the battery,
and refill the fluid, if necessary. or when working around this area, do not
strike or damage this sensor.
9
2. Turn the plastic nuts (C) counterclock-
wise, and then remove the battery upper
Removing and installing the cover (D).
battery upper cover (vehicles
equipped with turbocharger)
N00901300025
WARNING
 Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position on vehicle. Make sure that your
clothes cannot be caught by the fan or
drive belt. Personal injury could result.
Fluid type
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine

Lubricant
Power Steering Fluid

Battery
NOTE CAUTION Except for vehicles with turbocharger

 Be careful not to lose the removed plastic  Be sure to install the battery upper cover.
nuts. Otherwise, the battery electrolyte may spill
and cause a malfunction.
 When installing the battery upper cover,
To install plastic nuts, and air duct, do not touch the
cooling fan or other moving parts in the
1. Install the battery upper cover (A) onto engine compartment. Be especially careful
the battery, and then push the plastic nuts that the cables, your clothing or hair, etc., do
not get caught in the cooling fan or other
(B) in the direction shown by the arrows
moving parts.
to secure the cover.
Checking battery electrolyte

level 9
N00901500027
The electrolyte level must be between the

limits shown on the outside of the battery. Fill
it with distilled water as needed. The inside of
the battery is divided into several compart-
ments. Take the cap off of each compartment
and fill to the mark.
Do not fill above the top line because a spill WARNING
NOTE during driving could cause damage.
 Be sure to install the plastic nuts in the cor-  If the battery goes flat, be sure to check
rect direction. the battery electrolyte level before con-
 Make sure that the battery upper cover is necting booster cables.
installed securely.  After checking the battery electrolyte
level, make sure the caps are fitted
securely.
2. To install the air duct, perform the  If any of the caps has a loose fit, replace
removal steps in reverse. the battery.

Battery
NOTE NOTE WARNING

 For vehicles equipped with turbocharger, the  For vehicles equipped with turbocharger,  Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro-
battery upper cover does not need to be remove the battery upper cover before dis- sive diluted sulfuric acid. If it spills on
removed to check the battery electrolyte connecting the terminal of battery. Refer to nearby parts, it can crack, stain, or dis-
level. “Removing and installing the battery upper color them. And if gets on your skin or in
cover” on page 9-14. your eyes, it can cause burns or blindness.
 Open the terminal cover (A) before discon- Please observe the following handling
necting or connecting the positive (+) termi- instructions:
During cold weather
nal of the battery. • If electrolyte gets on plastic parts or
N00901600028
other nearby parts, wipe it off with a soft
The battery is weaker in cold temperatures. cloth or chamois soaked in a solution of
This has to do with its chemical and physical water and neutral detergent then imme-
properties and is why a very cold battery, diately rinse the affected parts with
especially one with a low charge, will have a plenty of water.
hard time starting your vehicle. • If electrolyte gets on your hands or
9 It is recommended that you have your battery clothes, rinse thoroughly with water. If
and charging system checked by an autho- electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them
with water immediately and get immedi-
ate medical attention.
facility of your choice before the start of cold
 Open doors and windows in any closed
weather. If necessary, have it charged. This
WARNING space where you may be charging or
will guarantee more reliable starting, and lon- working with the battery.
 Never disconnect the battery while the
ger battery life. engine is running, or you could damage  Always wear protective clothing and gog-
the vehicle’s electrical parts. gles when working with the battery, or
Disconnection and connection  Never short-circuit the battery. This could have a skilled automobile technician do it.
cause it to overheat and be damaged.  If you are quick-charging your battery,
N00901701097
 Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away first disconnect the battery cables.
To disconnect the battery cable, stop the from the battery because the battery could  In order to prevent a short circuit, be sure
engine. Disconnect the negative (-) terminal explode. to disconnect the negative (-) terminal
first, then the positive (+) terminal. To recon- first, and reconnect it last.
nect the battery, first connect the positive (+)  If the electrolyte level is very low, have the
terminal and then the negative (-) terminal, battery checked at an authorized Mitsubi-
before starting the vehicle. shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of
your choice.

Tires
 Recommended inflation pressure: the
WARNING Tires inflation pressure for optimum tire perfor-
 Battery terminals and related accessories N00939201563
mance.
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
 Intended outboard sidewall:
hands after handling. WARNING • The sidewall that contains a whitewall,
 Driving with tires that are worn, damaged
bears white lettering or bears manufac-
or improperly inflated is dangerous.
NOTE These type tire conditions will adversely
turer, brand, and/or model name molding
affect vehicle performance. that is higher or deeper than the same
 Check each battery terminal for corrosion.
You can stop more corrosion by washing These type tire conditions can also cause a molding on the other sidewall of the tire,
with a solution of baking soda and water. tread separation or blowout which may or
Grease the posts and clamps after cleaning or result in an accident causing serious • The outward facing sidewall of an asym-
tightening them. injury or death. metrical tire that has a particular side
 Check to see that the battery is securely  Tires, including spare tire, degrade over that must always face outward when
installed and cannot be moved. Also check time with age even when they are not mounted on a vehicle.
each terminal for tightness. being used. It is recommended that tires  Passenger car tire: a tire intended for use
 If you will not be driving your vehicle for a over 6 years generally be replaced even if on passenger cars, multipurpose passen-
9
long period of time, remove the battery and damage is not obvious.
ger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross
store it in a place where the battery fluid will vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000
not freeze. Memory data for settings made It is important to familiarize yourself with the pounds or less.
by the user may be erased when the battery is following terms:  Light truck (LT) tire: a tire designated by
removed. If this happens, reset the settings
again using the relevant procedures. The bat- its manufacturer as primarily intended for
 Cold tire pressure: use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose
tery only should be stored with a full charge.
• The measured pressure after the vehicle passenger vehicles.
 Before cleaning the battery, tighten all the
has been parked for at least three hours,  Tread: portion of a tire that comes into
filler port caps to keep dirt and moisture out.
or contact with the road.
• The measured pressure when the vehicle  Tread rib: a tread section running circum-
is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after ferentially around a tire.
having been parked for three hours.  Tread separation: pulling away of the
 Maximum inflation pressure: the maxi- tread from the tire carcass.
mum permissible cold tire inflation pres-  Carcass: the tire structure, except tread
sure for this tire. and sidewall rubber which, when inflated,
bears the load.

Tires
 Sidewall: portion of a tire between the Construction code
tread and bead.
Tire Markings
 Section width: the linear distance between
•“R” means radial construc-
the exteriors of the sidewalls of an R tion.
inflated tire, excluding elevations due to •“D” means diagonal or bias
labeling, decoration, or protective bands. construction.
 Bead: the part of the tire that is made of
steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply 15 Rim diameter in inches (in)
cords and that is shaped to fit the rim.
 Ply: a layer of rubber-coated parallel NOTE
cords.
 European/Japanese metric tire
 Cord: the strands forming the plies in the
tire. sizing is based on European/Jap-
 Rim: a metal support for a tire or a tire anese design standards. Tires
and tube assembly upon which the tire designed to these standards have
9 beads are seated. Size Designation the tire size molded into the
 Rim diameter: nominal diameter of the sidewall beginning with the sec-
bead seat. EXAMPLE:P215/65R15
 Groove: the space between two adjacent
tion width. The letter “P” is
tread ribs. Passenger car tire size based absent from this tire size desig-
P
on U.S.A. design standards nation. Example: 215/65R15
Section width in millimeters 96H.
215
(mm.)
Aspect ratio in percent (%)
65 Ratio of section height to sec-
tion width of tire.

Tires
NOTE Speed symbol WARNING

 LT (Light Truck) -metric tire A symbol indicating the range  Overloading of your tire is
sizing is based on U.S.A. design of speeds at which a tire can dangerous. Overloading can
standards. The size designation carry a load corresponding to cause tire failure, affect vehi-
for LT-metric tires is the same as its load index under certain cle handling, and increase
for P-metric tires except for the operating conditions. your stopping distance. Use
letters “LT” that are molded into H The maximum speed corre- tires of the recommended load
the sidewall preceding the size sponding to the speed symbol capacity for your vehicle.
designation. Example: should only be achieved under Never overload them.
LT235/85R16. specified operating condi-
 Temporary spare tires are high tions. (i.e. tire pressure, vehi-
pressure compact spares cle loading, road conditions Maximum Pressure
designed for temporary emer- and posted speed limits) 9
Maximum Pressure indicates the
gency use only. Tires designed
Maximum Load maximum permissible cold tire infla-
to this standard have the letter
tion pressure for this tire.
“T” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Maximum load indicates the maxi-
Example: T145/80D18 103M. mum load this tire is designed to Tire Identification Number (TIN)
carry.
The TIN may be found on one or
Service Description
both sides of the tire but the date
EXAMPLE: 95H code may only be on one side. Look
for the TIN on the outboard side of
Load index
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the
A numerical code associated
95 TIN is not found on the outboard side
with the maximum load a tire
then you will find it on the inboard
can carry.
side of the tire.

Tires
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD Treadwear, Traction and Temper- under controlled conditions on speci-
1504 fied government test surfaces of
ature Grades
Department of Transporta- asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
tion C may have poor traction perfor-
This symbol certifies that Treadwear
mance.
the tire is in compliance The treadwear grade is a comparative
DOT
with the U.S. Department rating based on the wear rate of the Temperature
of Transportation tire safety tire when tested under controlled
standards, and is approved The temperature grades are A (the
conditions on a specified government
for highway use. highest), B and C, representing the
test course. For example, a tire
tire’s resistance to the generation of
Code representing the tire graded 150 would wear one and one-
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
MA manufacturing location. (2 half (11/2) times as well on the gov- when tested under controlled condi-
9 digits) ernment course as a tire graded 100. tions on a specified indoor laboratory
Code representing the tire The relative performance of tires test wheel. Sustained high tempera-
L9 size. (2 digits) depends upon the actual conditions ture can cause the material of the tire
ABCD Code used by tire manufac- of their use, however, and may depart to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
turer. (1 to 4 digits) significantly from the norm due to excessive temperature can lead to
Number representing the variations in driving habits, service sudden tire failure. The grade C cor-
15 week in which the tire was practices and differences in road responds to a level of performance
manufactured. (2 digits) characteristics and climate. which all passenger car tires must
Number representing the meet under the Federal Motor Vehi-
Traction cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
04 year in which the tire was
manufactured. (2 digits) B and A represent higher levels of
The traction grades, from highest to
performance on the laboratory test
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
wheel than the minimum required by
grades represent the tire’s ability to
law.
stop on wet pavement as measured

Tires
The correct tire pressure for your vehicle is inflation pressure may increase 14 to 41 KPA,
Tire inflation pressures listed on the placard attached to the driver’s 2 to 6 PSI from the cold inflation pressure.
N00939301900
door sill. Do not let air out of the tires to get back to the
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential for (Refer to “Tire and loading information plac- specified cold pressure, or your tire pressure
the safe and satisfactory operation of your ard” on page 11-3.) will be too low.
vehicle. The wrong tire pressure will cause The recommended inflation pressures should Check your tires each time you refuel. If one
problems in three major areas: be used for the tires listed below. tire looks lower than the others, check the
pressure for all of them.
 Safety You should also take the following safety pre-
Item Tire size Front Rear
Too little pressure increases flexing in the cautions:
tire and can cause tire failure. Too much P205/60 250 KPA, 250 KPA,
pressure can cause a tire to lose its ability Normal R16 36 PSI 36 PSI  Keep your tires inflated to the recom-
to cushion shock. Objects on the road and tire P215/45 240 KPA, 240 KPA, mended pressures. (See the tire and load-
potholes could then cause tire damage that R18 35 PSI 35 PSI ing information placard attached to the
may result in tire failure. driver’s door sill.)
Compact T125/70
 Economy
spare tire D16
420 KPA, 60 PSI  Stay within the recommended load limits. 9
The wrong tire pressure can cause uneven  Make sure that the weight of any load in
wear patterns in the tire tread. These your vehicle is evenly distributed.
abnormal wear patterns will reduce the Tire pressures should be checked, and
 Drive at safe speeds.
tread life, and the tire will have to be adjusted if necessary, at least once a month.
 After filling your tires to the correct pres-
replaced sooner. Pressures should be checked more often
sure, check them for damage and air
Too little pressure also makes it harder for whenever weather temperatures change
leaks. Be sure to reinstall the caps on the
the tire to roll, and this uses up more fuel. severely, because tire pressures change with
valve stems.
 Ride comfort and vehicle stability outdoor temperatures. The pressures listed on
The superior riding experience built into the placard are always “cold inflation pres-
your vehicle partly depends on the correct sure”.
tire pressure. Too much pressure gives an Cold inflation pressure is measured after the
uncomfortable and jarring ride. Too little vehicle has been parked for at least three
pressure feels as if your vehicle is slow to hours or is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
respond. after having been parked for three hours.
Unequal tire pressures can make steering Cold inflation pressure must not go above the
your vehicle uneven and unpredictable. maximum values molded into the tire side-
wall. After driving several miles, your tire

Tires
Many states have laws requiring that you
Replacing tires and wheels Tire maintenance replace your tires at this point.
N00939600371 N00939700154
These indicators are molded into the bottom
The following maintenance steps are recom- of the tread grooves and will appear when the
CAUTION mended: tire tread is worn down to 1/16 inch (1.6
 Avoid using different size tires and wheels
from the ones listed, and avoid the combined mm).
 Check tire pressures regularly. When the bands appear next to one another in
use of different types of tires and wheels.  Have regular maintenance done on the
Using different size or type tires and wheels two or more places, replace your tires.
wheel balance and front and rear suspen-
may affect driving safety.
Refer to “Tires and wheels” on page 11-5.
sion alignment.
 Rotate your tires regularly as described in NOTE
 For All-wheel drive vehicles, always use
the “Tire rotation” section on page 9-22.  Tire wear indicators can have different marks
tires of the same size, same type, and same
and locations depending on the tire manufac-
brand, and which have no wear differences.
turer.
Using tires that differ in size, type, brand or Tread wear indicators
the degree of wear, will increase the differen-
9 tial oil temperature, resulting in possible
N00939800227
damage to the driving system. Further, the Tire rotation

drive train will be subjected to excessive N00939900491
loading, possibly leading to oil leakage,
To even out the wear on your tires and make
component seizure, or other serious prob-
them last longer, Mitsubishi Motors Corpora-
lems.
tion recommends that you rotate your tires at
 Even if a wheel has the same rim size and
offset as the specified type of wheel, its the mileage listed in the “WARRANTY AND
shape may prevent it from being fitted cor- MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
rectly. Consult an authorized Mitsubishi However, the timing for tire rotation may
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your vary according to your vehicle condition,
choice before using wheels that you have. road surface conditions, and your own per-
 Only Mitsubishi Motors genuine wheels 1- Location of the tread wear indicator sonal driving habits. Any time you notice
should be used, because your vehicle is 2- Tread wear indicator unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as pos-
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys- sible.
tem.
Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks Tread wear indicators are built into the origi- When rotating tires, check for uneven wear,
and sensor damage, as it will not be possible nal equipment tires on your vehicle to help damage, and wheel alignment. Abnormal
to install the tire pressure sensor properly. you know when your tires should be replaced. wear is usually caused by a wrong tire pres-

Tires
sure, wheels that are not aligned properly,
wheels that are out-of-balance, or severe
CAUTION Snow tires
 If the tires have arrows (A) indicating the N00940000359
braking.
correct direction of rotation, swap the front In some areas of the country, snow tires are
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
and rear tires on the left-hand side of the
dealer or a repair facility of your choice to required for winter driving. If snow tires are
vehicle and the front and rear tires on the
find out the reason for uneven tread wear. required in your area, you must choose snow
right-hand side of the vehicle separately.
Keep each tire on its original side of the tires of the same size and type as the original
The first tire rotation is the most important vehicle. When installing the tires, make sure tires provided with your vehicle. Snow tires
one. It will allow all your tires to wear evenly. the arrows point in the direction in which the should also be installed on all four wheels.
wheels will turn when the vehicle moves for- Otherwise your safety and vehicle handling
Tires that do not have arrows showing rotation ward. Any tire whose arrow points in the can be reduced.
direction wrong direction will not perform to its full Even where laws may permit it, snow tires
potential. should not be operated at sustained speeds
Front over 75 mph (120 km/h).
CAUTION
9
Tires that have arrows showing rotation direction Front
 If flange nuts are used on your vehicle,
change to tapered nuts when using snow tires
with steel wheels.
 Only Mitsubishi Motors genuine wheels
Front
should be used, because your vehicle is
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem.
Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks
and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
to install the tire pressure sensor properly.
CAUTION
 A compact spare tire can be installed tempo- CAUTION
rarily in place of a tire that has been removed  Avoid the combined use of different types of
during the tire rotation. However, it must not tires. Using different types of tires can affect
be included in the regular tire rotation vehicle performance and safety.
sequence.

Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped)

slowly and count the number of clicks of the
Tire chains Brake pedal free play ratchet.
N00940100129 N00940301333
To check the brake pedal free play (A), turn Parking brake lever stroke:
CAUTION off the engine and press the brake pedal sev- 3 to 5 notches
 Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle. eral times with your foot. Then press the
The clearance between the chains and the pedal down with your fingers until you first Also check to see if the lever stays gripped by
body is not sufficient to allow proper clear- the ratchet after pulling.
feel resistance.
ance, and the vehicle body might be dam-
aged.
Brake pedal free play:
.1 to .3 inch (3 to 8 mm)
Clutch pedal free play (if so

equipped)
9
N00940201097
To check the clutch pedal free play (A), turn

off the engine and press the pedal until you
feel resistance.
Clutch pedal free play:

.2 to .4 inch (4 to 9 mm) Parking brake break-in
If the free play is not within these limits, take N00936200057
your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Break-in the parking brake linings whenever
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your the brake performance of the parking brake is
choice for adjustment. insufficient or whenever the parking brake
linings and/or discs are replaced, in order to
assure the best brake performance.
Parking brake lever stroke This procedure is described in the vehicle ser-
N00940400180
vice manual and can be carried out by an
Check the parking brake lever travel occa- authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
sionally. To check this, pull the lever up

Wiper blades
and Environment Canada. The emission-con-
Wiper blades trol system is made of:
NOTE
N00940700170  To meet government regulations and pro-
 a positive crankcase ventilation system mote cleaner air, your vehicle is equipped
Check the wiper blades occasionally. Clean
 an evaporative emission-control system with an onboard diagnostic system (OBD).
them regularly to remove deposits of salt and The engine electronic control module that
road film. Use a sponge or cloth and a mild  an exhaust emission-control system
controls OBD functions stores various data
detergent or non-abrasive cleaner to clean the (especially about the exhaust emissions).
blades and glass areas. The maintenance services listed in the This data will be erased if the battery cable is
Replace the blades if they continue to streak “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE disconnected, which could make a rapid
or smear. MANUAL” must be performed at the times diagnosis difficult. Do not disconnect the
or mileages listed to keep the emission-con- battery cable when the engine malfunction
trol system working properly. These, and all indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or
NOTE the other “general” maintenance services “Check engine light”) is on.
 Do not run the wipers on dry glass for a long listed in this manual, need to be performed to
time. This wears out the rubber and can
keep your vehicle running properly and reli-
scratch the glass.
ably. Spark plugs 9
N00940900257
You may need more frequent maintenance if
During cold weather you drive your vehicle in harsh conditions Spark plugs must fire properly for good
such as dusty areas or do a lot of start-and- engine performance and emission-control.
stop driving. Do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping.
If the blades are frozen to the windshield or
Change them at the mileage listed in the
rear window, do not operate the wipers until
To be sure the emission-control system works “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
the ice has melted and the blades are freed,
properly, have your vehicle inspected and MANUAL”.
otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
maintained by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your NOTE
Emission-control system choice following the schedule in the “WAR-  Use the spark plugs listed under “Engine
maintenance RANTY AND MAINTENANCE MAN- specifications” on page 11-5 or plugs that are
N00940800201
UAL”. exactly the same. Other plugs could cause
You should also have an inspection and ser- engine damage, performance problems or
Your vehicle is equipped with an emission- vice any time you suspect a malfunction. radio noise.
control system that meets all the requirements
of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

General maintenance
high heat sources such as the exhaust mani- there are other parts which do not usually
Fuel hoses fold. need regular maintenance.
N00941000037
But, if any of these parts stops working prop-
Check the hose surfaces for any heat and erly, your vehicle performance could suffer.
mechanical damage, hard and brittle rubber,
WARNING
 If you see a fuel leak or if you smell fuel,
Have these items checked if you notice a
cracking, tears, cuts and abrasions. Pay spe- problem with them.
do not run the engine. Any spark (includ-
cial attention to the hoses closest to high heat ing from the ignition), flame or smoking
sources such as the exhaust manifold. Check material could cause an explosion or fire. See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
all the hose connections, such as clamps and Call an authorized Mitsubishi Motors for assistance, if you have any questions.
couplings, to make sure they are secure and dealer or a repair facility of your choice
that there are no leaks. If you see any wear or for assistance.
Disc brake pads
damage, replace the hoses immediately.
N00941600075
Good brakes are essential to safe driving.

Intake valve clearance Evaporative emission control Check the brake pads for wear. For good
9 N00950100050 system (except evaporative braking performance, replace the brake pads
Have the valve clearance checked at an emission canister) with the same type pads as the originals.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the N00941400116
mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND If the fuel-vapor vent line is clogged or dam- Brake hoses
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. aged, the fuel-vapor mixture will escape, pol- N00941700047
If the engine sounds abnormally loud, have luting the air.
adjustments made by an authorized Brake hoses and tubing should be checked
Have the system checked at an authorized for:
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the mileage spec-
ified in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-  Severe surface cracking, scuffing or worn
Fuel system (tank, pipe line and NANCE MANUAL”. spots. If the fabric casing of the hose is
connection, and fuel tank filler showing through any cracks or worn spots
General maintenance in the rubber hose cover, the hose should
cap) be replaced. The brakes can fail if the
N00941300186 N00941500159
hose wears through.
Check these regularly for damage or leaks in The next pages list the maintenance service  Improper installation may cause twisting,
the fuel lines and connections. Check the fuel recommended by Mitsubishi Motors Corpo- or wheel, tire or chassis interference.
tank filler cap for damage or looseness. Pay ration. In addition to the general maintenance
special attention to the fuel lines closest to that needs to be performed at the times listed,
For cold and snowy weather

 The underside or rear of the vehicle is Also, put a light coat of the same grease on
Ball joint, steering linkage seals damaged the safety catch wherever moving parts touch.
and drive shaft boots
N00941800077 Also check the exhaust system each time the
Check the following parts for damage and vehicle is raised for lubrication, oil changes, For cold and snowy weather
grease leaks: or required service. Any open seams or loose N00942600102
connections could let dangerous exhaust

 Ball joint boots of the front suspension fumes seep into the luggage compartment and Ventilation slots
and steering linkage passenger compartments.
 Bellows on both ends of the drive shaft The ventilation slots in front of the wind-
Check for any of the following shield should be brushed clear after a heavy
Exhaust system conditions: snowfall so that the operation of the heating
N00942200108 and ventilation systems will not be impaired.
 Check for holes or exhaust gas leaks
WARNING caused by corrosion or damage. Weatherstripping 9
 Carbon monoxide gas from your vehicle’s  Check the joints and connections for
exhaust is poisonous. Breathing these looseness or exhaust gas leaks.
fumes can cause unconsciousness or death.  Check the rubber hangers and brackets for To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping
damage. on the doors, engine hood, etc., they should
be treated with silicone grease.
The best way to keep carbon monoxide gas
from entering inside your vehicle is to have Hood lock release mechanism
the engine exhaust system properly serviced. Additional equipment (For
Have a competent mechanic inspect the com- and safety catch
regions where snow is encoun-
plete exhaust system and nearby body areas N00942500114
for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispo- The hood lock release mechanism and hood tered)
sitioned parts if you notice any of the follow- safety catch should be checked, cleaned, and
ing: oiled when needed for easy movement and to It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a short-
stop rust and wear. Use Multipurpose Grease handled spade in the vehicle during the win-
 A change in the sound of the exhaust sys- NLGI Grade 2 sparingly for all sliding parts ter so that you can clear away snow if you get
tem of the hood latch and release lever. Work the stranded. A small hand-brush for sweeping
 The smell of exhaust fumes inside the grease into the hood lock mechanism until all snow off the vehicle and a plastic scraper for
vehicle the movable surfaces are covered.

Fusible links
the windshield, side and rear window are also fuse blocks are located in the passenger com- 1. Open the fuse lid and pull to remove it.
useful. partment and in the engine compartment.
Fusible links Passenger compartment

N00942700259
The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if

a large current attempts to flow through cer-
tain electrical systems.
In case of a melted fusible link, see your
repair facility of your choice for inspection
and replacement. 2. For vehicles equipped with the bottom
For the fusible links, please refer to “Fuse cover, use the puller to loosen the 2 clips
load capacities” on page 9-29.
9 (A) and push down the bottom cover. The
puller is in the fuse block in the engine
A- Main fuse block
WARNING B- Sub fuse block
compartment. Refer to “Fuse replace-
 Fusible links must not be replaced by any ment” on page 9-32.
other device. Failing to fit the correct fus-
ible link may result in fire in the vehicle, The fuse blocks in the passenger compart-
property destruction and serious or fatal ment are located behind the fuse lid on the
injuries at any time. driver’s side as shown.
Fuses
N00942800898
Fuse block location
To prevent damage to the electrical system

from short-circuiting or overloading, each
individual circuit is equipped with a fuse. The
Fuses
WARNING Engine compartment Passenger compartment fuse loca-

 When changing fuses, do not damage the tion table
driver’s knee airbag harness or acciden- In the engine compartment, the fuse block is
tally strike the airbag area with hard located as shown in the illustration. Passenger compartment fuse location
objects. Improper work methods could
result in an accidental driver’s knee air-
bag deployment or could make the Main fuse block Sub fuse block
driver’s knee airbag inoperable. Either of
these situations could result in serious
injury or death.
NOTE
 When finished, be sure to return the puller to
the fuse block in the engine compartment.
9
3. To put back the fuse lid, line up the fuse
1. Push the lock lever.
lid hook (B) with the clamp (C) on the
2. Remove the fuse block cover.
instrument panel and push the lid back in.
Fuse load capacities

N00954800244
This fuse list shows the names of the electri-

cal systems and their fuse capacities.
There are spare fuses in the cover of the fuse Sym- Capac-
No. Electrical system
block in the engine compartment. Always bol ity
replace a blown fuse with one of the same
1 Heater 30 A*
capacity as the original.
Stop lights
2 15 A
(Brake lights)
3 Rear fog light 10 A

Fuses
Sym- Capac- Sym- Capac- Engine compartment fuse location
No. Electrical system No. Electrical system
bol ity bol ity table
4 Windshield wiper 30 A Power window con-
20 30 A*
trol Engine compartment fuse location
5 Optional 10 A
21 Defogger 30 A*
6 Door locks 20 A
Heated
7 Radio 15 A 22 outside rearview mir- 7.5 A
8 Control unit relay 7.5 A rors
Interior lights 23 115V Power outlet 15 A

9 15 A
(Dome lights) 25 (20) *
24 Power seats
Hazard warning A
10 15 A
flasher 25 Heated seats 30 A
9 11 Rear window wiper 15 A
*- Fusible link Behind the fuse block cover
12 Gauges 7.5 A
Cigarette  Some fuses may not be installed on your
13 lighter/Accessory 15 A vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
*
socket or specifications.
 The table above shows the main equip-
14 Ignition switch 10 A ment corresponding to each fuse.
15 Sunroof 20 A
*- Front of the vehicle
Outside rearview
16 10 A
mirrors
All-wheel drive sys- Sym- Capac-
17 10 A No. Electrical system
tem bol ity
18 Back-up lights 7.5 A 1 Front fog lights 15 A
19 Accessory socket 15 A 2 Engine 7.5 A

Fuses
Sym- Capac- Sym- Capac- Sym- Capac-
No. Electrical system No. Electrical system No. Electrical system
bol ity bol ity bol ity
3 Automatic transaxle 20 A Headlight Anti-lock braking
27 30 A*5
17 (low/high beam) 20 A*3 system
4 Horn 10 A (right) Air conditioning 5
28
5 Alternator 7.5 A Headlight condenser fan motor 30 A*
18
(low beam) (left) 10 A*4
6 Headlight washer 20 A 29 Radiator fan motor 40 A*5
Headlight
7 Air conditioning 10 A 19
(low beam) (right) 10 A*4 30 IOD IOD 30 A
ETV/Oil cooler fan 31 Audio amplifier 30 A

*1 ENG/POWER
8 * 1 (Twin Clutch SST) 15 A 20 10 A 32 Diesel 30 A
*2 I/C SPRAY
*2 ETV 33 — Spare fuse 10 A
21 Ignition coil 10 A
9 Security horn 20 A 34 — Spare fuse 15 A 9
22* ENG/POWER 20 A
10 Wiper deicer 15 A 35 — Spare fuse 20 A
1
Fuel line heater 25 A
11 — — —
22* *1-Except for vehicles equipped with turbo-
12 Power gate 30 A 2 ENG/POWER 20 A charger
Daytime running * -Vehicles equipped with turbocharger
2
13 10 A 15 A*1 *3-For vehicles equipped with high inten-
lights 23 Fuel pump sity discharge headlights
Headlight 20 A*2
14 10 A * -For vehicles without high intensity dis-
4
(high beam) (left) 24 Starter 30 A*5 charge headlights
15
Headlight
10 A *5-Fusible link
(high beam) (right) *1 Valve lift control 40 A*5
25
Headlight —*2 — —  Some fuses may not be installed on your
16 (low/high beam) 20 A*3 Anti-lock braking vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
(left) 26
system 40 A*5 or specifications.
 The table above shows the main equip-
ment corresponding to each fuse.

Fuses
There are no 7.5 A, 25 A or 30 A spare fuses. 2. There is a fuse puller (A) in the engine 4. Use the fuse location diagrams and the
If a fuse of one of these capacities blows, compartment fuse block. matching tables, to check the fuse that is
replace it temporarily by borrowing one of related to the problem. If the fuse is not
the fuses indicated below. blown, something else must be causing
7.5 A: 10 A spare fuse the problem. Contact an authorized Mit-
25 A: 20 A spare fuse subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
30 A: 30 A audio amplifier fuse of your choice to have the problem
Replace the borrowed fuse with a fuse that checked.
has the correct capacity as soon as possible.
Identification of fuse
Capacity Color 3. Clamp it on the fuse you wish to remove,

9 7.5 A Brown and pull the fuse straight out from the fuse
10 A Red block.
15 A Blue
20 A Yellow B- Fuse is OK
25 A Natural (White) C- Blown fuse
Green (fuse type)/Pink (fusible
30 A
link type) 5. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity
40 A Green securely into the appropriate slot.
CAUTION
Fuse replacement  Never use a fuse with a capacity greater than
N00954900085
the one listed or any substitute, such as wire,
1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off foil etc. This would cause the circuit wiring
the electrical item connected to the fuse to heat up and could cause a fire.
and turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position.

SC00001000-7.fm 33 ページ２０１３年２月１５日　金曜日　午後４時２０分
Replacement of light bulbs

[For vehicles without high intensity discharge
CAUTION NOTE headlights]
 If the replacement fuse blows again after a  When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
short time, have the electrical system washed, the inside of the lens sometimes
ANSI Trade
checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors becomes temporarily foggy. This is the same
dealer or a repair facility of your choice to phenomenon as when window glass mists up Description Wattage No. or Bulb
find and correct the cause. on a humid day, and does not indicate a func- type
tional problem. Front turn
When the light is switched on, the heat will 1- 21 W WY21W
signal light
Replacement of light bulbs remove the fog. However, if water gathers
N00942900219 inside the light, please have it checked by an Headlight, 9005
2- 60 W
Before replacing a bulb, be sure the light is authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a high beam HB3
repair facility of your choice. Headlight,
off. Do not touch the glass part of the new
bulb with your bare fingers; the oil from your low beam 9006
3- 51 W
skin will stay on the glass and dim or destroy Bulb capacity (Halogen HB4
bulb)
the bulb when it gets hot. N00943000158
9
The bulb should only be replaced with a new 4- Front fog
55 W H11
CAUTION bulb with the same rating and type. The type light
 Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after and rating are listed on the base of the bulb. Front side-
being turned off. 5- marker and 5W WY5W
When replacing a bulb, wait for it to cool
sufficiently before touching it. You could
Outside parking light
otherwise be burned.
N00950300818
6- Side turn sig-
5W —
Front nal light
NOTE
 If you are unsure of how to carry out the
work as required, it is recommended that
these procedures be carried out by an autho-
 Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body
when removing a light and lens.

SC00001000-7.fm 34 ページ２０１３年２月１５日　金曜日　午後４時２０分

[For vehicles equipped with high intensity
WARNING ANSI
discharge headlights]
 Check with an authorized Mitsubishi
Trade No.
Description Wattage
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your or Bulb
Wattage ANSI type
choice when it is necessary to repair a dis-
or Can- Trade No.
Description charge headlight or to replace the bulb. High-
dle or Bulb
The power circuit, bulb and electrodes 7- mounted stop — —
power type generate high voltages that may cause a
light
Front turn severe electrical shock.
1- 21 W WY21W License plate
signal light 8- 5W W5W
light
Daytime run- 27 W
2-
ning light 32 cp
1156 NOTE 9- Back-up light 18 W W16W
 It is not possible to repair or replace only the
Headlight, Tail and stop
bulb for the side turn signal light. 10- 21/5 W W21/5W
low/high Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
light
3- 35 W —
beam (Dis- dealer or a repair facility of your choice Rear turn sig-
9 charge bulb) when the light needs to be repaired or 11-
nal light
21 W WY21W
replaced.
4- Front fog Rear side-
55 W H11 12- 5W W5W
light marker light
Front side- Rear
5- marker and 5W WY5W
parking light
NOTE
 The high-mounted stop light uses LEDs
6- Side turn sig- rather than bulbs. For repair and replace-
5W —
nal light ment, contact an authorized Mitsubishi
choice.


Inside Headlights (low beam, except when replacing the bulb on the passen-
N00950400545
for vehicles equipped with high ger’s side, lift up the engine coolant reser-
intensity discharge headlights) voir (B).
N00901800091

when replacing the bulb on the driver’s
side, remove the bolt (A) holding down
the relay box and move the relay box
toward the rear of the vehicle.
Description Wattage
*- Front of the vehicle 9
1- Cargo room light 8W
2- Dome light (rear) (if so 3. Turn the bulb (C) counterclockwise, and
8W
equipped) then remove the headlight bulb with
3- Dome light (front)/Reading holder.
8W
light


4. While holding down the tab (D), pull out 2. Turn the cap (B) counterclockwise to
the bulb (E). remove it.
5. To install the bulb, perform the removal

Headlights (high beam, except *- Front of the vehicle
for vehicles equipped with high
9 steps in reverse.
3. Turn the bulb (C) counterclockwise to
intensity discharge headlights)
remove it.
1. When replacing the bulb on the front pas-

 Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gas
senger’s side, remove the bolt (A) holding
inside a halogen light bulb is highly pressur-
ized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a down the washer tank spout and move the
halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter. spout toward the rear of the vehicle.
 Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare
hand, dirty glove, etc.
The oil from your hand could cause the bulb
to break the next time the headlights are
used.
If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with
alcohol and let it dry completely before
installing the bulb. *- Front of the vehicle


4. While holding down the tab (D), pull out 2. Turn the cap (B) counterclockwise to
the bulb (E). remove it.

Daytime running lights (for *- Front of the vehicle
vehicles equipped with high
steps in reverse.
3. Turn the socket (C) counterclockwise to 9
intensity discharge headlights)
remove it.
1. When replacing the bulb on the front pas-

 Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gas
senger’s side, remove the bolt (A) holding
inside a halogen light bulb is highly pressur-
ized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a down the washer tank spout and move the
halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter. spout toward the rear of the vehicle.
 Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare
hand, dirty glove, etc.
to break the next time the headlights are
used.
installing the bulb. *- Front of the vehicle


4. Turn the bulb counterclockwise while 2. For vehicles equipped with turbocharger,
pressing it and pull it out of the socket.
Adjustment of headlight aim when replacing the bulb on the passen-
N00943200121
ger’s side, lift up the engine coolant reser-
The alignment of the headlights should be voir (B).
checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
Front side-marker and parking

lights (except for vehicles
equipped with high intensity
discharge headlights)
N00917300495
5. To install a bulb, perform the removal 1. For vehicles equipped with turbocharger,
9 steps in reverse. when replacing the bulb on the driver’s
side, remove the bolt (A) holding down
the relay box and move the relay box
Headlights (low/high beam, for toward the rear of the vehicle. 3. Turn the socket (C) counterclockwise to
vehicles equipped with high remove it.
intensity discharge lights)
N00902000029
Do not attempt to disassemble or repair head-

lights, and do not attempt to replace their
bulbs.
WARNING
 A high voltage is present in the power cir-
cuit and in the bulbs and bulb terminals.
To avoid the risk of an electric shock, con- *- Front of the vehicle
tact an authorized Mitsubishi dealer *- Front of the vehicle
whenever repair or replacement is neces-
sary.


4. Pull the bulb out of the socket. 2. Remove the clips (A), and screws (B) or 3. Turn the socket (D) counterclockwise to
bolts (B) to turn up the cover (C). remove it.
Type 1

steps in reverse. 4. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
9
Front side-marker and parking
lights (for vehicles equipped Type 2
with high intensity discharge
headlights)
N00917300541
1. To create enough work space, turn the

steering wheel all the way in the direction
opposite to the side you wish to replace.

steps in reverse.


3. Remove the bulb by pulling it out.
Front turn signal lights Vehicles with turbocharger
N00943400325
1. Remove the clips (A) and clips (B), then

remove the duct (C) and the upper cover
(D).

steps in reverse.
9 2. Remove the entire socket and bulb assem-
bly (E) by turning it counterclockwise. Front fog lights (Type 1) (if so
equipped)
N00943601786
1. Remove the screw (A) and pull the cover

out.


2. Remove the screws (B) and pull the entire 3. Push the connector (D) to disconnect and
light unit out. remove the fog light.
NOTE
 When mounting the cover, align the hooks
(F) on the cover with the hole in the body.
4. Remove the bulb assembly (E) by turning

NOTE CAUTION
 When unfastening the screws, be careful not
it counterclockwise.
 Handle halogen light bulbs with care. The 9
to mistakenly move the beam position gas inside a halogen light bulb is highly pres-
adjustment screw (C). surized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching
a halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.
 Never hold the halogen lights bulb with a
bare hand, dirty glove, etc.
to break the next time the fog lights are used.
installing the bulb.

steps in reverse.


2. Pull the cover out in the direction of the
arrow shown in the illustration.
NOTE
4. Push the connector (D) to disconnect and

remove the fog light.
Front fog lights (Type 2) (if so 3. Remove the screws (B) and pull the entire
equipped)
9 N00943601799
light unit out.
Passenger’s side Driver’s side

1. Remove the screw (A).
NOTE
 When unfastening the screws, be careful not
to mistakenly move the beam position
adjustment screw (C).


5. Remove the bulb assembly (E) by turning
it counterclockwise.
CAUTION Rear combination lights
 Handle halogen light bulbs with care. The N00943701527
gas inside a halogen light bulb is highly pres-

surized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching Tail and stop lights, rear turn sig-
a halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.
 Never hold the halogen lights bulb with a
nal lights and rear side-marker
bare hand, dirty glove, etc. lights
to break the next time the fog lights are used. 1. Insert a screwdriver at the edge of the
If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with cover and pry gently to remove the cover.
installing the bulb.

steps in reverse. 9
NOTE
 When mounting the cover, align the hook (F)
on the cover with the hole in the body.
NOTE
 Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screw-
driver to keep from scratching the cover.


2. Remove the socket and bulb assemblies 4. To install the bulb, perform the removal
Back-up lights
by turning them counterclockwise. steps in reverse.
N00901200066
1. Insert a screwdriver into the notch of the

NOTE cover and pry gently to remove the cover.
 When installing the cover, make sure the
arrow on the cover is pointing in the direc-
tion of the front of the vehicle.
A- Rear side-marker light

B- Rear turn signal light
9 C- Tail and stop light
*- Front of the vehicle NOTE
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it out.  Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screw-
Tail and stop light and Rear side-marker driver to keep from scratching the cover.
Rear turn signal light light
2. Remove the socket and bulb assembly by
turning it counterclockwise.


3. Remove the bulb by pulling it out. 3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
License plate lights
N00944000357
1. When removing the light unit (A), push it

toward the left side of the vehicle body.
4. To install the bulb, perform the removal 4. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse. steps in reverse.
9
NOTE 2. Use a screwdriver to gently pry up the tab
NOTE
 When installing the lid, align the tab on the  When installing the light, insert tab (C) first
(B) and remove the lens.
lid with the hole on the vehicle side. then align and insert tab (D).
NOTE
 Wrap a piece of cloth around the tip of the
screwdriver to keep from scratching the lens.


2. While holding down the tab (A), pull out 3. To install the bulb, perform the removal
Dome light (front)/Reading the bulb. steps in reverse.
lights
N00944500235 NOTE
1. Insert a screwdriver into the notch of the  Before replacing the bulb, put the dome light
light assembly. Gently pry to remove the (front)/reading lights switch into the “OFF”
lens. position.
 When mounting the lens, align the tab (B)
with the hole on the vehicle body.
NOTE
driver to keep from scratching the lens.


2. While holding down the tab (A), pull out
Dome light (rear) (if so equipped)
the bulb.
Cargo room light
N00944100329 N00950000075
1. Insert a screwdriver into the notch of the 1. Insert a screwdriver into the notch of the
light assembly and pry gently to remove light assembly and pry gently to remove
the lens. the lens.

steps in reverse. 9
NOTE
NOTE  Before replacing the bulb, put the dome light NOTE
(rear) switch into the “OFF” position.  Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screw-
driver to keep from scratching the lens.  When mounting the lens, align the tabs (B) driver to keep from scratching the lens.
with the holes on the vehicle body.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it out.

Vehicle care precautions

steps in reverse.
CAUTION NOTE
• Carbon Tetrachloride  Always read the instructions on the cleaner
• Benzine label.
NOTE
• Kerosene
 Before replacing the bulb, put the cargo
• Naphtha
room light switch into the “OFF” position.
• Acetone Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and
• Turpentine flocked parts
• Paint Thinner
Vehicle care precautions • Lacquer Thinner
N00945300168
N00945100179
1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth
• Nail Polish Remover soaked in a 3 % solution of gentle soap
In order to maintain the value of your vehicle, and water.
These can all be dangerous, and they all can
perform regular maintenance using the proper 2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring out
damage your vehicle.
materials and procedures. Be sure to use only well. Using this cloth, wipe off the deter-
those materials and procedures that meet your gent thoroughly.
9 local environmental pollution control regula- Cleaning the inside of your
tions. Choose the materials you will use care-
fully, to be sure that they do not contain
vehicle NOTE
N00945200109
corrosives. If you are not sure, contact an  Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and pro-
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for help After washing the inside of your vehicle with tectants containing silicones or wax.
in choosing these materials. any cleaner, wipe it dry in a shady, well venti- Such products, when applied to the instru-
lated area. ment panels or other parts, may cause reflec-
tions on the windshield and obscure vision.
CAUTION Also, if such products get on the switches of
 Cleaning products can be dangerous. Some CAUTION the electrical accessories, it may lead to fail-
are poisonous. Others are highly flammable.  Do not use organic substances (solvents, ure of these accessories.
Some are dangerous if you breathe their benzine, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or
fumes in a closed space. When you use any- alkaline or acidic solutions.
thing in a container to clean your vehicle, be These chemicals can cause discoloring,
sure to follow the instructions. Always open staining or cracking of the surface.
your vehicle doors or windows when you’re If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make
cleaning the inside. Never use the following sure their ingredients do not include the sub-
chemicals to clean your vehicle: stances mentioned above.
• Gasoline

Cleaning the outside of your vehicle

2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water,
Upholstery wring it out well, and wipe off all the Cleaning the outside of your
N00945500131
1. To maintain the value of your new vehi-

soap. vehicle
3. To preserve and protect, use a leather pro- N00945700061
cle, maintain the upholstery carefully and
tecting agent on the genuine leather sur- To protect your vehicle’s finish, wash it often
keep the interior clean.
face. and thoroughly. If desired, you may wax your
Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean
the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic vehicle using a nonabrasive automobile wax.
leather should be cleaned with an appro- NOTE
priate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be  If genuine leather is wet with water, wipe it Foreign material
cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mildew N00945800046
3 % solution of gentle soap in lukewarm may grow.
 The genuine leather surface can be damaged Industrial pollution, road tar, bird droppings,
water.
if brushed with a nylon or synthetic fiber tree sap, insect remains, sea water and other
2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum
brush. foreign matters can damage the finish on your
cleaner and remove any stains with carpet
vehicle.
cleaner. Oil and grease can be removed by  Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene,
alcohol, gasoline, acid or alkaline solvents Generally, the longer any foreign material
9
lightly dabbing with a clean white cloth
can discolor the genuine leather surface and stays on the finish, the worse the damage.
and spot remover. should not be used. Wash your vehicle as soon as possible when-
 Genuine leather can mildew if not kept ever the finish gets soiled.
NOTE clean. Clean up any oil stains immediately.
 If fuzzing is difficult to remove from the seat  The genuine leather surface may harden and
upholstery, draw a suitable defuzzing brush shrink if it is exposed to the direct sunlight Washing
over the surface in one direction. for long hours. When your vehicle is parked, N00945900539
place it in the shade as much as possible. Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust
 When the temperature of the vehicle interior picked up from air, rain, snow or road sur-
rises in summer, vinyl products left on the faces can damage the paint and body of your
Genuine leather (if so equipped) genuine leather seat may deteriorate and
vehicle if left on.
N00945600233 stick to the seat.
Frequent washing and waxing is the best way
1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a
to protect your vehicle from this damage.
soft cloth soaked in a 5 % solution of gen-
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
tle soap and water.
Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it with
water to remove dust. Next, using plenty of


clean water and a car washing mitt or sponge,
CAUTION During cold weather
wash the vehicle from top to bottom.
 Some hot water washing equipment uses
Use a mild car washing soap if necessary.
high pressure and heat to clean your vehicle. Salt and other chemicals spread on winter
Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a cham-
This heated water may damage your vehi- roads in some geographical areas can have a
ois or soft cloth. After washing the vehicle, cle’s resin parts. It can flood the interior of
carefully clean the joints and flanges of the detrimental effect on the vehicle underbody.
the vehicle. Therefore, be sure of the follow-
doors, hood, etc., where dirt is likely to You should flush the underbody with a high
ing:
remain. pressure hose every time you wash the out-
• Keep the washing nozzle at least 20 inches
(50 cm) away from the vehicle body.
side of your vehicle.
Take special care to remove mud or other
CAUTION • When washing around the door glass, hold
debris which could trap and hold salt and
the nozzle at a distance of more than 20
 When washing the underside of your vehicle moisture.
inches (50 cm) and at right angles to the
or the wheels, wear a pair of gloves to pro-
glass surface. After washing your vehicle, wipe off all
tect your hands.
 When using high-pressure water to wash a waterdrops from the rubber parts around the
 If your vehicle has rain sensor wipers, place
vehicle equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key sys- doors to prevent the doors from freezing.
9 the wiper switch lever in the “OFF” position
to deactivate the rain sensor before washing
tem, keep the water from spraying on the
open button on the rear hatch. This could
the vehicle. Otherwise, the wipers will oper-
cause the rear hatch to open and flood the
NOTE
ate in the presence of water spray on the  When the door is frozen, opening it by force
inside of the rear hatch.
windshield and may get damaged as a result. may tear off or crack the rubber gasket
 Make sure to do the following when using an
 Never spray or splash water on the electrical installed around the door. Pour warm water
automatic car wash, with help from either
parts in the engine compartment. This may to melt the ice. Be sure to thoroughly wipe
this manual or the car wash operator, to
damage them. Be careful also when washing off the water after opening the door. To pre-
avoid damaging your vehicle:
the underbody. Do not spray water into the vent freezing of the weatherstripping on the
engine compartment. • Fold the outside rear-view mirrors.
doors, hood, etc., treat with silicone lubri-
 Avoid automatic car washers that use rotat- • Put down (except for vehicles equipped
cant.
ing brushes. These brushes may scratch the with SIRIUS satellite radio antenna only)
paint surface and make it dull. or remove the antenna.
Scratches are more noticeable on darker col- • If your vehicle is equipped with rear
ored vehicles. spoiler, check with the car wash operator Waxing
before using the car wash. N00946000218
• If your vehicle has rain sensor wipers, place Wax your vehicle once or twice a year, or
the wiper switch lever in the “OFF” posi- when water does not bead up on the paint.
tion to deactivate the rain sensor.


Use a soft cloth to put a small amount of wax In this case, wipe it off using lukewarm water
on the painted surfaces. After the wax has
Polishing and a soft cloth or chamois.
N00946100059
dried, polish with a dry soft cloth.
Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight. If painted surfaces have been severely dam-
aged and lost their original luster and color
CAUTION
You should wax when the painted surfaces  Do not use a scrubbing brush or other rough
are cool. tone, polish the surface lightly with a fine
scrubber as these may damage the plastic
polishing compound. Avoid limiting your surface.
polishing to the damaged surface only; polish
CAUTION a somewhat wider area, moving the polishing
 Do not use wax containing compounds (pol-
 Waxes containing high abrasive compounds ishing powder) which may damage the plas-
cloth in one direction. After polishing, flush tic surface.
should not be used. These waxes remove rust
and stain effectively from the paintwork, but
the compound from the surface and apply a  Do not let the plastic parts get soiled with
are harmful to the finish on the paint and the coat of wax to regain a beautiful luster. gasoline, oil, brake fluids, engine oils,
plate, because they also remove clearcoat. greases, paint thinner, and sulfuric acid (bat-
tery electrolyte). These fluids, etc., may
They are also harmful to other glossy sur- Damaged paint crack, stain or discolor the plastic parts.
faces such as the grille, trim, moldings, etc.
 Do not use gasoline, kerosene, benzine or
N00946200063
If any of these get on the plastic parts, wipe 9
paint thinners to remove road tar or other dirt Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat them up with a soft cloth or chamois and a
from the vehicle surface. should be touched up as soon as possible with mild solution of soap and water. Then rinse
touch-up paint to prevent corrosion. them immediately with water.
 Do not put wax on the areas having black
matte coating because it can cause uneven Check body areas facing the road or the tires
discoloration, patches, blurs, etc. If these get carefully for damage to the paint caused by
wax on them, wipe the wax off right away flying stones, etc. The paint code number for Chrome parts
with a soft cloth and warm water. your vehicle can be found on the vehicle N00946400065
 On vehicles equipped with sunroof, be care- information code plate in the engine compart- To prevent spots and corrosion of chrome
ful not to apply any wax on the weatherstrip ment.
(black rubber) when waxing the area around
parts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and
the sunroof opening. apply a nonabrasive automotive wax. If the
If stained with wax, the weatherstrip cannot Cleaning plastic parts chrome is severely damaged or pitted, use a
maintain a weatherproof seal with the sun- N00946300178
commercially available chrome polish.
roof.
Use a sponge or chamois to clean these parts.
If a vehicle wax sticks to a gray or black
rough surface of the bumper, molding or
lights, the surface may appear white in color.


insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe it
Aluminum wheels (if so dry with a clean, dry, soft cloth.
Engine compartment
equipped) N00947000042
N00946500196 Never spray or splash water on the electrical

1. Remove dirt using a wet sponge. Wiper blades components in the engine compartment, as
N00946700097
2. Use a mild detergent on any dirt that can- this may cause damage.
not be removed easily with water. Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove Do not allow any nearby parts (such as plastic
Rinse off the detergent after washing the grease, dead insects, etc., from the wiper parts) come into contact with sulphuric acid
wheel. blades. (battery electrolyte), which may crack, stain,
3. Dry the wheel thoroughly using a chamois Replace the wiper blades when they no longer or discolour them.
leather or a soft cloth. clean the windshield and rear window prop- If this occurs, wipe the parts with a soft cloth
erly. saturated with a mild detergent and water
solution.
CAUTION Then immediately rinse the affected parts
 Do not use a brush or other hard implement Cleaning the sunroof (if so
with plenty of water.
9 on the wheels.
Doing so could scratch the wheels.
equipped)
N00946800072
 Do not use any cleaner that contains an abra-
sive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing Clean the inside of the sunroof with a soft
so could cause the coating on the wheels to cloth. Hard deposits should be wiped away
peel or become discolored or stained. with a cloth dipped in warm, neutral deter-
 Do not directly apply hot water using a steam gent solution. Wipe away the solution with a
cleaner or by any other means.
sponge dipped in fresh water.
 Contact with seawater or road salt used for
de-icing can cause corrosion. Rinse off such
substances as soon as possible. NOTE
 The surface treatment on the inside of the
glass may be removed if a hard cloth or
organic solvent is used.
Window glass
N00946600067
The window glass can usually be cleaned

using only a sponge and water. Glass cleaner
can be used to remove wax, oil, grease, dead

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.).....................10-2

Reporting Safety Defects................................................................10-2
Important facts to know in case of an accident...............................10-4
10
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

their use, however, and may depart signifi- material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
Consumer information (For cantly from the norm due to variations in tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
vehicles sold in U.S.A.) driving habits, service practices and differ- to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-
N01047100100 ences in road characteristics and climate. sponds to a level of performance which all
This information is provided in compliance passenger car tires must meet under the Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
with the requirements of the National High- Traction AA, A, B, C Grades B and A represent higher levels of
way Traffic Safety Administration, Depart-
ment of Transportation. It provides the performance on the laboratory test wheel than
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, the minimum required by law.
purchasers and/or prospective purchasers
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent
with information on reporting safety defects.
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on WARNING
 The temperature grade for this tire is
Uniform tire quality grading specified government test surfaces of asphalt
established for a tire that is properly
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
DOT quality grades - All passenger vehicle traction performance. speed, underinflation, or excessive load-
tires must conform to Federal Safety Require- ing, either separately or in combination,
10 ments in addition to these grades. The spe- WARNING can cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
cific grade rating in each grade category is  The traction grade assigned to this tire is
shown on the side wall of the tires on your based on straight-ahead braking traction
vehicle. tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction Reporting Safety Defects
characteristics.
Treadwear N01047201485
If you believe that your vehicle has a

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating Temperature A, B, C defect which could cause a crash or
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested could cause injury or death, you
under controlled conditions on a specified should immediately inform the
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B
government test course. For example, a tire
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the National Highway Traffic Safety
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
(11/2) times as well on the government course heat when tested under controlled conditions
tion to notifying Mitsubishi Motors
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of Sustained high temperature can cause the Corporation.
10-2 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects

If NHTSA receives similar com- For vehicles sold in U.S.A. To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
plaints, it may open an investigation, Canada, Inc. call 1-888-576-4878 or
and if it finds that a safety defect To contact Mitsubishi Motors North write to:
exists in a group of vehicles, it may America, Inc. call 1-888-648-7820 or
order a recall and remedy campaign. Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Can-
write to: ada, Inc.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems Mitsubishi Motors North Amer- Customer Relations Department
between you, your dealer, or Mit- ica, Inc. P.O. Box 41009
subishi Motors Corporation. Customer Relations Department 4141 Dixie Road
P.O. Box 6400 Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Cypress, CA 90630-0064
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico
9153); go to
For vehicles sold in Canada
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of 10
If you live in Canada, and you Caribbean, Inc.
NHTSA Headquarters
believe that your vehicle has a safety call 1-787-251-8715 or write to:
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE
West Building defect, you should immediately Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
Washington, DC 20590 notify Transport Canada, in addition Caribbean, Inc.
to notifying Mitsubishi Motor Sales Customer Service Department
of Canada, Inc. You may write to: P.O. Box 192216
You can also obtain other informa-
Transport Canada SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216
tion about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov. 330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5 For vehicles sold in Guam
To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc.

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-3
Important facts to know in case of an accident

call (671)649-3673 or write to: Pacific Marketing, Inc. Key information to discuss with
P.O. Box 698 your insurance company
Triple J Enterprises, Inc. PAGO PAGO,
P.O. Box 6066 AMERICAN SAMOA AS,  Understand your repair estimate before
TAMUNING 96799 approving repairs.
GUAM 96931  Choosing the repair shop and the brands
of parts that they use on your vehicle is
your decision.
Important facts to know in  Ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts.
For vehicles sold in Saipan Many times, to save money, your insur-
case of an accident
ance company will recommend imitation
N01047300229
To contact Triple J Motors parts that do not meet the original specifi-
We hope you will never be involved in an cations of fit, finish, corrosion resistance
call (670)234-7133 or write to: accident, but there is always that potential or workmanship.
danger. So, please be sure to buckle up and
Triple J Motors drive safely.
10 P.O. Box 500487 Mitsubishi Motors built-in pro-
SAIPAN, MP96950-0487 In the event of an accident tection
 Remain calm. The strength and integrity built into your Mit-
For vehicles sold in American  Check for injuries. Report all injuries to subishi vehicle is the result of a specific
the police, and, if necessary, call for an design referred to as “Energy Management”.
Samoa ambulance. Individual body parts are designed to act as
 Record all the details of the accident. This one unit in the event of an accident. Shock
To contact Pacific Marketing Inc. will provide you with accurate records of waves are absorbed by protective panels or
call 684(699)9140 or write to: the accident for discussions with your are channeled around the passenger compart-
insurance company and other persons ment. This important feature is possible
who may be acting on your behalf. because high tensile steel is used in Mitsubi-
shi Motors panels and structural parts, some-
thing that cannot be guaranteed by the
manufacturers of imitation parts. All Genuine
Mitsubishi Motors body panels and support
10-4 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

Important facts to know in case of an accident

brackets are designed and constructed as you expect. Genuine Mitsubishi Motors
important protection features in the event of replacements parts are your guarantee that
an accident. By replacing body parts with your vehicle will have all the technological
imitations, your vehicle may no longer meet advantages and maintain the style and protec-
original equipment specifications. tion of a brand new Mitsubishi Motors.
Remember to ask for genuine Mitsubishi
Motors parts.
Consumer rights (For vehicles
sold in U.S.A.)
As a consumer requesting repair on your

vehicle, you have consumer rights. Across the
country, State Insurance Commissioners have
begun considering rules on the use of non-
OEM parts. This could mean that repair shops
will have to disclose to the consumer, when
they intend to use non-OEM parts. Since reg- 10
ulations are not consistent on this point,
remember you have a choice. So, if you want
genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts, you may
have to specifically request them. Make cer-
tain your insurance company understands
imitations are not to be used in the repair of
your vehicle. You deserve the best genuine
Mitsubishi Motors parts.
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors

parts
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts are built

with the high quality and durability standards
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-5

Specifications
Vehicle labeling ..............................................................................11-2

Vehicle dimensions .........................................................................11-4
Vehicle weights...............................................................................11-4
Engine specifications ......................................................................11-5
Battery.............................................................................................11-5
Tires and wheels .............................................................................11-5
Refill capacities ..............................................................................11-6
11
Vehicle labeling
Vehicle labeling 1 - Vehicle emission control 4 - Vehicle information code

N01147400700 information label plate
Keep a record of the chassis number and
vehicle identification number. Such informa- The vehicle emission control information The vehicle information code plate is located
tion will assist the police if your vehicle is label is affixed on the inside panel of the on the front passenger door sill.
stolen. engine hood.
Chassis number
2 - Vehicle identification num-
ber plate The chassis number is stamped on the floor
under the front passenger seat. It is visible by
The vehicle identification number is stamped pulling back the carpet flap as shown in the
on the plate riveted to the left front corner of illustration.
the vehicle body. It is visible from outside of
the vehicle through the windshield.
11 3 - Air conditioning label

The air conditioning label is affixed on the
inside panel of the engine compartment.
Engine serial number
The engine serial number is stamped on the

cylinder block as shown in the illustration.
11-2 Specifications
Vehicle labeling
Type 1
Certification label
N01148200226
The certification label (A) is located on the

driver’s door sill.
Type 2
Tire and loading information
placard
N01148100557
The tire and loading information placard is

located on the driver’s door sill. 11
Specifications 11-3
Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle dimensions
N01147500509
Overall length 180.4 in (4,585 mm)

Overall width 69.4 in (1,760 mm)
Vehicles with 16 inch tire 59.3 in (1,505 mm)
Overall height
Vehicles with 18 inch tire 59.7 in (1,515 mm)
Wheel base 103.7 in (2,635 mm)
Vehicle weights
N01147600887
2.0 liter
Item Vehicles without turbo- Vehicles with turbo- 2.4 liter
charger charger
11 Gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) 4,013 lb (1,820 kg) 4,509 lb (2,045 kg) 4,190 lb (1,900 kg)
Front 2,227 lb (1,010 kg) 2,381 lb (1,080 kg) 2,227 lb (1,010 kg)
Gross axle weight rating (GAWR)
Rear 2,117 lb (960 kg) 2,238 lb (1,015 kg) 2,117 lb (960 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight 827 lb (375 kg)
Maximum roof load 110 lb (50 kg)
Seating capacity 5 persons
NOTE
 Roof load is important because it affects the vehicle capacity weight. Refer to “Loading cargo on the roof” on page 6-10.
GVWR: maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle
GAWR: maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle
11-4 Specifications
Engine specifications
Seating capacity: the number of maximum occupants
Engine specifications
N01147700471
2.0 liter
Item Vehicles without Vehicles with 2.4 liter
turbocharger turbocharger
Engine model 4B11 4B12
Engine displacement 121.9 CID (1,998 cm³) 144.0 CID (2,360 cm³)
No. of cylinders and cylinder arrangement 4 in-line
Bore 3.39 in (86.0 mm) 3.46 in (88.0 mm)
Stroke 3.39 in (86.0 mm) 3.82 in (97.0 mm)
Compression ratio 10.0 9.0 10.5
Thermostat valve opening temperature 189 °F (87.0 °C) 180 °F (82.0 °C) 189 °F (87.0 °C)
Spark plugs NGK DIFR6C11 DILKR7B6 DIFR5C11 11
.040 to .043 in .020 to .023 in .040 to .043 in
Spark plug gap
(1.0 to 1.1 mm) (0.5 to 0.6 mm) (1.0 to 1.1 mm)
Firing order 1-3-4-2
Battery Tires and wheels 16 x 6 1/2JJ,

Size 18 x 7J
16 x 6 1/2J
N01147800182 N01147901757
Wheel
PCD 4.5 in (114.3 mm)
75D23L P205/60R16 P215/45R18
Tire Offset 1.81 in (46 mm)
91H 89V
Battery is a 12 volt type.
PCD: Pitch Circle Diameter (installation
holes)
Specifications 11-5
Refill capacities
NOTE NOTE
 Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors  These tires satisfy vehicle loading conditions
dealer for details on the combination used on described in this owner’s manual.
your vehicle.
Refill capacities
N01148001029
Item Capacity Lubricants

Vehicles without turbocharger 15.5 gal (59.0 L)
Fuel (approximate) Refer to “Fuel selection” on page 3-2.
Vehicles with turbocharger 14.5 gal (55.0 L)
Vehicles Oil pan 4.2 qt (4.0 L)
without
turbocharger Oil filter .32 qt (0.3 L)
2.0 liter Engine oils displaying the ILSAC certification mark
(“starburst” symbol) on the container.
11 Engine oil Vehicles with Oil pan 5.1 qt (4.8 L)
If these oils are not available, an API classification SN or
turbocharger Oil filter .32 qt (0.3 L)
higher can be used.
Oil pan 4.5 qt (4.3 L)
2.4 liter
Oil filter .32 qt (0.3 L)
Power steering
As required Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Power Steering Fluid
(vehicles equipped with the hydraulic power steering system)
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine NEW MULTI GEAR OIL
Manual transaxle 2.6 qt (2.5 L) API classification GL-3
SAE 75W-80
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) 7.5 qt (7.1 L) Mitsubishi Motors Genuine CVTF-J4
Twin Clutch SST
8.0 qt (7.6 L) Mitsubishi Motors Genuine SSTF-I
{includes .53 qt (0.5 L) in oil cooler}
11-6 Specifications
Refill capacities
Item Capacity Lubricants
Transfer oil .85 qt (0.8 L) Mitsubishi Motors Genuine LSD gear oil
AWC control fluid (includes hydraulic piping) .95 qt (0.9 L) DIAMOND ATF SP III
Rear differential oil .58 qt (0.55 L) Mitsubishi Motors Genuine LSD gear oil
Brake/Clutch (if so equipped) As required Conforming to Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4
Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch As required Multipurpose type grease NLGI Grade 2
Manual
7.4 qt (7.0 L)
transaxle
Engine coolant Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life Coolant
CVT 7.4 qt (7.0 L)
{includes .63 qt (0.65 L) in reserve tank} Premium or equivalent*
Twin
7.9 qt (7.5 L)
Clutch SST
Washer fluid 4.3 qt (4.0 L) —
Refer to “Air con-
ditioning label” on
Refrigerant (air conditioning) HFC-134a
page
11-2.
11
*: similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid
technology
LSD: Limited slip differential
Specifications 11-7
Alphabetical index
A B C
Accessory (installation) ......................... 3-6 Back-up lights California Perchlorate Materials
ACD (Active center differential system) 5-83 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-33 Requirements ..................................... 3-7
replacement ................................... 9-44 Capacities .......................................... 11-6
Active stability control (ASC) .............. 5-91
Ball joint, steering linkage seals and drive Card holder ............................ 5-183, 5-187
Air cleaner filter ................................... 9-9
shaft boots ....................................... 9-27
Air conditioning Cargo floor boxes ............................. 5-189
Battery .............................................. 9-14
Automatic air conditioning ..... 7-14, 7-20 Cargo loads ........................................ 6-10
Charging system warning light ....... 5-143
Important air conditioning operating tips.. Cargo room light
Disconnection and connection ......... 9-16
7-25 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-35
During cold weather ....................... 9-16
Manual air conditioning ............. 7-4, 7-9 Replacement................................... 9-47
Specification.................................. 11-5
Air purifier......................................... 7-26 Switch ......................................... 5-186
Bluetooth 2.0 interface....................... 5-158
All-wheel drive system........................ 5-82 Catalytic converter ................................ 9-2
Bottle holder ..................................... 5-190
Aluminum wheels ............................... 9-52 CD player........................................... 7-26
Brake
AM/FM radio ..................................... 7-26 Anti-lock braking system ................ 5-88 Certification label ............................... 11-3
Antenna Braking ........................................... 6-5 Charging system warning light ........... 5-143
Roof antenna .................................. 7-59 Fluid ..................................... 9-13, 11-6 Chassis number................................... 11-2
Anti-lock braking system..................... 5-88 Hose ............................................. 9-26
Child restraint..................................... 4-15
12
Warning light / display .................... 5-89 Parking brake................................. 5-49
Parking brake lever stroke ............... 9-24 Child safety locks for rear door ............ 5-39
Arm rest............................................... 4-5 Pedal............................................. 5-85 Cleaning
Assist grip ........................................ 5-192 Pedal free play ............................... 9-24 Inside of your vehicle...................... 9-48
Audio Power brakes ................................. 5-86 Outside of your vehicle ................... 9-49
AM/FM radio ................................. 7-26 Service brake ................................. 5-85
Clutch
CD player ...................................... 7-26 Brake assist........................................ 5-87 Fluid..................................... 9-13, 11-6
Troubleshooting ............................. 7-57 Break-in recommendations.................... 5-3 Pedal free play................................ 9-24
Automatic air conditioning ......... 7-14, 7-20 Bulb capacity ..................................... 9-33 Coat hooks ....................................... 5-192
Combination headlights and dimmer switch .
5-145
12-1
Alphabetical index
Consumer information ........................ 10-2 Replacement................................... 9-46 Floor console box ............................. 5-188
Continuously variable transmission (CVT).... Switch.......................................... 5-184 Floor mat ............................................. 6-2
5-61 Doors Fluid.................................................. 11-6
Fluid .................................... 9-11, 11-6 Lock .............................................. 5-36 AWC control fluid ................. 9-12, 11-6
Selector lever operation................... 5-62 Power door locks ............................ 5-38 Brake fluid............................ 9-13, 11-6
Sports mode ................................... 5-66 Driving during cold weather.................. 6-4 Clutch fluid........................... 9-13, 11-6
Coolant (engine) .......................... 9-8, 11-6 Driving, alcohol and drugs .................... 6-2 Continuously variable transmission (CVT)
Cruise control..................................... 5-94 fluid ................................... 9-11, 11-6
Dual height adjustable cargo floor board ......
Engine coolant ........................ 9-8, 11-6
Cup holder ....................................... 5-189 5-191
Power steering fluid ............... 9-14, 11-6
Twin Clutch SST fluid ........... 9-11, 11-6
D E Washer fluid .................................. 11-6
Daytime running lights Electric rear window defogger switch.. 5-157 Fluid capacities and lubricants ............. 11-6
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-33 Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting Fog lights
Replacement .................................. 9-37 system) ..................................... 5-4, 5-28 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-33
Defogger (rear window) .................... 5-157 Emission-control system maintenance ... 9-25 Indicator ...................................... 5-141
Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door Replacement ......................... 9-40, 9-42
Engine Switch ......................................... 5-151
windows) ................. 7-9, 7-14, 7-19, 7-24 Compartment................................... 9-5
12 Digital clock Coolant ................................... 9-8, 11-6 Free-hand advanced security transmitter
(F.A.S.T.-key) .................................. 5-11
Time setting ................................... 7-56 Hood............................................... 9-3
Dimensions ........................................ 11-4 Oil and oil filter ....................... 9-5, 11-6 Front console boxes .......................... 5-188
Overheating..................................... 8-4 Front console tray ............................. 5-188
Dimmer (high/low beam change) ....... 5-148
Serial number ................................. 11-2
Disc brake pads .................................. 9-26 Front seats............................................ 4-3
Specifications ................................. 11-5
Dome light (rear) Front side-marker and parking light
Engine coolant temperature display..... 5-115
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-35 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-33
Exhaust system ................................... 9-27 Replacement ......................... 9-38, 9-39
Replacement .................................. 9-47
Switch ......................................... 5-185 Front turn signal lights
Dome light/Reading lights F Bulb capacity ................................. 9-33
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-35 Filling the fuel tank .............................. 3-4 Replacement .................................. 9-40
12-2
Alphabetical index
Fuel High beam indicator .......................... 5-141 Keys .................................................... 5-3
Fuel economy................................... 6-2 High-mounted stop light ..................... 9-33
Fuel hoses ...................................... 9-26
Modification/alterations to the electrical or
Hill start assist ................................... 5-86 L
fuel systems ................................... 3-6 Hood lock release mechanism and safety Labeling............................................. 11-2
Tank capacity .......................... 3-4, 11-6 catch ............................................... 9-27 License plate light
Fuel selection ....................................... 3-2 Horn switch ...................................... 5-157 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-33
Replacement................................... 9-45
Fuses ................................................. 9-28
Fusible links....................................... 9-28 I Limited-slip differential....................... 5-85
If the vehicle breaks down..................... 8-2 Link System ..................................... 5-158
G Ignition switch ........................... 5-16, 5-53 Loading information.............................. 6-6
Important facts to know in case of an accident Lubricants .......................................... 11-6
General maintenance ........................... 9-26
10-4
General vehicle data............................ 11-4
Genuine parts ....................................... 3-7
Indicators ......................................... 5-141 M
Information screen display ................. 5-143 Malfunction indicator ........................ 5-142
Glove compartment........................... 5-187
Inside day/night rearview mirror .......... 5-50 Manual air conditioning.................. 7-4, 7-9
H Instrument cluster.............................. 5-106 Manual transaxle................................. 5-59
Hazard warning flasher switch ........... 5-151

Interior lights .................................... 5-184 Oil........................................ 9-10, 11-6 12
Shift points (recommended speed).... 5-60
Hazard warning lights ....................... 5-141 Mirror
Head restraints...................................... 4-6
J Inside day/night rearview mirror ...... 5-50
Jack .................................................... 8-6 Outside rearview mirrors ................. 5-52
Headlight leveling switch .................. 5-150
Storage............................................ 8-5
Headlights Modification of your vehicle .................. 3-5
Jump-starting the engine ....................... 8-2
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-33 Multi-information display .................. 5-108
Dimmer ....................................... 5-148
Headlight flasher .......................... 5-148 K O
Leveling switch ............................ 5-150 Key reminder buzzer........................... 5-37
Replacement ......................... 9-35, 9-36 Oil
Switch ......................................... 5-145 Keyless entry system .................... 5-7, 5-30 Engine oil ............................... 9-5, 11-6
12-3
Alphabetical index
Manual transaxle oil .............. 9-10, 11-6 Rain sensor.................. 5-153, 5-154, 5-155 Seat belt............................................... 4-9
Rear axle oil.......................... 9-11, 11-6 Rear hatch .......................................... 5-40 Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor. 4-13
Transfer oil ........................... 9-11, 11-6 Inside rear hatch release................... 5-41 Child restraint ................................ 4-15
Operation under adverse driving conditions... Driver?s seat belt reminder/warning . 4-12
Rear shelf panel ................................ 5-190
8-15 Force limiter .................................. 4-15
Rear side-marker lights Front passenger seat belt warning light .....
Outside rearview mirrors ..................... 5-52 Bulb capacity.................................. 9-33 4-13
Overheating ......................................... 8-4 Replacement................................... 9-43 Maintenance and inspection............. 4-22
Rear turn signal lights Pre-tensioner .................................. 4-14
P Bulb capacity.................................. 9-33 Seat belt extender ........................... 4-14
Replacement................................... 9-43 Seat belt instructions ....................... 4-10
Parking ................................................ 6-6 Seat belt use during pregnancy......... 4-14
Parking brake ................................. 5-49 Rear window defogger switch ............ 5-157
Parking brake break-in .................... 9-24 Rear-view camera ............................. 5-104 Service brake...................................... 5-85
Parking brake lever stroke ............... 9-24 Rearview mirror Service precautions ............................... 9-2
Polishing............................................ 9-51 Inside............................................. 5-50 Snow tires .......................................... 9-23
Power brakes...................................... 5-86 Outside .......................................... 5-52 Spark plugs ........................................ 9-25
Power door locks ................................ 5-38 Refrigerant (air conditioning) ............... 11-6 SST (Sportronic Shift Transmission) .... 5-70
Power outlet ..................................... 5-183 Replacement of light bulbs................... 9-33 Steering
12 Power steering Replacing tires and wheels ................... 9-22 Power steering fluid ............... 9-14, 11-6
Fluid .................................... 9-14, 11-6 Reporting Safety Defects ..................... 10-2 Tilt lock lever................................. 5-50
System .......................................... 5-90 Wheel lock............................ 5-20, 5-55
Storage spaces .................................. 5-187
Power windows .................................. 5-44 S
Puncture (Tire changing) ....................... 8-6 Sun roof............................................. 5-46
Safe driving techniques......................... 6-4
Sun visors ........................................ 5-182
Seat .................................................... 4-2
R Arm rest .......................................... 4-5 Supplemental Restraint System ............ 4-23
Front seats ....................................... 4-3 How the Supplement Restraint System
Radiator cap ......................................... 9-9 works .......................................... 4-25
Heated seats..................................... 4-5
Radio Servicing ....................................... 4-37
Rear seats ........................................ 4-5
General information about your radio 7-60 Warning light/display...................... 4-29
Seats and restraint systems ................ 4-2
12-4
Alphabetical index
Turbocharger operation....................... 5-59 Vehicle dimensions ............................. 11-4
T Turn signal lights Vehicle labeling.................................. 11-2
Tail and stop lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-33 Vehicle preparation before driving.......... 6-3
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-33 Indicators ..................................... 5-141
Vehicle weights .................................. 11-4
Replacement .................................. 9-43 Lever ........................................... 5-150
Replacement .................................. 9-40 Vents ................................................... 7-2
Tank capacity .............................. 3-4, 11-6
Theft-alarm system Twin Clutch SST
System........................................... 5-41 Fluid ..................................... 9-11, 11-6 W
Gearshift lever operation................. 5-70 Warning lights .................................. 5-142
Time Setting....................................... 7-56
Gearshift lever position display........ 5-72
Tire pressure monitoring system......... 5-100 Manual shift................................... 5-76 Washer
Warning light/display.................... 5-101 Manual shift display ....................... 5-79 Fluid..................................... 9-12, 11-6
Twin Clutch SST control mode display .... Rear window washer ..................... 5-156
Tires .................................................. 9-17
5-76 Switch ......................................... 5-155
How to change a tire ......................... 8-6
Inflation pressure ............................ 9-21 Twin Clutch SST control mode switch ..... Waxing .............................................. 9-50
Maintenance................................... 9-22 5-76 Weights ............................................. 11-4
Quality grading............................... 10-2 Warning display ............................. 5-73
Wheel
Replacing tires and wheels............... 9-22 Twin Clutch SST (Sportronic Shift Covers ........................................... 8-12
Rotation ......................................... 9-22 Transmission) .................................. 5-70 Specification .................................. 11-5
Size (tire and wheel) ....................... 11-5
Wiper
12
Snow tires ...................................... 9-23
Tire and loading information placard . 6-7, U Rain sensor ............. 5-153, 5-154, 5-155
11-3 USB input terminal............................ 5-180 Rear window wiper ....................... 5-156
Tire chains ..................................... 9-24 How to connect an iPod ................. 5-181 Switch ......................................... 5-152
Tread wear indicators ...................... 9-22 Wiper blades .................................. 9-25
USB input terminal device
Tissue holder .................................... 5-189 How to connect a USB memory...... 5-180
Tools ................................................... 8-6
Storage ............................................ 8-5 V
Towing .............................................. 8-13 Vanity mirror .................................... 5-183
Trailer towing..................................... 6-11 Vehicle care precautions ..................... 9-48
12-5
10GS41(NAFTA)_BK0102103US_lastpage.fm 1 ページ２００９年９月２２日　火曜日　午後２時３７分
How to calculate your gasoline mileage
You can calculate your miles-per-gallon or kilometers-per-litre 3. Refill the fuel tank. Record the odometer mileage again,
by using the following process: as well as the gallons/litres of fuel used.
4. Subtract the first mileage number from the second number
1. Fill your vehicle’s fuel tank and record the odometer mile- to know how many miles/kilometers were driven. Divide
age. the number of miles/kilometers driven by the number of
2. Drive your vehicle as you normally do. gallons/litres of fuel used. This is your approximate miles-
per-gallon or kilometers-per-litre.
Gas mileage record Gas mileage record

Cost Per Miles Per Gallon/Kilo- Cost Per Miles Per Gallon/Kilo-
Gallons meters Per Litre Gallons meters Per Litre
Cost Cost
Date Odometer /Litres Gallon This Fill Date Odometer /Litres Gallon This Fill
This Fill (Miles/Gals.)/(Kilome- This Fill (Miles/Gals.)/(Kilome-
/Litre ters/Litres) /Litre ters/Litres)
BK0200700US.book 1 ページ２０１３年２月１４日　木曜日　午後２時４６分
N09348201032
NOTE
Name of Owner Date of Purchase
Address of Owner Model of Vehicle
Name and Address of Dealer Vehicle Identification Number
Maintenance record
Kilometers
Service Performed Date Inspection and Maintenance Item
Miles

Mitsubishi Lancer Sportback Owner's Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Mitsubishi Lancer Sportback Owner's Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mitsubishi Lancer Sportback Owner's Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BK0200700US.

book 1 ページ ２０１３年２月１４日 木曜日 午後２時４６分

Introduction Throughout this manual the words WARNING and CAUTION

©2013 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation Printed in Japan

Instruments and controls (Driver’s area)

1 Instruments and controls (Driver’s area)

Instrument cluster P.5-106 Sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter

Combination headlights and Wiper and washer switch

Steering wheel audio remote Cruise control switches P.5-94

Steering wheel tilt lock lever

Instruments and controls

Instruments and controls 1

Supplemental restraint system - airbag (for front

Parking brake lever P.5-49

Heated seat switch (if so equipped) P.4-5

Floor console box P.5-188

Audio (if so equipped) P.7-26

Front passenger seat belt warning light

Passenger’s airbag off indicator Electric rear window defogger switch

Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA) Air conditioning

Front console tray 12 V power outlet P.5-183

DISPLAY AUDIO (if so equipped)

Passenger’s airbag off indicator Electric rear window defogger switch

Front console box (Lower box) 12 V power outlet

Power window switches Power door lock

Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor (for front seats)

Rear shelf panel Sun visors P.5-182

Bottle holder (for front seats)

Front seats P.4-3

Supplemental restraint system - side airbag

Coat hook P.5-192 Dome light (Rear) (if so equipped)

Luggage compartment levers

Tether anchors for

Rear seats P.4-5

Cup holder (for rear seat) P.5-190

Cargo room light

AWC control fluid reser-

Tools P.8-6 Jack P.8-6

Sunroof (if so equipped) P.5-46 Outside rearview mirrors P.5-52

Windshield wiper P.5-152

Locking and unlocking P.5-36

Side turn signal lights P.5-150, 9-33

Front fog lights (if so equipped) P.5-151, 9-33, 9-40

Front side-marker and

Rear window wiper P.5-156 Tire inflation pressure P.9-21

High-mounted stop light P.9-33

Rear hatch P.5-40

Rear side-marker lights

Rear turn signal lights

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

Warning light Do this Ref. page

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Quick index 2-1

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

 It is not necessary to stop the vehicle immediately, but we recommend that

2-2 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

book 1 ページ２０１３年２月１４日　木曜日　午後２時４６分